Symantec OpsCenter Administrator's Guide

Windows and UNIX

Release 7.5

Symantec OpsCenter Administrator's Guide
The software described in this book is furnished under a license agreement and may be used only in accordance with the terms of the agreement. Documentation version: 7.5

Legal Notice
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved. Symantec, Symantec Logo, and NetBackup are trademarks or registered trademarks of Symantec Corporation or its affiliates in the U.S. and other countries. Other names may be trademarks of their respective owners. This Symantec product may contain third party software for which Symantec is required to provide attribution to the third party (“Third Party Programs”). Some of the Third Party Programs are available under open source or free software licenses. The License Agreement accompanying the Software does not alter any rights or obligations you may have under those open source or free software licenses. Please see the Third Party Legal Notice Appendix to this Documentation or TPIP ReadMe File accompanying this Symantec product for more information on the Third Party Programs. The product described in this document is distributed under licenses restricting its use, copying, distribution, and decompilation/reverse engineering. No part of this document may be reproduced in any form by any means without prior written authorization of Symantec Corporation and its licensors, if any. THE DOCUMENTATION IS PROVIDED "AS IS" AND ALL EXPRESS OR IMPLIED CONDITIONS, REPRESENTATIONS AND WARRANTIES, INCLUDING ANY IMPLIED WARRANTY OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE OR NON-INFRINGEMENT, ARE DISCLAIMED, EXCEPT TO THE EXTENT THAT SUCH DISCLAIMERS ARE HELD TO BE LEGALLY INVALID. SYMANTEC CORPORATION SHALL NOT BE LIABLE FOR INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES IN CONNECTION WITH THE FURNISHING, PERFORMANCE, OR USE OF THIS DOCUMENTATION. THE INFORMATION CONTAINED IN THIS DOCUMENTATION IS SUBJECT TO CHANGE WITHOUT NOTICE. The Licensed Software and Documentation are deemed to be commercial computer software as defined in FAR 12.212 and subject to restricted rights as defined in FAR Section 52.227-19 "Commercial Computer Software - Restricted Rights" and DFARS 227.7202, "Rights in Commercial Computer Software or Commercial Computer Software Documentation", as applicable, and any successor regulations. Any use, modification, reproduction release, performance, display or disclosure of the Licensed Software and Documentation by the U.S. Government shall be solely in accordance with the terms of this Agreement.

Symantec Corporation 350 Ellis Street Mountain View, CA 94043 http://www.symantec.com

Technical Support
Symantec Technical Support maintains support centers globally. Technical Support’s primary role is to respond to specific queries about product features and functionality. The Technical Support group also creates content for our online Knowledge Base. The Technical Support group works collaboratively with the other functional areas within Symantec to answer your questions in a timely fashion. For example, the Technical Support group works with Product Engineering and Symantec Security Response to provide alerting services and virus definition updates. Symantec’s support offerings include the following:

A range of support options that give you the flexibility to select the right amount of service for any size organization Telephone and/or Web-based support that provides rapid response and up-to-the-minute information Upgrade assurance that delivers software upgrades Global support purchased on a regional business hours or 24 hours a day, 7 days a week basis Premium service offerings that include Account Management Services

■ ■

For information about Symantec’s support offerings, you can visit our Web site at the following URL: www.symantec.com/business/support/ All support services will be delivered in accordance with your support agreement and the then-current enterprise technical support policy.

Contacting Technical Support
Customers with a current support agreement may access Technical Support information at the following URL: www.symantec.com/business/support/ Before contacting Technical Support, make sure you have satisfied the system requirements that are listed in your product documentation. Also, you should be at the computer on which the problem occurred, in case it is necessary to replicate the problem. When you contact Technical Support, please have the following information available:

Product release level

■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■

Hardware information Available memory, disk space, and NIC information Operating system Version and patch level Network topology Router, gateway, and IP address information Problem description:
■ ■ ■

Error messages and log files Troubleshooting that was performed before contacting Symantec Recent software configuration changes and network changes

Licensing and registration
If your Symantec product requires registration or a license key, access our technical support Web page at the following URL: www.symantec.com/business/support/

Customer service
Customer service information is available at the following URL: www.symantec.com/business/support/ Customer Service is available to assist with non-technical questions, such as the following types of issues:
■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■

Questions regarding product licensing or serialization Product registration updates, such as address or name changes General product information (features, language availability, local dealers) Latest information about product updates and upgrades Information about upgrade assurance and support contracts Information about the Symantec Buying Programs Advice about Symantec's technical support options Nontechnical presales questions Issues that are related to CD-ROMs, DVDs, or manuals

Support agreement resources
If you want to contact Symantec regarding an existing support agreement, please contact the support agreement administration team for your region as follows:
Asia-Pacific and Japan Europe, Middle-East, and Africa North America and Latin America customercare_apac@symantec.com semea@symantec.com supportsolutions@symantec.com

Contents

Technical Support ............................................................................................... 4 Chapter 1 Getting started using Symantec OpsCenter .................. 23
About Symantec OpsCenter ............................................................ About Symantec OpsCenter functions ........................................ About Symantec OpsCenter Analytics functions .......................... About monitoring and managing NetBackup and NetBackup appliances ...................................................................... About alerting in OpsCenter ..................................................... About reporting in Symantec OpsCenter Analytics ....................... About what's new in Symantec OpsCenter 7.5 .................................... About OpsCenter components ........................................................ About the OpsCenter Server ..................................................... About the OpsCenter Agent ...................................................... About the OpsCenter Java View Builder ..................................... About using the OpsCenter console ................................................. About starting the OpsCenter console .............................................. About Web browser considerations ........................................... About accessing the OpsCenter console ...................................... Logging on to the Symantec OpsCenter console ........................... Logging out of the OpsCenter console ........................................ Configuring the OpsCenter session timeout interval ..................... Possible OpsCenter console issues ............................................. About OpsCenter console components ............................................. About using the links on the title bar ......................................... About using tabs and subtabs ................................................... About refreshing the OpsCenter console ..................................... Changing the Task pane .......................................................... About the View pane ............................................................... About the Symantec ThreatCon pane ......................................... Using the quick links in the Task pane ....................................... Viewing alerts from the Alert Summary pane .............................. Sizing the Content pane .......................................................... About the OpsCenter status bar ................................................ Status icons and colors in the console ........................................ About using tables .................................................................. 23 24 25 26 27 27 29 43 43 46 50 50 51 51 53 64 68 68 69 70 71 72 73 73 73 78 78 79 79 82 82 83

8

Contents

Common tasks in OpsCenter .......................................................... 88 About using Web browser bookmarks .............................................. 90 About OpsCenter documentation .................................................... 91

Chapter 2

Installing Symantec OpsCenter 7.5 ................................. 93
About planning an OpsCenter installation ........................................ 93 Software components that OpsCenter uses ................................. 94 About the OpsCenter licensing model ........................................ 95 Symantec OpsCenter DVDs .................................................... 100 OpsCenter platform compatibility ........................................... 101 OpsCenter compatible backup and archiving products ................ 104 Managed NetBackup master server considerations ..................... 106 About designing your OpsCenter Server ................................... 108 Supported upgrade paths ....................................................... 110 About planning an OpsCenter Agent deployment ....................... 111 Preparation for install or upgrade ........................................... 123 Installing Symantec OpsCenter on Windows and UNIX ...................... 130 About installing Symantec OpsCenter 7.5 on Windows ................ 131 About installing Symantec OpsCenter 7.5 on UNIX ..................... 137 About installing Symantec OpsCenter silently on Windows .......... 142 About upgrading to OpsCenter on Windows and UNIX ...................... 158 About upgrading from OpsCenter 7.0.x or 7.1.x to OpsCenter 7.5 ............................................................................... 158 About post-installation tasks ....................................................... 170 Verifying that Symantec OpsCenter is running properly .............. 170 About starting to use OpsCenter .............................................. 170 About the start up tasks that OpsCenter performs ...................... 171 About tuning OpsCenter for more performance .......................... 171 About uninstalling Symantec OpsCenter on Windows and UNIX ......... 190 Uninstalling Symantec OpsCenter 7.5 on Windows ..................... 190 Uninstalling Symantec OpsCenter 7.5 on UNIX ......................... 191 About clustering Symantec OpsCenter ........................................... 193 About a Symantec OpsCenter cluster ........................................ 193 Supported OS and cluster solutions ......................................... 193 About running commands on the active node ............................ 194 Connecting Symantec Product Authentication Service and Symantec Private Branch Exchange ................................... 194 Clustering Symantec OpsCenter on Windows ............................. 196 Uninstalling Symantec OpsCenter 7.5 from the Windows cluster .......................................................................... 207 Clustering Symantec OpsCenter Server on Solaris ...................... 208

Contents

9

Upgrading from OpsCenter 7.0.x or 7.1.x cluster to OpsCenter 7.5 cluster ..................................................................... 215 Uninstalling OpsCenter Server completely from the Solaris cluster .......................................................................... 218

Chapter 3

Administering Symantec OpsCenter ............................. 221
About OpsCenter services and processes used by OpsCenter ............... Services used by OpsCenter on Windows ................................... OpsCenter server scripts on Windows and UNIX .............................. Commands to control OpsCenter services and processes .............. About dependency of services ................................................. About nbproxy processes on NetBackup master servers ............... About OpsCenter database administration ...................................... OpsCenter database commands ............................................... Moving the OpsCenter database and database logs to a different hard disk ...................................................................... About database troubleshooting .............................................. Configuring remote authentication service in OpsCenter ................... About backup and restore of OpsCenter and OpsCenter Analytics ............................................................................ Backing up OpsCenter in case of a disaster ................................ Restoring OpsCenter ............................................................. About communication and firewall considerations ........................... Communication ports used by key OpsCenter components .... 2 4 8 Ports required to communicate with backup products ................. Web browser to OpsCenter Web GUI connection ........................ About OpsCenter Web GUI to OpsCenter server software communication .............................................................. About OpsCenter server to NetBackup master server (NBSL) communication .............................................................. About SNMP traps ................................................................ About OpsCenter Web GUI/OpsCenter server to Sybase database communication .............................................................. About OpsCenter Web GUI to OpsCenter server email communication .............................................................. Gathering troubleshooting data with the support script ..................... About OpsCenter log files ............................................................. VxUL log files ...................................................................... OpsCenter application log files ................................................ About OpsCenter log files on Windows servers ........................... About OpsCenter log files on UNIX servers ................................ 221 222 225 227 229 229 230 230 235 239 239 241 241 244 247

250 251 252 253 253 253 253 254 257 257 259 260 263

10

Contents

Chapter 4

Understanding OpsCenter settings ............................... 265
OpsCenter settings ..................................................................... Setting user preferences .............................................................. Settings > User Preferences options ......................................... Changing your OpsCenter password ......................................... About managing licenses ............................................................. Settings > Configuration > License options ................................ Adding OpsCenter license keys ............................................... Viewing OpsCenter license keys .............................................. Deleting OpsCenter license keys .............................................. Configuring the data purge period on the OpsCenter Server ............... Settings > Configuration > Data Purge options ........................... Configuring SMTP server settings for OpsCenter .............................. Settings > Configuration > SMTP server options ........................ Configuring Symantec ThreatCon feature in OpsCenter ..................... Settings > Configuration > ThreatCon options ........................... Adding host aliases in OpsCenter .................................................. Settings > Configuration > Host Alias options ............................ Merging objects (hosts) in OpsCenter ............................................. Settings > Configuration > Object Merger options ....................... Modifying tape library information in OpsCenter ............................. Settings > Configuration > Tape Libary options .......................... Copying a user profile in OpsCenter ............................................... Settings > Configuration > Copy User Profile options .................. Setting report export location in OpsCenter .................................... Settings > Configuration > Report Export Location options .......... About managing Object Types in OpsCenter .................................... Settings > Configuration > Object Type options .......................... Adding object types in OpsCenter ............................................ Deleting object types in OpsCenter .......................................... Modifying object types in OpsCenter ........................................ Adding attributes to object types in OpsCenter ........................... Deleting attributes from object types in OpsCenter ..................... About managing Symantec OpsCenter users ................................... Settings > Users > Users options ............................................. User access rights and UI functions in OpsCenter ....................... Viewing OpsCenter user account information ............................ Adding new users to OpsCenter ............................................... Editing OpsCenter user information ......................................... Resetting an OpsCenter user password ..................................... Deleting OpsCenter users ....................................................... Viewing OpsCenter user groups .............................................. 266 268 268 272 272 272 273 273 273 274 274 275 276 276 277 278 278 279 280 280 281 281 282 282 283 283 283 284 284 285 285 285 286 286 287 292 293 293 294 294 295

Contents

11

Settings > Users > User Groups options .................................... Adding OpsCenter user groups ................................................ Editing OpsCenter user groups ................................................ Deleting OpsCenter user groups .............................................. About managing recipients in OpsCenter ........................................ Viewing email recipients in OpsCenter ..................................... Settings > Recipients > Email options ....................................... Viewing SNMP trap recipients in OpsCenter .............................. Settings > Recipients > SNMP trap recipient options ................... Creating OpsCenter email recipients ........................................ Settings > Recipients > Email > Add Email Recipient options ......................................................................... Creating OpsCenter SNMP trap recipients ................................. Settings > Recipients > SNMP > Add SNMP trap recipient options ......................................................................... Modifying OpsCenter Email or SNMP recipient information ......... Deleting OpsCenter Email or SNMP trap recipient ...................... About managing cost analysis and chargeback for OpsCenter Analytics ............................................................................ Setting the default currency for OpsCenter cost reports .............. Settings > Chargeback > Currency Settings options .................... Editing the OpsCenter global currency list ................................ Settings > Chargeback > Currency Settings > Edit Currency List options ......................................................................... Settings > Chargeback > Cost Variable options ........................... Creating cost variables in OpsCenter ........................................ Modifying cost variables in OpsCenter ...................................... Deleting cost variables in OpsCenter ........................................ Settings > Chargeback > Cost Formulae options ......................... Creating cost formulae in OpsCenter ........................................ Modifying cost formulae in OpsCenter ..................................... Deleting a cost formulae in OpsCenter ...................................... Estimating chargeback costs using the OpsCenter Formula Modeling Tool ................................................................ Settings > Chargeback > Cost Estimation options .......................

295 296 296 296 297 297 298 298 298 299 299 300 301 302 302 303 303 304 304 305 305 307 308 308 309 309 310 310 310 311

Chapter 5

Understanding data collection ....................................... 313
About data collection in OpsCenter ................................................ About OpsCenter Agents ........................................................ About OpsCenter Agent logs ................................................... OpsCenter Data Collector types ............................................... 313 314 315 315

12

Contents

Backup and archiving products supported by Symantec OpsCenter 7.5 ................................................................ About managing OpsCenter Agents ................................................ Settings > Configuration > Agent options .................................. Viewing OpsCenter Agent status ............................................. Configuring an OpsCenter Agent ............................................. Settings > Configuration > Agent > Create Agent or Edit Agent options ......................................................................... Modifying an OpsCenter Agent ............................................... Deleting OpsCenter Agents .................................................... About managing OpsCenter Data Collectors .................................... Viewing OpsCenter Data Collector status .................................. Configuring an OpsCenter Data Collector .................................. Data Collector Wizard settings ................................................ Modifying an OpsCenter Data Collector configuration ................. Deleting OpsCenter Data Collectors ......................................... About configuring data collection for NetBackup .............................. Settings > Configuration > NetBackup options ........................... NetBackup data collection view ............................................... How OpsCenter collects data from NetBackup ............................ About the Breakup Jobs option ................................................ About NetBackup versions that OpsCenter 7.5 can monitor and manage ........................................................................ Viewing master server details and data collection status .............. Data collection status of a master server ................................... NetBackup data types and collection status ............................... Master server states in OpsCenter ........................................... Adding a master server or appliance in OpsCenter ...................... Adding a NetBackup 7.0 or later master server ........................... Configuring a master server or appliance master server for server access and data collection by OpsCenter ............................. Settings > Configuration > NetBackup > Add Master Server options ......................................................................... Adding a master server or an appliance master server in the OpsCenter console .......................................................... Editing a master server or an appliance master server in OpsCenter ..................................................................... Deleting a master server or an appliance master server in OpsCenter ..................................................................... Controlling data collection for a master server in OpsCenter ..................................................................... Configuring Backup Exec data collector .......................................... Collecting data from PureDisk ......................................................

319 322 322 323 323 324 325 325 325 325 326 327 329 329 330 330 332 332 334 340 341 342 343 345 346 347 349 351 355 356 357 357 358 359

Contents

13

Setting up a trust between the PureDisk SPA host and OpsCenter AB host ......................................................................... Configuring PureDisk data collector ......................................... About collecting data from Enterprise Vault .................................... About Enterprise Vault .......................................................... About data collected from Enterprise Vault ............................... Versions supported by OpsCenter ............................................ Planning the Enterprise Vault data collector deployment ............. OpsCenter Agent deployment modes ........................................ Accessing Microsoft SQL Server host ....................................... About creating a user for integrated logon ................................ Configuring the OpsCenter Agent properties for integrated logon ............................................................................ Installing Microsoft SQL Server JDBC driver .............................. Configuring Enterprise Vault data collector ............................... IBM Tivoli Storage Manager data collector variables and details ......... EMC NetWorker data collector variables .........................................

360 361 362 363 363 366 366 368 368 369 371 372 373 375 376

Chapter 6

Managing OpsCenter views

............................................ 379 379 381 383 383 385 386 386 387 387 388 388 389 390 390 391 391 392 393 393 394 395 395 396

About OpsCenter views ................................................................ Settings > Views options ........................................................ OpsCenter view types ............................................................ UI access for specific view types .............................................. About access rights for a view ................................................ About OpsCenter view levels ................................................... About nodes and objects ........................................................ About managing OpsCenter views ................................................. Settings > Views > Manage Nodes and Objects options ................ Looking at OpsCenter views and their details ............................. Creating OpsCenter views ...................................................... Modifying OpsCenter views .................................................... Deleting OpsCenter views ...................................................... Modifying alias view levels in OpsCenter .................................. About managing nodes and objects in OpsCenter .............................. Adding nodes to a view in OpsCenter .............................................. Modifying node details in OpsCenter .............................................. Deleting nodes in OpsCenter ......................................................... Adding objects to a view node in OpsCenter ..................................... Deleting objects from a view node in OpsCenter ............................... View filters in OpsCenter ............................................................. Creating a view object filter in OpsCenter .................................. Modifying view object filters in OpsCenter ................................

14

Contents

Deleting view object filters in OpsCenter ................................... 397

Chapter 7

Monitoring NetBackup using Symantec OpsCenter .....................................................................
About the Monitor views .............................................................. Controlling the scope of Monitor views ........................................... About time frame selection .................................................... About monitoring NetBackup using the Overview tab ........................ Viewing the Job Summary by State .......................................... Viewing the Media Summary by Status .................................... About Top 7 Job Error Log Summary ........................................ Viewing the Services Summary ............................................... Viewing the Master Server Summary ....................................... Viewing the Job Summary by Exit Status ................................... Viewing the Drive Summary by Status ...................................... Top 7 Policies by Failed Jobs ................................................... Viewing the Alert Summary by Severity ................................... About monitoring NetBackup jobs ................................................. Monitor > Jobs List View options ............................................. About monitoring jobs using the List View ................................ Viewing the details for a single NetBackup job ........................... Viewing the details for a master server associated with a job ............................................................................... Viewing policy information for a job ........................................ Filtering on NetBackup job type and state ................................. Controlling NetBackup jobs .................................................... Reconciling NetBackup jobs .................................................... Changing the job priority ....................................................... Change Job Priority dialog box options ..................................... Exporting NetBackup job logs ................................................. About using the Summary View for monitoring jobs ................... Viewing the Job Summary by Exit Status ................................... Viewing the Job Summary by State .......................................... Viewing the Job Summary by Type ........................................... About the Group Component Summary table ............................. About using the Hierarchical View for monitoring jobs ................ Viewing the details for a single NetBackup job ........................... Viewing the details for a master server associated with a job ............................................................................... Viewing policy information for a job ........................................ Filtering on NetBackup job state .............................................. Monitor > Services view ...............................................................

399 401 401 402 403 404 404 405 405 406 407 408 409 409 410 410 413 414 414 415 415 416 417 417 418 418 419 420 420 421 422 424 426 426 427 427 428

Contents

15

Filtering on NetBackup service type ......................................... Controlling NetBackup services ............................................... About monitoring NetBackup policies ...................................... Monitor > Policies List View ................................................... About using the List View to monitor NetBackup policies ............. Filtering on NetBackup policy type .......................................... Monitor > Policies page ......................................................... Viewing details for a single NetBackup policy ............................ Viewing the details for a master server associated with a policy ........................................................................... Viewing the details for a volume pool associated with a policy ........................................................................... Activating or deactivating a job policy ...................................... Starting a manual backup ...................................................... Viewing the history for a single job policy ................................ Monitor > Policies Summary View ........................................... About Top 5 Policies by Data Backed up .................................... About Top 7 Policies by Failed Jobs .......................................... About Top 7 Policies by No. of Jobs .......................................... About monitoring NetBackup media ........................................ Monitor > Media List View options ........................................... About using the List View to monitor NetBackup media ..................... Viewing the details for NetBackup media ........................................ Viewing the details for a master server associated with the media ................................................................................. Filtering on NetBackup media type ................................................ Controlling media ....................................................................... Monitor > Media Summary View options ........................................ Hierarchical View by Volume Pool for monitoring media ................... Viewing the details for volume pool ............................................... Viewing the details for media ....................................................... Controlling media ....................................................................... Hierarchical View by Volume Group for monitoring media ................. Viewing the details for a volume group ........................................... Viewing the details for media ....................................................... Controlling media in OpsCenter .................................................... Monitoring NetBackup devices ...................................................... Monitor > Devices > Drives List View options .................................. About using the List View for monitoring drives ............................... Viewing the details for a single drive .............................................. Viewing the details for a master server associated with a drive ........... Filtering on NetBackup drive category ............................................ Controlling drives .......................................................................

429 430 430 431 434 435 435 436 436 437 437 437 438 438 439 439 440 440 441 443 444 444 444 445 446 447 448 448 448 449 449 450 450 451 451 453 453 454 454 455

16

Contents

Monitor > Devices > Drives Summary View ..................................... Viewing the Drive Summary by Status ............................................ Monitor > Devices > Disk Pools options .......................................... Viewing the details for a single disk pool ......................................... About monitoring NetBackup hosts ............................................... Monitor > Hosts > Master Servers view ........................................... Filtering by NetBackup master server type and status ....................... Monitor > Hosts > Media Servers view ............................................ Viewing the details of a master server that is associated with a media server ................................................................................. Monitor > Hosts > Clients view ...................................................... Viewing the details for a single master server .................................. About monitoring NetBackup alerts ............................................... Monitor > Alerts List View ........................................................... About using the List View to monitor NetBackup alerts ..................... Viewing the details for a single alert .............................................. Viewing the details of the alert policy associated with an alert ............ Filtering by alert type .................................................................. Responding to alerts .................................................................. Summary View for monitoring NetBackup alerts .............................. Viewing alerts by severity ............................................................ About monitoring Audit Trails ...................................................... Additional information about the Audit Trails report .................. What Audit Trails track ......................................................... Audit Trails report ................................................................ About OpsCenter features for Audit Trails ................................ Creating a custom filter to view audit trail data .......................... About managing Audit Trails settings ...................................... Monitor > Appliance Hardware > Master Server ............................... Monitor > Appliance Hardware > Media Server ................................ Appliance hardware details .......................................................... Monitor > Cloud options ..............................................................

455 456 456 458 458 459 460 461 461 462 462 462 463 464 465 465 466 467 469 470 471 471 471 472 472 473 474 474 477 480 482

Chapter 8

Managing NetBackup using Symantec OpsCenter .....................................................................
About the Manage views .............................................................. Controlling the scope of Manage views ........................................... About managing alert policies ....................................................... About OpsCenter alert policies ................................................ Manage > Alert Policies view .................................................. Viewing the details for a single alert policy ............................... Filtering on type of alert policy ...............................................

485 485 486 487 487 488 489 489

Contents

17

About creating (or changing) an alert policy .............................. Managing an alert policy ....................................................... Viewing the alerts associated with an alert policy ....................... About managing NetBackup storage .............................................. Manage > Storage > Storage Unit view ..................................... Manage > Storage > Storage Unit Group view ............................ Manage > Storage > Storage Lifecycle Policy view ....................... About managing NetBackup devices ............................................... Manage > Devices > Drive view ............................................... Manage > Devices > Robot view ............................................... Manage > Devices > Disk Pool view .......................................... Manage > Devices > SAN Client view ........................................ Manage > Devices > FT Server view ......................................... About Operational Restore and Guided Recovery operations .............. About Operational Restores from OpsCenter ............................. About OpsCenter Guided Recovery .......................................... About managing NetBackup Hosts ................................................. Managing audit trails settings ................................................ About managing NetBackup Deployment Analysis ............................ About the traditional license report ......................................... Prerequisites and data collection for a traditional licensing report ........................................................................... Traditional Licensing page ..................................................... Create Traditional Licensing Report Wizard .............................. Generating a Traditional Licensing report ................................. Traditional Licensing report and log file locations ...................... Possible Traditional License report issues ................................. Capacity License report ......................................................... Data compilation for the Capacity License report ....................... Generating a Capacity Licensing report .................................... Possible Capacity License report issues .....................................

490 508 509 509 510 512 513 515 515 519 521 524 526 527 527 560 572 573 573 573 575 579 579 582 583 584 586 587 588 593

Chapter 9

Supporting Replication Director in OpsCenter ............ 595
About monitoring Replication Director from OpsCenter .................... About the Open Storage alert condition .......................................... How the events are generated ....................................................... Adding an alert policy ................................................................. About changes in the SLP Status by Image Copy report ...................... About monitoring replication jobs ................................................. About changes in the Monitor and Manage views ............................. 595 595 596 597 598 599 600

18

Contents

Chapter 10

Understanding and configuring OpsCenter alerts ..............................................................................
About using SNMP ...................................................................... About SNMP ........................................................................ About SNMP versions ............................................................ SNMP versions supported in OpsCenter .................................... About the Management Information Base (MIB) and OpsCenter support ......................................................................... SNMP traps ......................................................................... Alert descriptions in OpsCenter .............................................. Configuring the SNMP trap community name for OpsCenter ..................................................................... Configuring the SNMP version for sending SNMP traps ............... About customizing Alert Manager settings ................................ Frequently asked SNMP and OpsCenter questions ...................... About managing OpsCenter alerts using Microsoft System Center Operations Manager 2007 ...................................................... About managing OpsCenter alerts using HP OpenView Network Node Manager 7.50/7.51 on Windows ..............................................

605 605 606 606 607 607 607 610 622 623 624 625 626 626

Chapter 11

Reporting in OpsCenter .................................................... 627
About OpsCenter reports ............................................................. OpsCenter reports UI ............................................................ Report creation wizards in OpsCenter ...................................... Reports > Report Templates ................................................... About custom reports in OpsCenter Analytics ............................ About custom SQL query in OpsCenter Analytics ........................ Report Templates in OpsCenter ..................................................... About report filters in OpsCenter ............................................ Creating an OpsCenter report using a Report Template ............... Using report formats ............................................................ About managing reports in OpsCenter ............................................ Save report and email report dialog boxes ................................. Saving an OpsCenter report .................................................... Exporting an OpsCenter report ............................................... File formats available in OpsCenter .......................................... Emailing a report in OpsCenter ............................................... Configuring number of rows in a tabular report for email or export .......................................................................... Adding email recipients to an OpsCenter report mailing .............. Add email recipients dialog box options .................................... Creating a custom report in OpsCenter ........................................... 627 628 629 629 630 631 631 633 634 635 636 636 638 639 639 641 642 644 644 644

Contents

19

About Custom Report Wizard parameters ................................. Changes in custom reporting in OpsCenter 7.5 ................................. Creating an OpsCenter report using SQL query ................................ About managing My Reports ........................................................ Creating a report using the My Reports tab ............................... Deleting a saved report using the My Reports tab ....................... Viewing a saved report using the My Reports tab ........................ Editing a saved report using the My Reports tab ......................... Exporting a saved report ........................................................ Emailing a saved report ......................................................... About managing My Dashboard .................................................... Reports > My Dashboard options ............................................. Adding reports to a dashboard ................................................ Modifying a dashboard section ................................................ Deleting a dashboard section .................................................. Emailing dashboard sections .................................................. Refreshing My Dashboard ...................................................... About managing reports folders in OpsCenter ................................. Reports > Manage Folders options ........................................... Adding a reports folder in OpsCenter ....................................... Editing a reports folder in OpsCenter ....................................... Deleting reports folders in OpsCenter ...................................... Deleting reports from a folder in OpsCenter .............................. Using report schedules in OpsCenter .............................................. Reports > Schedules options ......................................................... About managing report schedules in OpsCenter ............................... Viewing report schedule details in OpsCenter ............................ Report Schedule Wizard ........................................................ Creating a report schedule in OpsCenter ................................... Editing a report schedule in OpsCenter ..................................... Deleting a report schedule in OpsCenter ................................... Enabling or disabling a report schedule .................................... About managing time schedules in OpsCenter ................................. Reports > Schedules > Create or Edit Time Schedule options ......................................................................... Viewing time schedule details ................................................. Creating a time schedule ........................................................ Editing a time schedule .......................................................... Deleting a time schedule ........................................................ About Report Templates descriptions ............................................. About Enterprise Vault Archiving reports in OpsCenter ............... About Audit reports .............................................................. About Backup reports in OpsCenter .........................................

654 661 666 668 668 668 669 669 669 670 671 671 672 672 672 673 673 673 673 674 674 675 675 675 677 678 679 679 681 683 684 684 684 684 685 685 686 686 686 688 691 691

20

Contents

About Catalog reports in OpsCenter ......................................... About Chargeback reports in OpsCenter ................................... About Client reports in OpsCenter ........................................... About Cloud reports .............................................................. About Disk and Tape Device Activity reports in OpsCenter ........... About Hold reports in OpsCenter ............................................. About Media reports in OpsCenter ........................................... About Performance reports in OpsCenter .................................. About Policy reports in OpsCenter ........................................... About Restore reports in OpsCenter ......................................... About Storage Lifecycle Policy reports ..................................... About Workload Analyzer reports in OpsCenter .........................

833 833 842 874 887 897 897 907 921 937 943 978

Chapter 12

Using NetBackup Search .................................................. 989
About NetBackup Search ............................................................. Search & Hold > New view ............................................................ Search & Hold > Saved view .......................................................... Search & Hold > Saved > Search Results view .................................. Search & Hold > Holds view .......................................................... Search & Hold > Holds > Hold Details view ...................................... 989 990 993 993 994 995

Appendix A

Additional information on PureDisk data collection ....................................................................... 997
About AT configuration scenarios specific to PureDisk backup product .............................................................................. 997 About Scenario 1: Common Root Broker ................................... 998 About Scenario 2: Different Root Brokers .................................. 999 Setting up a trust between the OpsCenter AB host and PureDisk SPA host .................................................................................. 1001

Appendix B Appendix C

Attributes of NetBackup data ........................................ 1003
Backup data attributes ............................................................... 1003

Man pages for CLIs .......................................................... 1035
changeDbPassword ................................................................... changeVxATProperties .............................................................. configurePorts ......................................................................... dbbackup ................................................................................ dbdefrag ................................................................................. nbfindfile ................................................................................ opsadmin ................................................................................ 1036 1038 1039 1040 1041 1042 1046

Contents

21

opsCenterAgentSupport ............................................................. opsCenterSupport ..................................................................... runstoredquery ........................................................................ startagent ............................................................................... startdb .................................................................................... startgui ................................................................................... startserver .............................................................................. stopagent ................................................................................ stopdb .................................................................................... stopgui ................................................................................... stopserver ...............................................................................

1048 1049 1051 1052 1053 1054 1055 1056 1057 1058 1059

Appendix D

Creating views using CSV, TSV, and XML files ........... 1061
About using CSV, TSV, and XML files to create views ....................... About creating CSV files ............................................................ About creating TSV files ............................................................ About creating XML files ............................................................ XML DTD structure ................................................................... DTD elements .......................................................................... DTD <application> element ........................................................ DTD <objects> and <object> elements .......................................... DTD <attribute> elements .......................................................... DTD <view> element ................................................................. DTD <node> elements ............................................................... DTD <aliaslevel> elements ......................................................... Examples of XML files ............................................................... Example 1: Adding an object ....................................................... Example 2: Adding a view ........................................................... Example 3: Updating an object .................................................... Example 4: Merging objects ........................................................ 1062 1062 1064 1067 1068 1069 1069 1069 1071 1071 1072 1072 1073 1073 1074 1075 1076

Appendix E

Error messages in OpsCenter ........................................ 1079
OpsCenter Error Messages added in 7.5 ......................................... 1079

Symantec OpsCenter Glossary .................................................................... 1097 Index
................................................................................................................. 1099

22

Contents

By using Symantec OpsCenter. OpsCenter is a convergence of NetBackup Operations Manager (NOM) and Veritas Backup Reporter (VBR) and is available in the following two versions: . you can track the effectiveness of backup and archive operations by generating comprehensive reports.5 About OpsCenter components About using the OpsCenter console About starting the OpsCenter console About OpsCenter console components Common tasks in OpsCenter About using Web browser bookmarks About OpsCenter documentation About Symantec OpsCenter Symantec OpsCenter is a Web-based software application that helps organizations by providing visibility into their data protection environment.Chapter 1 Getting started using Symantec OpsCenter This chapter includes the following topics: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ About Symantec OpsCenter About what's new in Symantec OpsCenter 7.

and also NetBackup Search. Symantec OpsCenter Analytics Note: OpsCenter 7. Symantec OpsCenter Analytics is the licensed version of OpsCenter. About Symantec OpsCenter functions The unlicensed version of OpsCenter is called Symantec OpsCenter. alerting. Symantec OpsCenter provides single deployment configuration and user interface for monitoring. Symantec deduplication appliance etc. Java View Builder is free and does not require any license. Symantec Enterprise Vault. Manage or administer NetBackup and NetBackup 52xx Appliance setups. support for third-party data protection products.5. The NetBackup Search functionality is now also available with Symantec OpsCenter Analytics 7. chargeback reporting. With OpsCenter 7. These features were previously available in NOM and VBR. Analytics offers report customization. Provide operational reporting on the following Symantec products: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Symantec NetBackup Symantec NetBackup 52xx Appliance Symantec NetBackup PureDisk Symantec Backup Exec Symantec Enterprise Vault . It cannot monitor or manage other products like Symantec NetBackup PureDisk.24 Getting started using Symantec OpsCenter About Symantec OpsCenter Symantec OpsCenter This OpsCenter version does not require any license. Note that OpsCenter can only monitor and manage NetBackup or NetBackup 52xx Appliance. If you upgrade from an earlier version of Symantec OpsCenter Analytics to 7.5 does not support upgrades from NOM and VBR. In addition to the features available in the unlicensed OpsCenter version. a new OpsCenter Analytics license key can be purchased which enables only the Search functionality. Symantec OpsCenter can perform the following functions: ■ ■ Monitor NetBackup and NetBackup 52xx Appliance setups. Create and customize views using Java View Builder.5 and want the Search functionality. Generate alerts depending on the conditions that you have defined.5. and reporting functionality.

Symantec Enterprise Vault.5. Create and customize views using Java View Builder. A wide range of audiences can benefit from the reporting capabilities and management capabilities of Symantec OpsCenter Analytics. See “About NetBackup Search” on page 989. Symantec Backup Exec. It also contains tools for defining cost metrics and chargeback formulas or handling alerts.Getting started using Symantec OpsCenter About Symantec OpsCenter 25 About Symantec OpsCenter Analytics functions The licensed version of OpsCenter is called Symantec OpsCenter Analytics. Note that Symantec OpsCenter Analytics can only monitor and manage NetBackup or NetBackup 52xx Appliance. Symantec OpsCenter Analytics can perform the following functions: ■ ■ Monitor NetBackup and NetBackup 52xx Appliance setups. See “About alerting in OpsCenter” on page 27. It cannot monitor or manage other products like Symantec NetBackup PureDisk. See “ About monitoring and managing NetBackup and NetBackup appliances” on page 26. Symantec Deduplication Appliance etc. Symantec OpsCenter Analytics displays customizable. custom. Manage or administer NetBackup and NetBackup 52xx Appliance setups. Provide operational and business-level reporting on the following Symantec and third-party products: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Symantec NetBackup Symantec NetBackup 52xx Appliance Symantec NetBackup PureDisk Symantec Backup Exec Symantec Enterprise Vault EMC NetWorker IBM Tivoli Storage Manager ■ ■ Provide chargeback. and custom SQL reports Perform advanced NetBackup Search and hold operations based on indexing the file system metadata that is associated with the backup images. The audiences include . multi-level views of backup and archive resources and customizable reports for tracking service usage and expenditures. Java View Builder is free and does not require any license. With OpsCenter 7. Generate alerts depending on the conditions that you have defined.

It can manage up to 100 NetBackup master servers that are distributed across multiple locations. Cost reports for archive data are not available. auditors. and administrators Verify compliance with internal as well as external business-level regulations. and additionally appliance master and media servers. external compliance auditors. legal teams. IT finance teams. The primary objectives of Symantec OpsCenter Analytics are as follows: ■ Help organizations assess their compliance with business standards by allowing them to accomplish the following: ■ Help organizations to establish the Service Level Agreements by reporting on them Report to legal departments. About monitoring and managing NetBackup and NetBackup appliances OpsCenter can manage and monitor NetBackup master and media servers. OpsCenter focuses on how to maintain your backup environment after you complete the NetBackup configuration. IT managers. . external customers. ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Assist organizations in effective business planning by enabling them to do the following: ■ ■ Estimate future backup requirements with the help of backup trend analysis. storage units. You need to use the NetBackup Administration Console and command-line interfaces for core NetBackup administrative functions such as configuring media. application owners. Calculate the cost of data protection management and chargeback to customers and business units. clients. and policies. Assess the recovery of clients and applications. policies. Identify risks in terms of shortfall of backup resources. It does not require you to separately log on to each NetBackup master or media server. Note: You can generate cost reports only for backup data. IT architects. OpsCenter lets you view the operational status and health of your distributed data protection environment.26 Getting started using Symantec OpsCenter About Symantec OpsCenter IT (Information Technology) managers. line-of-business managers. and capacity planning teams.

you can measure system performance against a service level agreement (SLA). See “About OpsCenter reports” on page 627. See “About compliance reporting” on page 27. See “About managing alert policies” on page 487. About reporting in Symantec OpsCenter Analytics These topics state the benefits that you can get from the Symantec OpsCenter Analytics reports. By using internal compliance reports. You can use predefined alert conditions to create alert policies to monitor typical issues or thresholds within NetBackup.Getting started using Symantec OpsCenter About Symantec OpsCenter 27 About alerting in OpsCenter OpsCenter provides a policy-based alert system. You can send an email or SNMP notification in response to an actual alert. Reports such as history or trend analysis ensure your compliance with the SLA. A view shows a set of enterprise assets (hosts or file systems) organized in logical groups. which lets administrators focus on other job responsibilities. About compliance reporting OpsCenter Analytics helps organizations evaluate their compliance with internal and external business standards by providing accurate and customizable reports. NetBackup Appliance or other products. By using these reports. See “About reporting on archive data” on page 29. In addition to tracking the backup information or archive information. OpsCenter can generate reports that are filtered by views. you can generate a report that anticipates a shortfall of resources in the future based on the current backup trend. You can then use the results to optimize data protection management. The reports can help you ensure that the data recovery meets the recovery-time and recovery-point objectives. For example. master servers. or media servers. This report is then used to determine the time that is required to purchase new tape drives. OpsCenter reports ensure recovery of key information assets. which monitors and notifies you before serious problems happen to your backup environment. External compliance reports help you follow the policies that are laid down by various federal regulations. Such policies include the Sarbanes-Oxley Act (SOX) and the Health Insurance Portability and Accountability Act (HIPAA). See “About business planning” on page 28. you can track the use of backup resources and identify the risks involved. They no longer need to be logged on to a terminal to monitor systems continuously. . For example.

the line of business they represent. It seamlessly integrates with Symantec products as well as third-party backup products and provides consistent reporting across them. For example. The detailed. Symantec OpsCenter Analytics offers you a set of chargeback reports that detail backup service expenditures. OpsCenter can generate reports according to views created. in an environment running 20 instances of Oracle applications. server. Depending on this information. This product supports a wide range of backup and recovery solutions including NetBackup and Backup Exec.28 Getting started using Symantec OpsCenter About Symantec OpsCenter you can create views to display assets according to their locations in the organization. you can generate a report showing resource consumption by department. you can then present itemized invoices to internal . These reports help you identify locations or departments containing assets with critical data. It delivers backup services to organizations. organizations can provide appropriate resource planning in advance. or business departments that are the heaviest consumers of backup resources. About business planning OpsCenter Analytics is a management tool that helps you optimize your data protection environment with effective business planning. you can track the backup use and recovery use and the associated cost. It can collect data from the following target products: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Symantec NetBackup Symantec NetBackup Appliance Symantec Backup Exec Symantec NetBackup PureDisk Symantec Enterprise Vault IBM Tivoli Storage Manager EMC NetWorker OpsCenter’s ability to forecast backup resource requirements helps datacenter executives to decide whether to maintain the existing resources or add new capacity. or location. By using the chargeback function. drill-down OpsCenter reports help you determine the applications. Using this chargeback data. you can create a formula that determines charges based on kilobytes of backed up data over a period of time. or the applications that are installed. which include reporting on backup and recovery trends and managing datacenters . you can define pricing models for backup service delivery and allocate costs to customers based on these models. By using these reports. For example. These reports are then used in resource planning. databases.

About reporting on archive data The Enterprise Vault Archiving report category contains a number of reports that are generated based on the archive data collected from Enterprise Vault. With earlier versions of OpsCenter. Note: You can generate cost reports only for backup data.5. In OpsCenter 7. About what's new in Symantec OpsCenter 7. export chargeback tables to third-party billing systems. In the OpsCenter console. However. This issue has now been fixed in OpsCenter 7.5. The custom reports have been enhanced for report definition and data correctness. Cost reports for archive data are not available. The top 50 standard OpsCenter reports have been enhanced for report data correctness to be at par with the earlier NOM or VBR reports. The following enhancements have been made: ■ ■ The top 50 standard OpsCenter reports have been enhanced for report definition correctness to be at par with the earlier NOM or VBR reports. there will be some performance impact if you run a standard or custom report that meets both of the following conditions: ■ ■ ■ ■ The report is Historical (has a Time Frame Grouping filter) ) or is tabular with a Date or Date Time column. You can report on the number of messages that are archived across mailboxes or the size of these messages before and after the archive operation.5 offers the following enhancements or new functions. the top 50 standard reports and also custom reports have been enhanced for report definition and data correctness.5.5 OpsCenter 7. A new user role named Restore Operator has been added in OpsCenter 7. or use the data to analyze and justify expenditures.5 29 customers.Getting started using Symantec OpsCenter About what's new in Symantec OpsCenter 7. ■ OpsCenter 7. .5 allows you to search for and restore the backed up files or directories from multiple source clients. See “About Operational Restores from OpsCenter” on page 527. standard or custom reports may show incorrect data if you select a time frame that contains a Daylight Saving Time (or DST) change. go to Manage > Restore and click Restore Files and Directories link to restore backed up files and directories.

See “Job Activity > Job Count” on page 720. See “Job Activity > Client Count” on page 731. 2010 to November 22. See “Job Activity > Job Duration” on page 736. Since the DST ends on November 7 which is in the middle of the selected timeframe. you specify the absolute timeframe from Oct 22.Forecast Advanced Success Rate See “Status & Success Rate > Success Rate > Advanced Success Rate report” on page 821.All Attempts report” on page 824. Success Rate . . 2010. See “Planning Activity > Forecast > Job Size” on page 751. the selected timeframe contains the DST change. Example: Suppose you select CST (GMT -6:00) as the Data Display Time Zone on OpsCenter Server.5: ■ Folder Name Report Name Reference See “Job Activity > File Count” on page 740. The following standard or canned reports have been enhanced in OpsCenter 7.5 The time frame selected to run the report contains DST change. Symantec recommends that you configure the timezone for the OpsCenter Server as either GMT or a timezone that does not have any DST.All Attempts See “Status & Success Rate > Success Rate > Success Rate . See “Job Activity > Job Size” on page 725. Backup > Job Activity File Count Job Count Job Size Client Count Job Duration Backup Window > Job Count Backup > Planning Activity > Forecast Backup > Status & Success Rate Job Size . See “Job Activity > Backup Window > Job Count report” on page 716. To overcome such performance issues. You can configure the Data Display Time Zone from the OpsCenter console by clicking Settings > User Preferences > General and browsing to the Basic Preferences section. And while running the report. The DST setting for CST time zone ended on Nov 7.30 Getting started using Symantec OpsCenter About what's new in Symantec OpsCenter 7. 2010 02:00:00.

See “Status & Success Rate > Status > Week At A Glance report ” on page 797. See “Planning Activity > Scheduled Jobs > Job Details Scheduled Vs Actual report” on page 762. See “Status & Success Rate > Status > Job Attempt Status Detail report” on page 806.First Attempt Reference See “Status & Success Rate > Success Rate > Success Rate . Success Rate Line Job Attempt Status Detail Backup > Planning Activity > Scheduled Job Job Details Scheduled vs. Actual Job Count within Backup Window . See “Status & Success Rate > Status > Success Rate Line report” on page 793. Job Status Failed Job Count Partially Successful Job See “Status & Success Rate > Status > Count Partially Successful Job Count report ” on page 780. Success Rate .5 31 Folder Name Report Name Success Rate .All Jobs See “Status & Success Rate > Success Rate > Success Rate – All Jobs report ” on page 817. See “Planning Activity > Scheduled Job > Job Count within Backup Window report” on page 760.First Attempt report” on page 829. See “Status & Success Rate > Status > Failed Job Count report ” on page 776. Successful Job Count See “Status & Success Rate > Status > Successful Job Count report ” on page 784. Backup > Status & Consecutive Failures Success Rate > Status Report Week at a Glance See “Status > Consecutive Failures” on page 788. Actual Job Count Scheduled Vs. See “Status & Success Rate > Status > Job Status > Historical report” on page 810.Getting started using Symantec OpsCenter About what's new in Symantec OpsCenter 7. See “Planning Activity > Scheduled Job > Job Count Scheduled Vs Actual report” on page 756.

Post Deduplication Size report” on page 700. See “Deduplication Chargeback report” on page 833. See “Deduplication > Pre vs. See “Variance > Throughput Variance” on page 709. See “Job Success by Client report” on page 864. See “Risk Analysis > Recovery Point Objective report” on page 853. See “Risk Analysis > Client Coverage report” on page 846. Chargeback Backup Chargeback Deduplication Chargeback Client Reports > Risk Analysis Recovery Point Objective Client Risk Analysis Client Coverage Client Report Client Restore Client Not Backed up Job Success By Client . See “Backup Chargeback report” on page 838.32 Getting started using Symantec OpsCenter About what's new in Symantec OpsCenter 7. See “Risk Analysis > Client Risk Analysis report ” on page 843. Backup > Planning Activity > Stored Backup Images Stored backup Images on Media See “Planning Activity > Stored Backup Images > Stored Backup Images > Stored Backup Images on Media” on page 769.5 Folder Name Backup > Deduplication Report Name Deduplication Size Savings Deduplication Size Factor Pre Vs. See “Client Restore report” on page 872. See “Clients Not Backed up report” on page 857. See “Deduplication > Deduplication Size Factor” on page 694. Post Deduplication Reference See “Deduplication > Deduplication Size Savings” on page 703. See “Job Activity > Variance > Backup Job Size Variance report” on page 712. Job Activity > Variance Throughput Variance Backup Job Size Variance Backup > Job Browser Tabular Backup Report See “Job Browser > Tabular Backup Report” on page 745.

See “Media Reports > Media Expiration Schedule” on page 904. See “Disk and Tape Device Activity > Drive Utilization Report” on page 894. See “Media Reports > Media State” on page 898. See “ Disk Usage report” on page 915.Getting started using Symantec OpsCenter About what's new in Symantec OpsCenter 7. See “Disk and Tape Device Activity > Drive Throughput” on page 891. See “Restore > Restore Job Attempt Summary by Volume Restored ” on page 939. Disk & Tape Device Activity Current Disk Usage Drive Throughput Drive Utilization Media Reports Media Utilization Media Expiration Schedule Media State Performance Reports Master Server Job Throughput Disk Usage Policy Reports Policy Summary Dashbaord Top 10 Policies Using most Server Space Restore Restore Job Details Restore Job Summary by Job Count Restore Job Summary by Volume Restored If you have saved one or more reports that are based on any of the report templates mentioned above or any custom reports and you upgrade from an earlier OpsCenter version to OpsCenter 7. you will see the link named View modified saved reports under Reports > My Reports. See “Restore > Restore Job Attempt Summary by Job Count” on page 937. See “ Top 10 Policies Using Most Server Space report” on page 922. See “Disk and Tape Device Activity > Current Disk Usage Report” on page 888. See “Restore > Restore Job Details ” on page 941.5 33 Folder Name Report Name Virtual Client Summary Reference See “Virtual Client Summary report” on page 859. Since the saved reports . See “Media Reports > Media Utilization” on page 901. See “ Policy Summary Dashboard report” on page 927. See “ Master Server Job Throughput report” on page 908.5.

The following figure shows the View modified saved reports link. The following are some of the report definition changes that have been implemented that are valid for some or all of the above mentioned standard (or canned) reports: ■ The unit Years has been added for Relative Timeframe selection for all of the reports. You can now view report data for the last x years with Symantec OpsCenter Analytics for the above reports. and the length of the interval between points on the trend line (in days). Trend line display option is now available for some of the canned historical reports.34 Getting started using Symantec OpsCenter About what's new in Symantec OpsCenter 7. You can use trendlines to specify whether the report should include a trendline. The following check box is available under Timeline Chart Properties on the Modify Display Options pane: Show trend line with moving average period of <select value> The trendline option is available for the following reports: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Backup > Deduplication > Deduplication Size Saving Backup > Deduplication > Deduplication Size Factor Backup > Job Activity > File Count Backup > Job Activity > Job Count Backup > Job Activity > Job Size Backup > Status & Success Rate > Status > Failed Job Count Backup > Status & Success Rate > Status > Job Status Backup > Status & Success Rate > Status > Partially Successful Job Count Backup > Status & Success Rate > Status > Successful Job Count Backup > Planning Activity > Stored Backup Images > Stored Backup Images on Media Chargeback > Backup Chargeback Chargeback > Deduplication Chargeback ■ ■ ■ The Week at a Glance report can now show the files and directories that are backed up for each client.5. these saved reports may appear modified. The following checkbox has been added on the Modify Display Options pane when you edit the report: Show the files and directories backed up for each client .5 are based on templates that have been modified in OpsCenter 7. Click the link to view the modified saved reports. You can also see the Years tab on the top-right corner of the above reports.

A new subcategory called Disk Pool has been added under the Backup/Recovery category for custom reports. with which you can compare the actual performance shown. This checkbox is visible when you create a custom historical report. Using this option. You can use the Target Performance option to specify where a report draws the target line.5 35 If you check this option and click Run Report. you can easily compare the actual performance with the target performance.Getting started using Symantec OpsCenter About what's new in Symantec OpsCenter 7. The Target Performance option allows you to specify the target for Y1 or Y2 axis (in case of dual axis). You can now view report data for the last x years or the last x quarters with Symantec OpsCenter Analytics. you can view the client name and the backed up directory in the Client Name column of Week at a Glance report. Job Type. ■ ■ . The charts section now show UNKNOWN as legend instead of blank. A new checkbox named Target Performance has been added to the Modify Display Options page. you will see a straight line parallel to X-axis and the value as 100 on Y1 axis. The following are some of the report definition changes that have been implemented for custom reports: ■ ■ The unit Years and Quarters has been added for Relative Timeframe selection. ■ Drilldown reports are now available for the following reports: Report Drill down report Backup > Job Browser > Tabular Backup Skip File Details Report (click any link in the Job Primary ID column) Client Reports > Job Success By Client (click the bar chart) Media Reports > Media Expiration Schedule (click the bar chart) Job Details by Client Media Expiration Details Restore > Restore Job Attempt Summary Restore Job Attempt Details by Job Count (click the bar chart) Restore > Restore Job Attempt Summary Restore Job Attempt Details by Volume restored (click the bar chart) A new value called UNKNOWN has been added for filters like Policy type. In case you set a value of say 100 for Y1 axis and run the report.

for day selection. or Ranking custom report. The current date and time is September 13. This option appears on the Modify Display Options page when you create custom tabular reports. Examples: ■ ■ ■ The current date is June 13. the Relative timeframe is calculated starting from the first day for week.M. and add Job Retention Level as a selected column. While creating custom reports (Distribution. the report shows data from May 14. the Operation drop-down list shows only applicable functions namely Count and Distinct Count. from 12 A.M. 2010 to June 13. If you select the Relative Timeframe as Previous 2 Days and do not select the Start from the beginning of Days check box. 10:30 P. and from the earliest whole number (no minutes or seconds) for hour selection. all duplicate rows are replaced by a single row in the report and only distinct records are shown. 2010. or year selection. Maximum. Months. Days. If you specify a relative timeframe and check Start from the beginning of <selected unit>. and select Report Data as Job Primary ID. the report shows data from June 1. and Minimum are shown in the other drop-down list.5 ■ A new checkbox option called Display unique rows in the report has been added for custom tabular reports. Distinct Count. You can now choose to start from the beginning of a Relative time frame for custom reports. The following checkbox has been added in Relative Timeframe: Start from the beginning of <selected unit>. the report shows data from September 11. When you select this option.36 Getting started using Symantec OpsCenter About what's new in Symantec OpsCenter 7. if you select report data for chart based reports then the function or Operation drop-down list is populated dynamically with the supported values. <selected unit> may stand for Hours. Historical. 2010. or Ranking) in the Modify Display Options page. If you select the Relative Timeframe as Previous 1 Month and do not select the Start from the beginning of Month check box. Earlier all the functions were displayed. For example if you create a Distribution. 2010 to June 13. or Years depending on what you select. 2010. to September 13. Tabular. Similarly if you create a tabular custom report. Quarters. 10:30 PM. 10:30 P. Duplicate rows generally appear if the rows do not have a unique ID. However if you select the ■ .M. However if you select the Start from the beginning of Month check box. Weeks. Do not select the Start from the beginning of <unit> check box if you want to view data for the entire period specified in Relative Timeframe. Historical. quarter. month. only valid functions like Count.

to April 30.M. The charts section now shows UNKNOWN as legend instead of blank. A license for NetBackup Search is required. ■ The current time is 4:25 P. the report’s contents remain static whenever you display it. ■ Ignore To Date Use Ignore From Date or Ignore To Date to indicate an open-ended time interval for an Absolute Timeframe. ■ A new value called UNKNOWN has been added for filters like Policy type.M.M. 12:00 A.5 37 Start from the beginning of Days check box. the report shows data from 3 P. 12 A. 2004. The following checkboxes have been added for Absolute Time frame in custom reports: Ignore From Date Check this option to view all the data on and before the To date. the report ignores the To Date and displays all data on and after March 1.M.5 allows you to perform advanced NetBackup Search and hold operations based on indexing the file system metadata that is associated with the backup images. Now if you check Ignore To Date.Getting started using Symantec OpsCenter About what's new in Symantec OpsCenter 7. After you have added the license and log on as a Security . 2004. Now if you check Ignore From Date. 2004. Check this option to view all data on and after the From date Example: Suppose you specify an absolute timframe: From March 1. 10:30 P. the report is configured to display data collected over the interval ending at the current date. 2004.M.M. the report shows data from 2:25 P. Schedule/Level Type etc.M. 12:00 A.M.M. The report displays data from the time period between the start and end dates. This is effectively equivalent to specifying an absolute time frame. 12:00 A. 12:00 A. Example: Suppose you specify an absolute timframe: From March 1. to September 13. 12:00 A. 2004. 12:00 A. Note: If you specify relative time frame and check Start from the beginning of <selected unit>. to 4:25 P.M. However if you select the Start from the beginning of Hours check box. Job Type.M. to April 30.M. to 4:25 P. the report ignores the From Date and displays all data before April 30.M. 2004. The report displays data from the time period between the start and end dates. the report shows data from September 12. If you select the Relative Timeframe as Previous 2 Hours and do not select the Start from the beginning of Hour check box. ■ Symantec OpsCenter Analytics 7.

See “About access rights for a view ” on page 385. View-based access has been improved with OpsCenter 7. ■ . ■ OpsCenter 7. All non-admin users like Operator. See “ Adding new users to OpsCenter” on page 293. The Security Administrator can see assigned views for each user from Settings > Users by looking at the Assigned Views tab at the bottom. For other users. ■ Only the Security Administrator can grant view access to users from the OpsCenter console. This can be done when a Security Administrator adds or edits a user from Settings > Users. See “ Editing OpsCenter user information” on page 293. See “About NetBackup Search” on page 989. The logged-in user in OpsCenter can view the data for the permitted views only.5. Restore Operator.5 Administrator. See “About the View pane” on page 73. Note that both Security Administrator and an Administrator can grant view access to users from the Java View Builder. You can find information about traditional licenses by going to Manage > Deployment Analysis > Traditional Licensing in the OpsCenter console. See “About the traditional license report” on page 573. Only the permitted views appear in the View drop-down list in the View pane. Note: The ALL MASTER SERVERS view cannot be modified. See the Symantec OpsCenter Java View Builder Help for more information. The following changes have been made with respect to implementing view-based access in OpsCenter 7.38 Getting started using Symantec OpsCenter About what's new in Symantec OpsCenter 7. you can view the content in Search & Hold tab in the OpsCenter console. A Security Administrator or an Administrator has read and write permission for all the views (except write permission for the ALL MASTER SERVERS view). See “Settings > Users > Users options” on page 286.5. access to views is permission-based.5: ■ ■ All OpsCenter users cannot access all OpsCenter views.5 helps you to generate traditional licensing reports for master servers of version 6.6 and higher (supported by nbdeployutil). A Security Administrator or an Administrator can also grant view access to user groups using the Java View Builder. or Reporter can be given a read-only access to the views.

A Security Administrator can view information about permitted view for the user from Settings > Users. See “About access rights for a view ” on page 385. See “UI access for specific view types” on page 383. The Java View Builder was earlier available only with the licensed version (Symantec OpsCenter Analytics). When you upgrade from an earlier version to OpsCenter 7.5. Because an Analyst has default read permission on all the views. This default view would be used when you log on to OpsCenter. Click UI access for specific view types for details about the applicable view types. See “Settings > Users > Users options” on page 286. As this view is restricted to Security Administrator.5 39 ■ You can view the data that is relevant to the selected view. All My Views now is the default view for all standard reports. only the user with Security Administrator will be able to see the views assigned to a specific user. The Java View Builder is now available for free as part of Symantec OpsCenter. The Analyst user role is no longer available. Only a Security Administrator or Administrator can create or modify the views. Hence if you select a client-type view and click Monitor > Media. after upgrade all upgraded Analyst users get read permission on all the views in OpsCenter. See “Creating OpsCenter views” on page 388. A Security Administrator can only grant read access to this view but cannot modify or delete this view. all the existing users are given read access to the ALL MASTER SERVERS view. An OpsCenter user can specify the default view to be shown in OpsCenter from Settings > User Preferences > General. During upgrade.5. All the non-admin users get the access to the ALL MASTER SERVERS view only if permitted. then that view selection is used for that session throughout OpsCenter except reporting.Getting started using Symantec OpsCenter About what's new in Symantec OpsCenter 7. This default view will be used only for the standard reports. For example for a client view. media details are not valid. the user gets the following message immediately after login: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ . If you modify the view selection after logging on to OpsCenter from the View Pane. If an OpsCenter user does not have access to any view. all the existing Analyst users are upgraded to Reporter in OpsCenter 7. you will see the following error message: Data is not applicable for the view that you selected. You can also specify the default view to be used for report templates.

and now he no longer has access to the specific view. .5 OpsCenter login was successful.40 Getting started using Symantec OpsCenter About what's new in Symantec OpsCenter 7. A new report category called Cloud reports has been added to Reports > Report Templates. OpsCenter 7. See “Monitor > Appliance Hardware > Media Server” on page 477. See “Monitor > Cloud options” on page 482. The following reports have been added in Cloud reports: Job Success Rate Data Expiring in Future Cloud Metering Average Data Transfer Rate See “Job Success Rate report” on page 874. You can monitor appliance master and media servers and quickly identify any hardware failures in the appliances from the OpsCenter console.5 also lets you monitor hardware of multiple NetBackup 52xx Appliances from the OpsCenter console. A new data type called Appliance Hardware has been added to collect appliance-specific data. OpsCenter 7. See “About Cloud reports” on page 874.2 and 2. go to Monitor > Appliance Hardware in the OpsCenter console. You may not be able to proceed further as you do not have access to any View. For more details. and alert on a NetBackup 52xx Appliance master server.0 master server or to a regular NetBackup 7. contact the administrator. ■ Consider a scenario where an OpsCenter user has saved a view-based report. To monitor appliance hardware and view hardware summary of the appliance master or media servers. go to Monitor > Cloud in the OpsCenter console.0 media servers that are attached to an appliance 2.0 master servers. See “Monitor > Appliance Hardware > Media Server” on page 477.5 can monitor and report on cloud configurations on multiple NetBackup 7. ■ OpsCenter 7.5 can also monitor appliance 1. If the user tries to run this report. OpsCenter can monitor appliance 2.5 master or media servers. See “Average Data Transfer Rate” on page 882. You can however edit the report and then change the View. report.5 master server.5 lets you monitor. See “Data Expiring in Future” on page 877. the following message is displayed: You might not have access to the View selected for this report. To monitor your cloud configuration. manage. ■ See “Cloud Metering” on page 880. OpsCenter 7.

and View Builder.6. testing. deploy.280 ■ Starting with OpsCenter 7.33. Solaris SPARC. The Web server has been upgraded to address the security vulnerabilities in the earlier version.5. Data Protection. The following describes where to find the license agreement: .0.Getting started using Symantec OpsCenter About what's new in Symantec OpsCenter 7. refer to the license agreement section 17.29. technical support. This feature specifies the format and location of the tag that can help any Software Asset Management (SAM) tool to detect and report on Symantec OpsCenter. The information received becomes part of a continuous quality improvement program that helps Symantec understand how customers configure.5 components like Server.0.0.05. In OpsCenter 7.0. and use OpsCenter. Java Runtime Environment (JRE) is embedded in the OpsCenter Server package. The following table shows the new upgraded version of JRE in OpsCenter 7. This feature deploys ISO 19770-2 standard software asset tags with OpsCenter 7.150 1.0 (from version 6.6.6. Windows x64.12.5.0. and future requirements. the OpsCenter Product Improvement Program captures installation deployment and product usage information. During the installation.0) for all platforms. This information is then used to help Symantec identify improvements in product features.0.00 6.5 now supports the feature of asset tags. you can choose to participate in the Product Improvement Program and send this information automatically and in a secured manner to Symantec.5 for each platform: Platform Windows x86. Agent.19 Privacy. To learn more about the Product Improvement Program.6. Linux RHEL. An Asset tag helps to identify if a particular software product or component is deployed on a host. Solaris x86 HP-UX AIX ■ Old Version 1.5.5 41 Cloud Metering Chargeback See “Cloud Metering Chargeback” on page 885.0_29 1. Linux SUSE.0_17 New Version 1.0.0. Starting from OpsCenter 7. ■ OpsCenter 7. The JRE component has been upgraded to higher versions based on the respective platforms.00 6. the following infrastructure components have been upgraded to higher versions: ■ ■ The Apache Tomcat Web server has been upgraded to version 6.

all Agent tuning configurations in OpsCenterAgentService. views.conf can be changing the Agent logging level etc. On the Installation page. On the Home page. Hence the DBOPERATOR can only execute “Select” queries on the OpsCenter-specific tables. If you were using 32-bit Agent software on a 64-bit Windows system and upgrade to OpsCenter 7.5 UNIX See the file LICENSE in the base directory of the UNIX images on the DVD media. OpsCenter Agent. From the DVD media.5.xml file is used to specify how much memory is allocated for the Agent process and can be located in <INSTALL_PATH>\agent\bin. procedures.xml file that you may have made earlier should be performed again manually. or stored procedures. click Next to advance to the License Agreement page. ■ ■ In OpsCenter 7.conf file that you may have made earlier must be performed manually again after you upgrade.42 Getting started using Symantec OpsCenter About what's new in Symantec OpsCenter 7. You need to perform the following tasks after you upgrade to 64-bit OpsCenter Agent: ■ If 32-bit Agent software is upgraded to 64-bit. The DBOPERATOR role is used when you create reports by running SQL-based queries. or OpsCenter View Builder Installation. . On the Welcome page. The DBOPERATOR only has read access to the OpsCenter specific tables.5. select OpsCenter Server. any Agent configurations in the log.5.5 Agent. The OpsCenterAgentService. Windows ■ Native 64-bit OpsCenter Agent software is now available for 64-bit Windows platforms. The log. If 32-bit Agent software is upgraded to 64-bit software and the Agent is not installed on the OpsCenter Server. 32-bit Agent software is not supported on 64-bit Windows systems. then 64-bit Agent software is installed when you install OpsCenter 7. views. click Installation. For OpsCenter 7.conf file is located in <INSTALL_PATH>\agent. Possible Agent configuration in log. The DBOPERATOR can create his own tables. start the installation wizard (Browser.exe). views. This step must be performed only if OpsCenter Agent is not located on the OpsCenter Server. a new database user named DBOPERATOR has been added. The Installer automatically installs 64-bit Agent software on a 64-bit Windows system. The SQL-based queries can be created from Reports > Report Templates > Create New Report > Run SQL Query and is available in Symantec OpsCenter Analytics. and functions.

10. .5. the core of the architecture. and 9.5 using Internet Explorer 7. You can access OpsCenter 7.5” on page 53.6. OpsCenter 7. OpsCenter Server is supported on Windows and UNIX platforms. is a Web application that normalizes backup and archive data that it collects from various applications.0. OpsCenter 7.2.x.1 and above.6.5 can monitor and manage all NetBackup master server versions between 6.0.3a.0. ■ ■ About OpsCenter components This section describes the following OpsCenter components: About the OpsCenter Server The OpsCenter Server.5 can now collect data from Symantec Enterprise Vault 9. 6.x.x and 7.5 does not support Backup Exec 10.5.Getting started using Symantec OpsCenter About OpsCenter components 43 procedures and functions for which he has full permission (like Select. functions that are not specific to OpsCenter and were created before 7. DBOPERATOR has full access on the procedures.x.5 using Firefox 3.1. DBOPERATOR also has full access (except DROP) on the tables and views that are not specific to OpsCenter and were created before 7. If you are upgrading to OpsCenter 7. ■ OpsCenter 7.5.5. Delete. This normalized data is used for reporting on backup-related information.x.x.6. 8. It can also collect data from PureDisk 6. or Update). Earlier you could only filter the report data for a master server view. See “OpsCenter compatible backup and archiving products ” on page 104.5. ■ The following Client reports can now show data for a specific client view: ■ ■ ■ ■ Virtual Client Summary Clients not Backed up Client Summary Dashboard BMR Client Configuration Backup Failures To view report data for a specific client view. 9. See “ Web browsers supported by OpsCenter 7. 3. edit the report and select a client view from the View filter. You can also access OpsCenter 7.5. 3.

5 and View Builder 7. Agent.5. In the PBX exchange. It also provides a private user repository for service identities. See “About the OpsCenter database” on page 45. NIS/NIS+ repositories. A common Web server (that uses Java Server Pages) and a JRE to serve the OpsCenter console. and remove Veritas product license keys. custom actions. Examples of name spaces are Active Directory or other LDAP servers. A common Veritas Licensing Module and API used to add. or any identities that can be authenticated through PAM (Pluggable Authentication Module). and SNMP management capabilities. change. . Server 7. UNIX identities based on password files. cost metrics and chargeback formulas. Calls placed to a switchboard are redirected to a known extension. Symantec Product Authentication Service (AT) A set of common authentication runtime libraries and processes that enable users to log on once to access multiple products. For example. and alerts. AT validates identities based on external name spaces. The OpsCenter Server comprises the following components: OpsCenter database A Sybase SA (SQL Anywhere) database management system containing data related to back up and archive service usage and expenditure. including notification. See “About the Symantec Product Authentication Service ” on page 46. and View Builder of the same versions.44 Getting started using Symantec OpsCenter About OpsCenter components Note: You must install OpsCenter Server. Symantec Web Server and Java Runtime Environment (JRE) Veritas Licensing Manager Symantec Private Branch Exchange Figure 1-1 shows the architecture of the OpsCenter Server. Alert Manager A component that provides policy-based alert management.5 is compatible only with Agent 7. A common component that uses socket passing to reduce the number of ports that are required to be open across a firewall. client connections that are sent to the exchange’s port are redirected to an extension that is associated with the OpsCenter Server. Symantec Private Branch Exchange uses a paradigm similar to the paradigm of a telephone switchboard.

chargeback formulae.Getting started using Symantec OpsCenter About OpsCenter components 45 Figure 1-1 OpsCenter Server architecture OpsCenter Web Server View Builder Console OpsCenter Console Symantec Product Authentication Service (AT) OpsCenter Server CORBA Service Alert Service Reporting Service View Builder Service Licensing Service Security Service Database Access Layer Server Communication Layer OpsCenter Database (Sybase DBMS) Symantec Backup Exec Symantec PureDisk (Web Services) OpsCenter Agent Symantec Enterprise Vault NBSL Communication (CORBA) IBM TSM CLI EMC Legato Networker Symantec NetBackup About the OpsCenter database OpsCenter uses Sybase SQL Anywhere 11 (Sybase 11) database management system as a repository for the backup data or archive data. such as backup service usage and expenditure reports. . cost metrics. and alerts.

and Java View Builder. which consists of a single cross-platform database file. LDAP and even standard UNIX passwords. OpsCenter Server.46 Getting started using Symantec OpsCenter About OpsCenter components OpsCenter uses a Sybase SQL Anywhere 11 (Sybase 11) database installation that is separate from the NetBackup database. About the Symantec Product Authentication Service The OpsCenter Server relies on Symantec Product Authentication Service (AT) for user authentication for connections between. refer to the ICS documentation that is shipped with the NetBackup documentation set. Enable trust between OpsCenter and other Symantec products that also use AT. When the Symantec Product Authentication Service library authenticates a user for OpsCenter. all information that is in the Web user interface is contained in the OpsCenter database.5 does not support upgrades from NOM and VBR. NIS. Except for a very small number of system settings. Symantec Product Authentication Service is a shared component and is used to perform the following actions: ■ Authenticate users to the OpsCenter console based on external authentication systems such as Active Directory. OpsCenter 7. Provide for a secure transport of data between OpsCenter Agents and the OpsCenter server. The OpsCenter database is completely embedded and requires no additional installation steps. Agent. NIS+. About the OpsCenter Agent The OpsCenter Agent collects data from various Symantec and third-party backup and archiving products. ■ ■ Note: For more details on AT. The Web credential provides a limited form of user authentication so that products do not prompt the user to log on again. The Sybase database is also self tuning and does not require a database administrator to maintain it. The Symantec Product Authentication Service is referred to as AT. it returns a credential that OpsCenter passes along when cross-linking to other Symantec products such as NetBackup Operations Manager. These products can reside on the OpsCenter Agent host .

you need to have OpsCenter Agent only if you want to collect image. For NetBackup 6. or traditional license data. Symantec Backup Exec (Windows only) Symantec Enterprise Vault (Windows only) EMC NetWorker IBM Tivoli Storage Manager ■ ■ ■ ■ OpsCenter Server collects NetBackup data using NBSL in the following scenarios: ■ If you want to collect tape drive information.5. capacity license. media.x master servers. 7.5 master servers (except traditional and capacity license data). For NetBackup 7. policy and schedule. you need to have OpsCenter Agent only if you want to collect breakup jobs. All OpsCenter data collectors are configured on . The OpsCenter Agent relies on the Java Runtime Environment (JRE) to perform its functions. capacity license. error log. OpsCenter Agent is supported on Windows and Solaris platforms. you need to have OpsCenter Agent only if you want to collect capacity license or traditional license data. If you want to collect any data type from NetBackup 7. Server 7. error log. For NetBackup 7. For example.x.0. Agent. and traditional license data.5 and View Builder 7. you need to have OpsCenter Agent only if you want to collect image. OpsCenter formats the information collected from the following target products and displays it through the OpsCenter console: ■ Symantec NetBackup and NetBackup Appliance Note: For NetBackup 6. or traditional license data. capacity. or skipped file data from a NetBackup master server of any supported version.x master servers. breakup jobs. job.5 is compatible only with Agent 7. or can be installed on a remote host. The OpsCenter Agent also requires embedded AT (Symantec Product Authentication Service) to authenticate itself with the OpsCenter Server. Both JRE and AT libraries are installed automatically with the Agent installation. and View Builder of the same versions.Getting started using Symantec OpsCenter About OpsCenter components 47 or on remote hosts.5.x master servers.1.5 master servers.0. Note: You must install OpsCenter Server. ■ The OpsCenter Agent can reside on the same host as the OpsCenter Server.

A number of combinations of OpsCenter Agent and Server installations are possible. Alternatively. the Agent must be installed on the EMC NetWorker server host. See “About data collectors” on page 49. About the scheduler The scheduler performs three basic functions for the OpsCenter Agent: ■ ■ Checks and queues the data collection schedules of all running data collectors. See “About the CORBA Client/Server ” on page 49. The OpsCenter Agent communicates with the OpsCenter Server. Monitors modifications that are made to the Agent configuration using the OpsCenter console. Configure and run only these data collectors for the target product on which you want to monitor or report. The core of the OpsCenter Agent is a Java virtual machine (JVM) on which you run different data collectors. Sends periodic heartbeat messages to the OpsCenter server to ensure the reliability of communications between the Agent and the Server. which are stored on the OpsCenter Server. ■ . and receives commands through the CORBA API. The OpsCenter Agent consists of the scheduler. you can install an agent on the NetBackup master server host and configure the NetBackup data collector to collect data from the local NetBackup master server. the Symantec Product Authentication Service client libraries reside on the Agent host. These parts of the agent are described in the following topics: See “About the scheduler” on page 48. and data collectors that collect backup data from all available backup applications. schedules backup and archive data collection data types. Therefore. The Scheduler and CORBA form the agent core.48 Getting started using Symantec OpsCenter About OpsCenter components every Agent. Because the OpsCenter Server relies on Symantec Product Authentication Service to authenticate connections between the OpsCenter Agent and OpsCenter Server. CORBA Client/Server. For example. Note: The EMC NetWorker data collector does not support remote data collection. you can install an Agent on the OpsCenter Server host and configure the NetBackup data collector to collect data from a remote NetBackup master server.

Data collector configurations consist of general parameters. By default. a heartbeat is sent every minute. A heartbeat is a request that the OpsCenter Agent sends to the OpsCenter Server to check for any new changes in the configuration settings. Any changes that you make to the Agent configuration settings are reflected after the next heartbeat. any changes made to the local agent.) When you send a request to get the Agent status through the OpsCenter user interface. The Agent behaves as a CORBA client when sending data or alerts to the OpsCenter Server. which are shared by all data collectors.conf file do not take place until the agent is restarted. such as log configurations and data collection event definitions. About data collectors The data collectors convert the data specific to back up or archive products into a format that can be used by the OpsCenter Server. Note: You should not modify the agent. The agent compares the local agent.conf file. You must configure a data collector on the OpsCenter Agent host that collects data from a backup or archive product host.conf file with the one stored in the database when the agent process is started. About Agent configuration and logging Agent configuration settings are stored in the OpsCenter database. the OpsCenter Server sends the request to the CORBA Server to receive the requested information.Getting started using Symantec OpsCenter About OpsCenter components 49 About the CORBA Client/Server The OpsCenter Agent implements a CORBA server that listens on a configurable port that allows the OpsCenter console to get the runtime status of the Agent. The data collector is implemented in a way that suits the underlying backup or archive product. You should change the agent configuration settings using the OpsCenter Agent configuration user interface. Each data collector must conform to an interface that defines its interaction with the OpsCenter Agent. If the agent process has already started. and product-specific values.conf file. . (The default port is 7806. The OpsCenter Agent also caches the latest version of the configuration settings in the agent.

For information on how to understand and use the various OpsCenter views and related tasks. About the OpsCenter Java View Builder The OpsCenter Java View Builder is an application in which an administrator creates.5. It does not require a license. The OpsCenter online documentation assumes that the user has a good working knowledge of NetBackup and its concepts and components. Note: Java View Builder is now available free with Symantec OpsCenter 7. and View Builder of the same versions. To use the Java View Builder. Context-sensitive help is available for all console views. see the OpsCenter online Help. and manages access to the OpsCenter views that users see in the console.exe file. They include how to log on and log off and how the console works. Agent. The View Builder fetches the existing object view definitions from the OpsCenter database and displays them in the OpsCenter console. The Java View Builder relies on the AT client libraries which is installed automatically to communicate properly with the OpsCenter Server.5 and View Builder 7. Note: You must install OpsCenter Server. When you run the Java View Builder . To access the online Help.50 Getting started using Symantec OpsCenter About using the OpsCenter console Logging for the agent core and individual data collector is administered in the same fashion but written to different log files. For example.5 is compatible only with Agent 7. it is directly connected to the OpsCenter Server.5. task dialog boxes. and wizard task screens. modifies. use the Help option in most dialog boxes and wizard screens. The actions that you perform using the View Builder console are then stored in the OpsCenter database. Server 7. . About using the OpsCenter console The following sections describe how to access and use OpsCenter. you need to provide logon credentials as you do while logging onto the OpsCenter console. See “Logging on to the Symantec OpsCenter console” on page 64. You can also use the Help option on the title bar of OpsCenter views.

This issue is caused due to high security level in server systems. you open a connection to the OpsCenter Web interface. When you start the OpsCenter console to manage and monitor your NetBackup environment. If you use pop-up blockers with your Web browser.x and later) in your backup environment. open Internet Explorer and click Tools > Internet Options. you may see a blank page when you try to access OpsCenter using Internet Explorer 7. you select the computer that serves as the OpsCenter server. Windows. Volume I NetBackup Troubleshooting Guide for UNIX. Click the Security tab ■ ■ ■ . Ensure that the character encoding for the browser is Unicode (UTF 8) before you access the OpsCenter console. some of these menus may not display properly. About Web browser considerations Consider the following recommendations and requirements for the Web browser to be able to access the OpsCenter console. The following requirements and recommendations should be considered for the Web browser: ■ The OpsCenter console uses pop-up menus. You must disable pop-up blocking or add the OpsCenter Web address to the list of acceptable sites in your browser.Getting started using Symantec OpsCenter About starting the OpsCenter console 51 Portions of the online Help may refer the user to other NetBackup documentation for descriptions of NetBackup fields and components. The following NetBackup documents are referenced in the OpsCenter online Help: ■ ■ ■ ■ NetBackup Administration Console Help NetBackup Administrator’s Guide for Windows. On some server systems. and Linux About starting the OpsCenter console The OpsCenter Server is the focal point for centralized management of the NetBackup servers (version 6. Open the Mozilla Firefox browser and select View > Character Encoding > Unicode (UTF 8). The Web browser should have active scripting (ActiveX and JavaScript) enabled. When you install Symantec OpsCenter.0 and above versions.5. If you encounter this issue. Open the Internet Explorer browser and select View > Encoding > Unicode (UTF-8). Volume I NetBackup Administrator’s Guide for UNIX and Linux.

0. On some server-class systems. In case you want to continue using Firefox 8. when you export a report or job logs using Firefox 8. Click Custom Level. To resolve this issue. jobs. You can then open this report. Note: In case you do not want to change your security settings.x to access the OpsCenter console and generally occurs when you export a report or export job and audit logs.pdf) and click Save. security certificate warnings appear when you access a pop-up menu. This action must be taken every time you access OpsCenter and face this issue. click Save File.. This issue affects you if you use Firefox 8.0 or 9. browse to Miscellaneous > Allow META REFRESH and select Enable.0” on page 57. Because of the Firefox 8. ■ ■ ■ ■ .0 to access the OpsCenter console.. If you use Internet Explorer 9.do or some other file name and type which cannot be opened.x. A known issue in Firefox 8. the security certificate warnings do not appear on the pop-up menus. or audit trails data when you export it from OpsCenter. If you use Internet Explorer 8. when you export an OpsCenter report for instance.do and does not open if you try to open it. In the Enter name of file to save to dialog box. Symantec recommends that you upgrade to Firefox 9. open Internet Explorer and select Tools > Internet Options > Security to configure the Trusted-sites list and lower the security level. If you encounter this issue.x causes the downloaded attachments to be named as ExportReportAction. you may not be able to download or view reports. See “Exporting OpsCenter reports or data with IE 9. add the OpsCenter URL to the Trusted-sites list and lower the security setting. Select Continue to this website (not recommended) to open the pop-up menu. In the Security Settings dialog box. and then click OK. Once you select this option.x and are prompted to open or save the exported file. an enhanced security configuration can cause some pages to not display properly in Internet Explorer.0 to access the OpsCenter console.x issue. To resolve this issue. the report is saved by the name ExportReportAction.. Click Yes to confirm that you want to change the security settings for the zone. select the Save as type as All Files and then rename the file with the proper extension (like replace the default name ExportReportAction.52 Getting started using Symantec OpsCenter About starting the OpsCenter console and select 'Internet' icon as the zone. More details on how to resolve this issue are available. you must manually append /opscenter to the OpsCenter URL.do with filecount.

x. 9.Getting started using Symantec OpsCenter About starting the OpsCenter console 53 Note: If you do not see Enter name of file to save to dialog box. 3. Note: OpsCenter 7.6. See “Disabling security certificate warnings and HTTPS redirection in browsers” on page 55.x.5 Supported Versions 7. You may not be able to view reports.5 The OpsCenter user interface (the OpsCenter console) is supported with the following Web browsers.0. or audit data when you export these from IE 9. ■ Web browsers supported by OpsCenter 7.0.5 does not support Firefox 4. 9. See “Disabling the Untrusted Connection page in Mozilla Firefox” on page 54. jobs. See “Exporting OpsCenter reports or data with IE 9.0 and later versions may display a security certificate warning page when you access OpsCenter. review the following section thoroughly.0” on page 57.x. .5.x.0. Alternatively.0 may show "Internet Explorer Cannot Download" error when you export reports.0. or audit data from OpsCenter.0 Notes IE 7.5 does not support IE 6. Mozilla Firefox 3. 8. The Web browser cache must be cleared. IE 9.1 and above Note: OpsCenter 7. Table 1-1 lists the Web browsers that OpsCenter supports. About accessing the OpsCenter console Before accessing the OpsCenter console. Table 1-1 Web browser Microsoft Internet Explorer Web browsers supported by OpsCenter 7. Mozilla Firefox may display an Untrusted Connection page when you access OpsCenter. 3. click Firefox > Options > General and check Always ask me where to save files option.x. jobs.

domain:8181/opscenter. enter the following: http://host. Select OpsCenterUsers(vx) from the Domain drop-down list and click Log On. but we can't confirm that your connection is secure.domain>. the user name is admin and the password is password or any custom password that you chose during the installation. then use http://host. sites will present trusted identification to prove that you are going to the right place. You must supply logon credentials on the OpsCenter logon screen. However. To know the HTTP and HTTPS port that OpsCenter uses. Normally. you may see the following Untrusted Connection page. run the configurePorts utility. . start a Web browser. Run INSTALL_PATH\OpsCenter\gui\bin\goodies\configurePorts. if OpsCenter uses HTTP port 8181.54 Getting started using Symantec OpsCenter About starting the OpsCenter console See “About Web browser considerations” on page 51. In the Web browser address bar. -------------------------------------------------------------This Connection is Untrusted You have asked Firefox to connect securely to <OpsCenterhost.sh -status on UNIX hosts. Note: By default. OpsCenter tries to run on port 80 (HTTP). Disabling the Untrusted Connection page in Mozilla Firefox When you access OpsCenter in Mozilla Firefox.domain is the fully qualified domain name of the OpsCenter server and can also be an IP address. For example.bat -status on Windows hosts or <INSTALL_PATH>/SYMCOpsCenterWebGUI/bin/goodies/configurePorts.domain/opscenter host. when you try to connect securely. If port 80 is not available. this site's identity can't be verified. See “Logging on to the Symantec OpsCenter console” on page 64. OpsCenter can use a different port. On a system that has a network connection to the OpsCenter server. You can also use the URL that is presented at the end of the OpsCenter server installation to access OpsCenter. For an administrator initial logon.

you may see security certificate warnings on Mozilla Firefox and Internet Explorer browsers. make sure that the Permanently store this exception option is checked.Getting started using Symantec OpsCenter About starting the OpsCenter console 55 What Should I do? If you usually connect to this site without problems. Click Confirm Security Exception. which takes you to the Mozilla Firefox start page.domain>/opscenter. if you disable the automatic redirection to HTTPS. If you do not want to use HTTPS. you can disable the security certificate warnings for the OpsCenter console. Restart your browser for the changes to take effect. However. this error could mean that someone is trying to impersonate the site. you are automatically redirected to HTTPS (hypertext transfer protocol secure) which is a secure protocol and requires a certificate. expand I Understand the Risks section and click Add Exception. or to click Add Exception (when you expand the I Understand the Risks section) and permanently disable the page. To disable the Untrusted Connection page in Mozilla Firefox 1 2 3 4 5 On the Untrusted Connection page. In the Add Security Exception dialog box. Technical Details I Understand the Risks -------------------------------------------------------------- Your choice is either to click Get me out of here. . and you shouldn't continue. When you access OpsCenter using http://<host. Disabling security certificate warnings and HTTPS redirection in browsers When you log on to the OpsCenter console. you lose the encryption and secure identification of the server that HTTPS provides. This option is checked by default. To make this exception permanent. click Get Certificate.

xml <INSTALL_PATH>/SYMCOpsCenterGUI/webserver/conf/web.xml file.xml configuration file in a text editor from the following locations: For Windows: For UNIX: INSTALL_PATH\OpsCenter\gui\webserver\conf\web. 2 In the web.xml Note: Before you proceed. locate the security constraint string (located towards the end of the file): <security-constraint> <display-name>Security Constraint</display-name> <web-resource-collection> <web-resource-name>Protected Area</web-resource-name> <url-pattern>/*</url-pattern> </web-resource-collection> <user-data-constraint> transport-guarantee>CONFIDENTIAL</transport-guarantee> </user-data-constraint> . take a backup of the web.56 Getting started using Symantec OpsCenter About starting the OpsCenter console To disable security certificate warnings and HTTPS redirection in browsers 1 Open the web.xml file.

You can also add your comments inside.in the beginning and --> in the end.xml file by adding <!-. 5 Restart the OpsCenter Web interface service on UNIX. audit trails.Getting started using Symantec OpsCenter About starting the OpsCenter console 57 3 Comment this portion from the web. For example: <!-.0. Select Control Panel > Administrative Tools > Services and restart (stop and then start) the Symantec OpsCenter Web Server Service. This problem occurs if the Do not save encrypted pages to disk option in Internet Explorer is checked.Commenting to disable https <security-constraint> <display-name>Security Constraint</display-name> <web-resource-collection> <web-resource-name>Protected Area</web-resource-name> <url-pattern>/*</url-pattern> </web-resource-collection> <user-data-constraint> <transport-guarantee>CONFIDENTIAL</transport-guarantee> </user-data-constraint> Comments End --> 4 Stop the OpsCenter Web interface service on Windows. you may not be able to download or view reports. or jobs data when you export them from OpsCenter on HTTPS. Enter the following command: Stop service Start service <INSTALL_PATH>/SYMCOpsCenterGUI/bin/stopGUI <INSTALL_PATH>/SYMCOpsCenterGUI/bin/startGUI Exporting OpsCenter reports or data with IE 9.0 When you are using IE 9. This issue is explained in detail on the following Web site: .

58 Getting started using Symantec OpsCenter About starting the OpsCenter console http://support. In IE9. Use any one of the following procedures to resolve this issue. Go to Tools > Internet Options > Advanced.microsoft. the download fails. For a per-user setting. locate the following registry key: HKEY_CURRENT_USER\SOFTWARE\Microsoft\Windows\CurrentVersion\Internet Settings For a per-computer setting. then a cache file is not created.com/kb/2549423 File downloads in Internet Explorer require a cache or temporary file to succeed. . locate the following registry key: HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SOFTWARE\Microsoft\Windows\CurrentVersion\Internet Settings 3 On the Edit menu. To bypass the cache check in IE 9 1 2 Start the Registry Editor. if the file is delivered over HTTPS with any response headers set to prevent caching and the Do not save encrypted pages to disk option is set. Therefore. click Add Value and add the following value: "BypassSSLNoCacheCheck"=Dword:00000001 4 Quit Registry Editor. To uncheck encrupted pages to disk 1 2 Open Internet Explorer. Uncheck Do not save encrypted pages to disk option. Possible OpsCenter console access issues Table 1-2 describes possible OpsCenter console access issues and their solution.

monitor 2 Verify that a Web browser on the OpsCenter server can connect to the OpsCenter console by using the following address: http://localhost:<HTTP port number>/opscenter Note: To know the HTTP and HTTPS port that OpsCenter uses. causes. run the configurePorts utility. . You can check the status of all OpsCenter processes on UNIX This issue happens when the OpsCenter Web by entering the following command: interface (the OpsCenter console) is not <INSTALL_PATH>/SYMCOpsCenterServer/bin/opsadmin."message.bat -status on Windows hosts or <INSTALL_PATH>/SYMCOpsCenterWebGUI/bin/goodies/configurePorts. refused.sh running or is inaccessible on the network. Your To connect to the Web interface Web browser displays a "page cannot be 1 Verify that the Symantec OpsCenter Web server Service is displayed" or "connection was running.Getting started using Symantec OpsCenter About starting the OpsCenter console 59 Table 1-2 Issue and Cause OpsCenter console access issues.sh -status on UNIX hosts. Run INSTALL_PATH\OpsCenter\gui\bin\goodies\configurePorts. and solution Solution You cannot connect to the Web interface.

This issue happens when the OpsCenter console application is not loaded.60 Getting started using Symantec OpsCenter About starting the OpsCenter console Table 1-2 Issue and Cause OpsCenter console access issues.war file in the following directory to verify that the OpsCenter application is installed: <INSTALL_PATH>/SYMCOpsCenterGUI 2 To verify that all OpsCenter Server processes are running. causes. but the OpsCenter console is not available.bat start To resolve an HTTP STATUS 404 error on UNIX: 1 Locate the opscenter.war file in the following directory to verify that the OpsCenter application is installed: INSTALL_PATH\OpsCenter\gui\webserver\webapps The OpsCenter Web interface is running. and solution (continued) Solution To resolve an HTTP STATUS 404 error on Windows 1 Locate the opscenter. Start all the OpsCenter Server services by using the following command: INSTALL_PATH\OpsCenter\server\bin\opsadmin. Your Web browser displays an HTTP STATUS 404 error.sh start . 2 3 Verify that all the OpsCenter server services are running. use the following command: <INSTALL_PATH>/SYMCOpsCenterServer/bin/opsadmin monitor 3 Start all the OpsCenter Server processes by using the following commands: <INSTALL_PATH>/SYMCOpsCenterServer/bin/opsadmin.

browse to Miscellaneous > Allow META REFRESH and select Enable. causes. click the Internet. Without the changes to the security settings. . and solution (continued) Solution You see a blank page when you try to access To resolve blank page issues when using Internet Explorer 7. click Internet Options.Getting started using Symantec OpsCenter About starting the OpsCenter console 61 Table 1-2 Issue and Cause OpsCenter console access issues. icon and then click Custom Level. Note: If you do not want to change your security settings. 2 3 4 5 Click the Security tab. the issue recurs every time that you accessOpsCenter. you must manually append /opscenter to the OpsCenter URL. Under Select a Web content zone to specify its security settings. Click Yes to confirm that you want to change the security settings for the zone. and then click OK.0 OpsCenter using Internet Explorer 7. 1 Open Internet Explorer .0 and later and later versions. In the Security Settings dialog box. On the Tools menu. and you must add /opscenter to the URL.

and solution (continued) Solution Windows cannot find https://<MACHINE_NAME>:<PORT_NUMBER>/opscenter. click the Start button and then click Search. and then try again. To search for a file. . Make sure you typed the name correctly. causes.62 Getting started using Symantec OpsCenter About starting the OpsCenter console Table 1-2 Issue and Cause You get the following error when you access OpsCenter by clicking Start > Programs > Symantec OpsCenter > WebUI Login on Windows: OpsCenter console access issues.

the Use DDE box is still checked but the DDE Message box will be cleared). Click OK for that dialog and the next one (afterwards. Select Extension: (NONE) and File Type: URL:HyperText Transfer Protocol Click Advanced. Repeat for Extension: (NONE) File Type: Firefox URL. In the Edit File Type window. is not available in Windows Vista. You need to edit the registry to remove the ddeexec key. You need to manually edit the registry in Windows Vista or in cases where the File Types listing is missing certain entries such as URL:HyperText Transfer Protocol (HTTP) and URL:HyperText Transfer Protocol with Privacy (HTTPS). . select Open and click Edit. Use the following resolution on Windows Vista or in cases where the File Types listing is missing certain entries such as URL:HyperText Transfer Protocol (HTTP) and URL:HyperText Transfer Protocol with Privacy (HTTPS): 1 2 3 Go to Start > Run. Repeat for Extension: HTM (or HTML) File Type: Firefox Document. as described above. then type regedit and click OK. causes. and solution (continued) Solution To fix the WebUI Login error for Windows XP and Windows 2000 1 2 3 4 5 6 Open Windows Explorer (or My Computer). Repeat for Extension: (NONE) File Type: URL:HyperText Transfer Protocol with Privacy (and any other protocols you want to fix). Use the directory tree hierarchy to navigate to HKEY_CLASSES_ROOT\HTTP\shell\open\ddeexec. Do not attempt these steps if you are inexperienced or uncomfortable using the Registry Editor. Go to Tools > Folder Options > File Types. Uncheck Use DDE (the dialog should then hide the lower part).Getting started using Symantec OpsCenter About starting the OpsCenter console 63 Table 1-2 Issue and Cause OpsCenter console access issues. Note: Editing the registry incorrectly can damage your system. 7 8 9 Note that the File Types user interface that allows you to uncheck the Use DDE option. Delete the ddeexec registry key.

and solution (continued) Solution 4 Repeat for HKEY_CLASSES_ROOT\HTTPS\shell\open\ddeexec (and any other protocols you want to fix). Repeat for HKEY_CLASSES_ROOT\FirefoxURL\shell\open\ddeexec. . Repeat for HKEY_CLASSES_ROOT\FirefoxHTML\shell\open\ddeexec.64 Getting started using Symantec OpsCenter About starting the OpsCenter console Table 1-2 Issue and Cause OpsCenter console access issues. causes. 5 6 Logging on to the Symantec OpsCenter console You must supply logon credentials on the OpsCenter logon screen.

Possible OpsCenter console logon issues Table 1-3 describes the issues you may find when you log on to the console and their solution. domains that are migrated if you upgraded to OpsCenter from NOM or VBR. a monitoring overview of the NetBackup master servers appears. Initially. and select a domain from the Domain drop-down list. To change existing passwords. OpsCenter saves your settings and preferences and uses these settings when you restart the console again. change the user name and password. If you do not set a default. Note: The first time you log on. OpsCenter uses the Web browser language (or English). and domains of the users that are added to the OpsCenter console.Getting started using Symantec OpsCenter About starting the OpsCenter console 65 To log on to the Symantec OpsCenter console 1 Enter a user name and password. OpsCenter uses the default language of the Web browser. The domains that appear in the Domain drop-down list include the OpsCenterUsers(vx) domain. When you log off from the console. the user name is admin and the password is password or any custom password that you chose during the installation. See “Changing your OpsCenter password” on page 272. After initial logon. 2 Click Log On. you can specify a default language or locale from Settings > User Preferences > General. See “Setting user preferences” on page 268. For administrator initial logon. use Settings > User Preferences > My Profile view in the OpsCenter console. . it uses English. Select OpsCenterUsers(vx) from the Domain drop-down list. If OpsCenter does not support this language. After the initial log on.

Solution Enter a valid user name. password." The entered user name is not a registered OpsCenter user. You have a user authentication error." Log on as the OpsCenter admin user and add the user to the list of OpsCenter users. Please enter valid user name and password. and domain. Ensure that the Symantec Product Authentication Service is started and running properly. If problem persists contact your system administrator. The logon screen displays the message "User authentication failed. You can start the authentication service by running net start vrtsat' on Windows and <INSTALL_PATH>/VRTSat/bin/vxatd on UNIX. Please contact the OpsCenter Administrator for adding this user.66 Getting started using Symantec OpsCenter About starting the OpsCenter console Table 1-3 Issue OpsCenter console logon issues Cause The Symantec Product Authentication Service cannot validate the user name and password for the selected domain. The user name and domain are valid. The logon screen displays the message "This user is not authorized to use OpsCenter. . but the user was not added to the list of users for OpsCenter.

First stop all Symantec OpsCenter server services. Use the following procedure to restart all OpsCenter services. Verify that the hosts file has the correct IP address to host name mapping.sh stop ■ Start all Symantec OpsCenter server services. If PBX server gets restarted while OpsCenter services were running. Authentication Verify that the Symantec Product Authentication service is Service is running. Check your network configuration. by using the following command for Windows and UNIX: INSTALL_PATH\OpsCenter\server\bin\opsadmin. Please ensure that the server is running. The hosts file is located in C:\WINDOWS\system32\drivers\etc directory on Windows. use the following command for Windows and UNIX: INSTALL_PATH\OpsCenter\server\bin\opsadmin. The logon screen displays the message "Error occurred while connecting to the OpsCenter Server. See 'Controlling OpsCenter services and processes' section in the Administration chapter of the Symantec OpsCenter Administrator's Guide. Authentication service is down "Error occurred while connecting to the Symantec Product Authentication Service (AT)." . " Username Enter a valid user name and password.Getting started using Symantec OpsCenter About starting the OpsCenter console 67 Table 1-3 Issue OpsCenter console logon issues (continued) Cause This issue may occur due to any of the following reasons: The OpsCenter server is not running. you must restart all OpsCenter services. and/or password has not been specified.bat start <INSTALL_PATH>/SYMCOpsCenterServer/bin/opsadmin.bat stop <INSTALL_PATH>/SYMCOpsCenterServer/bin/opsadmin. You can start the authentication down service by running net start vrtsat on Windows or <INSTALL_PATH>/VRTSat/bin/vxatd on UNIX. ■ If PBX server goes down or restarts when OpsCenter services were running." Either the user name or password or both have not been entered. Please ensure that the AT service is running.sh start ■ You cannot connect to the OpsCenter server. ■ Solution Start the Symantec OpsCenter Server Service and verify that it is running properly. The logon screen displays the message "Please enter valid user name and password.

OpsCenter saves most of the settings and changes you make in an OpsCenter session. Configuring the OpsCenter session timeout interval When the timeout interval is left at its default value. the session timeout interval can be reconfigured.xml 2 In the web. To configure the session timeout interval 1 Open the web. change 30 to the desired value).xml configuration file in a text editor from the following locations: For Windows: For UNIX: INSTALL_PATH\OpsCenter\gui\webserver\conf\web. To log out from Symantec OpsCenter ◆ Click Logout located on the right side of the title bar. users are automatically logged out of the OpsCenter console when a session is left inactive for 30 minutes. However.68 Getting started using Symantec OpsCenter About starting the OpsCenter console Logging out of the OpsCenter console When you log out from the console.xml <INSTALL_PATH>/SYMCOpsCenterGUI/webserver/conf/web. . locate the session-timeout parameter: <session-config> <session-timeout>30</session-timeout> </session-config> 3 Change the session timeout parameter value to the desired length by changing the number that is encapsulated by the XML tags for session-timeout (in the example above. This value is set in minutes.xml file.

You must enable it to use application. An internal error occurs in the This error results from an internal OpsCenter console. browser.sh start Possible OpsCenter console issues Table 1-4 describes the issues you may find when you use the console. The logon screen appears when you try to change views or refresh the current view. Enable active scripting in OpsCenter. the OpsCenter user automatically logs out of the console. Any attempt to use OpsCenter.sh stop 5 Restart the OpsCenter services. you then return to the OpsCenter view that you last visited. the browser. After successful logon.bat start <INSTALL_PATH>/SYMCOpsCenterServer/bin/opsadmin. Issues when you use OpsCenter console Cause After 30 minutes of inactivity. You receive the message "Active Active scripting is disabled in the Web Enable active scripting in the Web scripting is required to use this browser. Table 1-4 Issue Your OpsCenter console session times out.bat stop <INSTALL_PATH>/SYMCOpsCenterServer/bin/opsadmin. " Click the link in the message and try to logon again. Enter the following command: Windows UNIX INSTALL_PATH\OpsCenter\server\bin\opsadmin. See “Configuring the OpsCenter session timeout interval” on page 68." . console. You can also configure the session timeout interval. You receive the message "An unknown error has occurred. Enter the following command: Windows UNIX INSTALL_PATH\OpsCenter\server\bin\opsadmin. displays the OpsCenter logon screen. An exception error issue in the OpsCenter console message appears in the OpsCenter application.Getting started using Symantec OpsCenter About starting the OpsCenter console 69 4 Stop the OpsCenter services. Click here to log on and retry. Solution Log on again.

the Monitor > Overview view appears. The following is an example view that shows the OpsCenter console components. When you log on initially. the console. Figure 1-2 OpsCenter console components Tabs and subtabs Content pane List View Title bar Change Table links Settings icon View Pane Symantec ThreatCon pane Minimize icons Task Pane (whole left pane) Quick links Alert Summary Pane Maximize icon Details pane Minimize icon Table page controls Table 1-5 lists the topics that describe the main elements of the console in greater detail. such as See “About using the links on the title bar” on page 71. Table 1-5 Topic Description Topics covered in this section Link Use the links available from the title bar. Overview about the tabs and subtabs available in See “About using tabs and subtabs” on page 72.70 Getting started using Symantec OpsCenter About OpsCenter console components About OpsCenter console components This section provides information on the panes and navigation features available in the OpsCenter console. You can view the console by using a Web browser. Logout and Help. .

click the Customize Tabs drop-down list. Overview about the View pane. Use the pane that displays a quick visual summary See “Viewing alerts from the Alert Summary pane” on page 79. console. To display the remaining tabs in a drop-down list. To display the remaining subtabs in a drop-down list. See “About using tables” on page 83. select rows. Medium Large Use the links available in the title bar at the top of the console for the following tasks: . Use the status bar at the bottom of the OpsCenter See “About the OpsCenter status bar” on page 82. The tabs have icons placed above them. See “Using the quick links in the Task pane” on page 78. and use filters. See “Status icons and colors in the console” on page 82.Getting started using Symantec OpsCenter About OpsCenter console components 71 Table 1-5 Topic Description Topics covered in this section (continued) Link Control the frequency that the OpsCenter console See “About refreshing the OpsCenter console” on page 73. refreshes to reflect changes in your backup environment. the Logged in as value shows the user name that is logged on to the OpsCenter server. Use tables. See “Sizing the Content pane” on page 79. click the arrow next to the selected subtab. To adjust the screen space that is used by the tabs and subtabs. Overview about quick links in the task panes. See “About the View pane” on page 73. of any current alerts. Overview about the Task pane. The tabs do not have any icons above them. click the arrow next to the selected tab. About using the links on the title bar On the title bar of the OpsCenter console. The tabs and subtabs appear in two separate rows. Use the visual keys that OpsCenter uses to help you understand displayed information. You can select the following options: Small Only the selected tab and subtab are shown in a single row. The tabs and subtabs appear in two separate rows. Use the main data display pane that OpsCenter uses. See “Changing the Task pane” on page 73.

wizards. devices. add OpsCenter users. From this tab. product information. How To links. and dialog boxes is available. add master servers or appliance master servers. Table 1-6 Tab Monitor Tabs and subtabs in the OpsCenter console Description From this tab. See “About OpsCenter documentation ” on page 91. Under each main tab is a series of subtabs. Settings From this tab. NetBackup job policies. click Logout.72 Getting started using Symantec OpsCenter About OpsCenter console components ■ To access documentation. set up email and SNMP recipients. you can view standard OpsCenter reports. . You can also display and respond to any OpsCenter alerts. and Policies. Jobs. From this tab. and so on. To disconnect from the OpsCenter server to end your session. services. To access Symantec OpsCenter help. ■ ■ ■ About using tabs and subtabs Table 1-6 describes the main tabs that provide access to the major areas of the OpsCenter console. the Monitor tab includes subtabs such as Overview. storage units. Services. click About. The contents of these subtabs vary depending on the current view and represent the views accessible from each main tab. and hosts. view chargeback settings. add and configure views. You can also restore data. More information about online Help is available. policies. Context-sensitive help for all views. you can customize the OpsCenter server. See “Logging out of the OpsCenter console” on page 68. you can manage alert policies. and other information click Tools. and devices. To see OpsCenter product version and copyright information. and schedule reports. media. define user preferences. support links. click Help. create and run custom reports. For example. Manage Reports Note: You can use custom report functionality only with a licensed OpsCenter version (OpsCenter Analytics). you can monitor the status of NetBackup or NetBackup Appliance jobs.

About refreshing the OpsCenter console As you use Symantec OpsCenter. a Task pane is available. click the Collapse Task Panel icon again. and Quick Links at the bottom. More information about the View pane is available. To change the Task pane 1 2 3 To enlarge the Task pane. the Symantec ThreatCon pane. OpsCenter generates alerts. You can change the refresh setting from Settings > User Preferences > General view in the OpsCenter console. Changing the Task pane In many views in the console. . To show all panes after you enlarged the Task pane. click the Collapse Task Panel icon between the Task pane and the Content pane. media usage fluctuates. and so on. the status of your backup environment is likely to change. From OpsCenter 7. To resize the Task pane. the View pane lists only the views that you are permitted to access. About the View pane The View pane is a key navigation and configuration tool in Symantec OpsCenter.Getting started using Symantec OpsCenter About OpsCenter console components 73 Your selection on the View pane determines what data is shown in OpsCenter views. See “About the View pane” on page 73. See “Setting user preferences” on page 268. Devices go online and offline. The minimize or maximize settings are applicable only for the current session. The Task pane is located on the left side of the console and contains the View pane.5. drag the line separating the Task pane and the Content pane. You cannot resize the Task pane from the Monitor > Overview page. This pane lets you select the views to control the scope of your console views. You can control when the information in the console refreshes to reflect the changes in your backup environment.

It uses unique icons and colors to convey operational states. For example. See “About making multiple or single-click selections in the View pane” on page 75. The View pane has the following features: ■ ■ It is available in any OpsCenter view where you can change the view. a specific view type. A Security Administrator or an Administrator can create views from Settings > Views or by using the Java View Builder. More information about how to create views from Settings > Views is available. Similarly. For example. you can view NetBackup information for your entire management domain (with the ALL MASTER SERVERS view). See “Status icons and colors in the console” on page 82. ■ Figure 1-3 shows a sample View pane in which ALL MASTER SERVERS view is selected.74 Getting started using Symantec OpsCenter About OpsCenter console components Using OpsCenter views. It lets you access and change the views that you monitor or manage. an individual server. . See “About OpsCenter views” on page 379. such as Europe. The View pane is one method that you can use to determine the scope of information that you view. See “About selecting views from the View pane when the multiple selection option is checked” on page 77. an icon with a red-dashed-circle represents a managed server that is Not Connected. or NetBackup appliances. a disabled master server is shown as a gray-colored icon. an admin can create a view named Geography to display details about master servers in a particular region. your view selection applies for any subsequent screens until you select a different view. As you navigate within the OpsCenter console. An admin can also create client or policy views. See the online Java View Builder Help for more information about creating views using Java View Builder.

To see the Allow Multiple Selection In View pane option. you can select multiple nodes or view objects from the View pane. The Allow Multiple Selection In View Pane option governs how you can make selections in the View pane. To view data for multiple master servers and nodes. . The multiple-selection option is checked by default.Getting started using Symantec OpsCenter About OpsCenter console components 75 Figure 1-3 View pane description About making multiple or single-click selections in the View pane You can make either multiple selections or single-click selections in the View pane. check the corresponding check boxes and click Apply Selection. click Settings > User Preferences > General in the OpsCenter console. You also see a check box next to each master server or node in the View pane. based on whether you check or uncheck the multiple selection option: Check Allow Multiple Selection In View Pane option With the multiple-selection option checked. You can make selections in the View pane in the following ways.

Note: When you uncheck the multiple-selection option. The Allow Multiple Selection in View Pane option is checked by default. you can click a master server in the View pane to view data for the specific master server. (The NetBackup Operations Manager (NOM) used this method. .) Each node or a view object is a link. Figure 1-4 shows how you can check the Allow Multiple Selection In View Pane option and make multiple selections. For example. a Group Component Summary table is displayed when you click Monitor > Jobs > Summary View.76 Getting started using Symantec OpsCenter About OpsCenter console components Uncheck Allow Multiple Selection In View Pane option With the multiple-selection option unchecked. You can click a node or a view object to view data for the respective node or view object. See “About the Group Component Summary table” on page 422. Figure 1-4 Making multiple selections in the View pane You can select multiple master servers by selecting the check-box Figure 1-5 shows how you can uncheck the Allow Multiple Selection in View Pane option and make single-click selections. you can only select a single node or view object from the View pane.

To select a specific master server. Suppose that you select the ALL MASTER SERVERS view and then specifically deselect server B.Getting started using Symantec OpsCenter About OpsCenter console components 77 Figure 1-5 Making single-click selections in the View pane You can select only one master server. In this case. Then. For example. For example. You may also deselect a specific master server from a view by selecting the view and then deselecting the specific master server. and that master server is also part of another selected view. When you select a view such asALL MASTER SERVERS or a node that contains a group of master servers. first deselect the view or node that contains the master server and then select the master server. you can select a view and a node that contains a group of master servers and also specific objects. it is recommended that you do not repeat a master server across groups. Each master server is a link About selecting views from the View pane when the multiple selection option is checked From the View pane. It is not considered because you specifically excluded server B from the ALL MASTER SERVER view. When you specifically deselect a master server from a view. . You also have the option to select only specific objects of a particular view or node. Consider a scenario in which server A and server B exist in a particular view. the exclusion (the deselection) has a higher priority. all the master servers that are currently in the view or node are automatically selected. ALL MASTER SERVERS. you select a node that also contains server B. such as ALL MASTER SERVERS. even though server B is part of the selected view or node. you can select the default view. For this reason. The master servers that you may add later to this view or node are also automatically selected. it is not considered. you may select only specific master servers under the default view ALL MASTER SERVERS.

This level is the same as the ThreatCon level which is shown on the following Web site: http://www. Using the quick links in the Task pane In many views in the console. Table 1-7 Quick Link Quick links and their destinations Destination Restore Files and Directories Manage > Restore or Oracle Cloning Alert Policies Manage > Alert Policies . a Task pane is available. OpsCenter periodically polls the ThreatCon Web service and updates the data that is shown in the Symantec ThreatCon pane. Figure 1-6 shows the Symantec ThreatCon pane in the OpsCenter console. See “Configuring Symantec ThreatCon feature in OpsCenter” on page 276.symantec. Table 1-7 shows the quick links available in OpsCenter and where they take you when you click them. The Symantec ThreatCon feature is enabled by default. At the bottom of the Task pane. Figure 1-6 Symantec ThreatCon pane in the OpsCenter console Click the More Info link in the Symantec ThreatCon pane to see details about the ThreatCon level. You can configure the polling interval. there are quick links to the most common tasks in OpsCenter.78 Getting started using Symantec OpsCenter About OpsCenter console components About the Symantec ThreatCon pane The Symantec ThreatCon pane shows the current ThreatCon level in the OpsCenter console. but you can disable it (or turn it on).com/security_response/threatcon The Symantec ThreatCon pane is available under most views in the OpsCenter console on the left side.

A filtered detail view for that alert category appears. . This pane is available in the Monitor view and Manage view of the OpsCenter console. Click the maximize icon (the up arrow) again to view the quick links. This view is a shortcut to the Monitor > Alerts view. The minimize or maximize settings are applicable only for the current session. The Alert Summary pane displays all the alerts in the OpsCenter database. Only the icons for quick link tasks are visible when the quick links are minimized. the content pane displays a summary of information for all master servers in the OpsCenter console. and informational alerts for the NetBackup master servers to which you are connected. major. To view alerts from the Alert Summary pane ◆ Click any of the four available alert counts. 2 Viewing alerts from the Alert Summary pane The Alert Summary pane provides a visual summary of the critical. warning.Getting started using Symantec OpsCenter About OpsCenter console components 79 Table 1-7 Quick Link Quick links and their destinations (continued) Destination Settings > Configuration > NetBackup Settings > Views Settings > Users > Users Monitor > Cloud Monitor > Appliance Hardware NetBackup Data Collection Views Users Cloud Appliance Hardware To use the quick links in the Task pane 1 Click the minimize icon (the down arrow) located on top of the quick links. Note: The quick links are shown by default in a maximized state. Sizing the Content pane When you initially log on to Symantec OpsCenter.

the drop-down list is displayed. The List View and Hierarchical View present information in tabular formats. To size the Content pane 1 2 3 To enlarge the Content pane. Note: Not all viewing modes are available for all Monitor views and Manage views. click the Collapse Task Panel icon between the Task pane and the Content pane. you can show any of the following views on the Monitor > Jobs page: . If the viewing modes are available. Summary View. and the time frame.80 Getting started using Symantec OpsCenter About OpsCenter console components Initially. Information in the content pane varies and is context-sensitive to current selections in the View pane. The minimize or maximize settings are applicable only for the current session. Summary. To show all panes after you enlarged the Content pane. Note: You cannot resize the Content pane from Monitor > Overview page. and Details views Most of the OpsCenter Monitor views and Manage views present information in three main viewing modes: List View. You can view information about your NetBackup environment in any of the available views. List View Drop-down list The Summary View presents information in a graphical format as pie charts. click the Collapse Task Panel icon again. a monitoring overview appears (Monitor > Overview). Use the drop-down list on the top-right corner of the OpsCenter console to switch these views. the tabs and subtabs. and Hierarchical View. For example. Hierarchical. To resize the Content pane. drag the line separating the Task pane and the Content pane. Using the List.

Maximize icon Minimize icon Tabs on the Details View Details View Contents of all the columns for the specific job ID is displayed in the Details View. To view details about all NetBackup jobs and relationships between jobs for a master server in a tabular format. Information in the Details view can be viewed from tabs available in the view. The Details view presents detailed information about an entity and shows contents of all the tabular columns for the specific entity. clickList View To view a summary of all NetBackup jobs for a master server in the form of pie charts. ■ ■ A Details view is available on some of the Monitor views. . For example. The view presents details on the displayed information and on the available information for the specific entity. the Details view on the Monitor > Jobs page (List View) shows detailed information about a specific job ID. click Hierarchical View. and Settings views. The following figure shows the Details view. click Summary View. Manage views.Getting started using Symantec OpsCenter About OpsCenter console components 81 ■ To view details about all NetBackup jobs for a master server in a tabular format.

Unique icons appear in the drive details view for shared drives available with the NetBackup Shared Storage Option (SSO). or drive path. the Monitor > Jobs view contains green icons for running jobs. . To maximize the Details view. Table 1-8 lists the icons that are used for managed NetBackup master servers in the View pane. About the OpsCenter status bar The status bar at the bottom of the OpsCenter console shows a Page generated value. drag the line separating the upper part of the Content pane and Details view. 3 To resize the Details view. OpsCenter uses status icons and color. the icons and colors let you quickly determine the status of a particular area in your NetBackup environment. you see a status icon. job. Status icons and colors in the console To help you understand the information it presents. Together. warning. For example. More information on how to specify your time zone is available. The icons use colors to represent critical. The date and time are adjusted to match your time zone.82 Getting started using Symantec OpsCenter About OpsCenter console components To change the Details view 1 2 To minimize the Details view. or informational conditions. The Page generated value shows the date and time on the OpsCenter server to which you logged on. Tool tips provide brief descriptions of the tool and the status icons that appear in OpsCenter views. Icons also appear for shared drives where the drive status is mixed (operating on some servers and not operating on other servers that share the drive). This value updates when the view changes or refreshes. click the icon (the up arrow) between the Details view and the upper part of the Content pane. These icons represent the shared drives that are operating on all servers that share the drive. See “Setting user preferences” on page 268. drive. The minimize or maximize settings are applicable only for the current session. A tool tip appears when you place the mouse over an icon. click the icon (the down arrow) between the Details view and the upper part of the Content pane. When OpsCenter detects a condition for a managed NetBackup server.

A managed server icon with a line through it denotes that the server is partially connected. OpsCenter tries to connect again after 10 minutes.Getting started using Symantec OpsCenter About OpsCenter console components 83 Table 1-8 Icon Icons used for managed master servers Description A normal. result. For a partially connected master server. A server icon that has a red circle with a line drawn through it means that the connection to the managed server is lost. A normal dark blue server icon means that the NetBackup appliance is connected. while gray indicates conditions such as disabled or unassigned. A gray server icon means that data collection for the managed server was disabled by the user. Figure 1-7 shows the task options for tables. . or operation. The following is a sample table showing task icons. This section describes how to change the tables to display the information you want to see. ■ ■ About using tables OpsCenter collects information about aspects of your NetBackup environment and presents much of this information in tables. OpsCenter uses the following colors in the interface: ■ Red indicates a critical condition that may cause the system to be unable to perform an important function. OpsCenter tries to reconnect to NBSL every 10 minutes in order to collect data for the data types that have a Failed collection status. Blue-gray generally indicate conditions such as enabled or assigned. blue-gray server icon means that the managed server is connected. Green indicates a normal condition. Investigate critical conditions immediately.

Configure pagination Select rows in tables . individual requirements Choose the number of rows and columns to See “Choosing the number of table rows that display appear per page” on page 85. See “Selecting rows in tables” on page 86. See “Changing the width of a column” on page 86. and Delete filter icons Sample screen with task options for tables Table Settings icon Table page controls Customizing tables for your needs You can customize the tables in the following manner. Sort columns in ascending or descending order Change the widths of columns See “Sorting the contents of a table column” on page 86. See “Accessing multiple pages of data in a table” on page 86. Rearrange the order of the columns for your See “Moving a column” on page 85. You can perform the following operations to a table: Add or remove columns See “Specifying which columns appear in a table” on page 85.84 Getting started using Symantec OpsCenter About OpsCenter console components Figure 1-7 Create. Edit.

To choose the number of table rows that appear per page 1 2 3 Click the Change Table Settings icon at the top of the table. select the column in Selected Columns and click Remove. Click Move Down to move the column to the right in the table. To view any of these columns. OpsCenter saves and reloads your customized settings when you log on to the OpsCenter server again. Choosing the number of table rows that appear per page Use the following procedure to choose the number of table rows that appear per page. Select a number from the Rows Per Page drop-down list . To move a column 1 2 3 Click the Change Table Settings icon at the top of the table. Added columns appear as the last column in the table. Initially. Each user can have different customized table settings. For these operations. Moving a column Use the following procedure to move columns in a table. To add any columns that currently do not appear.Getting started using Symantec OpsCenter About OpsCenter console components 85 The table refreshes after the operation and shows the changes you made. Specifying which columns appear in a table Use the following procedure to specify which columns appear in a table. Select the name of the column in Selected Columns. To specify which columns appear in a table 1 2 Click the Change Table Settings icon at the top-right corner of the table. . The setting applies to reports also. you may first have to remove one or more columns from the table and then add the missing columns. Click Move Up to move the column to the left in the table. select the column in the Available Columns list and click Add. To remove columns you do not want to appear. Select Apply To All Tables if you want the Rows Per Page setting to apply to all tables in OpsCenter. some OpsCenter tables do not show all available columns.

click the column name again. To sort in descending order. Accessing multiple pages of data in a table Much of the monitoring information appears in a table format. When you have more data to display than can fit in a table. click the column name. the table contains multiple pages.86 Getting started using Symantec OpsCenter About OpsCenter console components Sorting the contents of a table column Use the following procedure to sort the contents of a column or multiple columns. use the Change Table Settings icon. . Changing the width of a column Use the following procedure to change the width of a column. use the table page controls. The column sorts in ascending order by default. To access a specific page in a table ◆ Click the page number. To change the width of a column 1 2 Select the edge of the column heading and hold down the left mouse option. Click the check box again to deselect the selected row. Use the table page controls that are located below the table to help you navigate the pages. Drag the edge of the column heading to the right or left. you must select a row or rows to enable the tasks. To select a row in a table ◆ Click the check box for that row. OpsCenter tables display 10 rows at one time by default. To sort the contents of a column or multiple columns ◆ In a table. To change the number of rows that are displayed. To display the next 10 rows or to return to a previous set of rows in large tables. To access the first or the last page in a table ◆ Click the double left arrow or the double right arrow. Selecting rows in tables For many tables in OpsCenter. To access the previous or the next page in a table ◆ Click the left arrow or the right arrow.

For Column. edit it. 5 To continue building the filter. For Value. or remove it. click Add to add another clause to the query. For Link. Once you create a filter. Use != if you do not want to match a specific value. a calendar icon appears for Value. 6 Click OK when you finish building the filter. select an operator. filtering icons appear above the table. The following procedures describe how you can create. and removing custom view filters Many tables in OpsCenter let you display a subset of the information available by creating and using custom filters. select And or Or to build the filter query. select another column. The view remains in effect until you change it by selecting another filter. Creating. OpsCenter filters the table according to the criteria you specify. Repeat 3 and 4. click Remove to remove the clause from the query. or by using the predefined (ready-to-use) filters. select a custom filter or a OpsCenter built-in filter. applying. apply. To create a custom filter 1 2 3 Select the Create Filter icon. For Operator. Click the check box again to deselect all selected rows. If the clause is not what you want. . select the column name that you want to filter on from the drop-down list. 4 From the drop-down list. If you select Start Time or End Time for Column. In the views that allow filtering. Your new filter is available in the filter drop-down list. or remove a filter. enter or select a value. editing. A filter screens information that is based on a set of conditions that you define. Click the calendar icon to choose a date and time and then click OK. To apply a filter ◆ From the drop-down list. edit. you can save it. Type a name for the filter in the Name field.Getting started using Symantec OpsCenter About OpsCenter console components 87 To select all rows on the current page of the table ◆ Click the check box in the header row of the table.

delete user groups See “Setting user preferences” on page 268. See “To create a custom filter” on page 87. update. Add. 2 3 Click the Delete filter icon. To remove a custom filter 1 From the drop-down list. Table 1-9 OpsCenter functions Quick links to the OpsCenter documentation Tasks Go to this topic User Create. Click OK to remove the filter. delete users See “About managing Symantec OpsCenter Management users ” on page 286. You can only modify custom filters. Create. 4 Make your changes and click OK. remove users from user groups Assign. select a custom filter. Note: You cannot delete the predefined filters. 2 3 Click the Edit filter icon. This lists the instructions for using the dialog to edit a filter. remove roles to users and user groups . Common tasks in OpsCenter Table 1-9 lists common tasks and corresponding links to the documentation. select a custom filter. update. Note: You cannot modify the predefined OpsCenter filters.88 Getting started using Symantec OpsCenter Common tasks in OpsCenter To edit a custom filter 1 From the drop-down list.

or delete Management master servers Add. Search and restore files. SMTP server NetBackup Operations Change states of the NetBackup entities as follows: Policy (Activate or deactivate) Job (Stop. suspend. Backup and Recovery Execute manual backups See “Starting a manual backup” on page 437. or resume) Media (Assign. (Oracle) See “Performing a Guided Recovery cloning operation” on page 563. See “Deleting a master server or an appliance master server in OpsCenter” on page 357. See “About managing cost analysis and chargeback for OpsCenter Analytics” on page 303. freeze. See “Controlling NetBackup jobs” on page 416. SNMP. or application OpsCenter” on page 527. update. OpsCenter Add. See “Editing a master server or an appliance master server in OpsCenter” on page 356. unfreeze) Drives (Up or down) See “Activating or deactivating a job policy” on page 437. . See “Controlling media” on page 445. update. or delete OpsCenter Agents Set default currency. See “About Operational Restores from directories. See “About managing recipients in OpsCenter” on page 297.Getting started using Symantec OpsCenter Common tasks in OpsCenter 89 Table 1-9 OpsCenter functions Quick links to the OpsCenter documentation (continued) Tasks Go to this topic See “Adding a master server or appliance in OpsCenter” on page 346. See “Controlling drives” on page 455. See “Configuring SMTP server settings for OpsCenter” on page 275. See “About managing OpsCenter Agents” on page 322. start.

See “About managing recipients in OpsCenter” on page 297. See “Configuring SMTP server settings for OpsCenter” on page 275. Schedule when you want a report to run See “About managing report schedules in OpsCenter” on page 678. update Dashboard See “About managing My Dashboard” on page 671. acknowledge. See “About monitoring NetBackup jobs” on page 410. OpsCenter views and nodes See “ Adding new users to OpsCenter” on page 293. and clear alerts See “Managing an alert policy ” on page 508. Services etc. See “Creating a custom report in OpsCenter” on page 644. Policy. Details): Job. Report Execution Execute report templates and custom reports Schedule canned and custom reports See “Creating an OpsCenter report using a Report Template” on page 634. See “About monitoring NetBackup using the Summary.90 Getting started using Symantec OpsCenter About using Web browser bookmarks Table 1-9 OpsCenter functions Quick links to the OpsCenter documentation (continued) Tasks Go to this topic Views Create. See “About monitoring NetBackup policies” on page 430. Monitoring View entities (Dashboards. Assign. Alert Create. Assign read or write See “User access rights and UI functions in permissions to users on OpsCenter” on page 287. About using Web browser bookmarks Use your Web browser to add a bookmark for any view in the OpsCenter console and return to it as needed. update. Create. Overview tab” on page 403. See “Monitor > Services view” on page 428. delete alert See “About creating (or changing) an alert Management policies policy” on page 490. delete See “About managing OpsCenter views” Management OpsCenter views and nodes on page 387. . update.

The online version of the Symantec OpsCenter Administrator's Guide can be found at: http://www.com/docs/DOC5042 A separate Guide for reporting (NetBackup_OpsCenter_Reporting. and create various reports. About OpsCenter documentation The Symantec OpsCenter Administrator's Guide (NetBackup_AdminGuide_OpsCenter. It also provides details on the new enhancements in OpsCenter 7. You can access the Release Notes from the following URL: http://www. OpsCenter 7.com/business/support You can find more information about OpsCenter 7.5 Release Notes for any last-minute changes to the information that is presented in this document. It provides context-sensitive help pages for all screens.Getting started using Symantec OpsCenter About OpsCenter documentation 91 You can use the bookmark to return to the same view when you log onto the console again.symantec.com/docs/DOC5044 Note: For the latest support information about supported products and operating systems.symantec.pdf) is also available. The Release Notes also include any restrictions or limits for OpsCenter 7.5.pdf) provides information on how to use OpsCenter.5 Release Notes. The list is regularly updated on the Symantec Support Web site: http://www. see the Symantec NetBackup Hardware and Software Compatibility List.com/docs/DOC5041 In addition to this Symantec OpsCenter Administrator's Guide PDF.symantec. The online version of the Symantec OpsCenter Reporting Guide can be found at: http://www.5.5 and also how you can install OpsCenter 7.symantec. . collect data from Symantec products as well as third-party products. It includes information about how to monitor and manage NetBackup.5 is also shipped with the following online Help documents: OpsCenter context-sensitive This Help provides information about the OpsCenter user help interface. generate alerts. Always refer to the OpsCenter sections of the NetBackup 7.5 in Symantec NetBackup 7.

Table Settings Help This Help provides information on how to change the settings of a table in the OpsCenter console. . To access the Help. To access the Help. click Help on the Table Settings pop-up dialog box. NetBackup Status Codes Help This Help provides descriptions of NetBackup status codes and possible actions to take when a code appears. click Help in a dialog box in the Java View Builder console. Click a status code link in the jobs table to view its details. To access the Help.92 Getting started using Symantec OpsCenter About OpsCenter documentation Java View Builder context-sensitive help This Help provides information about all Java View Builder procedures and dialog boxes. click Monitor > Jobs.

See “Software components that OpsCenter uses” on page 94. See “Managed NetBackup master server considerations” on page 106. . See “Supported upgrade paths” on page 110. See “About designing your OpsCenter Server” on page 108. See “About the OpsCenter licensing model” on page 95.5 This chapter includes the following topics: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ About planning an OpsCenter installation Installing Symantec OpsCenter on Windows and UNIX About upgrading to OpsCenter on Windows and UNIX About post-installation tasks About uninstalling Symantec OpsCenter on Windows and UNIX About clustering Symantec OpsCenter About planning an OpsCenter installation The following topics provide information on concepts to understand and steps to take before you install or upgrade OpsCenter. See “ OpsCenter platform compatibility” on page 101. See “OpsCenter compatible backup and archiving products ” on page 104.Chapter 2 Installing Symantec OpsCenter 7. See “ Symantec OpsCenter DVDs” on page 100.

Server. Because PBX is an independent component. and user interface. which reduces the required number of open ports in firewalls. Symantec Product Authentication Service (AT) The AT service is primarily used for user logon authentication. The NetBackup authentication service (NBAC) does not need to be configured on your managed NetBackup master servers. its port number can be changed using PBX configuration files. OpsCenter uses some Symantec components that are shared.5 About planning an OpsCenter installation See “About planning an OpsCenter Agent deployment” on page 111. AT is required for secure communication among the OpsCenter Agent. Components that are shared OpsCenter uses the following components that are also shared with other Symantec with other Symantec applications: applications ■ Symantec Private Branch Exchange (PBX) PBX lets applications share a common TCP/IP port. Note: If you change the PBX port number on the OpsCenter server.94 Installing Symantec OpsCenter 7. OpsCenter does not require that you install the Symantec Product Authorization Service. PBX also integrates with the Symantec Product Authentication Service to allow for authenticated connections and non-authenticated connections. The OpsCenter Server needs to be a legitimate server that can communicate with NetBackup. it must be on the NetBackup server list. Software components that OpsCenter uses Along with OpsCenter-specific components. OpsCenter may fail. See “Preparation for install or upgrade” on page 123. View Builder. ■ JRE (Java Runtime Environment ) The Symantec OpsCenter Web server and the OpsCenter application require this component. It is also used for secure communication between NetBackup master servers and the OpsCenter Server. See the NetBackup Security and Encryption Guide for information about authentication services and about NBAC. ■ .

For Symantec Enterprise Vault environments. You also run Enterprise Vault and have 500 mailboxes. assume your NetBackup environment contains 100 clients to backup and all these 100 clients are also indexed then you must purchase a NetBackup Search license that allows you to search for 100 indexed clients. ■ Sybase database OpsCenter uses a Sybase SQL Anywhere 11 (Sybase 11) database installation that is separate from the NetBackup database. The product name is visible from the title bar and logon page of the OpsCenter console. the charges are based on the number of backup clients. For NetBackup Search that has been introduced with Symantec OpsCenter Analytics 7. the charges are based on the number of indexed clients. For example.5. as follows: ■ For backup environments. assume that your NetBackup environment contains 100 clients to back up. you must add the appropriate license key.com/support/manuals ■ About the OpsCenter licensing model OpsCenter requires no license. More information about the Sybase component is available at the following location: http://www. Veritas Unified Logging (VxUL) VxUL is installed with the OpsCenter Server and the Agent. ■ ■ Note: If you want to enable custom reporting on Enterprise Vault data. The unlicensed version of OpsCenter is called Symantec OpsCenter. For example.5 About planning an OpsCenter installation 95 Symantec OpsCenter components OpsCenter uses the following components that are not shared with other Symantec applications: ■ Apache Tomcat Web server The OpsCenter user interface runs under the Apache Tomcat Web server. The charges for Symantec OpsCenter licenses are based on how many entities you require reports on.Installing Symantec OpsCenter 7. The licensed version of OpsCenter is called Symantec OpsCenter Analytics. OpsCenter uses VxUL to configure and view logs.sybase. . See the NetBackup Troubleshooting Guide for more information about VxUL logs. You must purchase a license that allows reporting for 100 backup clients and 500 mailboxes. To enable additional functionality you can add a license key to enable Symantec OpsCenter Analytics. the charges are based on the number of mailboxes.

If you have a license for 1000 mailboxes.5 About planning an OpsCenter installation The Symantec Enterprise Vault license option called Archive Mailbox is added. it is added as Archive Mailbox as shown in the figure.96 Installing Symantec OpsCenter 7. Examine the Value column and the Usage column on the Settings > Configuration > License page. This is displayed in the following figure: . If you install the Archive Mailbox option. it is added as NetBackup Search option on the Settings > Configuration > License page. You compare the configured number of mailboxes or backup clients with the license limit. These entries show that the license to back up 1000 clients and the license to collect archive data of 1000 mailboxes from Enterprise Vault is installed. it is visible in the OpsCenter console on the Settings > Configuration > License page. If you have a license for NetBackup Search with 1000 indexed clients. These entries show that the actual usage of Archive mailbox license option is 0 while the licensed value is 1000.

and perform indexed NetBackup Search operations.5 Search key is capable of enabling only the NetBackup Search feature in OpsCenter Analytics. If you are a new OpsCenter user. These entries show that the actual usage of Archive mailbox license option is 0 while the licensed value is 1000. If you are an existing customer and upgrade to Symantec OpsCenter Analytics 7. NetBackup Search etc. and if you only require a license of NetBackup Search. The demo key lets you try the product before you purchase it. then buying the OpsCenter Analytics license will enable the Search and other OpsCenter Analytics features. In this case no additional key is required. A new category has been added under the permanent keys called NetBackup 7. create custom reports. ■ GOLD key enables all the features of OpsCenter Analytics other than the Search feature. Symantec OpsCenter Analytics license keys Symantec OpsCenter Analytics has two types of license keys: Demo key The demo key is valid for 60 days from the day the key is generated.5 ENT Capacity key enables all the features of OpsCenter Analytics like business reporting.5 Search Key along with the previous keys (like GOLD key or NetBackup 7. collect data from third-party products such as IBM Tivoli Storage Manager and EMC Networker. then a new OpsCenter Analytics license key can be purchased which will enables only the NetBackup Search feature. ■ Permanent key You can access the licensed features with both demo keys and permanent keys. ■ NetBackup 7. The Search license is a part of Symantec OpsCenter Analytics. A permanent key does not have an expiry date. you can perform advanced reporting.5 ENT Capacity key) NetBackup 7. .5.Installing Symantec OpsCenter 7. With Symantec OpsCenter Analytics.5 About planning an OpsCenter installation 97 This entry shows that the license to search for 1000 indexed clients is installed.

Symantec OpsCenter lets you do operational reporting. business-level reporting. With Symantec OpsCenter Analytics.98 Installing Symantec OpsCenter 7. This can be done from the Search tab in the OpsCenter console. Symantec OpsCenter Symantec OpsCenter is visible from the title bar and logon page of the OpsCenter console. Differences between Symantec OpsCenter and Symantec OpsCenter Analytics Table 2-1 lists the differences between Symantec OpsCenter and Symantec OpsCenter Analytics. . See “Symantec OpsCenter Analytics licensed features” on page 99. See “About Operational Restores from OpsCenter” on page 527. You can perform operational NetBackup search and restore operations. See “About managing licenses” on page 272. you have an additional reporting functionality that includes (but is not limited to) the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Creating custom reports Creating reports using SQL queries Running or configuring charge back reports Viewing report data for any previous date You can also collect data from third-party products such as IBM TSM and EMC Networker. delete. Symantec OpsCenter Analytics lets you perform advanced. You can also add. See “About NetBackup Search” on page 989. or view license keys after installation from the OpsCenter console. More information about the licensed features is available.5 About planning an OpsCenter installation See “Symantec OpsCenter Analytics licensed features” on page 99. This can be done from Manage > Restore > Restore Files and Directories. Symantec OpsCenter Analytics lets you perform advanced NetBackup Search operations that are based on indexing the file system metadata that is associated with the backup images. Table 2-1 Differences between Symantec OpsCenter and Symantec OpsCenter Analytics Symantec OpsCenter Analytics Symantec OpsCenter Analytics is visible from the title bar and logon page of the OpsCenter console.

Report Reports > My Reports > Create a New Report > Create a Custom Report Create a report using SQL query Reports > Report Templates > Create Create a report using SQL query a New Report > Create a report using option is disabled. Control charge back settings Create or edit data collectors for IBM Settings > Configuration > Agent > TSM and EMC Networker Create Data Collector In the Data Collector Wizard. Settings > Configuration > Agent > Edit Data Collector .Installing Symantec OpsCenter 7. where they are located in the OpsCenter console. You cannot create or edit data collectors for third-party products. Table 2-2 Licensed feature Create a Custom Report Licensed features in Symantec OpsCenter Analytics Access on the Symantec OpsCenter Analytics console Access on the unlicensed Symantec OpsCenter console Reports > Report Templates > Create Create a custom report option is a New Report > Create a Custom disabled. back Reports Settings > Charge back Charge back settings are disabled.5 About planning an OpsCenter installation 99 Symantec OpsCenter Analytics licensed features Table 2-2 shows the list of licensed features. SQL query Reports > My Reports > Create a New Report > Create a report using SQL query Run or view charge back reports Report > Report Templates > Charge Charge back reports are disabled. TSM and EMC Networker options are disabled. in the Select Product drop-down list. and how they appear in the unlicensed version.

) Reports > My Reports > Create New Report (Relative and Absolute Time frame window on the Select Parameters page. The Reconcile option The Reconcile option is disabled. click Edit Report and then Relative and Absolute Time frame window. Three OpsCenter DVDs are available and are a part of the NetBackup media kit. You can view report data for any previous date.100 Installing Symantec OpsCenter 7. The Object Types tab is disabled. Licensed features in Symantec OpsCenter Analytics (continued) Access on the Symantec OpsCenter Analytics console Access on the unlicensed Symantec OpsCenter console Report > Report Templates > Create You cannot view data older than 60 New Report (Relative and Absolute days.5 is shipped with three OpsCenter DVD's. operations based on indexing the file Search > Saved tab system metadata that is associated with the backup images When you click the Search tab. Edit View level Alias tab Object Types Settings > Configuration > Object Types Perform advanced NetBackup Search Search > New. Table 2-3 describes the contents of each DVD. Time frame window on the Select Parameters page. Settings > Edit View level Alias The Edit View level Alias tab is disabled.) Report > Report templates (Run a report. the following message is displayed: You do not have license to view this page.) Reports > My Reports (Run a report.) Reconcile Task Monitor > Jobs.5 About planning an OpsCenter installation Table 2-2 Licensed feature Full control over report time frame selection. . Search > Saved. click Edit Report and then Relative and Absolute Time frame window. Symantec OpsCenter DVDs Symantec OpsCenter 7. under the More drop-down list is disabled.

5 About planning an OpsCenter installation 101 Table 2-3 DVD OpsCenter (1 of 3) OpsCenter 7. This document is posted at the following URL: http://www.5 software is not a part of the NetBackup DVD's.5 DVD contents Platform OS Windows (x86 and x64) Contents ■ ■ ■ ■ 32-bit Windows platforms (x86) 64-bit Windows platforms (x64) ICS directory for each platform OpsCenter documentation RedHat SUSE Solaris x86 ICS directory for each platform OpsCenter documentation AIX64 HP-UX IA Solaris SPARC64 ICS directory for each platform OpsCenter documentation OpsCenter (2 of 3) UNIX ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ OpsCenter (3 of 3) UNIX ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Note: OpsCenter 7. Note: Refer to the compatibility matrix that is posted on the Symantec Support Web site for the latest information on the platforms that OpsCenter supports. With the demo version.symantec. you can access the Symantec OpsCenter Analytics features for 60 days (starting from the day you install the demo key). a demo version. See “About the OpsCenter licensing model” on page 95. or purchase a Symantec OpsCenter Analytics license key and install the licensed version. OpsCenter platform compatibility This section provides information about OpsCenter platform compatibility. You can either install an unlicensed version.com/docs/TECH59978 .Installing Symantec OpsCenter 7.

5 About planning an OpsCenter installation Table 2-4 Platform OpsCenter operating system requirements Server 32-bit 64-bit Yes Agent 32-bit Yes 64-bit Yes View Builder 32-bit Yes 64-bit Yes* See Note Windows 2003 SP2 Yes Windows 2003 R2 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes* See Note Windows 2008 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes* See Note Windows 2008 R2 No Yes No Yes No Yes* See Note Solaris 9 SPARC Solaris 10 x64 Solaris 10 SPARC HP Itanium 11. Linux SUSE 10 Linux SUSE 11 The supported versions for SUSE Linux are 2.16 and above.31 AIX 5.3 AIX 6. No 6.102 Installing Symantec OpsCenter 7.6.0 The supported versions for Red Hat Linux are 2.18 and above.1 No No No No No Yes Yes Yes No No No No Yes No Yes No No No No No No No No No No No No Yes Yes Yes Yes No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No Linux RedHat 5. No Yes No No No No .1 AIX 7.6.0.

OpsCenter Server and Agent are supported in a VMware virtual machine guest operating system environment. Ensure that the system on which the OpsCenter server is installed has valid values for the following OS parameters: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Display language Location Check your operating system documentation for more information on these parameters.com/support/docview.ibm. ■ ■ . If you install OpsCenter components on a dual stack system that has both IPv4 and IPv6 for instance.1.wss?uid=isg1fixinfo105097 OpsCenter Server is not supported on non-global Solaris zones.5 and View Builder 7. OpsCenter deployment limitations: ■ You must install Server. with Veritas Cluster Server (VCS). For example.5 is only compatible with Agent 7. The OpsCenter Agent and View Builder are not supported on VCS. Only the OpsCenter Server can be installed in a clustered mode on UNIX and Windows. This applies only to View Builder software. Important notes on operating systems: ■ If installing OpsCenter on AIX.5. ensure that you install the applicable patch for AIX from the IBM site: http://www-01. 32-bit Agent binaries are not supported on 64-bit Windows systems. If installing OpsCenter on AIX 6. Server 7. Agent. and View Builder of the same versions. ensure that the XLC runtime version is 9. you must configure the default IP as IPV4. OpsCenter components must not be installed on an IPv6 system. Note: OpsCenter components are not supported if Windows or Linux OS is installed on IA-64 architecture.0 or higher.Installing Symantec OpsCenter 7. Also hostname of the system must be configured with IPv4.5 About planning an OpsCenter installation 103 Note: * signifies 32-bit View Builder binaries working on 64-bit architecture. Operating systems and OpsCenter deployment limitations This section provides important notes regarding the supported operating systems and limitations that you need to address during OpsCenter deployment.

M. Your system may require a lesser max heap size to properly run all applications.S. ). such as 8:00 P. they must translate to the same GMT time (such as GMT -6). Ensure that the time on the OpsCenter Server and the backup product host or the archive product host is in sync based on the time zone they are deployed in. See “Adjusting the heap size for OpsCenter components” on page 179.T and the managed host shows and 6:00 P. If the OpsCenter server and the product host are in the same time zone. say the OpsCenter server and the product host are in the CST time zone but show different times. Enterprise Vault host etc. NetBackup master server. enable it and restart the Windows host before installing or upgrading to OpsCenter components.104 Installing Symantec OpsCenter 7. A backup product host or an archive product host means a supported product host that is connected to OpsCenter. If 8. Installing OpsCenter components in a location that is mounted from a remote host is not supported on UNIX.5 About planning an OpsCenter installation ■ The OpsCenter installer automatically sets the maximum heap size to 1024 MB. OpsCenter may not display accurate data in the reports or in the Monitor tab and Manage tab. both the OpsCenter server and the product host must show the same time. Examples of a backup product host or an archive product host are PureDisk host. If you install or upgrade to OpsCenter components on a Windows host where 8. and 9:00 P.S.M. Note that with the licensed version of OpsCenter.3 file name creation is disabled. With the . If the OpsCenter server and product host are in different time zones. In this case. Backup Exec host.M. For example. Ensure that the customized location that you provide does not contain spaces or special characters like %.M. if the OpsCenter server shows 8:00 P. ■ OpsCenter compatible backup and archiving products This section lists the backup and archiving products that OpsCenter supports. For example. ■ Ensure that the OpsCenter Server host name does not contain any underscores like opshost. ensure that both time zones convert to the same GMT time. P.. C. The default installation location of OpsCenter components is C:\Program Files\Symantec. then you must do the following: ■ ■ ■ Install OpsCenter components on a customized (non-default) location like D:\Favorites.T.3 file name creation is disabled on a Windows host. you can perform advanced reporting from the data that is collected from all of these products.

3.0. 6. 6.1. select the Agent that is installed as Integrated Agent. 6.0 master server or to a regular NetBackup 7. 11 Appliance 2. Note: OpsCenter does not Native agent on backup servers on support Symantec Backup Windows 2003 (SP2 & R2).0.2.2.1. 6. you cannot collect data from third-party products like IBM TSM and EMC Networker.6.0 master servers Appliance 1.1.6. 7.0 MP7 and higher All supported NetBackup platforms versions. 12.5 Versions Support level Back up or Archiving product Symantec NetBackup 6. Table 2-5 lists the backup and archiving products that OpsCenter supports. 6.2 and 2.x and higher by remote agent versions.5. Windows 2008 (SP2 & R2).5.6.6.6. Table 2-5 Backup and archiving products supported by Symantec OpsCenter 7.1.6.5 & R2). 12.5. 6.0. 6. 2010 R3 Exec platforms by remote agent. and Solaris 9.2.0 media servers that are attached to an appliance 2. 10.2.0. You do not need a separate Agent to collect data from PureDisk. 2010. 7. You can use the inbuilt Agent of the OpsCenter Server for data collection.5 About planning an OpsCenter installation 105 unlicensed version. 6. (SP2 & R2) . 2008 Exec running on NetWare. 6. 6. To create or configure the data collector.5. 6. Symantec Backup Exec 11d.0 and higher Native agent for Windows 2003 (SP2 versions.Installing Symantec OpsCenter 7.2.5 master server Data collection happens automatically by NBSL Symantec NetBackup Appliance Symantec NetBackup PureDisk 6.3a PureDisk supported platform (PDOS) by the OpsCenter integrated Agent.6. 2010 All supported Symantec Backup R2.

0 Back up or Archiving product Symantec Enterprise Vault Support level All supported Symantec Enterprise Vault platforms by remote agent Native agent on Microsoft SQL Server 2005 or 2008 (where Enterprise Vault database resides) on Windows 2003 (SP2 & R2). 10.3.5 About planning an OpsCenter installation Table 2-5 Backup and archiving products supported by Symantec OpsCenter 7.5 (continued) Versions 7.0. 5. The following recommendations and requirements should be considered for your managed master servers: ■ Installation of OpsCenter Server software on a NetBackup master server or media server is possible if you want to monitor only one master server. 8. 5. Managed NetBackup master server considerations Consider the following recommendations and requirements for your managed NetBackup master servers.. More information on sizing guidelines is available.4. To monitor more than one master server. . EMC NetWorker 7. Symantec recommends that you install the OpsCenter server software on a separate standalone server. 2008 (SP2 & R2) and Solaris 9/10 Data collection is possible only with a licensed version of OpsCenter. 9. See “OpsCenter sizing guidelines” on page 109. 2008 (SP2 & R2).0.106 Installing Symantec OpsCenter 7.5 All supported TSM platforms by remote agent Native agent for backup server on Windows 2003 (SP2 & R2).5.3 Native agent on backup servers on Windows 2003 (SP2 & R2). 2008 (SP2 & R2) and Solaris 9/10 Data collection is possible only with a licensed version of OpsCenter. An example is the master server on which the OpsCenter server software is installed. IBM Tivoli Storage Manager (TSM) 5.

See “Upgrading from OpsCenter 7. Upgrade the backup or archiving Refer to the appropriate product product that you are using like manuals. If you plan to upgrade the backup and archiving product like NetBackup. More information about adding managed NetBackup servers in OpsCenter is available.5. 3. ■ OpsCenter can be used to monitor a NetBackup cluster.symantec.x or 7. See NetBackup High Availability Administrator's Guide for more details on setting up a NetBackup cluster environment.5 on Windows” on page 159.0.Installing Symantec OpsCenter 7. it is recommended that you upgrade OpsCenter components first. 4. 7. Always upgrade the OpsCenter Agent first followed by the Server and the View Builder. OpsCenter 7.5 can monitor all NetBackup master server versions between 6. OpsCenter can start collecting data from the backup or archiving product once it is added to the console.0. .5.x or 7. Symantec recommends that any NetBackup master server is monitored by only one OpsCenter server.5.com/docs/TECH74584 The order also holds true if you plan to upgrade only OpsCenter and not the backup or archiving product.5 About planning an OpsCenter installation 107 ■ OpsCenter does not collect data from the managed servers that are configured within a network address translation (NAT) network.1. and the OpsCenter components. The OpsCenter server should be configured as a fixed host with a static IP address.1. NetBackup. By upgrading OpsCenter components before the backup and archiving product.x and 7. PureDisk etc. visit the NetBackup 7.x to OpsCenter 7. Upgrade the OpsCenter Agent Upgrade the OpsCenter Server Upgrade the OpsCenter View Builder ■ ■ ■ ■ Reference See “Upgrading from OpsCenter 7. EMC NetWorker. You must perform upgrades in the following order: Serial No. 2.5 Upgrade Portal: http://www. For example. IBM If you plan to upgrade to NetBackup TSM etc.x to OpsCenter 7.5 on UNIX” on page 166. The OpsCenter Server must be at an equal or higher version than the NetBackup master server version that it monitors. Backup Exec. Steps to upgrade 1.

Beginning with NetBackup version 6. NBSL components are included as a part of NetBackup on master and media servers. review the recommendations and requirements that are listed in the earlier sections. For a 7.1. Similarly.5 About planning an OpsCenter installation See “Adding a master server or an appliance master server in the OpsCenter console” on page 355. If you do not want to collect this data.5 master server. OpsCenter is affected if NBSL stops running on a managed NetBackup server. error logs.0.0. If you do not want to collect such data. and control functions.x master server.1. you do not need to install an Agent. or traditional license data. capacity license.5 requires an Agent or data collector only for capacity or traditional license data collection. capacity license. The OpsCenter Server uses the NetBackup Service Layer (NBSL) to collect all other data types from a NetBackup 7. For a 6.108 Installing Symantec OpsCenter 7.x master server. you do not need to install an Agent. See “Managed NetBackup master server considerations” on page 106. breakup jobs. OpsCenter requires NBSL for all NetBackup monitoring. managing. for a 6. When NBSL restarts. OpsCenter uses NBSL to collect all the other data automatically from the master server.0. error logs. an Agent must be installed if you want to collect image. or traditional license data. OpsCenter correctly recaptures the latest state. capacity license.x or 7. About designing your OpsCenter Server Before setting up an OpsCenter Server. About using NBSL to collect data from NetBackup master servers A NetBackup master server with version 7. If NBSL stops. OpsCenter may not capture any changes that were made to the NetBackup configuration.5. an Agent must be installed if you want to collect breakup jobs. The following NetBackup objects determine the characteristics of the OpsCenter Server: .x or 7. or traditional license data. an Agent must be installed if you want to collect image. OpsCenter uses NBSL to collect all the other data automatically from the master server. Sizing considerations The size of your OpsCenter server depends largely on the number of NetBackup objects that OpsCenter manages.x master server.

job data.5 About planning an OpsCenter installation 109 ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Number of master servers to manage Number of policies Number of the jobs that are run per day Total number of jobs Number of media Based on these factors. or media data. Information is available on how to adjust database values for better OpsCenter performance. The database is installed as part of the OpsCenter server installation. Note the following: ■ After you configure OpsCenter. OpsCenter sizing guidelines Table 2-6 lists the minimum hardware requirements and recommended settings for installing the OpsCenter Server. See “About tuning OpsCenter for more performance” on page 171. The initial data load on the OpsCenter server is in turn dependent on the following data present in the managed master servers: ■ ■ ■ Number of policy data records Number of job data records Number of media data records ■ The rate of OpsCenter database growth depends on the quantity of managed data. OpsCenter disk space depends on the volume of data initially loaded on the OpsCenter server from the managed NetBackup servers. . the following OpsCenter Server components should be sized accordingly: ■ ■ ■ Disk space (for installed OpsCenter binary + OpsCenter database) Type and number of CPUs RAM About the OpsCenter database The Sybase database that OpsCenter uses is similar to the database that NetBackup uses.Installing Symantec OpsCenter 7. This data can be policy data.

If NetBackup and the OpsCenter Server are installed on the same system.000 10.000 2000 – 4000 1000 – 10.10. Symantec recommends that you install OpsCenter server software on a separate standalone system.000 1.5 .000 10. 8 GB RAM 16 Logical Processors. You can install the OpsCenter server on a NetBackup master or media server if you want to monitor only the master server in the configuration.000 20.000 4000 – 6000 60.000 40.000 40. Information is available on how you can tune OpsCenter for better performance. Supported upgrade paths OpsCenter 7.5 OpsCenter 7.000 0 – 2000 0 – 1000 0 – 20.1 to OpsCenter 7. If the number of NetBackup jobs that run daily on the master server is more than 5000.50.00.000 – 1. Symantec recommends that you run no more than 5000 NetBackup jobs daily.0.000 – 50. Symantec recommends that the memory of the system where you install OpsCenter Server is 8 GB or more.000 – 60.000 Note: Some of the data in this table has been interpolated.000 50. See “About tuning OpsCenter for more performance” on page 171.5 supports direct upgrades from the following versions: ■ ■ OpsCenter 7.000 40.110 Installing Symantec OpsCenter 7.000 6000 – 10.000 – 1.0 to OpsCenter 7. 20-40 8 GB RAM 8 Logical 40-60 Processors. 16 GB RAM 60-100 0 . 0-20 8 GB RAM 4 Processors.00.000 60.000 – 40.5 About planning an OpsCenter installation Table 2-6 OpsCenter server sizing guidelines Number of alerts Number of Number of job policies media Number of jobs per day System Number of configuration NetBackup master servers to be monitored 2 Processors.000 60.

0 or 7. .1.0.5 OpsCenter 7. first upgrade to OpsCenter 7.1.Installing Symantec OpsCenter 7.3 to OpsCenter 7. When do you need an Agent? You require an Agent based on the product that you want to collect data from. See “Examples of OpsCenter Agent deployment in a NetBackup environment” on page 119.2 to OpsCenter 7.5 OpsCenter 7.5 Note: If you have NOM or VBR.1.5 About planning an OpsCenter installation 111 ■ ■ ■ ■ OpsCenter 7. Should I install the Agent on the product host? Should I install the Agent on a different platform? Quickly glance through the Agent deployment matrix Examples of Agent deployment scenarios See “About the Agent deployment matrix” on page 117. About planning an OpsCenter Agent deployment Before deploying an OpsCenter Agent.0. Can a single Agent monitor multiple product See “Can a single Agent monitor different versions? product versions?” on page 112. you must examine the following parameters: Do I need an Agent? See “When do you need an Agent?” on page 111.5 OpsCenter 7. To make this decision.1 to OpsCenter 7.1. You do not need an OpsCenter Agent to collect data from PureDisk. See the product documentation for details on how to upgrade. See “Where should I install the Agent?” on page 113.0.1 to OpsCenter 7. you must decide if you need an OpsCenter Agent.

.x Install an Agent if you want to collect data for breakup jobs.112 Installing Symantec OpsCenter 7.x Install an Agent if you want to collect data for image. Legato Networker Can a single Agent monitor different product versions? A single Agent can monitor multiple versions of TSM.x Install an Agent if you want to collect data for capacity license and traditional license. Enterprise Vault. traditional license. ■ 7.1. or traditional license.x and later master servers. ■ Note: From OpsCenter 7.5. you need separate Agents depending on the versions. capacity license. ■ 6.0.5 About planning an OpsCenter installation NetBackup The requirement for an OpsCenter Agent differs for each NetBackup version. or breakup jobs. You require OpsCenter Agent to collect data from these products. EV. You do not need to install an Agent to collect scheduled jobs data from NetBackup 6. For EMC Networker and NetBackup master servers. or traditional license.5. capacity. error log. ■ PureDisk You do not require an OpsCenter Agent to collect data from PureDisk.5. Backup Exec. capacity license.5.x master servers. ■ 7.x Install an Agent if you want to collect data for image. NBSL is used to automatically collect the scheduled jobs data from NetBackup 6. 7.5 Install an Agent if you want to collect data for capacity license and traditional license. Review the following points for specific NetBackup versions: 6. IBM TSM. error logs.0. BE.

You can use the Integrated Agent of the OpsCenter Server for data collection. EMC Networker PureDisk Note: You do not require an OpsCenterAgent to collect data from PureDisk. PureDisk data collection does not require a separate Agent. NetBackup binaries (such as the Remote Administration Console for Windows and a UNIX media server) that you install on the Agent host must match the version of the NetBackup master server. you must install the OpsCenter Agent on a Windows host. To monitor Enterprise Vault or Backup Exec. The OpsCenter Agent must be compatible with the operating system of the backup application host. You can use the same OpsCenter Agent to collect Enterprise Vault data from Microsoft SQL Servers with different versions. You need different OpsCenter Agents for EMC Networker servers with different versions. or EMC Networker. Backup Exec You can use the same Agent to collect data from Backup Exec servers with different versions. The OpsCenter Agent needs to be installed on the EMC Networker server host. To create or configure the data collector.5 About planning an OpsCenter installation 113 NetBackup You need separate Agents to collect data from different NetBackup master servers. IBM TSM You can use the same OpsCenter Agent to collect data from TSM servers with different versions. Enterprise Vault Note: To collect Enterprise Vault archive data. See “Configuring PureDisk data collector” on page 361. Where should I install the Agent? Installing the OpsCenter Agent has a little affect on the backup environment. Note: To collect data from a Backup Exec server host. select the Agent that is installed as the Integrated Agent. You can deploy the OpsCenter Agent on any of the following hosts: . you need to install the Agent on a Windows host as these products support only Windows platform. you need to install the Agent on a compatible Windows host.Installing Symantec OpsCenter 7. Tivoli Storage Manager. Agents can be installed on either Windows or Solaris platforms if you want to monitor NetBackup.

. Advantages of installing OpsCenter Agent on a product host are the following: Ease of maintenance for upgrades. ■ Disadvantages of installing OpsCenter Agent on the product host are the following: ■ The Agent may use significant system resources.5 About planning an OpsCenter installation Product host The Product host is the host where the backup or archiving product is installed.114 Installing Symantec OpsCenter 7. because only one agent is installed on a backup host. which can affect the product host’s performance. an Enterprise Vault host etc. you must install the OpsCenter Agent on the product host only. a product host can be a NetBackup master server. a Backup Exec host. ■ Minimal intrusion on backup hosts. Note: To collect data from EMC Networker. because you only service one host. For example.

5 About planning an OpsCenter installation 115 OpsCenter Server host or a separate host .Installing Symantec OpsCenter 7.

116 Installing Symantec OpsCenter 7. ■ In such situations. You should deploy a Remote Agent in the following situations: When the OpsCenter Agent is not compatible with the operating system of the product (such as HP-UX). For example. because the backup data is gathered remotely. Note: EMC Networker does not support Remote Agent. assume that you need separate OpsCenter Agents to collect data from different versions of NetBackup master servers. The different host may be the OpsCenter Server host or a separate host. You need to install NetBackup binaries (the Remote . ■ When the product host system has insufficient resources to support co-location of the OpsCenter Agent and the backup application. this is sometimes called a Remote Agent.5 About planning an OpsCenter installation The OpsCenter Agent can be installed on a host different from the product host. the Agent should remotely communicate with backup products. ■ Disadvantages of installing OpsCenter Agent on the Server host include the following: ■ You must install a component of the backup application on the OpsCenter Server host. which avoids the maintenance that might otherwise be involved in upgrading the Agent. you need to maintain only one host for both the OpsCenter Agent and the Server. ■ If you install Agent on the OpsCenter Server host. Advantages of installing OpsCenter Agent on the Server host or a separate host are the following: You do not have to install additional software on backup application hosts.

5 About planning an OpsCenter installation 117 Administration Console for Windows. The version of RAC or master or media server binaries installed on the Agent host should match the version of the NetBackup master server it intends to monitor. Agent for NetBackup needs binaries of either RAC (Remote Admin Console) or master or media server. a backup application license key is required for the component that is installed on the OpsCenter Server host. the master server. installed local to the Agent. Note the following points about installing an OpsCenter Agent: ■ ■ Only one OpsCenter Agent can be installed on any host.Installing Symantec OpsCenter 7. The Agent deployment matrix can help you in deploying the OpsCenter Agent. ■ ■ About the Agent deployment matrix Table 2-7 compiles Agent-related information for each backup product. Table 2-7 Product Agent deployment matrix Is an Agent Required? Can a single Agent monitor multiple product versions? Should Agent Can Agent be be deployed on installed on the product any platform? host? Solaris. Windows . or the media server) on the Agent host that match the version of the NetBackup master server. A single Agent can be configured for multiple data collectors which collect data from the respective product hosts.1.x Solaris. If you want to collect data from EMC Networker host. ■ In some situations. Windows NetBackup 7.5 Required only Multiple Agents Anywhere for capacity and traditional licensing Required only Multiple Agents Anywhere for capacity and traditional licensing NetBackup 7. you must install an Agent locally on the EMC Networker host.

Windows NetBackup 6. Windows Solaris. capacity licensing.118 Installing Symantec OpsCenter 7. or breakup jobs. traditional licensing. or error logs. Windows PureDisk Solaris. Windows Windows only Windows only Solaris.x Solaris. Required only Multiple Agents Anywhere for image.0. capacity licensing.0.x Required only Multiple Agents Anywhere for image. Not Required None None Solaris. Windows NetBackup 7. capacity.x Required for breakup jobs.5 About planning an OpsCenter installation Table 2-7 Product Agent deployment matrix (continued) Is an Agent Required? Can a single Agent monitor multiple product versions? Should Agent Can Agent be be deployed on installed on the product any platform? host? Solaris. Windows Backup Exec Enterprise Vault Required Required Single Agent Single Agent Single Agent Anywhere Anywhere Anywhere IBM Tivoli Storage Required Manager EMC Networker Required Multiple Agents On the product host . error log.5. traditional licensing. and traditional licensing Multiple Agents Anywhere NetBackup 6.

5 master server on ProdHost2.5 Remote Administration Console or NetBackup master server on AgentHost1 and configure a data collector to collect data from ProdHost1. Example 3: You install the OpsCenter Server on OpsCenterHost1.5 master server on the AgentHost2 and configure a data collector to collect data from ProdHost2. Example 5: You install the OpsCenter Server on OpsCenterHost1.5 master server on ProdHost1. A NetBackup 7. Install a NetBackup 6.5 master server is installed on ProdHost1.0 master server on AgentHost1 and configure a data collector to collect data from ProdHost1. Install the NetBackup 7.5 Remote Administration Console or 6. the NetBackup 6.Installing Symantec OpsCenter 7. Example 4: You install the OpsCenter Server and Agent on OpsCenterHost1. Figure 2-4 illustrates this scenario. Figure 2-2 illustrates this scenario. Figure 2-1 illustrates this scenario. Install NetBackup 6. Install the NetBackup 7.5 About planning an OpsCenter installation 119 Examples of OpsCenter Agent deployment in a NetBackup environment In a NetBackup environment. Figure 2-3 illustrates this scenario.0 MP7 on AgentHost3 and configure a data collector from ProdHost3 and ProdHost4. Install a NetBackup 6. Example 2: You install the OpsCenter Server and Agent on OpsCenterHost1 and install the NetBackup 7.0 Remote Admin Console or 7.5 master server on ProdHost2. You install Agent A1 on AgentHost1. install the Agent on AgentHost1. Install a NetBackup 7. ■ ■ ■ ■ . and install Agent3 on AgentHost3.0 MP7 on ProdHost3 and ProdHost4. install Agent A2 on AgentHost2. Figure 2-5 illustrates this scenario.0 master server exists on ProdHost1 and you install a NetBackup 6. and you install another NetBackup 6. Install either the Remote Administration Console or master server on OpsCenterHost1 and configure two data collectors: one to collect data from ProdHost1 and another to collect data from ProdHost2. the following OpsCenter deployment scenarios are valid: ■ Example 1: You install the OpsCenter Server on OpsCenterHost1.0 MP7 Remote Admin Console or 6.0 master server on ProdHost1. and you install the NetBackup master server and the OpsCenter Agent on ProdHost1 Configure a data collector on OpsCenterHost1 to collect data from ProdHost1.0 Remote Administration Console or the NetBackup master server on OpsCenterHost1 and configure a data collector to collect data from ProdHost1. and install a NetBackup 7.

Install 7. install Agent A2 on AgentHost2. Add Agent1 to OpsCenter 3.0 . Install a NetBackup 6.0 RAC or master 2. Select Agent1 for 2.5 master server on ProdHost2.0 MP7 master servers exist on ProdHost3 and ProdHost4.5 ProdHost1: NBU 7. Example 1 Figure 2-1 OpsCenter host 1 1.120 Installing Symantec OpsCenter 7. Install Agent1 2. A NetBackup 7.0 Remote Admin Console or 7.0 master server on AgentHost1 and configure a data collector to collect data from ProdHost1.5 About planning an OpsCenter installation ■ Example 6: You install the OpsCenter Server on OpsCenterHost1. NetBackup 6. Add Agent1 to OpsCenter AgentHost1: NBU 7. and install agent A3 on AgentHost3. Select Agent1 for ProdHost1 data collection ProdHost1: NBU 7.5 master server on the AgentHost2 and configure a data collector to collect data from ProdHost2. Install either the Remote Administration Console or master server on AgentHost3 and configure two data collectors: one to collect data from ProdHost3 and another to collect data from ProdHost4. Figure 2-6 illustrates this scenario.5 RAC master ProdHost1 data collection Figure 2-2 Example 2 OpsCenter host 1 + Agent host 1 1.5 1. Install 7. Install a NetBackup 7.0 master server exists on ProdHost1 and you install a NetBackup 6. You install Agent A1 on AgentHost1.5 Remote Administration Console or 6.

Install 6. Add Agent1 to OpsCenter 2. Install and add Agent1 to OpsCenter 2. Select Agent1 for ProdHost1 data collection 4. Use the same Agent for ProdHost2 data collection ProdHost1: NBU 6.5 ProdHost2: NBU 6. Install Agent1 Figure 2-4 Example 4 OpsCenter host 1 + Agent host 1 1.5 RAC master 3.5 .Installing Symantec OpsCenter 7. Select Agent1 for ProdHost1 data collection ProdHost1: NBU 6.5 + AgentHost1 1.5 About planning an OpsCenter installation 121 Figure 2-3 Example 3 OpsCenter Host 1 1.

Install 6. Select Agent2 for ProdHost2 data collection 6.0 RAC or master ProdHost1: NBU 7. Install Agent2 2. Install 6.0 MP7 RAC or master ProdHost3: NBU 6. Install 7. Install Agent1 2.5 AgentHost3 1.0 MP7 ProdHost4: NBU 6.5 About planning an OpsCenter installation Figure 2-5 Example 5 AgentHost1 1.122 Installing Symantec OpsCenter 7. Use the same Agent3 for ProdHost4 data collection AgentHost2 1. Select Agent3 for ProdHost3 data collection 6. Select Agent1 for ProdHost1 data collection 5.0 MP7 . Install Agent3 2. Add Agent3 4. Add Agent2 3.5 RAC or master ProdHost2: NBU 6. Add Agent1 2.0 OpsCenter Host1 1.

0 RAC or master ProdHost1: NBU 7.5 About planning an OpsCenter installation 123 Figure 2-6 Example 6 Agent Host1 1. install Agent1 2.0MP7 Agent Host3 1. Add Agent1 2.5 RAC or master ProdHost3: NBU 6.Installing Symantec OpsCenter 7. Select Agent3 for ProdHost3 data collection 6. Install Agent2 2. .0 MP7 See “Examples of OpsCenter Agent deployment in a NetBackup environment” on page 119. Install 6. Select Agent2 for ProdHost2 data collection 5. Add Agent3 3. Select Agent1 for ProdHost1 data collection 4. Install 6. Table 2-8 lists the things you must check before you install OpsCenter on a Windows server. Install Agent1 2. Install 7.5 Agent Host2 1.0 OpsCenter Host1 1.0 RAC or master ProdHost4: NBU 6. Add Agent2 3. Use the same Agent3 for ProdHost4 data collection ProdHost2: NBU 6. Preparation for install or upgrade Review the following checklists before installing OpsCenter.

5. then you must do the following: ■ Install OpsCenter components on a customized (non-default) location like D:\Favorites.3 name creation is disabled. 9. 6. Symantec recommends that you do not stop the installer forcefully while the OpsCenter upgrade is in progress. Note that after you install and start using OpsCenter. See “About designing your OpsCenter Server” on page 108.x.5. This should be done before you upgrade to OpsCenter 7. The default installation location of OpsCenter components is C:\Program Files\Symantec. OpsCenter install and upgrade checklist for Windows Task Ensure that you install OpsCenter software on a compatible platform. 3. it is recommended that you enable it and restart the Windows host before installing or upgrading to OpsCenter components. The customized location that you provide should not contain spaces or special characters like ( . ensure that the available disk space is at least three times the database size. Ensure that the fully qualified domain name (FQDN) of your OpsCenter Server has no more than 44 characters. For a new OpsCenter installation.1. % etc. 5.5. In addition.124 Installing Symantec OpsCenter 7. If you install or upgrade to OpsCenter components on a Windows host where 8. See “Supported upgrade paths” on page 110. Ensure that no other installation is in progress while you install OpsCenter. 8. and requires more space. you must first upgrade to OpsCenter 7. You cannot upgrade directly from VBR or NOM to OpsCenter 7.3 file name creation is disabled on a Windows host. If 8. 2.0.5 About planning an OpsCenter installation Table 2-8 Item 1. ■ 4. If you plan to upgrade to OpsCenter 7. ensure that the database directory has at least 20 MB of available space. If you have Veritas Backup Reporter (VBR) or NetBackup Operations Manager (NOM) and want to upgrade to OpsCenter 7.x or 7.5. . the database grows in size. Ensure that the antivirus software is disabled before you install OpsCenter. Ensure that your OpsCenter server is configured as a fixed host with a static IP address. 7. See “ OpsCenter platform compatibility” on page 101.

5 About planning an OpsCenter installation 125 Table 2-8 Item 10. The above order also holds true if you plan to upgrade only OpsCenter and not the backup or archiving product.x or 7. If you plan to upgrade both the backup and archiving product like NetBackup. If you plan to upgrade to OpsCenter 7. If you plan to upgrade to NetBackup 7. visit the NetBackup 7.com/docs/TECH74584 . See “Changing the OpsCenter database administrator password” on page 231.Installing Symantec OpsCenter 7.5. IBM TSM etc.x to OpsCenter 7. Symantec recommends that you reset the database password to original before performing the upgrade. Always upgrade the OpsCenter Agent first followed by the Server and the View Builder.5 on Windows” on page 159. 12.0.5.symantec. Backup Exec. See “Upgrading from OpsCenter 7. Symantec recommends that you take a hot backup of the OpsCenter database (without stopping OpsCenter) using the dbbackup utility. PureDisk etc. By upgrading OpsCenter components before the backup and archiving product. OpsCenter install and upgrade checklist for Windows (continued) Task Before upgrading to OpsCenter 7. OpsCenter can start collecting data from the backup or archiving product once it is added to the console.1.5 Upgrade Portal: http://www. EMC NetWorker. it is recommended that you upgrade OpsCenter components first. See “Backing up the OpsCenter database” on page 242. You must perform upgrades in the following order: ■ ■ ■ ■ Upgrade the OpsCenter Agent Upgrade the OpsCenter Server Upgrade the OpsCenter View Builder Upgrade the backup or archiving product that you are using like NetBackup. 11. and the OpsCenter components.5 and have changed the database password.

install OpsCenter on the NetBackup master server or media server (recommended). For example.5 installer. If you need to monitor a single master server. Display language Location Check your respective OS documentation for more information on these parameters. After successful upgrade. and View Builder of the same versions. Ensure that the necessary ports are opened before you install OpsCenter on a hardened server. 19. 18.126 Installing Symantec OpsCenter 7. In case free space on the drive where OS is installed is less than size of the current OpsCenter database. Install OpsCenter Server. !. use the following procedure before you upgrade: 1 2 Create a directory (say temp) where the OpsCenter database is installed: <OpsCenterDatabaseCustomLocation>\temp. See “About communication and firewall considerations” on page 247. Ensure that the name of the folder in which you install OpsCenter does not contain any special characters such as %. Ensure that the system on which the OpsCenter server is installed has valid values for the following OS parameters: ■ ■ 16.5 is only compatible with Agent 7. Server 7. If a file called program exists in the C: folder of your OpsCenter Server. OpsCenter install and upgrade checklist for Windows (continued) Task If you plan to upgrade to OpsCenter 7. Agent. ^. ~. @. $. rename or delete the file before you install OpsCenter. From My Computer > Properties > Advanced > Environment Variables. ensure that the free space on the drive where OS is installed is equal to or more than size of the current OpsCenter database. 3 4 14. . 15.5 and have installed the OpsCenter database on a custom location.5.5 and View Builder 7. Run the OpsCenter 7. create a new system variable with variable name SATMP and value as: <OpsCenterDatabaseCustomLocation>\temp. delete the environment variable SATMP and the directory temp from <OpsCenterDatabaseCustomLocation>. 17. &. or #.5 About planning an OpsCenter installation Table 2-8 Item 13.

first upgrade OpsCenter Server on the active node and then on the passive nodes. the database grows in size. 21. OpsCenter 7. Note that once you install and start using OpsCenter. Also in case OpsCenter components are installed on a dual stack IPv4 and IPv6 host. install OpsCenter on the NetBackup master server or media server (recommended). Table 2-9 Item 1. OpsCenter install and upgrade checklist for UNIX Task Ensure that you install OpsCenter software on a supported platform. See “About communication and firewall considerations” on page 247. Ensure that no other installation is in progress while you install OpsCenter. 8. See “About designing your OpsCenter Server” on page 108. 7. If you need to monitor a single master server. 3. 6. OpsCenter install and upgrade checklist for Windows (continued) Task You must not install OpsCenter components on an IPv6 system. Symantec recommends that you do not stop the installer forcefully while the OpsCenter upgrade is in progress.5 About planning an OpsCenter installation 127 Table 2-8 Item 20. Ensure that the OpsCenter Server does not have a symbolic link to the /opt directory.Installing Symantec OpsCenter 7. 5. Ensure that the fully qualified domain name (FQDN) of your OpsCenter Server has no more than 44 characters. ensure that the database directory has at least 20 MB of available space. Ensure that the necessary ports are opened before you install OpsCenter on a hardened server. the default IP must be IPv4 and the hostname of the system must be configured accordingly. See “ OpsCenter platform compatibility” on page 101. In addition. . For a new OpsCenter installation. Ensure that your OpsCenter Server is configured as a fixed host with a static IP address. Table 2-9 lists the things you must check before you install OpsCenter on a UNIX server.5 is not supported on an IPv6 system. and requires more space. 4. 2. In a clustered environment.

See “Backing up the OpsCenter database” on page 242. If you have Veritas Backup Reporter (VBR) or NetBackup Operations Manager (NOM) and want to upgrade to OpsCenter 7. 13. Symantec recommends that you reset the database password to original before performing the upgrade. ~.5. .0. If you plan to upgrade to OpsCenter 7. ensure that the available disk space is at least three times the database size. See “Supported upgrade paths” on page 110.5 is only compatible with Agent 7. OpsCenter install and upgrade checklist for UNIX (continued) Task Ensure that the name of the folder in which you install OpsCenter does not contain any special characters such as %.5 and View Builder 7. Install OpsCenter Server. &.5. or #. Before upgrading to OpsCenter 7. you must first upgrade to OpsCenter 7.5. 15. Agent. 11.x or 7.5 About planning an OpsCenter installation Table 2-9 Item 9. See “Changing the OpsCenter database administrator password” on page 231. Server 7.1.5. It is not possible to upgrade directly from VBR or NOM to OpsCenter 7.5. 14. @. Display language Location Check your respective OS documentation for more information on these parameters.x. and View Builder of the same versions. $. !. For example. This should be done before you upgrade to OpsCenter 7. Symantec recommends that you take a hot backup of the OpsCenter database (without stopping OpsCenter) using the dbbackup utility.5 and have changed the database password.5. ^. If you plan to upgrade to OpsCenter 7.128 Installing Symantec OpsCenter 7. 12. Ensure that the system on which the OpsCenter server is installed has valid values for the following OS parameters: ■ ■ 10.

After successful upgrade.5 Upgrade Portal: http://www. use the following procedure before you upgrade: 1 2 Create a directory (say temp) where the OpsCenter database is installed: <OpsCenterDatabaseCustomLocation>/temp.5 and have installed the OpsCenter database on a custom location.x to OpsCenter 7. and the OpsCenter components.Installing Symantec OpsCenter 7. PureDisk etc. If you plan to upgrade to NetBackup 7. it is recommended that you upgrade OpsCenter components first. By upgrading OpsCenter components before the backup and archiving product.5.5 About planning an OpsCenter installation 129 Table 2-9 Item 16. In case the free space on /tmp is less than size of the current OpsCenter database.0. If you plan to upgrade to OpsCenter 7.com/docs/TECH74584 17.5 installer. IBM TSM etc. unset the environment variable SATMP and remove the temp directory from <OpsCenterDatabaseCustomLocation>. You must perform upgrades in the following order: ■ ■ ■ ■ Upgrade the OpsCenter Agent Upgrade the OpsCenter Server Upgrade the OpsCenter View Builder Upgrade the backup or archiving product that you are using like NetBackup.x or 7. Backup Exec. OpsCenter can start collecting data from the backup or archiving product once it is added to the console. Use the following command to unset the SATMP variable: unset SATMP . The above order also holds true if you plan to upgrade only OpsCenter and not the backup or archiving product. Always upgrade the OpsCenter Agent first followed by the Server and the View Builder.1. ensure that the free space on /tmp is equal to or more than the size of current OpsCenter database.symantec. OpsCenter install and upgrade checklist for UNIX (continued) Task If you plan to upgrade both the backup and archiving product like NetBackup. visit the NetBackup 7. Export a variable named SATMP with the value of this variable as <OpsCenterDatabaseCustomLocation>/temp. EMC NetWorker.5 on UNIX” on page 166. See “Upgrading from OpsCenter 7. Use the following command: export SATMP=<OpsCenterDatabaseCustomLocation>/temp 3 4 Run the OpsCenter 7.

the default IP must be IPv4 and the hostname of the system must be configured accordingly. . See “About clustering Symantec OpsCenter” on page 193.5 in a clustered mode. Also in case OpsCenter components are installed on a dual stack IPv4 and IPv6 host. You can also upgrade from an earlier NOM. 19.130 Installing Symantec OpsCenter 7.5 on Windows and UNIX hosts.5 Installing Symantec OpsCenter on Windows and UNIX Table 2-9 Item 18. VBR. OpsCenter 7. OpsCenter install and upgrade checklist for UNIX (continued) Task You must not install OpsCenter components like Server. You can install OpsCenter 7. You can use this table as a checklist while installing Symantec OpsCenter. See “About upgrading to OpsCenter on Windows and UNIX” on page 158. Installing Symantec OpsCenter on Windows and UNIX This section describes the procedures for fresh installation of OpsCenter 7. or OpsCenter installation. or View Builder on an IPv6 system.5 is not supported on an IPv6 system. Table 2-10 provides steps to install OpsCenter components. In a clustered environment. first upgrade OpsCenter Server on the active node and then on the passive nodes. Agent.

upgrade. verify if OpsCenter is running properly. The three OpsCenter DVD's contain OpsCenter 7. See “About installing Symantec OpsCenter 7. Additionally after an installation is complete.3 file name creation is disabled. enable it and restart the Windows host before installing or upgrading to OpsCenter components. Go through the firewall settings and port number information. ■ See “Preparation for install or upgrade” on page 123. See “About communication and firewall considerations” on page 247.5 on UNIX” on page 137. you should wait for some time before installing other OpsCenter components. ■ See “ OpsCenter platform compatibility” on page 101.5 on Windows Use the Installation Wizard to install OpsCenter on a Windows host. Note: After installation.5 on Windows” on page 131.3 file name creation before installing OpsCenter components. ■ See “About planning an OpsCenter Agent deployment” on page 111. carefully. Review the Install/Upgrade checklists before installing OpsCenter. Review the following considerations before installing OpsCenter components on Windows: ■ Symantec recommends that you enable 8. If 8. Different sections are available for fresh installation. and clustering. You must not run any other installation while installing OpsCenter components. See “About upgrading to OpsCenter on Windows and UNIX” on page 158. and cluster Symantec OpsCenter Reference topic See “About planning an OpsCenter installation” on page 93. About installing Symantec OpsCenter 7. upgrade.Installing Symantec OpsCenter 7. ■ .5 Installing Symantec OpsCenter on Windows and UNIX 131 Table 2-10 Step number 1 Steps to install.5 software for all available platforms. Make sure that you satisfy the operating system requirements. See “About installing Symantec OpsCenter 7. ■ Step ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Review the hardware requirements and software requirements for OpsCenter Server and Agent hosts. Go through the Agent deployment section. ■ 2 Go through the appropriate installation section. See “About clustering Symantec OpsCenter” on page 193.

Note: In case you try to install OpsCenter 7. ■ ■ If autorun is enabled. This data would help Symantec to guide future product development and also analyze issues. . See “Installing Symantec OpsCenter Server on Windows” on page 132. the installer runs in a Maintenance mode.exe and press Enter: Where D is the DVD drive. The Symantec DVD Browser appears. You may opt to check or uncheck Participate in the NetBackup Product Improvement Program.5 components on a system where OpsCenter 7.132 Installing Symantec OpsCenter 7. insert the OpsCenter product DVD in the DVD drive. See “Installing Symantec OpsCenter Agent on Windows” on page 134. the Symantec DVD Browser appears. Click Next. click the Installation link. If you check this option. 3 4 5 6 On the Symantec DVD browser. Maintenance mode lets you repair or remove the OpsCenter component that is installed on your system. type D:\Browser. check I accept the terms of the license agreement and click Next. click Start > Run.5 Installing Symantec OpsCenter on Windows and UNIX Note: Symantec recommends that you do not cancel or interrupt the installation process once it is started. Read the license agreement. the installer uploads installation deployment and product usage information to Symantec automatically and in a secured manner.5 Server on Windows hosts. in the Open text box. On the Run dialog box. This option is checked by default. To install OpsCenter Server on Windows 1 2 On a Windows host where you want to install OpsCenter Server.5 is already installed. Click the OpsCenter Server Installation link to install Symantec OpsCenter server. Installing Symantec OpsCenter Server on Windows Use the following procedure to install Symantec OpsCenter 7. See “Installing Symantec OpsCenter View Builder on Windows” on page 135. If autorun is not enabled. The Symantec OpsCenter Installation Wizard appears.

Also compare the space that is required by the installation with the actual space available in the installation directory. The installer starts installing the OpsCenter Server software. In the Installation Method section. See “About managing licenses” on page 272.Installing Symantec OpsCenter 7. 8 On the License Keys panel. The installer shows the summary of the settings that you have selected for installation. This option is enabled if you have Veritas Cluster Server (VCS) installed. in a clustered mode. enter your demo or permanent key that you have received with the purchase of OpsCenter and click Add Key. or port numbers. Click Custom if you want to change the default settings. See “Clustering Symantec OpsCenter on Windows” on page 196. Check Save Summary to field to save the installation summary. Click Browse to save the installation summary in your preferred location. click Typical to use the default settings. or port numbers. 9 Click Next. See “Symantec OpsCenter Analytics license keys” on page 97. Select Install to this computer only.5 Installing Symantec OpsCenter on Windows and UNIX 133 7 The following options are displayed on the Installation Choice screen: Install to this computer only Select this option to install OpsCenter Server on this host. installation location. 10 Click Install. Click Next. You can also add the license keys later from the OpsCenter console. You need to install OpsCenter Server manually on each node of the cluster. See “Clustering Symantec OpsCenter Server on Solaris” on page 208. Note: The default OpsCenter database location on Windows is: C:\Program Files\Symantec\OpsCenter\server\db\data . locations. Install a clustered OpsCenter Select this option to install OpsCenter Server on all Server selected nodes.

See “About planning an OpsCenter Agent deployment” on page 111. If autorun is not enabled. type D:\Browser.OpsCenterServerMaintenanceInstallLog. click the Installation link. 2 3 On a Windows host where you want to install OpsCenter Agent. Installing Symantec OpsCenter Agent on Windows Use the following procedure to install Symantec OpsCenter Agent on a Windows host.5 Installing Symantec OpsCenter on Windows and UNIX 11 After successful installation. Click Next. click Start > Run.exe and press Enter: Where D is the DVD drive. ■ ■ If autorun is enabled. The Symantec DVD Browser appears. product host. or a separate host. 12 Click Finish. The installation logs are generated in the following location:%ALLUSERSPROFILE%\Symantec\OpsCenter\ INSTALLLOGS\OpsCenterServerInstallLog.134 Installing Symantec OpsCenter 7. On the Run dialog box. in the Open text box. 4 5 6 On the Symantec DVD Browser. insert the OpsCenter product DVD in the DVD drive. you can view the OpsCenter console or view installation logs. If you run the installer in a maintenance mode later. . To install OpsCenter Agent on Windows 1 You can install the OpsCenter Agent either on the OpsCenter Server host. review the information on Agent deployments.htm. the Symantec DVD Browser appears.htm is also generated in the same location. The Symantec OpsCenter Installation Wizard appears. Click the OpsCenter Agent Installation link to install OpsCenter Agent. To decide where you want to install the OpsCenter Agent.

You may opt to check or uncheck Participate in the NetBackup Product Improvement Program. 8 The default installation location is C:\Program Files\Symantec.5 Installing Symantec OpsCenter on Windows and UNIX 135 7 Read the license agreement.Installing Symantec OpsCenter 7. in the Open text box. 11 After successful installation.htm. On the Run dialog box. To install OpsCenter View Builder on Windows 1 2 On the OpsCenter Server host. Check Save Summary to field to save the installation summary. If you run the installer in a maintenance mode later. 9 The installer shows the summary of the settings that you have selected for Agent installation. The installer starts installation of OpsCenter Agent. The installation logs are generated in the following location:%ALLUSERSPROFILE%\Symantec\OpsCenter\INSTALLLOGS\OpsCenterAgentInstallLog. 12 Click Finish.exe and press Enter: Where D is the DVD drive. If you check this option. Click Next.OpsCenterAgentMaintenanceInstallLog. check I accept the terms of the license agreement and click Next. click Start > Run. This data would help Symantec to guide future product development and also analyze issues. Click Browse to save the installation summary in your preferred location. If autorun is not enabled. . ■ ■ If autorun is enabled. To install OpsCenter to a different directory. type D:\Browser. insert the OpsCenter product DVD in the DVD drive.htm is also generated in the same location. Installing Symantec OpsCenter View Builder on Windows Use the following procedure to install Symantec OpsCenter View Builder. 10 Click Install. the installer uploads installation deployment and product usage information to Symantec automatically and in a secured manner. This option is checked by default. you can view Agent installation logs or open the readme file. the Symantec DVD Browser appears. click Browse.

5 Installing Symantec OpsCenter on Windows and UNIX The Symantec DVD Browser appears. 11 After successful installation. The Symantec OpsCenter Installation Wizard appears. Click Next. 3 4 5 6 On the Symantec DVD Browser. Click Browse to save the installation summary in your preferred location. click Browse if you want to change the default location for Symantec OpsCenter View Builder installation. The installer shows the summary of the settings that you have selected for Symantec OpsCenter View Builder installation. If you check this option. This data would help Symantec to guide future product development and also analyze issues. The installer starts installation of Symantec OpsCenter View Builder. you can view the installation logs or open the readme file.OpsCenterViewBuilderMaintenanceInstallLog. 8 9 Select a new location and click Next.htm. The installation logs are generated in the following location:%ALLUSERSPROFILE%\Symantec\OpsCenter\ INSTALLLOGS\OpsCenterViewBuilderInstallLog. This option is checked by default. the installer uploads installation deployment and product usage information to Symantec automatically and in a secured manner. 12 Click Finish.htm is also generated in the same location. You may opt to check or uncheck Participate in the NetBackup Product Improvement Program. . 7 On the Installation Location screen. Note: The default installation location on a Windows 64-bit computer is C:\Program Files (x86)\Symantec. Read the license agreement. Check Save Summary to field to save the installation summary. If you run the installer in a maintenance mode later. check ‘I accept the terms of the license agreement’ and click Next. click the Installation link.136 Installing Symantec OpsCenter 7. 10 Click Install. Click the OpsCenter View Builder Installation link to install Symantec OpsCenter View Builder.

The installer also examines the system for existing packages.5 on UNIX 1 2 3 Open a UNIX console and log on as root on the target host. If you install OpsCenter on Solaris SPARC. OpsCenter GUI etc. Installing Symantec OpsCenter Server 7./install.5. 4 5 The Welcome message is displayed. select Server from the displayed options (Server and Agent). See “Installing Symantec OpsCenter Agent on UNIX” on page 140. Mount the appropriate OpsCenter product DVD on the computer where you are installing OpsCenter 7. OpsCenter Server. See “Installing Symantec OpsCenter Server 7. Press Enter to continue. Review this list and press Enter to continue. Select the appropriate OpsCenter DVD based on the platform on which you plan to install. The installer then checks if OpsCenter Server is installed on the system or not. It prompts you in case OpsCenter Server is already installed. The installer displays a list of components that get installed like PBX. Note: Symantec recommends that you do not cancel or interrupt the installation process once it is started.5 software on UNIX hosts.5 on UNIX This section provides you with the procedure to install OpsCenter on a UNIX host. You can install OpsCenter components from the OpsCenter DVD's. Type the following command: . Three DVD's for OpsCenter are available—one for Windows and two for UNIX. Press Enter to install OpsCenter Server.Installing Symantec OpsCenter 7. AT.5 on UNIX” on page 137.5 on UNIX Use the following procedure to install OpsCenter Server 7. 6 .5 Installing Symantec OpsCenter on Windows and UNIX 137 About installing Symantec OpsCenter 7. To install OpsCenter Server 7. Press Enter.

q] (y) If you type y and press Enter. press Enter without typing a directory path. . The installer prompts you with the following question: Participate in the NetBackup Product Improvement Program? [y.5 Installing Symantec OpsCenter on Windows and UNIX 7 The installer prompts you with the following question: Where do you want to install Symantec OpsCenter? </opt> Type a directory path where you want to install the Symantec OpsCenter Server packages and press Enter. To accept the default path (/opt).n. the installer uploads installation deployment and product usage information to Symantec automatically and in a secured manner. This data would help Symantec to guide future product development and also analyze issues. 8 9 Type y to confirm the directory path and press Enter.138 Installing Symantec OpsCenter 7.

The installer prompts for the following information: Specify a local directory for the Symantec OpsCenter database. press Enter without typing a directory path. 12 Review the installation options you selected.q] y Type y to confirm and press Enter. To specify an alternate directory.n. If you create an alternate database directory. the following information is displayed: Directory "/var/symantec" does not exist. Do you want to create the directory? [y. Type a directory path for the database server temporary space and press Enter. To accept the default database installation directory (/var/Symantec). In case the database installation directory (/var/symantec) does not exist on the host. .q] (n) To use the database installation directory for database server temporary space. The following information is displayed: The OpsCenter database server may require up to 1 GB of temporary space at runtime.5 Installing Symantec OpsCenter on Windows and UNIX 139 10 OpsCenter Server is installed on the system. The location of database directory and the database temp directory is also displayed. By default. (/var/symantec/) Type a directory path under which to install the OpsCenter database and press Enter. type y and press Enter. A directory named 'OpsCenterServer' will be created within the directory that you specify. press Enter without typing a directory path. temporary files will be created in the database installation directory /var/Symantec/OpsCenterServer 11 You are prompted with the following message: Would you like to use an alternate directory for database server temporary space? [y. the script creates the folder OpsCenterServer below your directory.Installing Symantec OpsCenter 7.n.

. The installer prompts you with the following: Please enter a Symantec OpsCenter Analytics license key or press <Return>: Enter a valid demo or permanent key that you have received with the purchase of OpsCenter and press Enter. This is because VRTSperl is not supported in local zones. you get an unlicensed version. Installing Symantec OpsCenter Agent on UNIX You can now install OpsCenter Agent in a local zone on UNIX platforms. you cannot access the licensed features.pkg 4 Once VRTSperl installation is complete. Type n and press Enter to repeat the configuration steps and revise your selection. See “Symantec OpsCenter Analytics license keys” on page 97. To install VRTSperl in a global zone on Solaris SPARC 1 2 Login to the global zone on the system. If you do not enter a key. You can also add the license keys later from the OpsCenter console. However if you are installing OpsCenter Agent in a local zone on Solaris SPARC.140 Installing Symantec OpsCenter 7.5 Installing Symantec OpsCenter on Windows and UNIX 13 Type y and press Enter to confirm the selection and continue. Navigate to the sol_sparc directory: cd <INSTALL_DIR>/Agent/pkgs/sol_sparc 3 Run the following command: /usr/sbin/pkgadd -d VRTSperl. Configuration changes are made to the system. 14 You are prompted for license information. login to the local zone and install the OpsCenter Agent. See “About managing licenses” on page 272. you must first install VRTSperl component in global zone. With the unlicensed version (Symantec OpsCenter). Use the following procedure to install OpsCenter Agent on UNIX.

Type a directory path where you want to install the Symantec OpsCenter Agent packages and press Enter.5 Installing Symantec OpsCenter on Windows and UNIX 141 To install OpsCenter Agent on UNIX 1 2 3 Open a UNIX console and log on as root on the target host. To accept the default path (/opt). Press Enter to install OpsCenter Agent. summary. The installer then checks if OpsCenter Agent is installed on the system or not. The Welcome message is displayed. It is optional to configure the OpsCenter Agent during installation. The installer displays a list of components that get installed like PBX. . the installer uploads installation deployment and product usage information to Symantec automatically and in a secured manner. You can view the installation log files. 12 The OpsCenter Agent is installed. Mount the appropriate OpsCenter product DVD on the computer where you plan to install OpsCenter Agent. 4 5 6 7 8 Select Agent from the displayed options (Server and Agent). Symantec WebGUI Agent etc. This data would help Symantec to guide future product development and also analyze issues. press Enter without typing a directory path. Press Enter. 10 Type y and then press Enter to confirm your installation options. To configure OpsCenterAgent now.Installing Symantec OpsCenter 7. type y and press Enter. Press Enter to continue.n./install. You may choose to configure OpsCenter Agent later either manually or by running /opt/VRTS/install/installOpsCenterAgent -configure command. Review this list and press Enter to continue. Type the following command: . 11 The installer prompts you with the following question: Participate in the NetBackup Product Improvement Program? [y. Note: The install OpsCenter Agent script is also present in the Solaris_Sparc64/Agent directory of the DVD. It prompts you in case OpsCenter Agent is already installed. 9 Enter the location where you want to install OpsCenter Agent. and response files on the path mentioned.q] (y) If you type y and press Enter.

You must create a response file first and then use the file to perform a silent installation. Navigate to <DVD Drive>\<Architecture>\Server directory. Insert the appropriate OpsCenter product DVD in the DVD drive. Note the following points about silent installation: ■ ■ Silent installation of OpsCenter is only supported on Windows platforms. See “About editing the response file” on page 154.142 Installing Symantec OpsCenter 7. See “About tracking the progress of silent installation” on page 155. Silent installation of OpsCenter is not supported on clusters. Open the command prompt on your system. The values that you specify in the Wizard pages are saved to the response file. Use a silent installation when you need to perform an identical installation on several servers. See “About editing the response file” on page 154. A silent installation uses a response file to automate OpsCenter installation. See “Installing OpsCenter Server software silently” on page 142. It also covers how you can track the progress of silent installation and some troubleshooting tips. Example: D:\x86\Server . To install OpsCenter server software silently 1 2 3 Log on as administrator to the system where you want to install OpsCenter server software. The procedure for creating a response file requires that you run through the Installation Wizard.5 Installing Symantec OpsCenter on Windows and UNIX About installing Symantec OpsCenter silently on Windows This section explains how you can install the OpsCenter components silently on Windows platform. Installing OpsCenter Server software silently A silent installation avoids the need for interactive input. You can also edit the response file if required.

Note: Click Custom if you want to change the default settings. This command starts the Installation Wizard where you can specify your preferences. you get an unlicensed version. .EXE -NoInstall Note that the switch -NoInstall is case-sensitive . 5 6 The Welcome panel of the Symantec OpsCenter Installation Wizard appears. If you check this option. locations. 10 The Installation Status panel is displayed. This data would help Symantec to guide future product development and also analyze issues. Click Next. Click Finish. or port numbers. See Symantec OpsCenter Administrator's Guide for licensing details. Read the license agreement. Also compare the space that is required by the installation with the actual space available in the installation directory. installation location. Click Next. 9 The installer shows the summary of the settings that you have selected for installation. This option is checked by default. Note that the Installation Wizard creates the response file based on your inputs and does not install the product. you cannot access the licensed features. Note that clicking Install does not install the product. 8 On the License Keys panel.Installing Symantec OpsCenter 7. enter your demo or permanent key that you have received with the purchase of OpsCenter and click Add Key. Click Browse to save the installation summary in your preferred location. click Typical to use the default settings. 7 Select Install to this computer only on the Installation Choice panel. the installer uploads installation deployment and product usage information to Symantec automatically and in a secured manner. Check Save Summary to field to save the installation summary. If you do not enter a key. Click Next. check I accept the terms of the license agreement and click Next. With the unlicensed version (Symantec OpsCenter). Click Install. or port numbers.5 Installing Symantec OpsCenter on Windows and UNIX 143 4 Enter the following command: SETUP. In the Installation Method section. You may opt to check or uncheck Participate in the NetBackup Product Improvement Program.

xml Note that the switches -Silent and -RespFile are case-sensitive . Open the command prompt on your system. Example: D:\x86\Agent .OpsCenterServerMaintenanceInstallLog. ensure that you are in the directory where SETUP. Insert the appropriate OpsCenter product DVD in the DVD drive.htm is also generated in the same location. If you run the installer in a maintenance mode later.XML is created at the following location: ‘%TEMP%\Symantec\OpsCenter This XML file can be used to install OpsCenter Server software on multiple computers. you can see Symantec OpsCenter Server in Add/Remove Programs. To install OpsCenter Agent silently 1 2 3 Log on as administrator to the system where you want to install OpsCenter Agent software. See the following section to track the progress of the installation. 13 Enter the following command to run the silent installation: SETUP -Silent -RespFile <path of the response file> Example: Setup -Silent -RespFile C:\Server-07-12-09-06-11-31.144 Installing Symantec OpsCenter 7.EXE is located. 12 On the command prompt. After successful installation.htm. Navigate to <DVD Drive>\<Architecture>\Agent directory.5 Installing Symantec OpsCenter on Windows and UNIX 11 A response file named Server-<DD-MM-YY-HH-MIN-SS>. 14 The installation logs are generated in the following location: %ALLUSERSPROFILE%\Symantec\OpsCenter\ INSTALLLOGS\OpsCenterServerInstallLog. See “About tracking the progress of silent installation” on page 155.

7 The default installation location is C:\Program Files\Symantec. 11 A response file named Agent-<DD-MM-YY-HH-MIN-SS>. This option is checked by default. Click Finish. This data would help Symantec to guide future product development and also analyze issues.Installing Symantec OpsCenter 7. Note that the Installation Wizard creates the response file based on your inputs and does not install the product.EXE -NoInstall Note that the switch -NoInstall is case-sensitive . the installer uploads installation deployment and product usage information to Symantec automatically and in a secured manner. To install OpsCenter to a different directory.5 Installing Symantec OpsCenter on Windows and UNIX 145 4 Enter the following command: SETUP. 5 6 The Symantec OpsCenter Installation Wizard appears. You may opt to check or uncheck Participate in the NetBackup Product Improvement Program. Click Next. 12 On the command prompt. Check Save Summary to field to save the installation summary. Click Next. check I accept the terms of the license agreement and click Next. Click Install. 9 10 The Installation Status panel is displayed. 8 The installer shows the summary of the settings that you have selected for Agent installation. This command starts the Installation Wizard where you can specify your preferences. Note that clicking Install does not install the product. Click Browse to save the installation summary in your preferred location.XML is created at the following location: %TEMP%\Symantec\OpsCenter This XML file can be used to install OpsCenter Agent software on multiple computers. .EXE is located. Read the license agreement. ensure that you are in the directory where SETUP. If you check this option. click Browse.

To install View Builder silently 1 2 3 Log on as administrator to the system where you want to install OpsCenter View Builder software. Open the command prompt on your system. See “About tracking the progress of silent installation” on page 155. Example: D:\x86\ViewBuilder 4 Enter the following command: SETUP. After successful installation. Note that the Installation Wizard creates the response file based on your inputs and does not install the product. If you run the installer in a maintenance mode later. Insert the appropriate OpsCenter product DVD in the DVD drive. Click Next.htm. .xml Note that the switches -Silent and -RespFile are case-sensitive . 5 The Symantec OpsCenter Installation Wizard appears.5 Installing Symantec OpsCenter on Windows and UNIX 13 Enter the following command to run the silent installation: SETUP -Silent -RespFile <path of the response file> Example: Setup -Silent -RespFile C:\Agent-07-12-09-06-11-31. you can see Symantec OpsCenter Agent in Add/Remove Programs. See the following section to track the progress of the installation.htm is also generated in the same location.EXE -NoInstall Note that the -NoInstall switch is case-sensitive .146 Installing Symantec OpsCenter 7. 14 The installation logs are generated in the following location: %ALLUSERSPROFILE%\Symantec\OpsCenter\ INSTALLLOGS\OpsCenterAgentInstallLog. Navigate to <DVD Drive>\<Architecture>\ViewBuilder directory. This command starts the Installation Wizard where you can specify your preferences.OpsCenterAgentMaintenanceInstallLog.

9 Click Install. . This data would help Symantec to guide future product development and also analyze issues. 11 A response file named ViewBuilder-<DD-MM-YY-HH-MIN-SS>. You may opt to check or uncheck Participate in the NetBackup Product Improvement Program. To install OpsCenter View Builder to a different directory. If you check this option. click Browse. Click Browse to save the installation summary in your preferred location.5 Installing Symantec OpsCenter on Windows and UNIX 147 6 Read the license agreement. 7 The default installation location is C:\Program Files\Symantec.EXE is located. Note: The default installation location on a Windows 64-bit computer is C:\Program Files (x86)\Symantec. Click Finish. This option is checked by default. Note that clicking Install does not install the product. 10 The Installation Status panel is displayed.Installing Symantec OpsCenter 7.XML is created at the following location: %TEMP%\Symantec\OpsCenter This XML file can be used to install OpsCenter View Builder software on multiple computers. 8 The installer shows the summary of the settings that you have selected for Symantec OpsCenter View Builder installation. Check Save Summary to field to save the installation summary. Click Next. 12 On the command prompt. check I accept the terms of the license agreement and click Next. ensure that you are in the directory where SETUP. the installer uploads installation deployment and product usage information to Symantec automatically and in a secured manner.

OpsCenterViewBuilderMaintenanceInstallLog. Navigate to <DVD Drive>\<Architecture>\Server directory.1.htm is also generated in the same location.5 Installing Symantec OpsCenter on Windows and UNIX 13 Enter the following command to run the silent installation: SETUP -Silent -RespFile <path of the response file> Example: Setup -Silent -RespFile C:\ViewBuilder-07-12-09-06-11-31. you can see Symantec OpsCenter View Builder in Add/Remove Programs. This command starts the Installation Wizard where you can specify your preferences.x or 7. To upgrade from OpsCenter 7.x Server or OpsCenter 7. 14 The installation logs are generated in the following location: %ALLUSERSPROFILE%\Symantec\OpsCenter\ INSTALLLOGS\OpsCenterViewBuilderInstallLog. After successful installation. If you run the installer in a maintenance mode later.x and 7. Upgrading silently from OpsCenter 7.1. Insert the appropriate OpsCenter DVD in the DVD drive.x Server to OpsCenter 7. Log on as administrator to the OpsCenter 7.xml Note that the switches -Silent and -RespFile are case-sensitive . Open the command prompt on your system.htm.5 Use the following procedures to upgrade to OpsCenter components silently. See “About tracking the progress of silent installation” on page 155.0. Note that the Installation Wizard creates the response file based on your inputs and does not install the product. ensure that you upgrade OpsCenter first before upgrading NetBackup.x to OpsCenter 7.5 Server 1 2 3 4 If you are using OpsCenter to monitor NetBackup.0.1.5. See the following section to track the progress of the installation.148 Installing Symantec OpsCenter 7.EXE -NoInstall Note that the -NoInstall switch is case-sensitive .x system that you want to upgrade to OpsCenter 7.0. Example: D:\x86\Server 5 Enter the following command: SETUP. .

A green checkmark appears in the Required column if there is adequate disk space. Click Yes to create the directory. installation location. Click Browse to specify a different location.1. Click Next.1. or port numbers while upgrading from OpsCenter 7.Installing Symantec OpsCenter 7. 9 Specify a location for saving the old OpsCenter 7.5. You cannot customize the default settings.x or 7. Click Next.1.1. you are prompted to create it. check I accept the terms of the license agreement and click Next. This option is checked by default.x database.0 In order to upgrade to a newer version.x (or 7. 8 In the Installation Method section.0. click Typical to use the default settings. Note: The Custom option is disabled when you upgrade from 7.0. If you check this option. the existing Symantec OpsCenter Server will be removed.x) to OpsCenter 7. Typical is selected by default.x on the system.x to OpsCenter 7. . Also compare the space that is required for installing OpsCenter server and the actual space that is available. This data would help Symantec to guide future product development and also analyze issues. The default location is C:\Program Files\Symantec\OpsCenter_SavedData.x or 7.x or 7. the following message may be displayed on the Welcome screen: The Installation has detected that the following software is already installed on your system: Symantec OpsCenter Server: Version 7.5 Installing Symantec OpsCenter on Windows and UNIX 149 6 The Installation Wizard detects an existing installation of OpsCenter 7.0. locations.0. the installer uploads installation deployment and product usage information to Symantec automatically and in a secured manner. Note: Ensure that the database location has adequate space by going through the Disk space requirements section on this page. or port numbers.5. In case the directory C:\Program Files\Symantec\OpsCenter_SavedData does not exist. You may opt to check or uncheck Participate in the NetBackup Product Improvement Program. For example. 7 Read the license agreement.

you can see Symantec OpsCenter Server 7.5 Installing Symantec OpsCenter on Windows and UNIX 10 On the License Keys panel.htm is also generated in the same location.150 Installing Symantec OpsCenter 7. Click Browse to save the installation summary in your preferred location. 15 Enter the following command to run the silent installation: SETUP -Silent -RespFile <path of the response file> Example: Setup -Silent -RespFile C:\Server-07-12-10-06-11-31. . 13 A response file named Server-<DD-MM-YY-HH-MIN-SS>. 11 The installer shows a summary of the installation settings. See “Symantec OpsCenter Analytics license keys” on page 97. 12 The Installation Status panel is displayed. Check Save Summary to option to save the installation summary. Click Install.XML is created at the following location: %TEMP%\Symantec\OpsCenter This XML file can be used to upgrade OpsCenter Server software on multiple computers. If you run the installer in a maintenance mode later.OpsCenterServerMaintenanceInstallLog. 14 On the command prompt. ensure that you are in the directory where SETUP. See “About tracking the progress of silent installation” on page 155.xml Note that the switches -Silent and -RespFile are case-sensitive . Note that clicking Install does not install the product. Click Next. After successful installation. Click Finish.htm. 16 The installation logs are generated in the following location: %ALLUSERSPROFILE%\Symantec\OpsCenter\ INSTALLLOGS\OpsCenterServerInstallLog. See the following section to track the progress of the installation. enter your demo or permanent key that you have received with the purchase of OpsCenter and click Add Key.5 in Add/Remove Programs.EXE is located.

. the existing Symantec OpsCenter Agent will be removed.0.0. check I accept the terms of the license agreement and click Next.x or 7. 6 The Symantec OpsCenter Installation Wizard appears.0 In order to upgrade to a to a newer version. You may opt to check or uncheck Participate in the NetBackup Product Improvement Program.5 Agent 1 2 3 4 If you are using OpsCenter to monitor NetBackup. 7 Read the license agreement.x Agent to OpsCenter 7. Navigate to <<DVD Drive>\Architecture>\Agent directory.x or 7.EXE -NoInstall Note that the -NoInstall switch is case-sensitive. This option is checked by default. Based on your installed OpsCenter Agent version.5 Installing Symantec OpsCenter on Windows and UNIX 151 To upgrade silently from OpsCenter 7. Click Next to continue. If you check this option. The Installation Wizard detects an existing installation of OpsCenter 7.x Agent on the system. Note that the Installation Wizard creates the response file based on your inputs and does not install the product. This data would help Symantec to guide future product development and also analyze issues. the following message may be displayed on the Welcome screen: The Installation has detected that the following software is already installed on your system: Symantec OpsCenter Agent: Version 7. ensure that you upgrade OpsCenter first before upgrading NetBackup.1.Installing Symantec OpsCenter 7. Example: D:\x86\Agent 5 Enter the following command: SETUP. This command starts the Installation Wizard where you can specify your preferences. Insert the appropriate OpsCenter DVD in the DVD drive.1. Open the command prompt on your system. Log on as administrator to the OpsCenter Agent system that you want to upgrade. the installer uploads installation deployment and product usage information to Symantec automatically and in a secured manner.

Click Finish.xml Note that the switches -Silent and -RespFile are case-sensitive .htm is also generated in the same location. . To upgrade silently from OpsCenter 7.x View Builder to OpsCenter 7.htm. If you run the installer in a maintenance mode later.1. 11 On the command prompt.x or 7. Insert the appropriate OpsCenter DVD in the DVD drive. See “About tracking the progress of silent installation” on page 155.x Agent software on multiple computers.5 View Builder 1 2 Log on as administrator to the OpsCenter View Builder system that you want to upgrade.x or 7. 9 The Installation Status panel is displayed.XML is created at the This XML file can be used to upgrade OpsCenter 7.0. See the following section to track the progress of the installation.OpsCenterAgentMaintenanceInstallLog.5 in Add/Remove Programs. ensure that you are in the directory where SETUP. 12 Enter the following command to run the silent installation: SETUP -Silent -RespFile <path of the response file> Example: Setup -Silent -RespFile C:\Agent-07-12-09-06-11-31.1.5 Installing Symantec OpsCenter on Windows and UNIX 8 The installer shows a summary of the settings that you have selected for Symantec OpsCenter Agent installation. Note that clicking Install does not install the product. you can see Symantec OpsCenter Agent 7. Click Install. 13 The installation logs are generated in the following location: %ALLUSERSPROFILE%\Symantec\OpsCenter\ INSTALLLOGS\OpsCenterAgentInstallLog. following location: %TEMP%\Symantec\OpsCenter\ 10 A response file named Agent-<DD-MM-YY-HH-MIN-SS>.EXE is located. Click Browse to save the installation summary in your preferred location.0.152 Installing Symantec OpsCenter 7. After successful installation. Check Save Summary to field to save the installation summary.

5 Installing Symantec OpsCenter on Windows and UNIX 153 3 Open the command prompt on your system. If you check this option. Note that the Installation Wizard creates the response file based on your inputs and does not install the product. This option is checked by default. 7 The installer shows a summary of the settings that you have selected for Symantec OpsCenter View Builder installation. Click Next to continue. This command starts the Installation Wizard where you can specify your preferences. Click Browse to save the installation summary in your preferred location.Installing Symantec OpsCenter 7. You may opt to check or uncheck Participate in the NetBackup Product Improvement Program. check I accept the terms of the license agreement and click Next. Click Install. Navigate to <DVD Drive>\<Architecture>\ViewBuilder directory. Check Save Summary to field to save the installation summary. . This data would help Symantec to guide future product development and also analyze issues.0 In order to upgrade to a to a newer version. Example: D:\x86\ViewBuilder 4 Enter the following command: SETUP. the existing Symantec OpsCenter View Builder will be removed. The Installation Wizard detects an existing OpsCenter View Builder and shows the following message on the Welcome panel: The Installation has detected that the following software is already installed on your system: Symantec OpsCenter View Builder: Version 7. the installer uploads installation deployment and product usage information to Symantec automatically and in a secured manner.EXE -NoInstall Note that the -NoInstall switch is case-sensitive . 6 Read the license agreement. 5 The Symantec OpsCenter Installation Wizard appears.

HYPERLINK \l "". 9 On the command prompt. The following are the contents of a sample response file: <?xml version="1.5 Installing Symantec OpsCenter on Windows and UNIX 8 A response file named ViewBuilder-<DD-MM-YY-HH-MIN-SS>.0" encoding="UTF-8" standalone="no" ?> . After successful installation. The silent installation is based on these inputs.XML is created at the following location: %TEMP%\Symantec\OpsCenter\ This XML file can be used to upgrade OpsCenter View Builder software on multiple computers. About editing the response file You can edit the response file to change any inputs that you provided to the Installation Wizard.htm. To edit the response file. or database directory in the response file.<XML_Install> . See the following section to track the progress of the installation.<OpsCenter_Server> <InstallProperty Name="RAN_SETUP" Value="1" /> <InstallProperty Name="SYMTMPPATH" Value="C:\DOCUME~1\ADMINI~1\LOCALS~1\Temp\1\ .OpsCenterViewBuilderMaintenanceInstallLog. For example. you can see Symantec OpsCenter View Builder in Add/Remove Programs. 10 Enter the following command to run silent installation: Setup -Silent -RespFile <path of the response file> Example: Setup -Silent -RespFile C:\ViewBuilder-07-12-10-06-11-31. ensure that you are in the directory where SETUP.htm is also generated in the same location.154 Installing Symantec OpsCenter 7.EXE is located. license key information.xml Note that the switches -Silent and -RespFile are case-sensitive . If you run the installer in a maintenance mode later. See “About tracking the progress of silent installation” on page 155. open it and modify the Value field for the applicable install property. 11 The installation logs are generated in the following location: %ALLUSERSPROFILE%\Symantec\OpsCenter\ INSTALLLOGS\OpsCenterViewBuilderInstallLog. you can modify the OpsCenter installation location.

You can also modify the database directory by modifying the value of the DATABASE_DATA_DIR property. This procedure must be performed after the silent installation ends.exe processes running in the Task Manager. you can see SETUP. You can also track if a silent installation is in progress by checking the size of Vxinst. See “Troubleshooting silent installation issues” on page 155. The Vxinst. you will also find multiple msiexec.log file. you can modify the OpsCenter installation location in this response file by changing the value of INSTALLDIR property from C:\Program Files\Symantec to D:\Symantec.Installing Symantec OpsCenter 7. You can also add a new license key by adding <TagValue>License key </TagValue> under <InstallProperty Name="BUSINESS_REP_LIC_KEYS" >. and STARTSERVICE properties.EXE process running in the Processes tab of the Windows Task Manager. Note: Symantec recommends that you do not change the value of RAN_SETUP.5 Installing Symantec OpsCenter on Windows and UNIX 155 <InstallProperty Name="TELEMETRY_UPLOAD" Value="YES" /> <InstallProperty Name="INSTALLHTMLLOGPATH" Value="C:\Documents and Settings <InstallProperty Name="BUSINESS_REP_LIC_KEYS" Value="0" /> <InstallProperty Name="SCMSTARTTYPE" Value="auto" /> <Installproperty Name="INSTALLPBX" Value="YES" /> <Installproperty Name="STARTSERVICE" Value="YES" /> <InstallProperty Name="INSTALLDIR" Value="C:\Program Files\Symantec\" /> <Installproperty Name="DATABASE_DATA_DIR" Value="C:\Program Files\Symantec\ </OpsCenter_Server> </XML_Install> For example. In addition. The size of Vxinst. About tracking the progress of silent installation When a silent installation is in progress. Note that the text that you enter or modify in the response file is case-sensitive. . Troubleshooting silent installation issues Use the following procedure to troubleshoot silent installation issues. INSTALLPBX.log file is generated in %ALLUSERSPROFILE%\SYMANTEC\OPSCENTER\INSTALLLOGS. SCMSTARTTYPE. Similarly you can edit the license key by changing the value of BUSINESS_REP_LIC_KEYS property. You must save the response file after you modify it.log file increases as silent installation progresses.

htm. navigate to the following location: %ALLUSERSPROFILE%\SYMANTEC\OPSCENTER\INSTALLLOGS. or View Builder.htm is not present. the same OpsCenterInstallLog.htm and check the timestamp and the OpsCenter component it is for to ensure that it is the appropriate log file. You must check the timestamp because OpsCenterInstallLog. see 7.5 Installing Symantec OpsCenter on Windows and UNIX To troubleshoot silent installation issues 1 After the silent installation ends. . 2 3 Check if a file named OpsCenterInstallLog. In addition. Agent. the timestamp is 01-19-2010.13:35:30: -Silent _RespFile "C:\Documents and Settings\Administrator\Agent-19-01-10-13-04-21. For example.xml" In this example. 4 You can check the timestamp by opening OpsCenterInstallLog.htm may have been generated as a result of previous silent installations. 13:35:30.htm is present.htm and seeing the first line in the file. If OpsCenterInstallLog. Hence you must check the specific OpsCenter component that is associated with OpsCenterInstallLog.htm file: 01-19-2010.htm file is generated when you install OpsCenter server.156 Installing Symantec OpsCenter 7. Open OpsCenterInstallLog. the following is the first line from a sample OpsCenterInstallLog.

Ignore the subsequent steps of this procedure. see 7.htm file.htm file to troubleshoot silent installation issues. You may also see a description about why the error occurred and troubleshoot accordingly. This file shows the installation status at the end. Installation errors are flagged in this file in red color. You will find matches when you search for OpsCenter Agent in the file. <Product> can be Server.htm file is present. This means that the log file is for OpsCenter View Builder. This means that the log file is for OpsCenter Agent. . search for the following keywords in the OpsCenterInstallLog. OpsCenter Agent OpsCenter View Builder Note: If you have checked the timestamp and the OpsCenter component associated with all present OpsCenterInstallLog. check if OpsCenter<Product>InstallLog. 6 Use the OpsCenterInstallLog. Open the OpsCenterInstallLog. or View Builder depending on the OpsCenter component that you are installing.htm is not present or you cannot find a valid OpsCenterInstallLog.htm files and do not find a valid OpsCenterInstallLog. Agent.htm file to see if the installation was successful or to understand why the installation failed. This means that the log file is for OpsCenter server.5 Installing Symantec OpsCenter on Windows and UNIX 157 5 To know the OpsCenter component the log file is associated with.Installing Symantec OpsCenter 7.htm file: OpsCenter Server You will find matches when you search for OpsCenter Server in the file. You will find matches when you search for OpsCenter View Builder in the file. 7 If OpsCenterInstallLog.htm. In OpsCenter<Product>InstallLog.htmfile.

5 About upgrading to OpsCenter on Windows and UNIX 8 Always ensure that the OpsCenter<Product>InstallLog.1.1 to OpsCenter 7.0.0 is renamed as media__summary report in OpsCenter 7. If there are special characters in a report name like (/ \ * ? | ") in OpsCenter 7. You can check the timestamp by opening the OpsCenter<Product>InstallLog.0. these special characters are replaced with an underscore '_' when you upgrade to OpsCenter 7.0.5 on Windows and UNIX platforms.0.5 on Windows and UNIX hosts.htm file to troubleshoot silent installation issues.x or 7.x to OpsCenter 7. This only applies if you are upgrading from OpsCenter 7.x or 7.0. . Review the following considerations before you upgrade: ■ An alert policy that you had created in OpsCenter 7.x to OpsCenter 7. See “About tracking the progress of silent installation” on page 155. 9 Use the OpsCenter<Product>InstallLog.5.x may not be visible when you upgrade to OpsCenter 7. the timestamp is 01-19-2010.0.htm file to see if the installation was successful or to understand why the installation failed.13:35:30: -Silent _RespFile "C:\Documents and Settings\Administrator\Agent-19-01-10-13-04-21.0. This file shows the installation status at the end. For example.x respectively.5. For example a media**summary report in OpsCenter 7. This happens if this policy was modified by some other user in OpsCenter 7.0.x or 7.x.xml" In this example.1.1.htm file is appropriate by checking the timestamp.5. You can open the OpsCenter<Product>InstallLog.0. About upgrading to OpsCenter on Windows and UNIX This section describes how you can upgrade from OpsCenter 7.x or 7. About upgrading from OpsCenter 7.5.0.1. ■ See “Upgrading from OpsCenter 7.1.x to OpsCenter 7.158 Installing Symantec OpsCenter 7.5 on Windows” on page 159.0. See “About upgrading from OpsCenter 7.1.1. 7. or 7.5 Use the following procedures to upgrade OpsCenter 7. 7. Installation errors are flagged in this file in red color. You may also see a description about why the error occurred and troubleshoot accordingly.x components to OpsCenter 7.htm file and seeing the first line of the file.htm file: 01-19-2010. 13:35:30.5” on page 158.x or 7.x or 7.1.1.x to OpsCenter 7. the following is the first line from a sample OpsCenter<Product>InstallLog.

1.1.5 on Windows hosts.0. Always upgrade the OpsCenter Agent first followed by the Server and the View Builder. NetBackup.5 on Windows Use the following procedure to upgrade OpsCenter 7.Installing Symantec OpsCenter 7.5.x or 7.0. ■ Symantec recommends that you enable 8. 2.x or 7. You must perform upgrades in the following order: Serial No. visit the NetBackup 7. 7. See “Upgrading from OpsCenter 7. Review the following considerations before installing OpsCenter components on Windows: ■ If you plan to upgrade both the backup and archiving product like NetBackup. Steps to upgrade 1. PureDisk etc.3 file name creation before installing OpsCenter components.5 on UNIX” on page 166.x to OpsCenter 7. Upgrading from OpsCenter 7.5 Upgrade Portal: http://www. .5 on UNIX” on page 166.1. EMC NetWorker. By upgrading OpsCenter components before the backup and archiving product.x to OpsCenter 7.1.1.symantec. 3.0.x or 7.x or 7. Backup Exec. IBM If you plan to upgrade to NetBackup TSM etc. 4.x or 7.5 on Windows” on page 159.x to OpsCenter 7. enable it and restart the Windows host before installing or upgrading to OpsCenter components.x to OpsCenter 7.0. OpsCenter can start collecting data from the backup or archiving product once it is added to the console. Upgrade the backup or archiving Refer to the appropriate product product that you are using like manuals.3 file name creation is disabled. Upgrade the OpsCenter Agent Upgrade the OpsCenter Server Upgrade the OpsCenter View Builder Reference See “Upgrading from OpsCenter 7.0. If 8.com/docs/TECH74584 The above order also holds true if you plan to upgrade only OpsCenter and not the backup or archiving product. it is recommended that you upgrade OpsCenter components first. and the OpsCenter components.5 About upgrading to OpsCenter on Windows and UNIX 159 See “Upgrading from OpsCenter 7.x components to OpsCenter 7.

exe and press Enter: Where D is the DVD drive.5 About upgrading to OpsCenter on Windows and UNIX ■ You must not run any other installation while installing OpsCenter components.5 components on a system where OpsCenter 7. insert the OpsCenter product DVD in the DVD drive. 4 5 6 On the Symantec DVD Browser. The Welcome panel of the Installation Wizard appears. always upgrade the OpsCenter Agent first followed by the Server and then the View Builder. you should wait for some time before installing other OpsCenter components.1. the Symantec DVD Browser appears. the installer runs in Maintenance mode. The Installation Wizard detects an existing installation of OpsCenter Agent 7.0. Additionally after an installation is complete. When upgrading OpsCenter. On a Windows host where you want to install OpsCenter Agent.5 on Windows 1 If you plan to upgrade your backup product and OpsCenter.1. click Start > Run.0 In order to upgrade to a to a newer version. Maintenance mode lets you repair or remove the OpsCenter 7. Click the OpsCenter Agent Installation link to install Symantec OpsCenter Agent 7.5 component that is installed on your system. click the Installation link. If autorun is not enabled. ensure that you upgrade OpsCenter first. in the Open text box.x (or 7.x or 7. .0. The Symantec DVD Browser appears. On the Run dialog box. ■ ■ 2 3 If autorun is enabled.160 Installing Symantec OpsCenter 7. Click Next to continue. the following message may be displayed on the Welcome screen: The Installation has detected that the following software is already installed on your system: Symantec OpsCenter Agent: Version 7. If you try to install OpsCenter 7. ■ ■ To upgrade from OpsCenter Agent 7.5. Symantec recommends that you do not cancel or interrupt the installation process once it is started.x to OpsCenter Agent 7.5 is already installed. type D:\Browser. the existing Symantec OpsCenter Agent will be removed. Depending on the installed version.x) on the system.

conf file that you may have made earlier must be performed manually again after you upgrade. check I accept the terms of the license agreement.xml file that you may have made earlier should be performed again manually. ■ 7 Read the license agreement. The log. any Agent configurations in the log. 32-bit Agent software is not supported on 64-bit Windows platforms.5. Click Next. You need to perform the following tasks after you upgrade to 64-bit OpsCenter Agent: ■ If 32-bit Agent software is upgraded to 64-bit.conf can be changing the Agent logging level etc. This option is checked by default. If 32-bit Agent software is upgraded to 64-bit software and the Agent is not installed on the OpsCenter Server. The OpsCenterAgentService.5 About upgrading to OpsCenter on Windows and UNIX 161 Note: The Installation Wizard automatically detects and installs 32-bit Agent software on 32-bit Windows platforms and 64-bit Agent software on 64-bit Windows platforms. all Agent tuning configurations in OpsCenterAgentService. the Installer automatically uninstalls the older 32-bit software and installs 64-bit Agent software. You may opt to check or uncheck Participate in the NetBackup Product Improvement Program. This data would help Symantec to guide future product development and also analyze issues. . If you check this option. the installer uploads installation deployment and product usage information to Symantec automatically and in a secured manner. Possible Agent configuration in log.Installing Symantec OpsCenter 7.xml file is used to specify how much memory is allocated for the Agent Java process and can be located in <INSTALL_PATH>\agent\bin.conf file is located in <INSTALL_PATH>\agent. If you have an existing 32-bit Agent installation on a 64-bit system and you install OpsCenter Agent 7.

always upgrade the OpsCenter Agent first followed by the Server and then the View Builder. Check Save summary to option to save the installation summary. in the Open text box.x or 7. On the Run dialog box. the Symantec DVD Browser appears.1. . you can view the installation logs or view the Readme. insert the appropriate OpsCenter product DVD in the DVD drive. If autorun is not enabled. ensure that you upgrade OpsCenter first.htm is also generated in the same location.htm Note: If you run the installer in a maintenance mode later. OpsCenterAgentMaintenanceInstallLog. 4 5 On the Symantec DVD Browser. click Start > Run. 9 After successful installation. Click Install to begin the installation. The installation logs are generated in the following location: %ALLUSERSPROFILE%\Symantec\OpsCenter\INSTALLLOGS\OpsCenterAgentInstallLog. Click Browse to save the installation summary in your preferred location. click the Installation link. To upgrade from OpsCenter Server 7. The installer installs OpsCenter Agent 7.0. Click Finish.x to OpsCenter Server 7. The Symantec DVD Browser appears.exe’ and press Enter: Where D is the DVD drive. Click the OpsCenter Server Installation link to install Symantec OpsCenter Server. On a Windows host where you want to install OpsCenter Server. When upgrading OpsCenter. type ‘D:\Browser. ■ ■ 2 3 If autorun is enabled.5 software.162 Installing Symantec OpsCenter 7.5 on Windows 1 If you plan to upgrade your backup product and OpsCenter.5 About upgrading to OpsCenter on Windows and UNIX 8 The installer shows the summary of the installation settings.

Installing Symantec OpsCenter 7. locations. Note: The Custom option is disabled when you upgrade from 7. Also compare the space that is required for installing OpsCenter Server and the actual space that is available.x) on the system.1.x (or 7. If you check this option.0. You cannot customize the default settings. or port numbers. Click Next. click Typical to use the default settings.0. . This option is checked by default. the existing Symantec OpsCenter Server will be removed.x (or 7.5.1.0 In order to upgrade to a newer version. 7 Read the license agreement.5 About upgrading to OpsCenter on Windows and UNIX 163 6 The Welcome panel of the Installation Wizard appears. The Installation Wizard detects an existing installation of OpsCenter Server 7. check I accept the terms of the license agreement. Click Next.x (or 7.5. You may opt to check or uncheck Participate in the NetBackup Product Improvement Program. This data would help Symantec to guide future product development and also analyze issues.x) to OpsCenter 7. Depending on the installed version.1. the following message may be displayed on the Welcome panel: The Installation has detected that the following software is already installed on your system: Symantec OpsCenter Server: Version 7.0. the installer uploads installation deployment and product usage information to Symantec automatically and in a secured manner. installation location. Click Next to continue. 8 On the Installation Choice panel.x) to OpsCenter 7. or port numbers while upgrading from OpsCenter 7. Typical is selected by default.

Click Browse to specify a different location. The installer installs OpsCenter Server 7.5 and click Add Key. Note: Ensure that the database location has adequate space by going through the Disk space requirements section on this page. Click Browse to save the installation summary in your preferred location. 11 The installer shows the summary of the installation settings.x or 7.5 software and also migrates data from OpsCenter 7. The installation logs are generated in the following location: %ALLUSERSPROFILE%\Symantec\OpsCenter\ INSTALLLOGS\OpsCenterServerInstallLog. In case the directory C:\Program Files\Symantec\OpsCenter_SavedData does not exist. The default location is C:\Program Files\Symantec\OpsCenter_SavedData.0.164 Installing Symantec OpsCenter 7.x to the OpsCenter 7.1. enter your demo or permanent key that you have received with the purchase of OpsCenter 7. A green checkmark appears in the Required column if there is adequate disk space. 12 After successful installation. Click Yes to create the directory. 10 On the License Keys panel. Click Install to begin the installation. .htm Note: If you run the installer in a maintenance mode later. Click Finish. See “Symantec OpsCenter Analytics license keys” on page 97.5 About upgrading to OpsCenter on Windows and UNIX 9 Specify a location for saving the old OpsCenter database. Check Save summary to option to save the installation summary. you can view the installation logs or view the Readme.htm is also generated in the same location. you are prompted to create it. The database migration may take some time based on the size of your database.5 database. OpsCenterServerMaintenanceInstallLog.

The Welcome panel of the Installation Wizard appears. This option is checked by default.1. . 4 5 6 On the Symantec DVD Browser.5. 7 Read the license agreement.1. ■ ■ 2 3 If autorun is enabled.x on the system.5 About upgrading to OpsCenter on Windows and UNIX 165 To upgrade from OpsCenter View Builder 7. type D:\Browser.x or 7. the following message is displayed on the Welcome panel: The Installation has detected that the following software is already installed on your system: Symantec OpsCenter View Builder: Version 7. click the Installation link. check I accept the terms of the license agreement. Depending on the installed version. When upgrading OpsCenter.0. If you check this option. in the Open text box. ensure that you upgrade OpsCenter first. On the Run dialog box. always upgrade the OpsCenter Agent first followed by the Server and then the View Builder. the existing Symantec OpsCenter View Builder will be removed. The Symantec DVD Browser appears. You may opt to check or uncheck Participate in the NetBackup Product Improvement Program. On a Windows host where you want to install OpsCenter View Builder. This data would help Symantec to guide future product development and also analyze issues. If autorun is not enabled. the installer uploads installation deployment and product usage information to Symantec automatically and in a secured manner.x or 7.exe and press Enter: Where D is the DVD drive. Click the OpsCenter View Builder Installation link to install Symantec OpsCenter View Builder 7.0.5 on Windows 1 If you plan to upgrade your backup product and OpsCenter. The Installation Wizard detects an existing installation of OpsCenter View Builder 7.x to OpsCenter View Builder 7.Installing Symantec OpsCenter 7. Click Next to continue. click Start > Run. the Symantec DVD Browser appears.0 In order to upgrade to a to a newer version. insert the OpsCenter product DVD in the DVD drive. Click Next.

166 Installing Symantec OpsCenter 7.0. See “Upgrading from OpsCenter 7.1. Mount the OpsCenter product DVD on the OpsCenter Agent 7.5 Agent on UNIX 1 If you plan to upgrade your backup product and OpsCenter. The installation logs are generated in the following location: %ALLUSERSPROFILE%\Symantec\OpsCenter\ INSTALLLOGS\OpsCenterViewBuilderInstallLog. always upgrade the OpsCenter Agent first followed by the Server and then the View Builder.htm Note: If you run the installer in a maintenance mode later.0.5 About upgrading to OpsCenter on Windows and UNIX 8 The installer shows the summary of the installation settings.5. ensure that you upgrade OpsCenter first. Note: Symantec recommends that you do not cancel or interrupt the installation process once it is started.x) computer that you want to upgrade to OpsCenter 7.5 software on UNIX hosts.0. Upgrading from OpsCenter 7.5 software. Click Browse to save the installation summary in your preferred location. The installer installs OpsCenter View Builder 7.x or 7.5” on page 158.x or 7.x Agent to OpsCenter 7.1. When upgrading OpsCenter.x to OpsCenter 7. 2 3 . See “About upgrading from OpsCenter 7.5 on UNIX Use the following procedure to upgrade from OpsCenter 7.1.x or 7.0.x or 7. Check Save summary to option to save the installation summary. Click Install to begin the installation. 9 After successful installation.1. Open a UNIX console and log on as root on the target host.x (or 7.1. OpsCenterViewBuilderMaintenanceInstallLog.0.x to OpsCenter 7.x to OpsCenter 7.5 on UNIX” on page 166. you can view the installation logs or view the Readme.htm is also generated in the same location.x to OpsCenter 7.0.x or 7.1. Click Finish. To upgrade from OpsCenter 7.

n.x) is installed.q] (y) If you type y and press Enter.x (or 7.x (or 7.5 About upgrading to OpsCenter on Windows and UNIX 167 4 Type the following command: . Press Enter.1. To upgrade from OpsCenter 7. 9 The installer prompts you with the following question: Participate in the NetBackup Product Improvement Program? [y.5. Symantec OpsCenter Agent etc. You can view the installation log and summary files on the path mentioned. select Server from the displayed options (Server and Agent). It then uninstalls packages with older versions and installs 7.0. If you install OpsCenter on Solaris SPARC.x Server to OpsCenter 7. Type the following command: . Press Enter to install OpsCenter Server. 2 3 4 5 6 The Welcome message is displayed./install. the installer uploads installation deployment and product usage information to Symantec automatically and in a secured manner. The installer also examines the system for existing packages.x) Server that you want to upgrade. The installer displays the packages that are installed like PBX. Press Enter to continue.1. Press Enter to install or upgrade these packages to 7. Mount the OpsCenter product DVD on the OpsCenter 7. always upgrade the OpsCenter Agent first followed by the Server and then the View Builder. 5 6 7 8 Select Agent from the displayed options (Server and Agent). The Welcome message is displayed. This data would help Symantec to guide future product development and also analyze issues. The installer checks if OpsCenter Agent is installed.5 is installed. ensure that you upgrade OpsCenter first. The installer then checks if OpsCenter Server is installed on the system or not. 10 OpsCenter Agent 7. .0.x or 7. The installer displays that OpsCenter Agent 7.0. Press Enter. Open a UNIX console and log on as root on the target host. Press Enter to install OpsCenter Agent.5 packages.1. Press Enter to continue.Installing Symantec OpsCenter 7. When upgrading OpsCenter. It prompts you in case OpsCenter Server is already installed./install.5 Server on UNIX 1 If you plan to upgrade your backup product and OpsCenter.

. OpsCenter GUI etc.5. 11 The installer prompts you with the following question: Participate in the NetBackup Product Improvement Program? [y.168 Installing Symantec OpsCenter 7.x) packages that are installed. press Enter.0.x (or 7. The installer prompts you with the following question: installOpsCenterServer is now ready to upgrade OPSCENTERSERVER.n.x or 7. This data would help Symantec to guide future product development and also analyze issues. (/var/symantec/) Type the directory name in which the existing OpsCenter 7. Are you sure you want to upgrade OPSCENTERSERVER? [y. To accept the default directory path (/var/symantec).0. 8 The installer displays a list of components that will be installed or upgraded like PBX. OpsCenter Server. the installer uploads installation deployment and product usage information to Symantec automatically and in a secured manner. The installer then installs or upgrades the older packages and installs OpsCenter 7. 10 The installer displays the OpsCenter 7.q] (y) If you type y and press Enter.1.q] (y) 9 Press Enter to continue and upgrade to OpsCenter 7.x database and configuration files can be saved and then press Enter.5 Server.n. AT.5 About upgrading to OpsCenter on Windows and UNIX 7 The following prompt is displayed: Where should the existing Symantec OpsCenter database and configuration files be backed up? An 'OpsCenterServer_backup' directory will be created within the directory that you specify to store these files. Review this list and press Enter to continue.1.

log is created after a few minutes in INSTALL_PATH/SYMCOpsCenterServer/db/log directory.Installing Symantec OpsCenter 7.x (or 7. 14 The database upgrade process starts. Configuration changes are made to the system.0. See “Upgrading from OpsCenter 7.1. See “About upgrading from OpsCenter 7.0.x to OpsCenter 7.x to OpsCenter 7. SYMCOpsCenterServer 7. Depending on the installed packages. This may take some time based on the database size. The database process may take time depending on your database size.x or 7. see dbManager_<timestamp>_. . A file named dbManager_<timestamp>_. 15 All the OpsCenter processes are started. the following message may be displayed: The following packages were found on the system.5 Server.x) packages that are installed.5.5 database.1. 13 OpsCenter 7.0 VRTSOpsCenterLegacyServer 7.log file in the OpsCenter Server database logs directory (. but OpsCenter requires VRTSOpsCenterLegacyServer 7. You can view this file to check the database upgrade status.5 on Windows” on page 159. but OpsCenter requires SYMCOpsCenterServer 7. data is migrated from the OpsCenter 7.x) database to the OpsCenter 7.0.0.0 The installer then uninstalls the older packages and installs OpsCenter 7.5 Server is installed. You can check the status of database upgrade.5.x or 7.0 was found on the system./db/log) after some time.5” on page 158. In this process.0.0.x (or 7.5 About upgrading to OpsCenter on Windows and UNIX 169 12 The installer displays the OpsCenter 7.0 was found on the system.0 SYMCOpsCenterGUI 7.1. To know the upgrade status. The following information is also displayed: ■ ■ Web URL to access OpsCenter console Location of install log and summary files.0.0 was found on the system. The following message is displayed: The database upgrade is in progress. However the package versions are older than the ones required by OpsCenter. but OpsCenter requires SYMCOpsCenterGUI 7.1.5..

domain>:8181/opscenter. it takes longer than usual time for the GUI to load. If the OpsCenter logon screen appears. If port 80 is not available. For example.170 Installing Symantec OpsCenter 7. Alternately type the following in the Web browser address bar: http://<server-host>/opscenter Note: By default.5 About post-installation tasks About post-installation tasks The following sections explain how to start using OpsCenter and includes some performance tuning tips for OpsCenter. if OpsCenter uses HTTP port 8181. .sh -status on UNIX hosts. OpsCenter can use a different port.bat -status on Windows hosts or <INSTALL_PATH>/SYMCOpsCenterWebGUI/bin/goodies/configurePorts. Verifying that Symantec OpsCenter is running properly After installing Symantec OpsCenter on either Windows or UNIX. To know the HTTP and HTTPS port that OpsCenter uses. OpsCenter tries to run on port 80 (HTTP). perform a check to verify that OpsCenter is running properly. you are ready to start using the OpsCenter console. To verify that OpsCenter is running properly 1 Use the URL that is presented at the end of the OpsCenter Server installation to access the OpsCenter console. the Web server. run the configurePorts utility. The first time you log on . Run INSTALL_PATH\OpsCenter\gui\bin\goodies\configurePorts. the OpsCenter Server. then use http://<host. See “About starting to use OpsCenter” on page 170. and the authentication service are running. See “About tuning OpsCenter for more performance” on page 171. 2 Log on as admin (user name) /password (password) on the private domain: OpsCenterUsers(vx) About starting to use OpsCenter After you complete the OpsCenter installation. See “About the start up tasks that OpsCenter performs” on page 171. See “Verifying that Symantec OpsCenter is running properly” on page 170.

For administrator initial logon. and NOM_MACHINES are created when OpsCenter server is installed. This topic provides an overview of the console components. console” on page 50. The following domains namely OpsCenterUsers. To change the password for the administrator logon. See “About installing OpsCenter on a Windows 64-bit platform” on page 172. and settings views and related tasks. managing. See “About using a Web browser to access OpsCenter” on page 172. After initial logon. reporting. ■ About tuning OpsCenter for more performance The following settings can be tuned to improve OpsCenter performance. Table 2-11 Task Topic Links to get you started with OpsCenter Topic Description This topic provides instructions on how to access the console and log on. OpsCenterServices. it is recommended that you change the user name and password. About the start up tasks that OpsCenter performs OpsCenter performs the following tasks when it starts for the first time. OpsCenter uses them. it performs the following tasks: ■ Creates and initializes the security domain that the authentication broker requires. See “Changing your OpsCenter password” on page 272. use the OpsCenter online Help . and provides solutions to possible issues.Installing Symantec OpsCenter 7. To learn more about using See “About using the OpsCenter For instructions on understanding and using the the OpsCenter console. various OpsCenter monitoring. OpsCenter console” on page 53. When OpsCenter starts. See “About OpsCenter console components” on page 70. Creates the OpsCenter admin user in the OpsCenterUsers domain with the default password as 'password'. the user name is admin and the password is password if you have chosen to keep the default password during installation. To access and log on to the See “About accessing the OpsCenter console.5 About post-installation tasks 171 Table 2-11 lists the common tasks in OpsCenter and contains links to the corresponding topics and descriptions. See “About adding master servers to OpsCenter” on page 172. . To learn about the OpsCenter console components. If these security domains are present.

About installing OpsCenter on a Windows 64-bit platform Symantec recommends that you install the OpsCenter server software on a supported Windows 64-bit platform for optimum performance. About using a Web browser to access OpsCenter Symantec recommends that you use Mozilla Firefox to access the OpsCenter console. go to Settings > Configuration > NetBackup in the OpsCenter console and then click the Data Collection Status tab on the page. Performance testing indicates that Mozilla Firefox works 1. Symantec recommends that you add them in groups of five in the following manner . See “Moving the OpsCenter database to a different hard disk” on page 174.172 Installing Symantec OpsCenter 7. To view the data collection status for a master server.5 About post-installation tasks See “About bandwidth utilization” on page 173. Once you add the first five master servers. The data collection status for a master server can be viewed from the Collection Status column.25 times faster than Microsoft Internet Explorer. These can be used as guidelines and should not be used as 100% accurate benchmarks. See “About known performance issues” on page 188. See “About purging data periodically” on page 188. Note: The information that is published in this section is based on the tests that have been performed in Symantec Lab in a controlled environment with expert users. See “About performance tuning guidelines” on page 173. . About adding master servers to OpsCenter If you need to add multiple master servers to the OpsCenter console. See “Adjusting the heap size for OpsCenter components” on page 179. See “Adjusting the OpsCenter database cache size” on page 184. then you should not add all of them at once. Symantec recommends that you add five master servers at one time. See “About saving the OpsCenter log files on a different drive” on page 176. wait until the initial data collection for these master servers is complete. if you have 20 master servers to be added. See “About OpsCenter performance and floating-point calculations” on page 188. For example. Performance testing indicates that OpsCenter runs fastest on a Windows 64-bit platform as compared to other Windows or UNIX platforms.5+5+5+5.

Increase the heap size of the OpsCenter Server in accordance with the RAM. About performance tuning guidelines You may want to tune OpsCenter to obtain incremental performance gains. Create report schedules such that the email or export happens in system idle time when OpsCenter is not accessed frequently. ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ . See “Adjusting the heap size for OpsCenter components” on page 179. Increase the database cache size in accordance with the RAM and database size. The following guidelines can help improve OpsCenter performance: ■ Install the OpsCenter database on a drive that is different from where OpsCenter server software and operating system is installed. This type of installs should be done only if the logging level is greater than 1. See “About OpsCenter database defragmentation” on page 233. See “Moving the OpsCenter database to a different hard disk” on page 174. You must perform defragmentation once in a month.5 About post-installation tasks 173 See “ OpsCenter platform compatibility” on page 101. This section describes important tuning parameters and settings that can result in improved performance.67 Kbps 10.000 Note: The system that was used for testing was a NetBackup 7.5 master server running Windows 2003 on a Xeon-64 processor that has 2 GB RAM and 1. Install the OpsCenter log files on a drive that is different from where OpsCenter server software and operating system is installed.381 Kbps 2500 More than 10. See “Adjusting the OpsCenter database cache size” on page 184.0 GbE LAN connection. About bandwidth utilization The following table lists the average bandwidth that is consumed when OpsCenter collects data from a master server. Symantec recommends that you defragment the OpsCenter database periodically.Installing Symantec OpsCenter 7. See “About saving the OpsCenter log files on a different drive” on page 176. Average Bandwidth used by OpsCenter Number of jobs per day 4.

174 Installing Symantec OpsCenter 7. To restart all OpsCenter services.db and symcOpscache. Restart all OpsCenter server services. Copy vxpmdb. If OpsCenter works as expected. &.db Make sure that you specify the path in double quotes.conf file with a text editor like notepad from the following directory: INSTALL_PATH\OpsCenter\server\db\conf This file has the following contents: INSTALL_PATH\OpsCenter\server\db\data\vxpmdb.db This path specifies the default location of the OpsCenter database. you can delete vxpmdb. !. To move the OpsCenter database to a different hard disk on Windows 1 Stop all OpsCenter server services. ~. replace the contents of the file with the following: E:\Database\vxpmdb. .5 About post-installation tasks ■ Purge the OpsCenter data periodically.conf file.db and symcOpscache. @. Open the command line and enter the following command: INSTALL_PATH\OpsCenter\server\bin\opsadmin. ^. See “About purging data periodically” on page 188. For example.db from INSTALL_PATH\OpsCenter\server\db\data to a location like E:\Database. 3 To move the database to a custom location like E:\Database.bat start 5 You should run and monitor OpsCenter for a certain period after moving the database. 4 Copy the database file to the new location. # etc. $. Moving the OpsCenter database to a different hard disk Use the following procedure to move the OpsCenter database to a different hard disk. The directories in the specified path should not contain any special characters like %.db from the default location (INSTALL_PATH\OpsCenter\server\db\data). enter the following command: INSTALL_PATH\OpsCenter\server\bin\opsadmin. do not specify a path like E:\Database%. Save the databases.bat stop 2 Open the databases.

always create a new directory named OpsCenterServer inside /usr/mydata by entering the following command: mkdir -p /usr/mydata/OpsCenterServer Symantec recommends that when you move the OpsCenter database to a custom location on UNIX. If OpsCenter works as expected. the database must be saved in a directory named OpsCenterServer inside the custom location: /CUSTOM_LOCATION/OpsCenterServer. enter the following command: ln -s <INSTALL_PATH>/SYMCOpsCenterServer/db/data /usr/mydata/OpsCenterServer 7 Restart all OpsCenter server processes by entering the following command: <INSTALL_PATH>/SYMCOpsCenterServer/bin/opsadmin. Enter the following command: cp –R <INSTALL_PATH>/SYMCOpsCenterServer/db/data /backup/data 3 To move the database to a custom location like /usr/mydata. Enter the following command: unlink <INSTALL_PATH>/SYMCOpsCenterServer/db/data 6 Create a symbolic link to /usr/mydata/OpsCenterServer in <INSTALL_PATH>/SYMCOpsCenterServer/db/data. Enter the following command: <INSTALL_PATH>/SYMCOpsCenterServer/bin/opsadmin.5 About post-installation tasks 175 To move the OpsCenter database to a different hard disk on UNIX 1 Stop all OpsCenter server processes. enter the following command: mv <INSTALL_PATH>/SYMCOpsCenterServer/db/data/* /usr/mydata/OpsCenterServer 5 Remove the symbolic link that exists for the OpsCenter database.db and symcOpscache.db from /backup/data.Installing Symantec OpsCenter 7. . you can delete vxpmdb.sh start You should run and monitor OpsCenter for a certain period after moving the database.sh stop 2 The default location of the OpsCenter database is <INSTALL_PATH>/SYMCOpsCenterServer/db/data. 4 To move the database to a custom location like /usr/mydata/OpsCenterServer. To create a symbolic link. Back up the OpsCenter database (<INSTALL_PATH>/SYMCOpsCenterServer/db/data) to some other location.

To check the debug level of logs 1 Navigate to the following location: Windows INSTALL_PATH\OpsCenter\server\bin\ or INSTALL_PATH\OpsCenter\Agent\bin\ UNIX <INSTALL_PATH>/SYMCOpsCenterServer/bin or <INSTALL_PATH>/SYMCOpsCenterAgent/bin 2 Enter the following command: vxlogcfg -l -p 58330 -o <OID> -q The following OID values must be used for OpsCenter components: OpsCenter Server OpsCenter Agent OpsCenter View Builder 148 146 147 . and the OpsCenter Web GUI components. The default debug level of OpsCenter logs is 1. This installation should be done only if the debug level of logs is greater than 1. Checking the debug level of logs You can check the debug level of OpsCenter logs by using the following procedure.5 About post-installation tasks About saving the OpsCenter log files on a different drive Symantec recommends that you install the OpsCenter log files on a drive that is different from where OpsCenter Server software and operating system is installed. OpsCenter Agent. See “Saving the log files to a different location on Windows” on page 177. You can control how OpsCenter writes log files for OpsCenter Server.176 Installing Symantec OpsCenter 7. see the following section. See “Saving the log files to a different location on UNIX” on page 178. To know the debug level of your logs. See “Checking the debug level of logs” on page 176.

OpsCenter writes VxUL logs to the following directories: OpsCenter Server OpsCenter Agent OpsCenter View Builder INSTALL_PATH\OpsCenter\server\logs INSTALL_PATH\OpsCenter\Agent\logs INSTALL_PATH\OpsCenter\gui\logs To save the log files for OpsCenter server in a different location 1 Enter the following command to save log files to a different location: INSTALL_PATH\OpsCenter\server\bin\vxlogcfg -a –p 58330 -o 148 -s LogDirectory="<New log directory location>" Note: 58330 is the OpsCenter product ID. .5 About post-installation tasks 177 Saving the log files to a different location on Windows Use the following procedures to save the log files for OpsCenter components in a different directory. Select Control Panel > Administrative Tools > Services and start the Symantec OpsCenter Agent Service. To save the log files for OpsCenter Agent in a different location 1 Enter the following command to save log files to a different location: INSTALL_PATH\OpsCenter\Agent\bin\vxlogcfg -a –p 58330 -o 146 -s LogDirectory="<New log directory location>" Note: 58330 is the OpsCenter product ID. By default.Installing Symantec OpsCenter 7. 2 3 Select Control Panel > Administrative Tools > Services and stop the Symantec OpsCenter Server Service. 146 is the OID for OpsCenter Agent. Select Control Panel > Administrative Tools > Services and start the Symantec OpsCenter Server Service. 2 3 Select Control Panel > Administrative Tools > Services and stop the Symantec OpsCenter Agent Service. 148 is the OID for OpsCenter server.

2 3 Select Control Panel > Administrative Tools > Services and stop the Symantec OpsCenter Web Server Service. 148 is the OID for OpsCenter server. Saving the log files to a different location on UNIX Use the following procedures to save the log files for OpsCenter components in a different location.178 Installing Symantec OpsCenter 7.5 About post-installation tasks To save the log files for OpsCenter Web GUI in a different location 1 Enter the following command to save log files to a different location: INSTALL_PATH\OpsCenter\server\bin\vxlogcfg -a –p 58330 -o 147 -s LogDirectory="<New log directory location>" Note: 58330 is the OpsCenter product ID. 147 is the OID for OpsCenter Web GUI. 2 Enter the following command to stop the OpsCenter server process: <INSTALL_PATH>/SYMCOpsCenterServer/bin/stopserver 3 Enter the following command to start the OpsCenter server process: <INSTALL_PATH>/SYMCOpsCenterServer/bin/startserver . OpsCenter writes VxUL logs to the following directories: OpsCenter Server OpsCenter Agent OpsCenter View Builder <INSTALL_PATH>/SYMCOpsCenterServer/logs <INSTALL_PATH>/SYMCOpsCenterAgent/logs <INSTALL_PATH>/SYMCOpsCenterGUI/logs To save the log files for OpsCenter server in a different location 1 Enter the following command to save log files to a different location: <INSTALL_PATH>/SYMCOpsCenterServer/bin/vxlogcfg -a -p 58330 -o 148 -s LogDirectory="<New log directory location>" Note: 58330 is the OpsCenter product ID. Select Control Panel > Administrative Tools > Services and start the Symantec OpsCenter Web Server Service. By default.

sh 3 Enter the following command to start the OpsCenter Web server process: <INSTALL_PATH>/SYMCOpsCenterServer/bin/startgui. Adjusting the default heap size for the OpsCenter server If the OpsCenter server processes are consuming a lot of memory (which may happen with large OpsCenter configurations). 147 is the OID for OpsCenter Web GUI. 2 Enter the following command to stop the OpsCenter Agent process: <INSTALL_PATH>/SYMCOpsCenterAgent/bin/stopagent 3 Enter the following command to start the OpsCenter server process: <INSTALL_PATH>/SYMCOpsCenterAgent/bin/startagent To save the log files for OpsCenter Web GUI in a different location 1 Enter the following command to save log files to a different location: <INSTALL_PATH>/SYMCOpsCenterServer/bin/vxlogcfg -a -p 58330 -o 147 -s LogDirectory="<New log directory location>" Note: 58330 is the OpsCenter product ID. You can . 2 Enter the following command to stop the OpsCenter Web server process: <INSTALL_PATH>/SYMCOpsCenterServer/bin/stopgui.sh Adjusting the heap size for OpsCenter components Use the following procedures to adjust the heap size for OpsCenter components. The OpsCenter Server default heap size can be increased from 1024 MB up to 1400 MB for 32-bit platforms. it may be helpful to increase the OpsCenter Server heap size.Installing Symantec OpsCenter 7. 146 is the OID for OpsCenter Agent. The OpsCenter Server default heap size can be increased from 2048 MB to a higher value (like 4096 MB) for 64-bit platforms.5 About post-installation tasks 179 To save the log files for OpsCenter Agent in a different location 1 Enter the following command to save log files to a different location: <INSTALL_PATH>/SYMCOpsCenterAgent/bin/vxlogcfg -a -p 58330 -o 146 -s LogDirectory="<New log directory location>" Note: 58330 is the OpsCenter product ID.

3 4 Save the OpsCenterServerService. Enter the following commands to first stop and then start all OpsCenter server services as follows: INSTALL_PATH\OpsCenter\server\bin\opsadmin. modify the -Xmx2048M value in the following string: <CmdArg value="-Xrs -Xmx2048M For example.bat start To adjust the default heap size on UNIX servers 1 Open startserver file from the following location: <INSTALL_PATH>/SYMCOpsCenterServer/bin 2 Modify the -Xmx2048M value in the following string: MAX_HEAP=-Xmx2048M For example. On 64-bit systems. replace -Xmx1024M with -Xmx1400M to increase the maximum heap size from 1024 MB to 1400 MB. To adjust the default heap size on Windows servers 1 Open OpsCenterServerService.xml file from the following location on the OpsCenter server: INSTALL_PATH\OpsCenter\server\bin 2 Modify the Xmx1024M value in the following string. .xml file.5 About post-installation tasks determine a higher value based on the physical (RAM) and virtual memory that is available on your system.bat stop INSTALL_PATH\OpsCenter\server\bin\opsadmin. <CmdArg value="-Xms512M -Xmx1024M For example. You must restart all OpsCenter server services for the changes to be effective. replace -Xmx2048 with -Xmx4096 to increase the maximum heap size from 2048 MB to 4096 MB.180 Installing Symantec OpsCenter 7. replace -Xmx2048M with -Xmx4096M to increase the maximum heap size from 2048 MB to 4096 MB.

5 About post-installation tasks 181 3 4 Save the startserver file. <EnvVar name="JAVA_OPTS" value="-Xrs -Xms512m -Xmx1024m For example.xml file to adjust the heap size. Note: If you start seeing poor performance in the OpsCenter console every few days and restarting the Symantec OpsCenter Web server service fixes the problem. You can determine a higher value based on the physical (RAM) and virtual memory that is available on your system. Enter the following commands to first stop and then start all OpsCenter server processes as follows: <INSTALL_PATH>/SYMCOpsCenterServer/bin/opsadmin.sh stop <INSTALL_PATH>/SYMCOpsCenterServer/bin/opsadmin. The OpsCenter Web server default heap size can be increased from 1024 MB to a higher value (like 2048 MB) for 64-bit platforms. you should increase the Web server default.Installing Symantec OpsCenter 7.xml file. You must restart all OpsCenter server processes for the changes to be effective. Note: This string may be listed twice in the OpsCenterGUIService.xml file from the following location on the OpsCenter server: INSTALL_PATH\OpsCenter\gui\bin\OpsCenterGUIService. replace -Xmx1024m with -Xmx1400m to increase the maximum heap size from 1024 MB to 1400 MB.xml 2 Modify the Xmx1024m value in the following string. To adjust the default heap size on Windows servers 1 Open OpsCenterGUIService. .sh start Adjusting the default heap size for the Symantec OpsCenter Web server The OpsCenter Web server default heap size can be increased from 1024 MB up to 1400 MB for 32-bit platforms. You can change the first occurrence of -Xmx1024m in the OpsCenterGUIService.

sh start Adjusting the default heap size for the OpsCenter Agent If the OpsCenter Agent processes are consuming a lot of memory (which may happen with large OpsCenter configurations). The OpsCenter Agent default heap size can be increased from 1024 MB up to 1400 MB for 32-bit platforms.182 Installing Symantec OpsCenter 7. You can determine a higher value based on the physical (RAM) and virtual memory that is available on your system.sh stop <INSTALL_PATH>/SYMCOpsCenterServer/bin/opsadmin... For example.bat start To adjust the default heap size on UNIX servers 1 Open startGUI file from the following location: <INSTALL_PATH>/SYMCOpsCenterGUI/bin 2 Modify the Xmx1024M value in the following string. 3 4 Save the startGUI file. Note: The OpsCenter Agent runs as a 32-bit application on 64-bit Windows platforms. . the OpsCenter Agent default heap size can be increased from 1024 MB up to 1400 MB for Windows 64-bit platforms.5 About post-installation tasks 3 4 Save the OpsCenterGUIService. JAVA_OPTS="-Xrs -d64 -Xms512M -Xmx1024m. Enter the following commands to first stop and then start all OpsCenter server processes as follows: <INSTALL_PATH>/SYMCOpsCenterServer/bin/opsadmin.xml file. it may be helpful to increase the OpsCenter Agent heap size. Enter the following commands to first stop and then start all OpsCenter server services as follows: INSTALL_PATH\OpsCenter\server\bin\opsadmin. replace -Xmx1024M with -Xmx1400M to increase the maximum heap size from 1024 MB to 1400 MB. You must restart all OpsCenter server services for the changes to be effective. Hence. The OpsCenter Agent default heap size can be increased from 1024 MB to a higher value (like 2048 MB) for 64-bit platforms. You must restart all OpsCenter server processes for the changes to be effective.bat stop INSTALL_PATH\OpsCenter\server\bin\opsadmin.

replace -Xmx1024M with -Xmx1400M to increase the maximum heap size from 1024 MB to 1400 MB. Select Control Panel > Administrative Tools > Services and stop the Symantec OpsCenter Agent Service.xml file. Enter the following commands to first stop and then start OpsCenter Agent process as follows: <INSTALL_PATH>/SYMCOpsCenterAgent/bin/stopagent <INSTALL_PATH>/SYMCOpsCenterAgent/bin/startagent . You must restart the OpsCenter Agent service for the changes to be effective. To adjust the default heap size on UNIX servers 1 Open startagent file from the following location: <INSTALL_PATH>/SYMCOpsCenterAgent/bin 2 Modify the Xmx1024M value in the following string.Installing Symantec OpsCenter 7.5 About post-installation tasks 183 To adjust the default heap size on Windows servers 1 Open OpsCenterAgentService. To restart the OpsCenter Agent service.xml file from the following location on the OpsCenter server: INSTALL_PATH\OpsCenter\Agent\bin 2 Modify the Xmx1024M value in the following string. <CmdArg value="-Xms512M -Xmx1024M For example. 3 4 Save the startagent file. You must restart the OpsCenter Agent process for the changes to be effective. first stop and then start the Symantec OpsCenter Agent Service. 3 4 Save the OpsCenterAgentService. replace -Xmx1024M with -Xmx2048M to increase the maximum heap size from 1024 MB to 2048 MB. 5 Select Control Panel > Administrative Tools > Services and start the Symantec OpsCenter Agent Service. MAX_HEAP=-Xmx1024M For example.

After you install OpsCenter. Symantec recommends that you adjust the Sybase cache size after installing OpsCenter.184 Installing Symantec OpsCenter 7. . You can also set the cache size using the -c server option. Sybase automatically adjusts the cache size for optimum performance. the database size can grow rapidly as you add more master servers.5 About post-installation tasks Adjusting the OpsCenter database cache size The amount of memory available for database server cache is an important factor in controlling OpsCenter performance.

bat stop INSTALL_PATH\OpsCenter\server\bin\opsadmin.log" should be changed to -n OPSCENTER_<hostname> -x tcpip(LocalOnly=YES. For example. -ch 512M indicates the maximum cache size.conf file: -n OPSCENTER_<HOST_NAME> -x tcpip(LocalOnly=YES. as a limit to automatic cache resizing. as a limit to automatic cache growth.ServerPort=13786) -gd DBA -gk DBA -gl DBA -gp 4096 -ti 0 -c 256M -ch 1024M -cl 256M -zl -os 1M -m -o "<INSTALL_PATH>\OpsCenter\server\db\log\server. replace -c 256M -ch 512M -cl 256M with -c 512M -ch 1G -cl 512M -cs in the sample server. to increase the cache size to 1 GB. as follows: INSTALL_PATH\OpsCenter\server\bin\opsadmin.bat start . to increase the cache size to 512 MB with a maximum of 1 GB. In the same manner.ServerPort=13786) -gd DBA -gk DBA -gl DBA -gp 4096 -ti 0 -c 256M -ch 512M -cl 256M -zl -os 1M -m -o "<INSTALL_PATH>\OpsCenter\server\db\log\server. The following default options appear: -n OPSCENTER_<HOST_NAME> -x tcpip(LocalOnly=YES.log" The -cs option logs the cache size changes for the database server.5 About post-installation tasks 185 To set the cache size using the -c server option on Windows servers 1 Open the <INSTALL_PATH>\OpsCenter\server\db\conf\server. -cl 256M indicates the minimum cache size.conf file. you should change -c256M -ch 512M -cl 256M to -c 1G -ch 2G -cl 1G -cs in the server. The default value is 256 MB.log" -c 256M indicates the initial memory reserved for caching database pages and other server information. The default minimum cache size is 256 MB.conf file.conf file.Installing Symantec OpsCenter 7.ServerPort=13786) -gd DBA -gk DBA -gl DBA -gp 4096 -ti 0 -c 512M -ch 1G -cl 512M -cs -zl -os 1M -m -o "<INSTALL_PATH>\server\db\log\server. Stop and restart the OpsCenter services. The default maximum cache size is 512 MB for 32-bit systems and 1024 MB for 64-bit systems. 2 3 Save the server.

186 Installing Symantec OpsCenter 7.5 About post-installation tasks To set the cache size using the -c server option on UNIX servers .

conf file to increase the cache size to 512 MB with a maximum of 1 GB. replace -c 256M -ch 512M -cl 256M with -c 512M -ch 1G -cl 512M -cs in the sample server.DOBROADCAST=NO. The default value is 256 MB. as a limit to automatic cache resizing.ServerPort=13786.BROADCASTLISTENER=0. The default maximum cache size is 512 MB for 32-bit systems and 1024 MB for 64-bit systems. In the same manner. The default minimum cache size is 256 MB.Installing Symantec OpsCenter 7.DOBROADCAST=NO.5 About post-installation tasks 187 1 Open the <INSTALL_PATH>/SYMCOpsCenterServer/db/conf/server. -cl 256M indicates the minimum cache size.) -gd DBA -gk DBA -gl DBA -gp 8192 -ti 0 -c 256M -ch 512M -cl 256M -zl -os 1M -m should be changed to: -n OPSCENTER_<HOST_NAME> -x tcpip (LocalOnly=YES.BROADCASTLISTENER=0.ServerPort=13786. For example.conf file: You can increase the Sybase cache size to 512 MB by changing the server.conffile and change the value of the -c option. -ch 512M indicates the maximum cache size.) -gd DBA -gk DBA -gl DBA -gp 8192 -ti 0 -c 256M -ch 512M -cl 256M -zl -os 1M -m -c 256M indicates the initial memory reserved for caching database pages and other server information. as a limit to automatic cache growth.BROADCASTLISTENER=0. The -cs option logs the cache size changes for the database server.) -gd DBA -gk DBA -gl DBA -gp 8192 -ti 0 -c 512M -ch 1G -cl 512M -zl -os 1M -m This example replaced -c 256M -ch 512M -cl 256M with -c 512M -ch 1G -cl 512M -cs in the server. you should change -c256M -ch 512M -cl 256M to -c 1G -ch 2G -cl 1G -cs in the server.DOBROADCAST=NO. The following default options appear: -n OPSCENTER_<HOST_NAME> -x tcpip (LocalOnly=YES.ServerPort=13786. . to increase the cache size to 1 GB and a maximum of 2 GB.conf file. The following: -n OPSCENTER_<HOST_NAME> -x tcpip (LocalOnly=YES. to increase the cache size to 512 MB with a maximum of 1 GB.conf file content.

Reports are slow and take a longer time to run. Stop and restart the OpsCenter processes.sh start About purging data periodically You should purge the OpsCenter data periodically. The following is a list of procedure-based reports: ■ ■ . If the server's processor does not have a dedicated floating-point unit. The OpsCenter database should be defragmented after a purge operation. Symantec recommends that you install OpsCenter server software on a Sun T2 server. Performance issues exist when the OpsCenter server software is installed on a Sun T1 server. Emulation mode slows down OpsCenter's performance. See “Configuring the data purge period on the OpsCenter Server” on page 274. as follows: <INSTALL_PATH>/SYMCOpsCenterServer/bin/opsadmin.conf file. the calculations are handled in floating-point emulation. If you have configured report schedules. the reports may reach later than the scheduled time. The issue of limited floating point capability on T1 servers has been resolved with the T2 servers. About OpsCenter performance and floating-point calculations Symantec OpsCenter performs certain calculations that require floating-point math.sh stop <INSTALL_PATH>/SYMCOpsCenterServer/bin/opsadmin.188 Installing Symantec OpsCenter 7. About known performance issues The following known issues may occur when the database size increases: ■ The performance of OpsCenter reports degrades. Symantec does not recommend running OpsCenter on any server that lacks a dedicated floating-point unit.5 About post-installation tasks 2 3 Save the server. See “Defragmenting the OpsCenter database” on page 234. Procedure-based reports may not run before timeout happens (in 30 minutes). Symantec recommends that you schedule procedure-based reports in such a scenario.

See “BMR client configuration backup failures report” on page 873. See “ Planning Activity > Capacity Planning > Historical Size report ” on page 750. See “Client summary dashboard report” on page 870. See “Clients Not Backed up report” on page 857. See “ Storage Unit Usage report” on page 907. See “Job Activity > Variance > File Count Variance report” on page 711. See “Disk and Tape Device Activity > Drive Throughput” on page 891. See “Planning Activity > Capacity Planning > Forecasted Size report ” on page 750. See “ Media Summary by Media Server report” on page 900. See “Job Activity > Variance > Backup Duration Variance report” on page 711.5 About post-installation tasks 189 Backup Job Size Variance See “Job Activity > Variance > Backup Job Size Variance report” on page 712. See “Virtual Client Summary report” on page 859. See “Variance > Throughput Variance” on page 709. Throughput Variance File Count Variance Backup Duration Variance BMR Client Configuration Backup Failures Clients Not Backed up Client Summary Dashboard Master Server Job Throughput Media Server Job Throughput Disk Usage Storage Unit Usage Media Summary by Media Server Virtual Client Summary Capacity Planning Historical Size Capacity Planning Forecasted Size Drive Throughput Drive Utilization . See “Disk and Tape Device Activity > Drive Utilization Report” on page 894. See “ Media Server Job Throughput report ” on page 914.Installing Symantec OpsCenter 7. See “ Master Server Job Throughput report” on page 908. See “ Disk Usage report” on page 915.

If a rollback occurs during an uninstall of OpsCenter. Close any NetBackup-Windows GUI consoles that are open before uninstalling OpsCenter components. Advanced Success Rate (was earlier named Daily Summary of Backup Activity) All Failed Backups Consecutive Failures Report All Jobs Client Risk Analysis Client Coverage About uninstalling Symantec OpsCenter on Windows and UNIX This section describes uninstallation procedures for OpsCenter on Windows and UNIX. Use setup. .5 on Windows” on page 190. Uninstalling Symantec OpsCenter 7.5 About uninstalling Symantec OpsCenter on Windows and UNIX Success Rate Line See “Status & Success Rate > Status > Success Rate Line report” on page 793. the keys are not removed from Add or Remove Programs dialog box.5 on UNIX ” on page 191. See “Risk Analysis > Client Risk Analysis report ” on page 843. Note: After a rollback. See “Uninstalling Symantec OpsCenter 7.190 Installing Symantec OpsCenter 7. See “ Planning Activity > Scheduled Job > All Jobs report” on page 766.exe to remove OpsCenter. ensure that NetBackup-Windows GUI is not running.5 on Windows Before uninstalling OpsCenter components. See “Status & Success Rate > Status > All Failed Backups report ” on page 788. You must remove OpsCenter. the keys are not recreated to display an entry in Add or Remove Programs dialog box. See “Status > Consecutive Failures” on page 788. See “Risk Analysis > Client Coverage report” on page 846. See “Uninstalling Symantec OpsCenter 7. See “Status & Success Rate > Success Rate > Advanced Success Rate report” on page 821.

click Symantec OpsCenter Server (64bit) and click Remove. In the Windows Control Panel. to uninstall OpsCenter on a UNIX host. click Add/Remove Programs. To uninstall Symantec OpsCenter Agent on Windows 1 2 3 4 Log on to the target host as a user with administrator privileges.5 on UNIX Use the Uninstall Script. Note: If you want to reinstall OpsCenter components. Click Symantec OpsCenter Server and click Remove. click Add/Remove Programs. In the Windows Control Panel.5 About uninstalling Symantec OpsCenter on Windows and UNIX 191 Use the Windows Add/Remove Programs utility to uninstall OpsCenter on a Windows host. In the Windows Control Panel. 4 Click Next to continue and remove Symantec OpsCenter Server from your computer. You cannot reinstall OpsCenter components using the install scripts in the opt/VRTS/install directory. To uninstall Symantec OpsCenter View Builder on Windows 1 2 3 4 Log on to the target host as a user with administrator privileges. Click Symantec OpsCenter View Builder and click Remove. click Add/Remove Programs. . Click Next to continue and remove Symantec OpsCenter Agent from your computer.Installing Symantec OpsCenter 7. To uninstall Symantec OpsCenter Server on Windows 1 2 3 Log on to the target host as a user with administrator privileges. which resides in the root directory of the product DVD and also in opt/VRTS/install directory. Click Next to continue and remove Symantec OpsCenter View Builder from your computer. Note: Symantec recommends that you do not cancel or interrupt the uninstallation process once it is started. Uninstalling Symantec OpsCenter 7. For Windows 64-bit systems. Click Symantec OpsCenter Agent and click Remove. use the product DVD.

Press Enter to cancel the uninstall procedure./uninstallOpsCenterAgent The Uninstall Script checks the components that are installed on the system. Press Enter to start the uninstall process. 4 When asked to confirm if you want to uninstall OpsCenter Server. Change to the following directory: opt/VRTS/install 3 Type the following command and press Enter: . it displays a summary of the uninstall.192 Installing Symantec OpsCenter 7. do one of the following: ■ Type y. The Uninstall Script stops all processes and then uninstalls the component packages. do one of the following: ■ Type y. 4 When asked to confirm that you want to uninstall OpsCenter Agent./uninstallOpsCenterServer The Uninstall Script checks the components that are installed on the system. When the uninstall is complete. ■ Type n. To uninstall OpsCenter Agent on UNIX 1 2 Open a UNIX console and log on as root on the target host.5 About uninstalling Symantec OpsCenter on Windows and UNIX To uninstall OpsCenter Server on UNIX 1 2 Open a UNIX console and log on as root on the target host. Change to the following directory: <INSTALL_PATH>/VRTS/install 3 Type the following command and press Enter: . Press Enter to start the uninstall process. Press Enter to cancel the uninstall procedure. . it displays a summary of the uninstall. When the uninstall is complete. ■ Type n. including the location of the uninstall log files. The Uninstall Script stops all processes and then uninstalls the component packages. including the location of the uninstall log files.

OpsCenter is shut down on the active node and starts on one of the failover nodes in the cluster. Table 2-12 lists the supported versions of VCS. Supported OS and cluster solutions An OpsCenter cluster is supported on Windows and Solaris platforms. Installing OpsCenter in a clustered environment makes OpsCenter a highly available application. OpsCenter Server must be installed on the active node and the passive (or failover nodes).1 4. users experience only a short interruption in service. two or more nodes are linked in a network and work collectively as a single system. When a failover occurs in an OpsCenter cluster.Installing Symantec OpsCenter 7. you must have Veritas Cluster Server (VCS) installed. During failover. In a cluster. Symantec OpsCenter (OpsCenter) operates in an active or passive failover configuration.3 .5. You can cluster only the OpsCenter Server.5 About clustering Symantec OpsCenter 193 About clustering Symantec OpsCenter The following sections describe how you can cluster OpsCenter 7. This failover provides high availability for OpsCenter.2 RP2 4. All nodes in a cluster are constantly aware of the status of resources on the other nodes.1 5. You can install an OpsCenter 7. Table 2-12 Platform VCS Windows VCS Solaris OpsCenter cluster support matrix Latest supported version Start of support 5. Each node can access the shared disks with the help of cluster software. resources running on that node migrate to an available node. If a node becomes unavailable. About a Symantec OpsCenter cluster Clusters provide high availability of applications and data to users.5 cluster on the following platforms: ■ ■ ■ ■ Windows 2008 R2 x64 Windows 2008 x86 and x64 Windows 2003 x86 and x64 Solaris SPARC 10 For Symantec OpsCenter to be clustered.

conf file" In addition. its value is equal to 1 and this means that PBX and AT are connected. Connecting Symantec Product Authentication Service and Symantec Private Branch Exchange An OpsCenter cluster requires that the authentication service and PBX components that are installed on the remote host are connected. After setting the value of pbxexchflag to 1. About running commands on the active node For a clustered OpsCenter server. the OpsCenter service group may failover if the command requires restarting the OpsCenter services. and restart services on a different system when hardware or software fails. Some OpsCenter commands or utilities like the support utility require restarting the services. The command may fail to run and may sometimes result in an unexpected behavior. you must run commands on the active node. You may get unexpected results if you run a command on an inactive node. With VCS you can monitor systems and application services. Note: The information in this section applies to OpsCenter clusters only. verify whether pbxexchflag of the authentication service is set or not. Before setting the value of pbxexchflag. When pbxexchflag is set. Use the following procedure to connect the authentication service and PBX components. . see the Veritas Cluster Server User's Guide.194 Installing Symantec OpsCenter 7. Symantec Product Authentication Service and Symantec Private Branch Exchange.5 About clustering Symantec OpsCenter VCS is a high-availability solution for cluster configurations. For example. To check if AT and PBX are connected. Note: Clustered OpsCenter is not supported on MSCS. For more information about VCS. you must stop all OpsCenter Server services. you must restart these services.bat E:\temp Result: "Could not find Z:\OpsCenter\server\config\db. running the dbbackup command on an inactive node may result in the following unexpected result: Command: E:\OpsCenter\server\bin>dbbackup.

If the value of pbxexchflag is 0. Verify if the value of pbxexchflag is 1. 3 Stop all the OpsCenter Server services by executing the following command: INSTALL_PATH\OpsCenter\server\bin\opsadmin. or Execute the following command in a command console: net stop vrtsat 5 Restart Symantec Product Authentication Service by performing either of the following steps: ■ ■ Use the start option in the Windows Service pane. See step 1.exe showispbxexchflag This command gives the value of pbxexchflag. Enter the following command at the bin directory to set the value of pbxexchflag: vssat.5 About clustering Symantec OpsCenter 195 To connect Symantec Product Authentication Service and Symantec Private Branch Exchange on Windows 1 Open the command prompt and enter the following command: INSTALL_PATH\Security\Authentication\bin\vssat. you do not need to follow the remaining steps.Installing Symantec OpsCenter 7. or Execute the following command in a command console: net start vrtsat 6 Restart all the OpsCenter Server services by performing the following steps: ■ Navigate to INSTALL_PATH\OpsCenter\server\bin directory.exe setispbxexchflag --enable The value of pbxexchflag is set to 1.bat stop 4 Stop Symantec Product Authentication Service by performing either of the following steps: ■ ■ Use the stop option in the Windows Service pane. . 2 Navigate to INSTALL_PATH\Security\Authentication\bin directory. you need to set it to 1. In case the value of pbxexchflag is 1.

5 About clustering Symantec OpsCenter ■ Restart all the OpsCenter Server services by executing the following command: opsadmin. If the value of pbxexchflag is 0. For example.sh stop 4 Stop Symantec Product Authentication Service by issuing kill command on the process ID of the vxatd service. you do not need to follow the remaining steps of this procedure.bat start To connect Symantec Product Authentication Service and Symantec Private Branch Exchange on Solaris 1 Open the command console and enter the following command: <INSTALL_PATH>/VRTSat/bin/vssat showispbxexchflag This command gives the value of pbxexchflag. if the process ID of vxatd service is 203. 3 Stop all the OpsCenter Server services by entering the following command: <INSTALL_PATH>/SYMCOpsCenterServer/bin/opsadmin. run the following command: kill 203 5 Run the following command to restart Symantec Product Authentication Service: <INSTALL_PATH>/VRTSat/bin/vxatd 6 Run the following command to restart all the OpsCenter Server services: <INSTALL_PATH>/SYMCOpsCenterServer/bin/opsadmin. . 2 Enter the following command at the bin directory to set the value of pbxexchflag: <INSTALL_PATH>/VRTSat/bin/vssat setispbxexchflag --enable The value of pbxexchflag is set to 1. you need to set it to 1.196 Installing Symantec OpsCenter 7. In case the value of pbxexchflag is 1.sh start Clustering Symantec OpsCenter on Windows This section provides information about installing Symantec OpsCenter in a clustered mode. on a Windows host. Follow step 1 of this procedure to verify if the value of pbxexchflag is 1.

2 Make sure that you have met all prerequisites. Note that an OpsCenter 7.symantec.Installing Symantec OpsCenter 7.x cluster can be upgraded to an OpsCenter 7.0.5 cluster. ■ Verify that VCS and OpsCenter support your hardware.5 and AT on a remote Windows host” on page 199.com Verify that the supported version of VCS is correctly installed and configured. For VCS Windows 4. See “Installing Symantec OpsCenter Agent 7. the ■ ■ . Limitations of Symantec OpsCenter cluster on Windows An OpsCenter cluster has the following limitations: ■ Only the OpsCenter Server can be clustered. Upgrades from previous versions of NOM or VBR to clustered OpsCenter Server is not supported.OpsCenter Agent and the OpsCenter View Builder cannot be clustered.2 versions.5 About clustering Symantec OpsCenter 197 Table 2-13 provides the Windows clustering steps. visit the following Web site: http://entsupport. Table 2-13 Step 1 OpsCenter clustering steps Description Understand the limitations of an OpsCenter cluster Reference topic See “Limitations of Symantec OpsCenter cluster on Windows” on page 197. See “Prerequisites for Symantec OpsCenter cluster on Windows” on page 197. For a list of supported storage devices.1. 3 Install OpsCenter 7.5. Follow the steps in the Veritas Cluster Server Installation Guide. ■ ■ ■ Prerequisites for Symantec OpsCenter cluster on Windows This section contains information about the requirements that must be met before you install and configure OpsCenter in a clustered mode. ensure that the patch available through Technote 278307 is installed before installing OpsCenter.x or 7. For OpsCenter. on a Windows host. OpsCenter cluster cannot co-exist with any other Symantec product running in secure mode using the Symantec Product Authentication Service. OpsCenter does not support clustered AT.

5 About clustering Symantec OpsCenter supported VCS version starts from 4.198 Installing Symantec OpsCenter 7. ping the IP address and verify that the IP address is not plumbed. Before installing OpsCenter Server. Verify that you have an IP address and host name (virtual host name) to be assigned to the OpsCenter resource in VCS. The SharedDisk must be configured and accessible to all cluster nodes where you want to install OpsCenter. verify that the cluster disk groups and dynamic volumes for OpsCenter are created on the shared storage.2 RP2. Verify that you can mount the disk. For a Windows cluster. see the Symanetc Infrastructure Core Services Installation Guide. ensure that Symantec OpsCenter Agent 7.5 (PBX) and AT on the remote host: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Symantec recommends that you first install OpsCenter Agent 7.5 (PBX) and then install AT from the OpsCenter 7. PBX is installed when you install OpsCenter 7. Verify that you have the OpsCenter installation program and a valid license key. AT must be installed in a non-clustered mode. AT can be installed in Root + AB or AB mode on the remote host. For more information about installing AT. ■ ■ ■ AT must be installed separately (and not along with OpsCenter) on the remote host.com/docs/278307 This Technote is applicable to OpsCenter. Also. The virtual host name must be the short name and less than 15 characters. The patch is available from the following URL: http://entsupport. Only use these for the OpsCenter resource.5 DVD.5 (PBX) and Symantec authentication service (AT) Server are installed separately on a remote host.symantec. . ■ Verify that no VCS resource group and resource exist with the same name as that which you intend to use for OpsCenter.5 Agent. Verify that all VCS services are up and running on all the nodes in the cluster. Note the following points about installing OpsCenter Agent 7. Refer to theVeritas Storage Foundation Administrator’s Guide for details. Verify that OpsCenter installation is carried out with the domain admin account.

Note: Symantec Product Authentication Service is installed when you install Veritas Cluster Server.5 on the remote host. Note: OpsCenter does not support clustered AT.5.5 (PBX) and Symantec Product Authentication Service (AT) are installed on a standalone host.5 and AT. You must install the version of AT Service that is shipped with OpsCenter 7. You must upgrade to the version of authentication service that is shipped with OpsCenter 7. See “Installing Symantec OpsCenter Agent on Windows” on page 134. You can either configure AT in root + authentication broker (Root + AB) mode or authentication broker (AB) mode. you need to create a principal user on the AT host. Use the credentials of this user when installing OpsCenter Server. Clustered OpsCenter Server uses this authentication broker. Symantec recommends that you configure AT in a 'Root+AB' mode. To establish a connection between AT host and OpsCenter Server host.5 DVD. Installing Symantec OpsCenter Agent 7.Installing Symantec OpsCenter 7.5 About clustering Symantec OpsCenter 199 ■ Verify that authentication service and PBX components on the remote host are connected. before OpsCenter can be clustered.symantec. See “Connecting Symantec Product Authentication Service and Symantec Private Branch Exchange” on page 194.com/docs/336967 The OpsCenter Agent 7.5. To install Symantec OpsCenter Agent and AT on a remote Windows host 1 2 Log on to the remote host where you want to install OpsCenter Agent 7.5. Install OpsCenter Agent 7. see the following technote for the latest information: http://entsupport.5 and AT on a remote Windows host OpsCenter Server requires that OpsCenter Agent 7.5 and AT can be installed on the remote host using the following procedure. Note: In case of updates made to AT for OpsCenter 7. . Symantec recommends that you first install OpsCenter Agent 7.5 and then install AT from the OpsCenter 7.

exe is executed. Note that you should not cluster the AT service.5 on a Windows cluster 1 2 On an active cluster node where you want to install OpsCenter server.5 DVD. ■ ■ If autorun is enabled. first install the OpsCenter Server on the active node and then on the passive nodes. you need to install OpsCenter Server manually on all the nodes. To install OpsCenter Server 7. in the Open text box. . If autorun is not enabled. the Symantec OpsCenter Installation Wizard appears. click the Installation link.exe. The default location on 32-bit Windows platforms is: %Program Files%\VERITAS\Security\Authentication The default location on 64-bit Windows platforms is: %ProgramFiles(x86)%\VERITAS\Secruity\Authentication Installing OpsCenter Server 7. See Symantec Infrstructure Core Services Installation Guide for more information about the VxSSVRTSatSetup. The VxSSVRTSatSetup. you must install and configure OpsCenter in a clustered mode.5 About clustering Symantec OpsCenter 3 Install AT from the OpsCenter 7. Also. Click Symantec Product Authentication Service. the Symantec OpsCenter Installation Wizard appears.5 on a Windows cluster To cluster OpsCenter and make it highly available. type D:\Browser. 7 Create a principal user on the AT host using the following command: AT_INSTALL_DIR/bin/vssat addprpl --prplname <principal name> --password <principal name password> --pdrtype ab --domain broker --prpltype service --is_broker_admin --is_domain_admin AT_INSTALL_DIR is the directory where AT is installed. The Symantec OpsCenter Installation Wizard appears. ■ If autorun is enabled.200 Installing Symantec OpsCenter 7. Note: To install OpsCenter Server in clustered mode. click Start > Run. 4 5 6 On the Symantec OpsCenter Installation Wizard. insert the OpsCenter DVD in the DVD drive.exe and press Enter: Where D is the DVD drive. as OpsCenter does not support clustered AT. On the Run dialog box. Click Next.

You need to install OpsCenter Server manually on each node of the cluster. type D:\Browser. in the Open text box.5 About clustering Symantec OpsCenter 201 ■ If autorun is not enabled. Read the license agreement. You may opt to check or uncheck Participate in the NetBackup Product Improvement Program. Click the OpsCenter Server Installation link to install Symantec OpsCenter server. . 7 Select Install a clustered OpsCenter Server to install OpsCenter Server in clustered mode. click Typical to use the default settings and installation location. This option is checked by default. This option is enabled if you have Veritas Cluster Server (VCS) installed. This data would help Symantec to guide future product development and also analyze issues. click Start > Run. the installer uploads installation deployment and product usage information to Symantec automatically and in a secured manner.exe and press Enter: Where D is the DVD drive. check I accept the terms of the license agreement and click Next.Installing Symantec OpsCenter 7. click the Installation link. Note: Click Custom if you want to change the default settings and locations. 8 In the Installation Method section. Click Next. The Symantec OpsCenter Installation Wizard appears. 3 4 5 6 On the Symantec OpsCenter Installation Wizard. On the Run dialog box. Also compare the space that is required for installation with the actual space available in the installation directory. If you check this option. Click Next.

202 Installing Symantec OpsCenter 7. See “About the OpsCenter licensing model” on page 95. The license keys that are already installed on the system are also displayed in the box that is shown on this panel. Note: Ignore this step if you are installing OpsCenter on a passive node. . enter the following details of a principal user to connect to the host where AT authentication broker (Root + AB or AB) is installed: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Authentication service host name Authentication service port number (2821 is the default port number) Authentication service user name Authentication service Password Authentication service Domain Name (broker is the default domain name) Note: You must have this principal user created on the authentication broker (AB) host. The license type information is also shown along with the key. 10 Click Next. The Cluster Settings panel is displayed. See “Installing Symantec OpsCenter Agent 7.5 and AT on a remote Windows host” on page 199.5 About clustering Symantec OpsCenter 9 On the License Keys panel. See “About managing licenses” on page 272. 11 On the Authentication Settings panel. 12 Click Next. More information about licenses is available. enter the demo or permanent key that you have received with the purchase of OpsCenter and click Add Key. The Authentication Settings panel is displayed. Note: You can also add the license keys from the OpsCenter console.

0 Select the shared drive path that you have configured in VxVM. Enter the IP address that assigned to the OpsCenter cluster Enter the subnet mask . The installer shows the summary of the settings that you have selected for OpsCenter Server installation. Click Browse to save the installation summary in your preferred location. Virtual host Name Virtual IP address Subnet mask Path to Shared data Public Network Note: While installing OpsCenter on a passive node.Installing Symantec OpsCenter 7. only Public Network option is enabled. You can select different public network for passive nodes. Z:\ Select LAN as a public network.252. For example. the default OpsCenter database location on Windows is the following location on the shared drive: OpsCenter\Server\db . enter the following information: Cluster Group Name Enter the name for the OpsCenter cluster. For example: Oc_cluster. Check Save Summary to field to save the installation summary. For example: 255.5 About clustering Symantec OpsCenter 203 13 On the Cluster Settings panel. The virtual host name must be the short name and less than 15 characters. 15 Click Install.255. For example: OpsCenter_Server Enter the virtual host name that is assigned to the OpsCenter cluster. 14 Click Next. In a clustered mode. The installer starts installing the OpsCenter Server software.

click the Installation link. insert the OpsCenter DVD in the DVD drive. first install the OpsCenter 7.x or 7.x cluster to OpsCenter 7. you can view the OpsCenter console or view installation logs. Repeat this procedure for all the cluster nodes.x cluster to OpsCenter 7. you need to install OpsCenter Server manually on all the nodes.0.5 cluster Use the following procedure to upgrade from OpsCenter 7.5 cluster on Windows 1 2 From the active node of the OpsCenter 7. Use the following command: hares -online <resource name> -sys <Name of the active node> Example: hares -online newonelatest-OpsCenter -sys OPS-CLUSTER-1 Upgrading from OpsCenter 7.x or 7.1.x) cluster that you want to upgrade. Click Next. You can bring the NetBackupOpsCenterVCS resource online from the CLI or by using the cluster GUI. Note: After installing an OpsCenter cluster on Windows 2008 R2 x64 system. the Symantec OpsCenter Installation Wizard appears.5 Server on the active node and then on the passive nodes.exe and press Enter: Where D is the DVD drive.1. you need to manually bring the NetBackupOpsCenterVCS resource online. ■ ■ If autorun is enabled.1.5 cluster on Windows. The Symantec OpsCenter Installation Wizard appears.x or 7. . If autorun is not enabled.x (or 7. in the Open text box. Click the OpsCenter Server Installation link to install Symantec OpsCenter server. Note: To upgrade to OpsCenter 7. type D:\Browser. On the Run dialog box.5 Server in a clustered mode. 17 Click Finish.0.1. Also.0. click Start > Run. 3 4 5 On the Symantec OpsCenter Installation Wizard. To upgrade from OpsCenter 7.5 About clustering Symantec OpsCenter 16 After successful installation.x cluster to OpsCenter 7.0.204 Installing Symantec OpsCenter 7.

x) to OpsCenter 7.x (or 7. 7 Read the license agreement. 9 In the Installation Method section.1. or port numbers while upgrading from OpsCenter 7. the existing Symantec OpsCenter Server will be removed. This option is enabled if you have Veritas Cluster Server (VCS) installed. This option is checked by default. the installer uploads installation deployment and product usage information to Symantec automatically and in a secured manner.x to 7. You need to install OpsCenter Server manually on each node of the cluster.0 (or 7. .Installing Symantec OpsCenter 7. locations. Note: The Custom option is disabled when you upgrade from OpsCenter 7. You cannot customize the default settings. If you check this option.0 In order to upgrade to a newer version. Typical is selected by default.1.0.0. 8 Select Install a clustered OpsCenter Server to install OpsCenter Server in clustered mode.0x or 7. Also compare the space that is required for installation with the actual space available in the installation directory. the following message may be displayed on the Welcome panel: The Installation has detected that the following software is already installed on your system: Symantec OpsCenter Server: Version 7.5 About clustering Symantec OpsCenter 205 6 The Welcome panel of the Installation Wizard appears. Click Next to continue.5.1) on the system. check I accept the terms of the license agreement and click Next. This data would help Symantec to guide future product development and also analyze issues.5. The Installation Wizard detects an existing installation of OpsCenter Server 7. You may opt to check or uncheck Participate in the NetBackup Product Improvement Program. Depending on the installed version. click Typical to use the default settings and installation location. Click Next.

The default location is C:\Program Files\Symantec\OpsCenter_SavedData. The license type information is also shown along with the key. Note: You can also add the license keys from the OpsCenter console.5 About clustering Symantec OpsCenter 10 Specify a location for saving the old OpsCenter database. In case the directory C:\Program Files\Symantec\OpsCenter_SavedData does not exist. 12 Click Next. See “About the OpsCenter licensing model” on page 95. A green checkmark appears in the Required column if there is adequate disk space. Click Browse to specify a different location. This option is disabled. This option is disabled. Click Yes to create the directory. 13 On the Cluster Settings panel. enter the following information: Cluster Group Name Virtual host Name Virtual IP address Subnet mask Path to Shared data Public Network This option is disabled. 11 On the License Keys panel. Select LAN as a public network. The Cluster Settings panel is displayed. you are prompted to create it. Note: Ensure that the database location has adequate space by going through the Disk space requirements section on this page. The license keys that are already installed on the system are also displayed in the box that is shown on this panel. This option is disabled.206 Installing Symantec OpsCenter 7. More information about licenses is available. See “About managing licenses” on page 272. This option is disabled. . You can select different public network for active and passive nodes. enter the demo or permanent key that you have received with the purchase of OpsCenter and click Add Key.

Repeat this procedure for the passive nodes. click Add/Remove Programs. Click Browse to save the installation summary in your preferred location. Note: In clustered mode. you can view the OpsCenter console or view installation logs. To unistall Symantec OpsCenter Server completely from the cluster 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Log on to the active node as a user with administrator privileges. 15 Click Install. The installer shows the summary of the settings that you have selected for OpsCenter Server installation. Click Symantec OpsCenter Server and click Remove. Right-click the OpsCenter resource group and select Offline > All Systems. Use the following procedure to uninstall OpsCenter from all the cluster nodes. Click the Service Groups tab in the Cluster Explorer configuration tree. Click Yes to forcefully take the resource group offline.5 from the Windows cluster Use the Windows Add/Remove Programs utility to uninstall OpsCenter Server from a Windows cluster. Check Save Summary to field to save the installation summary. Log on to the cluster Web GUI. the default OpsCenter database location on Windows is the following location on the shared drive: OpsCenter\Server\db 16 After successful installation. In the Windows Control Panel. The installer starts installing the OpsCenter Server software. Click Next to continue and remove Symantec OpsCenter Server from your computer. Uninstalling Symantec OpsCenter 7.Installing Symantec OpsCenter 7.5 About clustering Symantec OpsCenter 207 14 Click Next. Right-click the selected cluster monitor panel and click Explorer View from the menu to access Cluster Explorer. 17 Click Finish. .

on a Solaris host. See “Deleting OpsCenter resource group from the cluster” on page 208.208 Installing Symantec OpsCenter 7. Clustering Symantec OpsCenter Server on Solaris This section provides information about installing OpsCenter Server in a clustered mode. See “Prerequisites for Symantec OpsCenter cluster on Solaris” on page 209. Table 2-14 Step 1 OpsCenter Server clustering steps Description Understand the limitations of an OpsCenter cluster Reference topic See “Limitations of Symantec OpsCenter cluster on Solaris” on page 209. . 2 Make sure that you have met all prerequisites. Click Yes to forcefully take the resource group offline. Right-click the OpsCenter resource group and select Delete. To delete OpsCenter resource group from the cluster 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Log on to the cluster Web GUI.5 About clustering Symantec OpsCenter 10 Uninstall OpsCenter software from all the nodes. Click the Service Groups tab in the Cluster Explorer configuration tree.5 from the Windows cluster” on page 207. Right-click the selected cluster monitor panel and click Explorer View from the menu to access Cluster Explorer. Right-click the OpsCenter resource group and select Offline > All Systems. See “Uninstalling Symantec OpsCenter 7. Repeat steps 7 through 9 for all the passive nodes. These must be removed manually. 11 Delete the OpsCenter resource groups manually. Click Yes to delete the OpsCenter resource group. Table 2-14 provides the Solaris clustering steps. Deleting OpsCenter resource group from the cluster Use the following procedure to delete OpsCenter resource group from the cluster. Note that the installer does not remove the OpsCenter resource groups.

■ ■ ■ ■ Prerequisites for Symantec OpsCenter cluster on Solaris The following requirements must be met before you install and configure a Symantec OpsCenter failover server: ■ Verify that VCS and OpsCenter support your hardware. Upgrades from previous versions of NOM or VBR to clustered OpsCenter Server is not supported.symantec.x) cluster to an OpsCenter 7. OpsCenter cluster cannot co-exist with any other Symantec product running in secure mode using the Symantec Product Authentication Service. ■ ■ ■ ■ .1. See “Installing Symantec OpsCenter Server in a clustered mode on Solaris” on page 213. For a list of supported storage devices. Verify that no VCS resource group and resource exist with the same name as that which you intend to use for OpsCenter.5 cluster.0. OpsCenter does not support clustered AT. a Symantec OpsCenter Server installation” on page 211.5. Install OpsCenter 7. 4 Limitations of Symantec OpsCenter cluster on Solaris An OpsCenter cluster has the following limitations: ■ Only the OpsCenter Server can be clustered. Only use these for the OpsCenter resource. In a Solaris cluster.com Verify that the supported version of VCS is correctly installed and configured on Solaris.5 About clustering Symantec OpsCenter 209 Table 2-14 Step 3 OpsCenter Server clustering steps (continued) Description Reference topic Make sure that your preinstallation See “Preinstallation checklist for checklist is complete. Verify that you have an IP address and host name (virtual name) to be assigned to the OpsCenter resource in VCS. The SharedDisk must be configured and accessible to all cluster nodes where you want to install OpsCenter.Installing Symantec OpsCenter 7. Follow the steps in the Veritas Cluster Server Installation Guide. visit the following Web site: http://entsupport.x (or 7.OpsCenter Agent and OpsCenter View Builder cannot be clustered. the Search broker is not a clustered component and is not monitored by the NetBackupOpsCenterAgent. You can upgrade from OpsCenter 7.

5 (PBX) and Symantec Product Authentication Service (AT) are installed on a standalone host. You can either configure AT in root + authentication broker (Root + AB) mode or authentication broker (AB) mode. ■ ■ Verify that you can mount the disk.5 About clustering Symantec OpsCenter Also. before OpsCenter can be clustered. see the Symanetc Infrastructure Core Services Installation Guide. You must install the version of AT Service that is shipped with OpsCenter 7. Note the following points about installing OpsCenter Agent 7.5 and AT on a remote host OpsCenter Server requires that OpsCenter Agent 7.210 Installing Symantec OpsCenter 7. you need to create a . For more information about installing AT. ping the IP address and verify that the IP address is not plumbed. See “Connecting Symantec Product Authentication Service and Symantec Private Branch Exchange” on page 194. ■ ■ ■ AT must be installed separately (and not along with OpsCenter) on the remote host. Installing Symantec OpsCenter Agent 7.5 DVD.5. ensure that Symantec OpsCenter Agent 7. Clustered OpsCenter Server uses this authentication broker. AT must be installed in a non-clustered mode.5 DVD.5 (PBX) and AT on the remote host: ■ ■ ■ Symantec recommends that you first install OpsCenter Agent 7. Symantec recommends that you configure AT in a 'Root+AB' mode. Before installing OpsCenter Server. PBX is installed when you install OpsCenter 7. Symantec recommends that you first install OpsCenter Agent 7. Verify that OpsCenter Server installation is carried out with the domain admin account. To establish a connection between AT host and OpsCenter Server host.5 Agent.5 and then install AT from the OpsCenter 7.5 (PBX) and then install AT from the OpsCenter 7. AT can be installed in Root + AB or AB mode on the remote host. Verify that you have the OpsCenter installation program and a valid license key.5 (PBX) and Symantec authentication service (AT) Server are installed separately on a remote host. ■ Verify that the authentication service and PBX components are connected.

5 DVD. See “Installing Symantec OpsCenter Agent on UNIX” on page 140. Note: The configuration utility unless specified.Installing Symantec OpsCenter 7. Navigate to the ICS directory: cd ICS 4 Invoke the .5 and AT. The installics menu is displayed. Note: OpsCenter does not support clustered AT.5 About clustering Symantec OpsCenter 211 principal user on the AT host. 5 Select 1 to install AT. Preinstallation checklist for a Symantec OpsCenter Server installation The OpsCenter Server requests certain cluster-related information during installation. mount the OpsCenter 7. You must upgrade to the version of authentication service that is shipped with OpsCenter.5 and AT can be installed on the remote host using the following procedure. Note: Symantec Product Authentication Service is installed when you install Veritas Cluster Server. Use the credentials of this user when installing OpsCenter Server. The following information is required for all VCS cluster configurations.5 on the remote host using the OpsCenter 7. . Answer y to enable Private Branch Exchange (PBX) support in authentication broker server./installics script from the ICS directory. Install OpsCenter Agent 7. OpsCenter Agent 7.5 DVD. See Symantec Infrstructure Core Services Installation Guide for more details on using the installics script. To install Symantec OpsCenter Agent 7. 3 To install AT.5 and AT on a remote host 1 2 Log on to the remote host where you want to install OpsCenter Agent 7. Fill out the checklist before you begin installation. Note that you must enable PBX support for the authentication broker server. treats all attribute values globally.

212 Installing Symantec OpsCenter 7.---------------------------------------.------------------------------------------------------------------------------.------------------------------------------------------------------------------.---------------------------------------. Resource Disk group resource: Disk group : -------------------------------------Start volumes: ----------------------------------Stop volumes: ----------------------------------Volume resource: (optional) Volume: ------------------------------------------Mount resource: Mount point : -----------------------------------Block device: ----------------------------------FS Type: -----------------------------------------Mount option: ---------------------------------Fsck option: ------------------------------------/opt/VRTSnbu /dev/vx/dsk/opsdg/opsvol vxfs (optional) (if you add other options.5 About clustering Symantec OpsCenter Virtual Name for NetBackup: IP address : Subnet mask Node Name IP address ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Network device name (NIC) ---------------------------------------.---------------------------------------. Review the scenario that is described. -y is also required) opsvol opsdg 0 or 1 0 or 1 Example .---------------------------------------- Installation checklist for aSymantec OpsCenter installation with VCS The following information is required if you use VCS with VxVM.

Note: To install OpsCenter Server in clustered mode. The installer also examines the system for existing packages. Stop the volume the mount point is on and deport the disk group for that volume on all nodes of the cluster. Review this list and press Enter to continue. Press Enter to install OpsCenter Server. To install OpsCenter Server in clustered mode on Solaris 1 Fill out the checklist for all configurations and the checklist for your specific environment. 2 3 4 Open a Solaris console and log on as root on the target host. The installer then checks if OpsCenter Server is installed on the system or not. See “Preinstallation checklist for a Symantec OpsCenter Server installation” on page 211. Symantec Database etc. The installer displays a list of components that are installed like PBX. Press Enter. If applicable. you must install and configure OpsCenter in a clustered mode. It prompts you in case OpsCenter is already installed. Press Enter to continue. Select Server from the displayed options (Server and Agent).5 About clustering Symantec OpsCenter 213 Installing Symantec OpsCenter Server in a clustered mode on Solaris To cluster OpsCenter and make it highly available. Mount the OpsCenter product DVD for the appropriate platform on which you are installing OpsCenter Server. unmount the OpsCenter shared mount point. 5 Type the following command:.Installing Symantec OpsCenter 7. Make sure that the shared disk is not mounted on any node in the cluster. you need to install OpsCenter Server manually on all the nodes. first install the OpsCenter Server on the active node and then on the passive nodes. 8 ./install. 6 7 The Welcome message is displayed. Symantec WebGUI Server. Also.

q] (y) If you type y and press Enter. information of already created NetBackup OpsCenter cluster group is displayed. ■ . then install OpsCenter Server in /opt on the secondary nodes as well. You are prompted to join the group.5 About clustering Symantec OpsCenter 9 The installer prompts you with the following question: Where do you want to install Symantec OpsCenter? </opt> Type a directory path where you want to install the Symantec OpsCenter Server packages and press Enter.214 Installing Symantec OpsCenter 7. 10 Type y to confirm the directory path and press Enter. When you install OpsCenter Server on the subsequent nodes. a confirmation prompt is displayed. To accept the default path (/opt). the installer uploads installation deployment and product usage information to Symantec automatically and in a secured manner.n. 12 When OpsCenter Server is installed on the clustered setup. This data would help Symantec to guide future product development and also analyze issues. if you install OpsCenter Server in /opt on the primary node. ■ When you install OpsCenter Server on the first node. you are prompted to confirm creation of an OpsCenter Server cluster. Type Yes to set up OpsCenter in HA mode. press Enter without typing a directory path. 11 The installer prompts you with the following question: Participate in the NetBackup Product Improvement Program? [y. For example. Note: Ensure that the installation location of primary node and the secondary nodes is the same.

x cluster to OpsCenter 7.x) cluster as root.1. Use the virtual name for the NetBackup server name.0. Caution: When you are prompted. The following happens when OpsCenter Server is installed: ■ On the first node.x (or 7. 4 Offline OpsCenter server resource by using the following command: hares -offline <opscenter server resource name> -sys <node> . Make sure that the shared disk is not mounted on any node in the cluster. Note: To upgrade OpsCenter Server in a clustered mode.5 cluster on Solaris.x or 7. On the other nodes. you must provide the same virtual cluster name that you provided during the installation. 2 3 Log on to the OpsCenter 7.0. 14 Allow OpsCenter to be installed in a cluster.5 Server on the active node and then on the passive nodes.5 cluster Use the following steps to upgrade from an OpsCenter 7.x cluster to OpsCenter 7.1. Also. This name is case-sensitive and must be in the same format (FQDN/short) on all the nodes. ■ Upgrading from OpsCenter 7. first install OpsCenter 7.1.x cluster to OpsCenter 7.Installing Symantec OpsCenter 7.x or 7. unmount the OpsCenter shared mount point. a single node cluster resource group for OpsCenter is created and brought online. refer to the checklist and provide details accordingly. See “Preinstallation checklist for a Symantec OpsCenter Server installation” on page 211.5 cluster 1 Fill out the checklist for all configurations and the checklist for your specific environment.1. the installed node is added to the cluster resource group.0.5 About clustering Symantec OpsCenter 215 13 When you are prompted for cluster-specific configuration details. If applicable.x or 7. Stop the volume the mount point is on and deport the disk group for that volume on all nodes of the cluster. To upgrade from OpsCenter 7.0. you need to install OpsCenter Server manually on all the nodes.

(/var/symantec/) Type the directory name in which the existing OpsCenter 7. Are you sure you want to upgrade OPSCENTERSERVER? [y. Press Enter to install OpsCenter Server. Review this list and press Enter to continue. AT.5 software. not. Select Server from the displayed options (Server and Agent).5 About clustering Symantec OpsCenter 5 Freeze OpsCenter group by using the following command: hagrp freeze <OpsCenter group name> -persistent sys 6 Stop NetBackup OpsCenter cluster agent on all nodes of the OpsCenter group using the following command: haagent -stop NetBackupOpsCenter -force -sys <node> 7 Log on to the active node and upgrade to OpsCenter Server 7. It prompts you in case OpsCenter Server is already installed.0. 12 The installer displays a list of components that will be installed or upgraded like PBX.x database and configuration files can be saved and then press Enter.x) cluster that you want to upgrade.5.n.1. The installer also examines the system for existing packages. press Enter. OpsCenter GUI etc.x (or 7.0. 9 The Welcome message is displayed. 8 Type the following command: . 13 The installer prompts you with the following question: installOpsCenterServer is now ready to upgrade OPSCENTERSERVER. OpsCenter Server. Mount the OpsCenter product DVD on the OpsCenter 7. Press Enter. To accept the default directory path (/var/symantec)./install.x or 7.q] (y) Press Enter to continue and upgrade to OpsCenter 7.216 Installing Symantec OpsCenter 7. .1. Press Enter to continue. 10 The installer then checks if OpsCenter Server is installed on the system or 11 The following prompt is displayed: Where should the existing Symantec OpsCenter database and configuration files be backed up? An 'OpsCenterServer_backup' directory will be created within the directory that you specify to store these files.

x (or 7.0.0 VRTSOpsCenterLegacyServer 7.0.log is created after a few minutes in INSTALL_PATH/SYMCOpsCenterServer/db/log directory.5 database.0.0.1. The following message is displayed: The database upgrade is in progress. the following message may be displayed: The following packages were found on the system. Configuration changes are made to the system.log file in the OpsCenter Server database logs directory (.0 was found on the system. In this process.0 was found on the system. but OpsCenter requires SYMCOpsCenterServer 7.0 The installer then uninstalls the older packages and installs OpsCenter 7.0 SYMCOpsCenterGUI 7. However the package versions are older than the ones required by OpsCenter. You can check the status of database upgrade. This may take some time based on the database size. the installer uploads installation deployment and product usage information to Symantec automatically and in a secured manner. The database process may take time depending on your database size. . see dbManager_<timestamp>_. but OpsCenter requires SYMCOpsCenterGUI 7. Depending on the installed packages. You can view this file to check the database upgrade status.. data is migrated from the OpsCenter 7.x) packages that are installed.x) database to the OpsCenter 7.n. 15 The installer prompts you with the following question: Participate in the NetBackup Product Improvement Program? [y.x (or 7.5.0 was found on the system. To know the upgrade status. 17 The database upgrade process starts./db/log) after some time.q] (y) If you type y and press Enter. SYMCOpsCenterServer 7.5 Server.5 About clustering Symantec OpsCenter 217 14 The installer displays the OpsCenter 7.Installing Symantec OpsCenter 7.0.5 Server is installed.5.5. This data would help Symantec to guide future product development and also analyze issues. but OpsCenter requires VRTSOpsCenterLegacyServer 7. 16 OpsCenter 7.1. A file named dbManager_<timestamp>_.

do one of the following: ■ Type y.5. The Uninstall Script stops all processes and then uninstalls the component packages.218 Installing Symantec OpsCenter 7.5 About clustering Symantec OpsCenter 18 All the OpsCenter processes are started. which resides in the root directory of the product DVD and also in <INSTALL_PATH>/VRTS/install directory. 20 After upgrading OpsCenter server on all nodes. Press Enter to start the uninstall process. run the following command to start the NetBackupOpsCenter cluster agent on each node. . including the location of the uninstall log files. When the uninstall is complete. Offline OpsCenter group by following command from the active node: hagrp -offline <OpsCenter group name> -sys node 3 Change to the following directory: <INSTALL_PATH>/VRTS/install 4 Type the following command and press Enter: . The following information is also displayed: ■ ■ Web URL to access OpsCenter console Location of install log and summary files. Repeat steps 8 through 19 for all passive nodes./uninstallOpsCenterServer The Uninstall script checks the components that are installed on the system. to uninstall OpsCenter completely from all the nodes on a Solaris host. it displays a summary of the uninstall. 5 When you are asked to confirm if you want to uninstall OpsCenter Server.5 software on all the passive nodes. 19 After upgrading the active node to OpsCenter 7. To unistall OpsCenter Server completely from the Solaris cluster 1 2 Open a Solaris cluster and log on as root. install OpsCenter 7. haagent -start NetBackupOpsCenter -force -sys <node> 21 Unfreeze the OpsCenter VCS group by using the following command: hagrp -unfreeze <OpsCenter group name> -persistent sys <node> Uninstalling OpsCenter Server completely from the Solaris cluster Use the Uninstall Script.

Press Enter to cancel the uninstall procedure.5 About clustering Symantec OpsCenter 219 ■ Type n.Installing Symantec OpsCenter 7. Delete all resources by following command: hagrp -delete <OpsCenter group name> . 6 7 Uninstall OpsCenter software from all the nodes. Repeat steps 3 through 5 for all nodes.

220 Installing Symantec OpsCenter 7.5 About clustering Symantec OpsCenter .

. These topics assume you already installed OpsCenter on a server. See “Processes used by OpsCenter on UNIX” on page 223.Chapter 3 Administering Symantec OpsCenter This chapter includes the following topics: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ About OpsCenter services and processes used by OpsCenter OpsCenter server scripts on Windows and UNIX About OpsCenter database administration Configuring remote authentication service in OpsCenter About backup and restore of OpsCenter and OpsCenter Analytics About communication and firewall considerations Gathering troubleshooting data with the support script About OpsCenter log files About OpsCenter services and processes used by OpsCenter This section provides information about OpsCenter services and processes and how you can control these services. If you have not installed OpsCenter. See “Controlling the OpsCenter services” on page 222. review the installation chapter. See “Services used by OpsCenter on Windows” on page 222.

exe Symantec OpsCenter Web java. Table 3-1 contains information about the services that OpsCenter uses on Windows. the OpsCenter Agent Service starts whenever you boot your Agent host. This service is not an OpsCenter service. Symantec OpsCenter Agent java.exe Symantec Product Authentication Service vxatd. but it is a component used by OpsCenter. OpsCenter uses this service to authenticate users of OpsCenter. This service manages the OpsCenter databases. the following services should be active. This service is not an OpsCenter service. OpsCenter uses this service to host the OpsCenter Console. running reports and so on. The OpsCenter server interacts with the OpsCenter GUI and provides the data that is requested by the GUI from the OpsCenter database. .exe Symantec OpsCenter Database Server dbsrv11. Table 3-1 Service Name Process Services used by OpsCenter on Windows Description This service is for the Symantec OpsCenter Agent. OpsCenter does not start. This service is not an OpsCenter service.exe server Service Symantec Private Branch Exchange pbx_exchange. This process must be running on the OpsCenter server during all normal operations like viewing reports. Symantec Private Branch Exchange allows all socket communication to take place through a single port. Controlling the OpsCenter services Use the following procedure to verify if these services are running or not.222 Administering Symantec OpsCenter About OpsCenter services and processes used by OpsCenter Services used by OpsCenter on Windows After you install OpsCenter server and Agent on Windows. It also interacts with NetBackup through NBSL to get data regularly.exe Note: The processes that are listed in this table show the actual memory that is consumed by the respective OpsCenter service. By default. OpsCenter depends on these services.exe Service Symantec OpsCenter Server Service java. If any of these services fail to start.

By default. It also interacts with NetBackup to get data regularly. Processes used by OpsCenter on UNIX After you install OpsCenter server and Agent on UNIX. <INSTALL_PATH>/SYMCOpsCenterServer/bin/.OpsCenterServerd The OpsCenter server interacts with the OpsCenter GUI and provides the data that the GUI requests from the OpsCenter database. This Server process must be running on the OpsCenter server during all normal operations like viewing reports.Administering Symantec OpsCenter About OpsCenter services and processes used by OpsCenter 223 To control these services 1 2 3 Use Start > Settings > Control Panel > Administrative Tools > Services. the following processes should be active. OpsCenter Database Server can fail to start in some scenarios. Check the Status column for each service. start. and restart the OpsCenter services and Symantec shared services. The Services panel can also be used to stop. running reports and so on. Table 3-2 Process Description Symantec OpsCenter Agent Processes used by OpsCenter on UNIX Detailed Description Process <INSTALL_PATH>/SYMCOpsCenterAgent/bin/. Symantec OpsCenter Server Symantec <INSTALL_PATH>/SYMCOpsCenterServer/db/bin/OpsCenterDBd This process manages the OpsCenter Database OpsCenter databases. the OpsCenter UNIX is /opt Agent process starts whenever you boot your Agent host. From the Status column. See “OpsCenter database service fails to start” on page 224.OpsCenterAgentd This process is for the Note: The default installation path or <INSTALL_PATH> for Symantec OpsCenter Agent. you can verify if a service is running or not. . Table 3-2 describes the processes that OpsCenter uses on UNIX.

Assertion failed: file system may be full or file size exceeded. The service fails when the database size increases more than the file size mentioned. OpsCenter uses this process to authenticate users of OpsCenter. In a case where the database service fails to start. OpsCenter uses this process to host the OpsCenter Console. you get the following error message . You can check log details through <INSTALL_PATH>/SYMCOpsCenterServer/db/log/dbserver. such as checking the ulimit size and size limit of the file system. The problem can be overcome through a few checks. This process is not an OpsCenter process. OpsCenter database service fails to start OpsCenter database service can fail to start on the AIX system in various scenarios.log.224 Administering Symantec OpsCenter About OpsCenter services and processes used by OpsCenter Table 3-2 Process Description Symantec OpsCenter Web Server Processes used by OpsCenter on UNIX (continued) Detailed Description This process is not an OpsCenter process. but it is a component used by OpsCenter. . Many Symantec Web consoles share this component. PBX allows all socket communication to take place through a single port. This process is not an OpsCenter process. Process java Symantec Private Branch Exchange <INSTALL_PATH>/VRTSpbx/bin/pbx_exchange Symantec Product Authentication Service <INSTALL_PATH>/VRTSat/bin/vxatd Note: The processes that are listed in this table show the actual memory consumed by the respective OpsCenter process.

bat INSTALL_PATH\OpsCenter\server\bin Starts or stops OpsCenter Administrator the OpsCenter database Starts and OpsCenter Administrator stops all OpsCenter Server services opsadmin.Increase the file size.bat INSTALL_PATH\OpsCenter\server\bin . you must change the user-specific settings using SMIT or run the command edit /etc/security/limits. Note: The file size must be increased only if the database size is greater than the file system size. enter the ulimit command -a and press Enter.bat dbbackup. you must increase the file size to the maximum limit. This information is displayed when you run the ulimit command -a. If the file size is not the maximum size that is supported by the file system. OpsCenter server scripts on Windows and UNIX The following scripts are used within OpsCenter.Administering Symantec OpsCenter OpsCenter server scripts on Windows and UNIX 225 To overcome database service failure 1 Check the ulimit size for the file system. Table 3-3 lists the OpsCenter server scripts on Windows. To change file size. The OpsCenter administrator may use many of these scripts. Use the -h option for help about these scripts.bat and stopserver. 2 Start the OpsCenter database after the changes are made.bat and stopdb. Table 3-3 Script startserver.bat INSTALL_PATH\OpsCenter\server\bin Backs up the OpsCenter database OpsCenter Administrator OpsCenter server scripts on Windows Function Invokes or Is Invoked by Location INSTALL_PATH\OpsCenter\server\bin Starts or stops Administrator the OpsCenterServerd. startdb. See “Starting and stopping the OpsCenter database” on page 233.

sh <INSTALL_PATH>/SYMCOpsCenterServer/bin Starts. <INSTALL_PATH>/SYMCOpsCenterServer/bin Starts or stops the OpsCenter database OpsCenter Administrator opsadmin.bat INSTALL_PATH\OpsCenter\server\bin OpsCenter Administrator runStoredQuery. Table 3-4 Script Location OpsCenter server scripts on UNIX Function Invokes or Is Invoked by startserver and stopserver startdb and stopdb <INSTALL_PATH>/SYMCOpsCenterServer/bin Starts or OpsCenter stops the Server OpsCenterServerd.bat OpsCenter server scripts on Windows (continued) Function Defragments the OpsCenter database Changes the OpsCenter database password Location INSTALL_PATH\OpsCenter\server\bin Invokes or Is Invoked by OpsCenter Administrator changedbpassword. OpsCenter and monitors Administrator all OpsCenter Server processes .226 Administering Symantec OpsCenter OpsCenter server scripts on Windows and UNIX Table 3-3 Script dbdefrag. Table 3-4 lists the OpsCenter server scripts on UNIX.bat INSTALL_PATH\OpsCenter\server\bin Runs saved OpsCenter Administrator custom SQL and generates output in the desired format. stops.

sh <INSTALL_PATH>/SYMCOpsCenterServer Runs saved OpsCenter custom SQL Administrator and generates output in the desired format. dbbackup. and OpsCenter Web server (Tomcat).d This script is OpsCenter used Server internally for clustering. The script starts. OpsCenter Server. stops. or restarts the OpsCenter database.sh <INSTALL_PATH>/SYMCOpsCenterServer runStoredQuery.Administering Symantec OpsCenter OpsCenter server scripts on Windows and UNIX 227 Table 3-4 Script Location OpsCenter server scripts on UNIX (continued) Function Invokes or Is Invoked by OpsCenterServer Solaris: /etc/init. Commands to control OpsCenter services and processes This section provides information on how you can control the OpsCenter server services and OpsCenter Agent service.sh <INSTALL_PATH>/SYMCOpsCenterServer/bin Backs up the OpsCenter OpsCenter Administrator database <INSTALL_PATH>/SYMCOpsCenterServer Defragments OpsCenter the Administrator OpsCenter database Changes the OpsCenter database password OpsCenter Administrator dbdefrag changeDbPassword. .

sh start To stop all Symantec OpsCenter server processes: <INSTALL_PATH>/SYMCOpsCenterServer/bin/opsadmin. Symantec OpsCenter Server Service Symantec OpsCenter Web server Service Symantec OpsCenter Agent Service Select Control Panel > Administrative Tools > Services and start or stop the Symantec OpsCenter Server Service.bat start To stop all Symantec OpsCenter server services: INSTALL_PATH\OpsCenter\server\bin\opsadmin. Table 3-6 Process All Symantec OpsCenter server processes Start and stop commands on UNIX Commands or Steps To start all Symantec OpsCenter server processes: <INSTALL_PATH>/SYMCOpsCenterServer/bin/opsadmin.228 Administering Symantec OpsCenter OpsCenter server scripts on Windows and UNIX Table 3-5 Service All Symantec OpsCenter server services Start and stop commands on Windows Commands or Steps To start all Symantec OpsCenter server services: INSTALL_PATH\OpsCenter\server\bin\opsadmin. Select Control Panel > Administrative Tools > Services and start or stop the Symantec OpsCenter Web Server Service.sh monitor Symantec OpsCenter database server process Symantec OpsCenter server process <INSTALL_PATH>/SYMCOpsCenterServer/bin/startdb <INSTALL_PATH>/SYMCOpsCenterServer/bin/stopdb <INSTALL_PATH>/SYMCOpsCenterServer/bin/startserver <INSTALL_PATH>/SYMCOpsCenterServer/bin/stopserver .bat stop Symantec OpsCenter Select Control Panel > Administrative Tools > Services and start or stop the Symantec database server service OpsCenter Database Server service.sh stop To monitor all processes: <INSTALL_PATH>/SYMCOpsCenterServer/bin/opsadmin. Select Control Panel > Administrative Tools > Services and start or stop the Symantec OpsCenter Agent Service.

OpsCenter services may not start on reboot in case of SUSE 11. and removed by NBSL. you may find one or more nbproxy processes running on the master server. then the OpsCenter server also stops. .sh Symantec OpsCenter Agent process <INSTALL_PATH>/SYMCOpsCenterAgent/bin/startagent <INSTALL_PATH>/SYMCOpsCenterAgent/bin/stopagent About dependency of services The Symantec OpsCenter server service requires that the following OpsCenter services (processes) are running: ■ ■ ■ Symantec OpsCenter Database Server Symantec Product Authentication Service Symantec Private Branch Exchange If you stop any of these services. Note: After a reboot. and even though OpsCenter Server services are running.Administering Symantec OpsCenter OpsCenter server scripts on Windows and UNIX 229 Table 3-6 Process Symantec OpsCenter Web server process Start and stop commands on UNIX (continued) Commands or Steps <INSTALL_PATH>/SYMCOpsCenterGUI/bin/startgui.sh <INSTALL_PATH>/SYMCOpsCenterGUI/bin/stopgui. Symantec recommends that you start the OpsCenter processes after you perform a reboot. You may also see nbproxy processes when NetBackup-Java GUI or NetBackup-Windows GUI request certain data from NetBackup (like LiveUpdate . This section talks about the nbproxy processes that NBSL manages. Occasionally. Also after you reboot a SUSE 11 Server. managed. Most of the nbproxy processes are started. the OpsCenter processes do not start automatically on SUSE Linux systems. This issue may happen because of the PBX taking time to start. storage lifecycle policies). an attempt to logon may not succeed. About nbproxy processes on NetBackup master servers When OpsCenter is connected to a master server.

More information about the Sybase database is available. See http://www. In addition. If NBSL crashes (or is abruptly closed). The database is located on the OpsCenter server. OpsCenter database commands OpsCenter provides some useful commands to help manage the OpsCenter database. For example.sybase. a utility called changeVxATProperties has been included that lets you change the authentication server parameters. the nbproxy process is removed within an hour. If NetBackup is stopped (and NBSL is already killed). Table 3-7 lists some of the commands that are available. all nbproxy processes are stopped immediately. all nbproxy processes exit within 10 minutes. some of the nbproxy processes are managed by nbjm and nbpem. If OpsCenter crashes (or is abruptly closed). An nbproxy process runs to retrieve the following NetBackup data for OpsCenter: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Policies Catalogs Storage lifecycle policies LiveUpdate Client details Note the following points about the NBSL-managed nbproxy processes: ■ If the data collection for a master server is disabled or a master server is removed from the OpsCenter console.com/support/manuals. . ■ ■ ■ About OpsCenter database administration The Sybase database that OpsCenter uses is similar to the NetBackup database and is installed as part of the OpsCenter installation. all nbproxy processes are stopped immediately.230 Administering Symantec OpsCenter About OpsCenter database administration Note: Not all nbproxy processes on the master server are managed by NBSL.

You require a user name and a password to access the data that is stored in the database. See “About OpsCenter database defragmentation” on page 233. The OpsCenter database administrator password cannot have the following characteristics: ■ Exceed 30 characters. Note: This utility is not used to change the logon password for OpsCenter. . To change the existing logon password.Administering Symantec OpsCenter About OpsCenter database administration 231 Table 3-7 Command Commands available with OpsCenter Reference See “Changing the OpsCenter database administrator password” on page 231. See “Backing up the OpsCenter database” on page 242. you must run commands on the active node. The database administrator user ID is DBA and the initial password is SQL (password is case-sensitive ). changeDbPassword startdb and stopdb dbdefrag dbbackup changeVxATProperties See “Configuring authentication server parameters” on page 235. See “Restoring the OpsCenter database” on page 245. Note: For a clustered OpsCenter server. See “Starting and stopping the OpsCenter database” on page 233. you must use the OpsCenter console. Changing the OpsCenter database administrator password The changeDbPassword utility lets you change the database administrator password that is used for the OpsCenter database. OpsCenter uses the Sybase SA (Server Anywhere) database to store data. See “Changing your OpsCenter password” on page 272.See “About running commands on the active node” on page 194. Review the rules for forming a new database password.

sh 2 3 4 You are prompted for the current database administrator password.sh stop <INSTALL_PATH>/SYMCOpsCenterServer/bin/opsadmin.bat stop INSTALL_PATH\OpsCenter\server\bin\opsadmin. Windows Enter the following commands to stop and then start the OpsCenter services: INSTALL_PATH\OpsCenter\server\bin\opsadmin. Begin with White space and a single quote character.bat Enter the following command on UNIX: <INSTALL_PATH>/SYMCOpsCenterServer/bin/changeDbPassword. ■ ■ ■ Note: Information about role-based access in Symantec OpsCenter is available. These characters have special meaning in Windows or in shell scripts. . Restart the OpsCenter services and processes on Windows and UNIX platforms. ^ | < > . See “User access rights and UI functions in OpsCenter” on page 287. Contain any of the following characters. To change the database administrator password on Windows and UNIX 1 Enter the following command on Windows: INSTALL_PATH\OpsCenter\server\bin\changeDbPassword. Enter the current database password. ‘ ! $ % & .sh start . Enter the new password.232 Administering Symantec OpsCenter About OpsCenter database administration ■ ■ ■ Contain consecutive black slash characters. End with White space. You are prompted for a new database administrator password.bat stop UNIX Enter the following commands to stop and then start the OpsCenter processes: <INSTALL_PATH>/SYMCOpsCenterServer/bin/opsadmin. Contain any bracket [ ] characters. { } $ " ~ [ ] \\ Contains the ASCII characters that are less than 32 or ASCII characters that are greater than 127.

See “Checking the disk fragment count” on page 233.Administering Symantec OpsCenter About OpsCenter database administration 233 Starting and stopping the OpsCenter database The startdb script is used to start the OpsCenter database. run the following command: INSTALL_PATH\OpsCenter\server\bin\startdb.log file on UNIX. The stopdb script is used to stop the OpsCenter database.log file on Windows or dbserver.bat To stop the OpsCenter database on UNIX. In addition. To start the database server on Windows and UNIX ◆ To start the OpsCenter database on Windows. run the following command: <INSTALL_PATH>/SYMCOpsCenterServer/bin/startdb To stop the database server on Windows and UNIX ◆ To stop the OpsCenter database on Windows.bat To start the OpsCenter database on UNIX. The following section describes how you can find the disk fragment count.log file on Windows or dbserver.log file on UNIX shows a large number. When you delete a master server from OpsCenter. The purge settings can be viewed by clicking Settings > Configuration > Data Purge in the OpsCenter console. Data purging in OpsCenter is enabled by default. See “Configuring authentication server parameters” on page 235. you should defragment the OpsCenter database if the disk fragment count in the server. Such changes may occur due to the deletion of data from the OpsCenter database. run the following command: INSTALL_PATH\OpsCenter\server\bin\stopdb. . run the following command: <INSTALL_PATH>/SYMCOpsCenterServer/bin/stopdb About OpsCenter database defragmentation Fragmentation occurs naturally as you make changes to your database. Checking the disk fragment count Use the following procedure to check the disk fragment count in the server. ■ Symantec recommends that you should defragment the OpsCenter database once in a month. Some examples when data is deleted from the OpsCenter database are the following: ■ When data purging is enabled in OpsCenter.

For optimum performance. you may find the following line: Performance warning: Database file "G:\OpsCenter\db\vxpmdb. 2 To defragment the OpsCenter database on Windows. run the following command: <INSTALL_PATH>/SYMCOpsCenterServer/bin/dbdefrag.log or dbserver. Defragmentation helps to increase data access and retrieval speed.234 Administering Symantec OpsCenter About OpsCenter database administration To check the disk fragment count 1 Open the following files on Windows and UNIX respectively: Windows INSTALL_PATH\Symantec\OpsCenter\server\db\log\server.db" consists of 2000 disk fragments Note: You may not find any results when you search for fragment. For example. This result is completely fine. defragment the OpsCenter databases once in a month and after a purge operation. See “Backing up the OpsCenter database” on page 242. Symantec recommends that you back up the OpsCenter database.log UNIX <INSTALL_PATH>/SYMCOpsCenterServer/db/log/dbserver. Note: OpsCenter does not work during the time when the OpsCenter database is defragmented. You may see such performance warnings when the disk fragment count is high. when you search for fragment in server.log.bat To defragment the OpsCenter database on UNIX. Defragmenting the OpsCenter database You can defragment the OpsCenter database using the dbdefrag command. To defragment the OpsCenter database on Windows and UNIX 1 Before you defragment the OpsCenter database.log 2 Search for the word fragment in the file.sh . run the following command: INSTALL_PATH\OpsCenter\server\bin\dbdefrag.

You must restart the OpsCenter services for these changes to be effective. . You can specify a custom location (non-default location) for the OpsCenter database during OpsCenter installation. Moving the OpsCenter database and database logs to a different hard disk To improve OpsCenter performance. the value of the parameter does not change. 2 3 Enter the new values next to the respective parameter. The default location for the OpsCenter database can also be changed after OpsCenter has been installed. Symantec also recommends that you not store the database files on the hard disk that contains your operating system files. If you do not enter a new value for a parameter. The last two procedures are for moving the database log files. Note: This procedure is applicable only for OpsCenter clusters where the authentication broker is remote.Administering Symantec OpsCenter About OpsCenter database administration 235 Configuring authentication server parameters The authentication server parameters can be configured using the changeVxATProperties utility. Answer y to restart the OpsCenter services. Use the following procedures to move the OpsCenter database and log files to a different hard disk. To configure authentication server parameters 1 Enter the following command on Windows: INSTALL_PATH\OpsCenter\server\bin\changeVxATProperties.sh The authentication server parameters appear one by one.bat Enter the following command on UNIX: <INSTALL_PATH>/SYMCOpsCenterServer/bin/changeVxATProperties. You can store the OpsCenter database files on one hard disk and the log files on another hard disk. This procedure is not applicable when Symantec Product Authentication Service is installed on the local computer. OpsCenter database files and the log files that are associated with the OpsCenter database should be stored on separate hard disks. The first two procedures are for moving the OpsCenter database files on Windows or UNIX. The current values of the parameters are specified in brackets.

!.db" This path specifies the default location of the OpsCenter database. For example.db and symcOpscache. Enter the following command: INSTALL_PATH\OpsCenter\server\bin\opsadmin. If OpsCenter works as expected. @.db and symcOpscache. do not specify a path like E:\Database%.bat stop 2 Open the databases. To restart all OpsCenter services. ^. # etc. ~. you can delete vxpmdb.db from INSTALL_PATH\OpsCenter\server\db\data to a location like E:\Database. . 3 To move the database to a custom location like E:\Database. 4 Copy the database files to the new location.bat start 5 You should run and monitor OpsCenter for a certain period after moving the database.db" Make sure that you specify the path in double quotes. Also the directories in the specified path should not contain any special characters like %.236 Administering Symantec OpsCenter About OpsCenter database administration To move the OpsCenter database to a different hard disk on Windows 1 Stop all OpsCenter services. &. Save the databases.conf file. Copy vxpmdb. replace the contents of the file with the following: "E:\Database\vxpmdb. Restart all OpsCenter server services.db from the default location (INSTALL_PATH\OpsCenter\server\db\data). $. enter the following command: INSTALL_PATH\OpsCenter\server\bin\opsadmin.conf file with a text editor like notepad from the following directory: INSTALL_PATH\OpsCenter\server\db\conf This file has the following contents: "INSTALL_PATH\OpsCenter\server\db\data\vxpmdb.

db from /backup/data. Enter the following command: cp –R <INSTALL_PATH>/SYMCOpsCenterServer/db/data /backup/data 3 To move the database to a custom location like /usr/mydata. Enter the following command: unlink <INSTALL_PATH>/SYMCOpsCenterServer/db/data 6 Create a symbolic link to /usr/mydata/OpsCenterServer in <INSTALL_PATH>/SYMCOpsCenterServer/db/data. . Enter the following command: <INSTALL_PATH>/SYMCOpsCenterServer/bin/opsadmin.sh start You should run and monitor OpsCenter for a certain period after moving the database. 4 To move the database to a custom location like /usr/mydata/OpsCenterServer. enter the following command: mv <INSTALL_PATH>/SYMCOpsCenterServer/db/data/* /usr/mydata/OpsCenterServer 5 Remove the symbolic link that exists for the OpsCenter database.Administering Symantec OpsCenter About OpsCenter database administration 237 To move the OpsCenter database to a different hard disk on UNIX 1 Stop all OpsCenter server processes. enter the following command: ln -s <INSTALL_PATH>/SYMCOpsCenterServer/db/data /usr/mydata/OpsCenterServer 7 Restart all OpsCenter server processes by entering the following command: <INSTALL_PATH>/SYMCOpsCenterServer/bin/opsadmin. To create a symbolic link.db and symcOpscache.sh stop 2 The default location of the OpsCenter database is <INSTALL_PATH>/SYMCOpsCenterServer/db/data. always create a new directory named OpsCenterServer inside /usr/mydata by entering the following command: mkdir -p /usr/mydata/OpsCenterServer Symantec recommends that when you move the OpsCenter database to a custom location on UNIX. the database must be saved in a directory named OpsCenterServer inside the custom location: /CUSTOM_LOCATION/OpsCenterServer. Back up the OpsCenter database (<INSTALL_PATH>/SYMCOpsCenterServer/db/data) to some other location. you can delete vxpmdb. If OpsCenter works as expected.

Enter the following command: <INSTALL_PATH>/SYMCOpsCenterServer/bin/opsadmin. To restart all OpsCenter services.db where directory_path is the path where you want to store the database logs and database_path is the path where your database is located. 3 Restart all OpsCenter server services.log database_path\vxpmdb.log as the name of the log file. Enter the following command: INSTALL_PATH\OpsCenter\server\bin\opsadmin. enter the following command: INSTALL_PATH\OpsCenter\server\bin\opsadmin.238 Administering Symantec OpsCenter About OpsCenter database administration To move the database log files to a different hard disk on Windows 1 Stop all OpsCenter server services. It is recommended to use vxpmdb. This command moves the log file that is associated with the OpsCenter database to the new directory (directory_path).bat start To move the database log files to a different hard disk on UNIX 1 Stop all OpsCenter server processes.sh stop 2 Set the path of the LD_LIBRARY_PATH variable in the following manner: LD_LIBRARY_PATH=<INSTALL_PATH>/SYMCOpsCenterServer/db/ lib:$LD_LIBRARY_PATH export LD_LIBRARY_PATH .bat stop 2 Navigate to the following location for 32-bit and 64-bit systems respectively: INSTALL_PATH\OpsCenter\server\db\WIN32 INSTALL_PATH\OpsCenter\server\db\WIN64 Enter the following commands: dblog -t directory_path\vxpmdb.

/dblog -t directory_path/vxpmdb. you can configure the remote AT after upgrading to OpsCenter.log as the name of the log file. See “About OpsCenter log files on Windows servers” on page 260. you install the authentication server component on a remote computer in the network. . If you were using a remote AT configuration in NOM and upgrade to OpsCenter. It is recommended to use vxpmdb. See “About OpsCenter Web GUI/OpsCenter server to Sybase database communication” on page 253.Administering Symantec OpsCenter Configuring remote authentication service in OpsCenter 239 3 Navigate to the following location: <INSTALL_PATH>/SYMCOpsCenterServer/db/bin Enter the following commands: . When you are using the Symantec Product Authentication Service remotely. This command moves the log file that is associated with the OpsCenter database to the new directory (directory_path). See “About OpsCenter log files on UNIX servers” on page 263. Configuring remote authentication service in OpsCenter OpsCenter supports using Symantec Product Authentication Service (AT) remotely. Use the following procedure to configure remote AT with OpsCenter.sh start About database troubleshooting Security information about the OpsCenter database is available.db where directory_path is the path where you want to store your database log file and database_path is the path where the OpsCenter database is located. Information about the log files on Windows and UNIX servers is available.log database_path/vxpmdb. 4 Restart all OpsCenter server processes by entering the following command: <INSTALL_PATH>/SYMCOpsCenterServer/bin/opsadmin.

The default value is Vxadmin. Authentication Service Port Number The port number of the server on which the authentication service server component is running. . The default value is 2821.240 Administering Symantec OpsCenter Configuring remote authentication service in OpsCenter To configure remote authentication service in OpsCenter 1 Enter the following command for Windows and UNIX platforms respectively: Windows UNIX INSTALL_PATH\OpsCenter\server\bin\changeVxATProperties. Authentication Service User Name The name of the broker that the user used for initial authentication. The current values of the parameters are specified in brackets.sh 2 The authentication server parameters appear one by one. The following authentication service parameters are displayed: Authentication Service Host Name The fully qualified host name (FQHN) of the server on which the authentication service server component is running. The default value is admin. Authentication Service Password The password of the broker that the user used for initial authentication.bat <INSTALL_PATH>/SYMCOpsCenterServer/bin/changeVxATProperties. The default value is broker. Authentication Service Domain Name The domain name of the broker. The default value is localhost if the authentication service is installed on the OpsCenter server.

Enter the password of the broker that the user used for initial authentication. Backing up OpsCenter in case of a disaster The sequence of steps gives an overview about the steps that need to be followed to back up OpsCenter. Enter the port number of the remote server on which the authentication service server component is running. See “Backing up OpsCenter in case of a disaster” on page 241. Authentication Service Host Name Enter the FQHN of the remote server on which the authentication service server component is running. . Authentication Service Port Number Authentication Service Domain Name Authentication Service User Name Authentication Service Password 4 You must restart the OpsCenter services for these changes to be effective. Enter the name of the broker that the user used for initial authentication. About backup and restore of OpsCenter and OpsCenter Analytics The procedures in this section explain how you can back up and restore OpsCenter and OpsCenter Analytics in case of a disaster.Administering Symantec OpsCenter About backup and restore of OpsCenter and OpsCenter Analytics 241 3 To use a remote AT configuration. See “Restoring OpsCenter” on page 244. enter the new values next to the respective parameter. If you do not enter a new value for a parameter. Enter the domain name of the broker. Answer y to restart the OpsCenter services. the value of the parameter does not change.

See the NetBackup Administrator’s Guide. On UNIX as well as Windows platforms. which is referred to as hot backup. the user information that Symantec Product Authentication Service manages must be saved in a directory or by using a NetBackup backup policy. 3 If you want to change the OpsCenter database password. Note: Regular file system backups are not sufficient for backing up the OpsCenter database. the script overwrites existing database (db) files before backing up or restoring the database. Volume I for more information on how to configure a policy and schedule. This script can be run whenever you need to back up your OpsCenter database.db. and vxpmdb. The database files are as follows: vxpmdb. Note: You can also create schedules for taking regular database and authentication profile backups.db) using the dbbackup script. See “Saving the OpsCenter user profiles managed by Symantec Product Authentication Service” on page 243.db. See “Backing up the OpsCenter database” on page 242. symcOpscache. . 2 Along with the OpsCenter database. In this case.db. You must schedule periodic hot backups for the OpsCenter database to avoid losing any important data. The script backs up or restores the vxpmdb.log file (if it exists).db and symcOpscache.242 Administering Symantec OpsCenter About backup and restore of OpsCenter and OpsCenter Analytics To back up OpsCenter in case of a disaster 1 Take a hot backup of the OpsCenter database (vxpmdb. you also need to back up the database password file. and vxpmdb. NetBackup policies can be created to back up the specified directories that contain OpsCenter database snapshots and the authentication service user configuration files.log.db. Backing up the OpsCenter database OpsCenter is shipped with a database backup script that performs backup of the database without interrupting its operations. symcOpscache.

■ Create a NetBackup job policy to back up the authentication service systemprofile folder.db. and vxpmdb. Specify one of the following backup directories depending on your platform: Windows INSTALL_PATH\OpsCenter\server\bin\dbbackup. To save authentication service profiles on UNIX servers ◆ Do one of the following to save the user profiles: ■ ■ Copy the folder /var/VRTSat to another folder. Run the backup script that is appropriate for your platform. symcOpscache.sh /my_db_backup_dir UNIX The backup script creates vxpmdb. . Create a NetBackup job policy to back up the authentication service profile folder.bat C:\MyDbBackupFolder <INSTALL_PATH>/SYMCOpsCenterServer/bin/dbbackup. To save authentication service profiles on Windows servers ◆ Do one of the following to save the user profiles: ■ Copy the folder INSTALL_PATH\VERITAS\Security\Authentication\systemprofile to another folder.db. Saving the OpsCenter user profiles managed by Symantec Product Authentication Service Use the following procedures to save the authentication service profiles on Windows and UNIX servers.Administering Symantec OpsCenter About backup and restore of OpsCenter and OpsCenter Analytics 243 To back up the OpsCenter database 1 Log on to the OpsCenter database server host in one of the following ways: Windows UNIX As an administrator or user in the Administrator group root 2 3 Open the Windows command prompt or the UNIX console.log (if it exists) in the backup directory that you specified.

you need to back up the following password file (along with the backup of the OpsCenter database files and authentication service profile folders).conf file that is located in INSTALL_PATH/OpsCenter/server/config directory. Restoring OpsCenter A restore of OpsCenter requires that the new OpsCenter server has the same host name and IP address of the old server that crashed. To back up the OpsCenter database password file on UNIX ◆ Back up the db.conf file that is located in <INSTALL_PATH>/SYMCOpsCenterServer/config directory. To back up the OpsCenter database password file on Windows ◆ Back up the db. To restore OpsCenter in case of a disaster 1 2 Install OpsCenter on a server with the same name as the server where problems happened. you must configure the master servers for data collection. The sequence of steps gives an overview about the steps that need to be followed to restore OpsCenter. . This limitation is due to a couple of reasons. you must add the master servers to the OpsCenter console. Stop all OpsCenter server services. This involves adding the OpsCenter hostname to the Server List of the NetBackup master servers. ■ Note: The following procedures assume that you have OpsCenter database snapshots and the authentication service user profiles saved in folders.244 Administering Symantec OpsCenter About backup and restore of OpsCenter and OpsCenter Analytics Backing up the OpsCenter database password file If you want to change the OpsCenter database password. Atter this. To enable data collection. See “Adding a master server or appliance in OpsCenter” on page 346. Some of the reasons are the following: ■ The authentication service credentials (host name and IP address) are stored on the old OpsCenter server.

the restore operation automatically stops the database. The dbbackup script overwrites existing database (db) files before backing up or restoring the database. The database files are as follows: vxpmdb.log file (if it exists). and restarts the database. The script backs up or restores the vxpmdb.db.db. and vxpmdb.log.conf file to INSTALL_PATH/OpsCenter/server/config directory on Windows or <INSTALL_PATH>/SYMCOpsCenterServer/config directory on UNIX. See “Restoring the OpsCenter user profiles managed by Symantec Product Authentication Service” on page 247. Restart all OpsCenter server services.db.Administering Symantec OpsCenter About backup and restore of OpsCenter and OpsCenter Analytics 245 3 Restore the OpsCenter database snapshot files and authentication service user profiles from the backup image. and vxpmdb. On Windows and UNIX hosts. . you can restore it. See “Restoring the OpsCenter database” on page 245. restores the backup database files. 4 If you saved a copy of the OpsCenter database password file. copy the file to the corresponding location on the newly installed OpsCenter server. symcOpscache. Copy the db.db. 5 Restoring the OpsCenter database After you back up the database. symcOpscache.

Windows Open a Windows command prompt and log on as an administrator or user in the Administrators group. If not used. The script prompts you with a message similar to the following: WARNING: this operation will overwrite the active OpsCenter data on this host. Do you wish to continue ? [y/n] (n) . and <restoreDir> is the location of the current OpsCenter database.sh <backupDir> -restore <restoreDir> where backupDir is the directory where the backed up database resides. Open a UNIX console and then log on as root.bat <backupDir> -restore <restoreDir> UNIX Type the following command and press Enter. do one of the following: Windows Type the following command and press Enter. you must specify the restoreDir option. 2 To restore the backed up database.246 Administering Symantec OpsCenter About backup and restore of OpsCenter and OpsCenter Analytics To restore a backed up OpsCenter database 1 On the OpsCenter server with backup data you want to restore. UNIX All the paths that are shown in the steps that follow are the default database install paths. open a UNIX console or a Windows command prompt and log on as root (on UNIX) or as an administrator or user in the Administrators group (on Windows). <INSTALL_PATH>/SYMCOpsCenterServer/bin/dbbackup. the dbbackup script restores to the default database directory: Windows UNIX INSTALL_PATH\OpsCenter\server\db\data <INSTALL_PATH>/SYMCOpsCenterServer/db/data If you specified a non-default directory location. These paths may different for your site if the database was installed anywhere other than the default location. INSTALL_PATH\OpsCenter\server\bin\dbbackup. restoreDir is optional.

Start all OpsCenter server services.bat stop 2 3 Copy or overwrite the folder containing the authentication service user profiles to INSTALL_PATH\VERITAS\Security\Authentication\systemprofile.sh stop 2 3 Copy or overwrite the folder containing the authentication service user profiles to /var/VRTSat Start all OpsCenter server processes. type y on UNIX hosts. Enter the following command: <INSTALL_PATH>/SYMCOpsCenterServer/bin/opsadmin. .Administering Symantec OpsCenter About communication and firewall considerations 247 3 To continue with the restore. Enter the following command: <INSTALL_PATH>/SYMCOpsCenterServer/bin/opsadmin. Enter the following command: INSTALL_PATH\OpsCenter\server\bin\opsadmin. The dbbackup script automatically stops and restarts the database. To restore the authentication user profiles on Windows 1 Stop all OpsCenter server services.sh start About communication and firewall considerations Figure 3-1 shows the key OpsCenter components and the communication ports that are used. Restoring the OpsCenter user profiles managed by Symantec Product Authentication Service Use the following procedures to save the authentication service profiles on Windows and UNIX servers. To continue with the restore.bat start To restore the authentication user profiles on UNIX 1 Stop all OpsCenter server processes. press Enter on Windows hosts. Enter the following command: INSTALL_PATH\OpsCenter\server\bin\opsadmin.

Port 8282 and Port 8553. PureDisk etc. Port 8181 and Port 8443.Port 80 and Port 443. .248 Administering Symantec OpsCenter About communication and firewall considerations Figure 3-1 Key OpsCenter components and how they communicate The following HTTP and HTTPS port combinations are checked for availability in the specified sequence and the first available port combination is used as the default HTTP and HTTPS port respectively . and. PureDisk etc. are installed NetBackup Master Server without NBAC Possible Firewall Hosts where backup products like Backup Exec. View Builder Console Web Browser Possible Firewall OpsCenter Web GUI Default Port 13786 OpsCenter Database PBX default port 1556 Possible Firewall OpsCenter Server SMTP email SNMP traps Port 162 Possible Firewall NetBackup Master Server with NBAC Hosts where backup products like Backup Exec. Communication ports used by key OpsCenter components The following table shows the default port settings for OpsCenter..are installed OpsCenter Agent See “Communication ports used by key OpsCenter components” on page 248.

OpsCenter Client OpsCenter Server 1556 PBX (pbx_exchange) Allow between source and destination. See “About OpsCenter Web GUI to OpsCenter server software communication” on page 252. If these ports are changed then the appropriate hardware ports have to be opened. Destination Port Number Host Mail server 25 SNMP Server 162 SNMP trap recipient PBX (pbx_exchange) Allow from source to destination. Some hardened servers and firewall configurations may block this port. PBX port number configuration is not supported. PBX port number configuration is not supported. Table 3-8 lists the communication ports that are used by key OpsCenter components. See “About OpsCenter Web GUI to OpsCenter server software communication” on page 252. The SNMP trap recipient ports can also be configured from the OpsCenter console (using Settings > Recipients > SNMP).Administering Symantec OpsCenter About communication and firewall considerations 249 SMTP recipient ports can be configured from the OpsCenter console (using Settings > Configuration > SMTP Server). Table 3-8 Source Host OpsCenter Server OpsCenter Server OpsCenter Server Communication ports used by key OpsCenter components Usage (Process Port Configuration Name) SMTP Allow from source to destination. . NetBackup Master Server(s) 1556 Allow between source and destination (bi-directional).

TSM etc.250 Administering Symantec OpsCenter About communication and firewall considerations Table 3-8 Communication ports used by key OpsCenter components (continued) Usage (Process Port Configuration Name) Allow from all hosts on network. Authentication Service (vxatd) 2 3 OpsCenter Server OpsCenter Server 13786 OpsCenter Server Host where 2821 Symantec Product Authentication Service (AT) Server is installed Ports required to communicate with backup products This section provides information about the ports that OpsCenter Agent uses to communicate with backup products like NetBackup. . Source Host Destination Port Number Host Web browser OpsCenter Server The following HTTP and HTTP and HTTPS HTTPS ports are checked for availability in the specified sequence and the first available port combination is used by default: 1 80 (HTTP) and 443 (HTTPS) 8181 (HTTP) and 8443 (HTTPS) 8282 (HTTP) and 8553 (HTTPS) Sybase database Allow between source and destination. Table 3-9 lists the ports that must be opened on OpsCenter Agent to collect data from various backup products. Symantec Allow between source and destination in case Product NBAC is enabled on NetBackup master server. (dbsrv11) Some hardened servers and firewall configurations may block this port. PureDisk. Backup Exec.

These protocols use TCP/IP. For HTTP.exe bpimagelist. . specific ports are checked for availability in a particular sequence and the first available port is used by default. The response is sent on a port in the reserved port range 512-1023 if not configured to use vnetd The following processes are used for NetBackup data collection: ■ ■ ■ Port number 13782 & 13724 bperror.Administering Symantec OpsCenter About communication and firewall considerations 251 Table 3-9 Backup product NetBackup Ports required to communicate with other backup product Communication OpsCenter (NetBackup data collector) communicates with the NetBackup master server.exe bpretlevel. 13782 port should be used to connect to the NetBackup master server and 13724 port should be used to respond to the Agent host.exe 6106 Backup Exec OpsCenter (Backup Exec data collector) communicates with Backup Exec Server using Backup Exec API PureDisk OpsCenter (PureDisk data collector) 443 (HTTPS) communicates with PureDisk SPA 2821 (AT) using atssl OpsCenter (TSM data collector) communicates with TSM Server using TSM CLI dsmadmc OpsCenter (EMC data collector) communicates with EMC Server locally 1500 TSM EMC NetWorker A local host communication Web browser to OpsCenter Web GUI connection Web browsers use Insecure hypertext transfer protocol (HTTP) and Secure hypertext transfer protocol (HTTPS) to communicate with the OpsCenter Web GUI.

1. 8282 8553 Port 8282 and Port 8553 are checked for availability. port 80 is used as the default HTTP port and port 443 is used as the default HTTPS port. These HTTP and HTTPS ports are opened only for input and are configurable using the command lines. Default HTTP and HTTPS ports HTTPS port number 443 HTTP port number 80 Description Port 80 and Port 443 are checked for availability. About OpsCenter Web GUI to OpsCenter server software communication The OpsCenter Web GUI uses Symantec Private Branch Exchange (PBX) to communicate with the OpsCenter server software. No. Table 3-10 Sr. some other application like a Web server uses one or both ports. ■ In case. If port 8181and port 8443 are available. 8181 8443 Port 8181 and Port 8443 are checked for availability. ■ 2. If port 80 and port 443 are available. ■ In case another application like VRTSWeb installed with VCS or any other product uses one or both ports. then the next port combination is checked for availability. The PBX port is opened for input and output traffic. .252 Administering Symantec OpsCenter About communication and firewall considerations Table 3-10 lists how the default HTTP and HTTPS ports are selected. The default port is 1556. ■ 3. then the next port combination is checked for availability. port 8181 is used as the default HTTP port and port 8443 is used as the default HTTPS port. See configurePorts on page 1039.

The database is available only to resident OpsCenter components on the OpsCenter server. About SNMP traps SNMP trap protocol is used for outbound UDP traffic and requires a port that opens for output. The port is opened for output only. the OpsCenter server software listens to the notifications that are sent by NBSL for any change in NetBackup data. The initial data load happens serially for each data type. As soon as the initial data load is complete. Symantec Private Branch Exchange (PBX) is used for communication and requires a port opened on the OpsCenter server and the NetBackup master server for input and output. The port number is 162. when data collection for a master server is enabled or when a master server is added to OpsCenter. The Sybase database server port is closed to all inbound connections. Then OpsCenter updates the OpsCenter database. About OpsCenter Web GUI/OpsCenter server to Sybase database communication The OpsCenter Web GUI communicates with the OpsCenter Sybase SQL Anywhere database server by using the default port 13786. The OpsCenter server software collects data from NBSL in the following ways: ■ ■ Initial data load Listening for change notifications or events Whenever OpsCenter server software starts. the OpsCenter server starts collecting all the available data from NetBackup master server into the OpsCenter database using NBSL. The port number is defined when the user specifies the SMTP server port (see Settings > Configuration > SMTP Server in the OpsCenter console to specify this port). Configuring the PBX port is not supported in OpsCenter 7.Administering Symantec OpsCenter About communication and firewall considerations 253 About OpsCenter server to NetBackup master server (NBSL) communication OpsCenter requires the NetBackup Service Layer (NBSL) to be present on all managed master servers. The default PBX port that is used is 1556. .5. About OpsCenter Web GUI to OpsCenter server email communication SMTP email server protocol is used for outgoing mail.

To gather troubleshooting data for OpsCenter Server on Windows 1 Run the following command to execute the support script for OpsCenter Server: INSTALL_PATH\OpsCenter\server\bin\opsCenterSupport. do you want to collect installation lzgs? [y/n] y Answer y or n based on your preferences. collects information about any data collection problems. This file can serve as a first-level information for the Support team in case of an issue with OpsCenter. The script collects Server and Agent logs. you can use the support script to gather troubleshooting information for OpsCenter Server and OpsCenter Agent. captures the current Agent configuration.bat Note: The following is the default directory location on Windows computers. and compresses the results into a zip file. .254 Administering Symantec OpsCenter Gathering troubleshooting data with the support script Gathering troubleshooting data with the support script If you are running OpsCenter on UNIX or Windows. 2 The script then prompts the following questions: Do you want to collect configuration files? [y/n] y Do you want to collect application log files? [y/n] y Do you want to collect OpsCenter GUI <147> log files? [y/n] y Do you want to collect OpsCenter Server <148> log files? [y/n] y Do you want to collect db log files? [y/n] y Do you want to collect WebServer log files? [y/n] y Do you want to collect setEnv file? [y/n] y Do you want to collect database files? [y/n] y If this is an upgrade scenario. do you want to collect old database and log files? [y/n] y If this is an install scenario.

4 The Support. 2 3 The script stops the OpsCenter Agent service and then collects the OpsCenter Agent logs.Administering Symantec OpsCenter Gathering troubleshooting data with the support script 255 3 This script collects system information and OpsCenter configuration information based on your preferences. You can use OpsCenter and run the support script in the background.zip file is created. Note: Adding log files and OpsCenter database files can increase the file size of the resulting Support. It then compresses all this information in a file that is called Support.zip file. It then collates this information in a Support.bat Note: This is the default directory location on Windows computers. This zip file is stored in the following directory: INSTALL_PATH\OpsCenter\Agent\temp\support 4 After the Support. .zip. the script starts the OpsCenter Agent service.zip file.zip file is stored in the following directory: INSTALL_PATH\OpsCenter\server\temp\support To gather troubleshooting data for OpsCenter Agent on Windows 1 Run the following command to execute the support script for OpsCenter Agent: INSTALL_PATH\OpsCenter\Agent\bin\opsCenterAgentSupport.

Note: Adding log files and OpsCenter database files can increase the file size of the resulting support. 3 This script collects system information and OpsCenter configuration information based on your preferences. do you want to collect installation logs? [y/n] y Answer y or n based on your preferences. It then collates all this information in a support.zip.256 Administering Symantec OpsCenter Gathering troubleshooting data with the support script To gather troubleshooting data for the OpsCenter Server on UNIX 1 Run the following commands to execute the support scripts for OpsCenter Server: <INSTALL_PATH>/SYMCOpsCenterServer/bin/opsCenterSupport.sh 2 The script then prompts the following questions: Do you want to collect configuration files? [y/n] y Do you want to collect application log files? [y/n] y Do you want to collect OpsCenter GUI <147> log files? [y/n] y Do you want to collect OpsCenter Server <148> log files? [y/n] y Do you want to collect db log files? [y/n] y Do you want to collect WebServer log files? [y/n] y Do you want to collect setEnv file? [y/n] y Do you want to collect database files? [y/n] y If this is an upgrade scenario.zip file is stored in the following directory: <INSTALL_PATH>/SYMCOpsCenterServer/temp/support . You can use OpsCenter and run the support script in the background.zip file. do you want to collect old database and log files? [y/n] y If this is an install scenario. 4 The support.

It then collates this information in a support. VxUL log files The VxUL log file creates log file names and messages in a format that is standardized across all Symantec components.zip file is stored in the following directory: <INSTALL_PATH>/SYMCOpsCenterAgent/temp/support 4 After the zip file is created. See “About OpsCenter log files on UNIX servers” on page 263.Administering Symantec OpsCenter About OpsCenter log files 257 To gather troubleshooting data for the OpsCenter Agent on UNIX 1 Run the following command to execute the support script for OpsCenter Agent: <INSTALL_PATH>/SYMCOpsCenterAgent/bin/opsCenterAgentSupport. 2 3 The script stops the OpsCenter Agent process and then collects the OpsCenter Agent logs. Table 3-11 shows the originator IDs used by OpsCenter and key shared components. About OpsCenter log files OpsCenter creates log files that you can use to troubleshoot installation. legacy.sh Note: The following are the default directory locations on UNIX machines. the script automatically starts the OpsCenter Agent process. See “About OpsCenter log files on Windows servers” on page 260. OpsCenter writes log files using Veritas Unified Logging (VxUL). and other log file formats.zip file. The support. Table 3-11 VxUL IDs used by OpsCenter components Originator name Symantec Private Branch Exchange service (PBX) NetBackup Service Layer (NBSL) VxUL originator ID 103 132 . OpsCenter components create most log messages in VxUL format. These messages use VxUL IDs (a product ID and an originator ID) that identify the component that wrote the log message. and other issues. performance.

OpsCenter\server\logs) To configure the verbosity level (default INSTALL_PATH\OpsCenter\server\bin\vxlogcfg. OpsCenter writes VxUL logs to the following directory: INSTALL_PATH\OpsCenter\server\logs In UNIX. Table 3-12 Control Logging Control logging on Windows Command To change the log directory destination INSTALL_PATH\OpsCenter\server\bin\vxlogcfg.258 Administering Symantec OpsCenter About OpsCenter log files Table 3-11 VxUL IDs used by OpsCenter components (continued) Originator name Symantec OpsCenter Agent Symantec OpsCenter Web GUI Symantec OpsCenter Server Application log file VxUL originator ID 146 147 148 423 In Windows. OpsCenter Web GUI. OpsCenter Web GUI. The following OID values must be used for OpsCenter Server.exe value is 1) -a -p 58330 -o <OID> -s DebugLevel=1 . OpsCenter Agent.exe (default value is -a -p 58330 -o <OID> -s LogDirectory="<New log directory location>" <INSTALL_PATH>\ Note: 58330 is the OpsCenter product ID. and application logging. OpsCenter writes VxUL logs to the following directory: <INSTALL_PATH>/SYMCOpsCenterServer/logs You can control how OpsCenter writes log files for OpsCenter Server. OpsCenter Agent. and also application log files. OpsCenter Server OpsCenter Agent OpsCenter Web GUI Application logging 148 146 147 423 Table 3-12 lists the commands by which you can control logging on Windows.

To configure the debug level (default value is 1) <INSTALL_PATH>/SYMCOpsCenterServer/bin/vxlogcfg -a -p 58330 -o <OID> -s DebugLevel=<New debug level> <INSTALL_PATH>/SYMCOpsCenterServer/bin/vxlogcfg -a -p 58330 -o <OID> -s DiagnosticLevel=<New diagnostic level> <INSTALL_PATH>/SYMCOpsCenterServer/bin/vxlogcfg -a -p 58330 -o <OID> -s NumberOfLogFiles=<New number> To configure the diagnostic level (default value is 1) To configure the number of log files that are created (default value is 100) OpsCenter application log files Table 3-14 shows details about the application log files.exe -a -p 58330 -o <OID> -s NumberOfLogFiles=100 To configure the diagnostic level (default value is 1) To configure the number of log files that are created (default value is 100) Table 3-13 lists the commands by which you can control logging on UNIX. .Administering Symantec OpsCenter About OpsCenter log files 259 Table 3-12 Control Logging Control logging on Windows (continued) Command INSTALL_PATH\OpsCenter\server\bin\vxlogcfg. Table 3-13 Control logging Control logging on UNIX Command To change the log directory destination <INSTALL_PATH>/SYMCOpsCenterServer/bin/vxlogcfg (default value is <INSTALL_PATH>/ -a -p 58330 -o <OID> -s LogDirectory="<New log SYMCOpsCenterServer/logs) directory location>" Note: 58330 is the OpsCenter product ID.exe -a -p 58330 -o <OID> -s DiagnosticLevel=1 INSTALL_PATH\OpsCenter\server\bin\vxlogcfg.

set the debug level as 0 in log. DebugLevel=1 enables application logging. These log files can be used to troubleshoot installation issues of the respective OpsCenter component. To disable application logging.conf file using the following command: Windows: <INSTALL_PATH>\OpsCenter\server\bin\vxlogcfg.log This log file has minimal information that helps in understanding the flow of each use case. An example of a failed use case is when you run a report and any of the pre-defined steps like fetching report definition . data collection and reporting component has well defined error code and messages. modify the value of DebugLevel to 0.exe -a -p 58330 -o <OID> -s DebugLevel=0 UNIX: /<INSTALL_PATH>/SYMCOpsCenterServer/bin/vxlogcfg -a -p 58330 -o <OID> -s DebugLevel=0 To enable application logging later. . you can give any value greater than 0. This log or file can be mainly used by Support to diagnose the problem <INSTALL_PATH>/SYMCOpsCenterServer/logs if a particular use case has failed. You can disable it by configuring the log. fail. building query.5 installation log files Table 3-15 shows details about the installation log files for OpsCenter components. By default. To disable application logging later. OpsCenter 7.conf file. Each failed use case will have error code and the message. Unlike *148* logs. this log file does not have detailed log information. This log file also has a detailed stack trace for failed use case. For example. the application logging is enabled. converting result etc.260 Administering Symantec OpsCenter About OpsCenter log files Table 3-14 Log file directory INSTALL_PATH\ OpsCenter\server\logs OpsCenter application log files Log file Troubleshooting purpose 58330-423-*. Currently. About OpsCenter log files on Windows servers OpsCenter creates the following log files using VxUL and legacy formats.

On 32-bit Windows vxatd.err and system.out of OpsCenter server service. Table 3-16 Log file directory INSTALL_PATH\ OpsCenter\server\ logs\ OpsCenter log files Log file Troubleshooting purpose ServerService_timestamp. Table 3-17 Log file directory Log files for Symantec Product Authentication Service Log file Troubleshooting purpose Authentication activity.html Server OpsCenter %ALLUSERSPROFILE%\Symantec\OpsCenter\INSTALLLOGS\OpsCenterAgentInstallLog.log \Veritas\Security \Authentication\bin On 64-bit Windows platforms: %ProgramFiles(x86)% \Veritas\Security \Authentication\bin .Administering Symantec OpsCenter About OpsCenter log files 261 Table 3-15 OpsCenter Log file component OpsCenter 7.log These log files for system. Log files associated with Symantec Product Authentication Service Table 3-17 lists the log files that are associated with Symantec Product Authentication Service.html View Builder OpsCenter log files Table 3-16 shows details about the OpsCenter log files.log platforms: %ProgramFiles% vssconfig.5 installation log files OpsCenter %ALLUSERSPROFILE%\Symantec\OpsCenter\INSTALLLOGS\OpsCenterServerInstallLog.html Agent OpsCenter %ALLUSERSPROFILE%\Symantec\OpsCenter\INSTALLLOGS\OpsCenterViewBuilderInstallLog.

log Note: Do not change this log file.log INSTALL_PATH\OpsCenter\gui\logs\ 51216-147-*.log Troubleshooting purpose OpsCenter Sybase database activity. OpsCenter application logging. OpsCenter Web GUI activity. NBSL activity. INSTALL_PATH\VERITAS\VxPBX\bin\ 50936-103-*. INSTALL_PATH\OpsCenter\server\logs 58330-148*. OpsCenter Web server log files The log files that are associated with the OpsCenter Web server are present in the INSTALL_PATH\OpsCenter\gui\webserver\logs directory. OpsCenter Sybase database transaction files. OpsCenter server activity.log logs\ INSTALL_PATH\OpsCenter\Agent\logs 51216-146-*.262 Administering Symantec OpsCenter About OpsCenter log files OpsCenter database log files Table 3-18 lists the log files that are associated with the OpsCenter database. Table 3-18 Log file directory INSTALL_PATH\ OpsCenter\server\db\log\ INSTALL_PATH\ OpsCenter\server\db\data\ Log files associated with the OpsCenter database Log file server.log INSTALL_PATH\VERITAS\NetBackup\ 51216-132-*. vxpmdb.log . VxUL log files for OpsCenter and the components that OpsCenter uses Table 3-19 lists the log files that are associated with VxUL and other components that OpsCenter uses. Table 3-19 Log file directory Log files associated with VxUL and other components Log file Troubleshooting purpose PBX activity.log INSTALL_PATH\OpsCenter\server 58330-423-*.log Agent activity.

log Log files for Symantec Product Authentication Service Troubleshooting purpose Authentication activity. Table 3-22 Log files associated with OpsCenter database Troubleshooting purpose OpsCenter Sybase database activity. Table 3-20 Log files for OpsCenter Troubleshooting purpose OpsCenter log file <INSTALL_PATH>/SYMCOpsCenterServer/logs/ stdout and stderr for the OpsCenterServer OpsCenterServer_out. Log files on UNIX servers for Symantec Product Authentication Service Table 3-21 lists the log files that are associated with Symantec Product Authentication Service.Administering Symantec OpsCenter About OpsCenter log files 263 About OpsCenter log files on UNIX servers OpsCenter creates the following log files by using VxUL and legacy formats.log Note: Do not change this log file. . db/data/vxpmdb.log /var/VRTS/install/logs/ (directory) Provides a trace for any installation issues. Log files on UNIX servers associated with OpsCenter Table 3-20 lists the log files for OpsCenter. <INSTALL_PATH>/SYMCOpsCenterServer/logs/ Shows the details of purge operations. Table 3-21 Log file /var/VRTSat/vxatd.log daemon. purge-status. OpsCenter log file <INSTALL_PATH>/ SYMCOpsCenterServer/db/log/ dbserver.log <INSTALL_PATH>/SYMCOpsCenterServer/ OpsCenter Sybase database transaction files. Log files on UNIX servers associated with OpsCenter database Table 3-22 lists the log files that are associated with the OpsCenter database.

264 Administering Symantec OpsCenter About OpsCenter log files Log files on UNIX servers associated with OpsCenter Web server Table 3-23 lists the log files that are associated with the OpsCenter Web server. <INSTALL_PATH>/SYMCOpsCenterServer/logs/ OpsCenter server activity. .log OpsCenter Web GUI activity. Log files on UNIX associated with VxUL and other components Table 3-24 lists the log files that are associated with VxUL and other components.log Log files associated with VxUL and other components Troubleshooting purpose PBX activity. <INSTALL_PATH>/openv/logs/51216-132-*. Table 3-24 OpsCenter log file <INSTALL_PATH>/VRTSpbx/log/ 50936-103-*. 51216-146-*.log <INSTALL_PATH>/SYMCOpsCenterServer/ 58330-423-*. 558330-148*.log <INSTALL_PATH>/SYMCOpsCenterGUI/logs/ 51216-147-*.log NBSL activity. <INSTALL_PATH>/SYMCOpsCenterAgent/logs/ OpsCenter Agent activity.log OpsCenter application logging. Table 3-23 OpsCenter log directory Log files associated with the OpsCenter Web server Troubleshooting purpose <INSTALL_PATH>/SYMCOpsCenterGUI/webserver/logs OpsCenter Web GUI application activity (stdout).

Chapter 4 Understanding OpsCenter settings This chapter includes the following topics: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ OpsCenter settings Setting user preferences About managing licenses Configuring the data purge period on the OpsCenter Server Configuring SMTP server settings for OpsCenter Configuring Symantec ThreatCon feature in OpsCenter Adding host aliases in OpsCenter Merging objects (hosts) in OpsCenter Modifying tape library information in OpsCenter Copying a user profile in OpsCenter Setting report export location in OpsCenter About managing Object Types in OpsCenter About managing Symantec OpsCenter users About managing recipients in OpsCenter About managing cost analysis and chargeback for OpsCenter Analytics .

See “ Adding OpsCenter license keys” on page 273. Data Purge SMTP Sever ThreatCon Host Alias Add aliases for hosts.266 Understanding OpsCenter settings OpsCenter settings OpsCenter settings This topic describes the various OpsCenter settings. Configure Symantec ThreatCon feature in OpsCenter. Create Agent and Data Collectors to collect data from non-NetBackup products. Specify when you want to purge the data See “Configuring the data that is collected from various products. OpsCenter” on page 275. NetBackup Add NetBackup master servers and their See “About configuring data properties to collect data from it. but registered as separate objects . You can configure the following settings in OpsCenter. See “About managing OpsCenter Agents” on page 322.. Table 4-1 Setting Settings in OpsCenter Lets you. preferences” on page 268. collection for NetBackup” on page 330. Configure the SMTP server details that See “Configuring SMTP you need while sending reports or alerts server settings for through emails. in OpsCenter” on page 279. Reference topic User Preferences Add user-specific details and create user See “Setting user profiles.. Agent License Manage permanent or demo license keys. See “Configuring Symantec ThreatCon feature in OpsCenter” on page 276. The normal users can view or access the information that is relevant only to their profiles. An OpsCenter Admin can configure these settings using the OpsCenter console. purge period on the OpsCenter Server” on page 274. See “Adding host aliases in OpsCenter” on page 278. The Symantec ThreatCon feature is used to show how secure or vulnerable your network is. Object Merger Configure OpsCenter to merge the objects See “Merging objects (hosts) that represent the same backup client. which the OpsCenter Administrator has set.

Modify tape library information Reference topic See “Merging objects (hosts) in OpsCenter” on page 279. Add new object types and attributes.. Create cost variables. location in OpsCenter” on page 282. See “About managing Symantec OpsCenter users ” on page 286. Object Type Views Create and manage OpsCenter views. Report Export Location Specify the location where the exported See “Setting report export reports are stored. See “Estimating chargeback costs using the OpsCenter Formula Modeling Tool” on page 310.Understanding OpsCenter settings OpsCenter settings 267 Table 4-1 Setting Tape Library Settings in OpsCenter (continued) Lets you. Cost Estimation Manage cost estimation. See “About managing OpsCenter views” on page 387. See “Settings > Chargeback > Cost Variable options” on page 305. . Currency Settings Manage the currency settings that appear See “Setting the default in cost reports.. Users Manage users and user groups. default. Cost Variables Cost Formulae Create cost formulae. See “About managing recipients in OpsCenter” on page 297. Recipients Manage Email and SNMP recipients. See “About managing Object Types in OpsCenter” on page 283. See “Settings > Chargeback > Cost Formulae options” on page 309. You can select a currency currency for OpsCenter cost from the global currency list and set it as reports” on page 303. See “Copying a user profile in OpsCenter” on page 281. Copy User Profile Configure OpsCenter to copy a user's profile to another user.

Select this check box if you do not want to automatically refresh the OpsCenter GUI. Report data is grouped depending on this start time. User Role. you can set your preferences. Click the My Profile tab to see or modify User Name. and Email Address. you can type in name and contact information for this user. You can also change your password using the User Preferences tab. Click Save. and Allow Multiple Selection in View Pane. Domain Name. Settings > User Preferences options Use the General tab options as follows: Table 4-2 Option Default Locale General options Description Select a locale of your choice from the drop-down list. By default. Data Display Time Zone. For example. Enter the time that is used as the start time of a day in reports. To set user preferences 1 2 In the OpsCenter console. 3 4 5 Click Save. In General details. Select a preferred time zone . The user preferences options are organized in the General and My Profile tabs. Disable Auto Refresh. Data Display Time Zone Start 24 Hour Day at Disable Auto Refresh . Click the General tab to set Default Locale. Start 24 Hour Day at. if your user account belongs to the OpsCenterUsers domain. such as email ID or name. if you select English as a default locale. all OpsCenter GUI screens use English as a default language. Auto Refresh Interval (Minutes).either OpsCenter Server time zone or any other time zone from the Other drop-down list. click Settings > User Preferences. OpsCenter displays time on the GUI screens according to the selected time zone. such as default locale or time zone and personal details.268 Understanding OpsCenter settings Setting user preferences Setting user preferences In OpsCenter. Password. the auto-refresh option is enabled.

enter five in the Auto Refresh Interval text box. data for the selected view is shown when you run a report based on any of the report templates. Select one of these views as the default view for the Monitor and Manage tabs in the OpsCenter console. data for the selected view is shown in the Monitor and Manage tabs of the OpsCenter console. . Select one of these views as the default view for report templates. For example. By default. if you want to refresh the OpsCenter GUI to show updated data after every 5 minutes. By default. Auto Refresh Interval (Minutes) View Preferences Default View This drop-down list shows the views for which you have permission. Report Template Default View This drop-down list shows the views for which you have permission.Understanding OpsCenter settings Setting user preferences 269 Table 4-2 Option General options (continued) Description Enter auto-refresh interval in minutes.

a Group Component Summary table is displayed when you click Monitor > Jobs and select Summary View from the drop-down list. you can click a master server in the View Pane to view data for the specific master server. For example. Report Export Layouts . The Group Component Summary table was also displayed in NOM earlier. When you uncheck the multiple-selection option. The Group Component Summary table at the bottom of the view displays job summary information. Each node or a view object is a link. the multiple-selection option is enabled. You can click a node or a view object to view data for the respective node or view object. To view data for multiple master servers and nodes. you can see a check box next to each master server or node in the View Pane. When you check this option. For example if you select the ALL MASTER SERVERS view. the Group Component Summary table displays job summary for each master server. See “About making multiple or single-click selections in the View pane” on page 75. It shows the immediate NetBackup constituents of the selected view or node (group) in the View pane. When you uncheck the multiple-selection option. By default. you can only select a single node or view object from the View Pane at a given time. you check the corresponding check boxes and then click Apply Selection. See “About the Group Component Summary table” on page 422. You can make selections in the View pane in a similar manner as NetBackup Operations Manager (NOM).270 Understanding OpsCenter settings Setting user preferences Table 4-2 Option General options (continued) Description Allow Multiple Selection in Select this check box if you want to select multiple nodes View Pane or view objects in the View Pane. More details about the Group Component Summary table are available.

Fill in the First Name. The users from other domains cannot change their passwords using this option. ■ Portrait for less than eight headers Displays data in the Portrait format for data up to seven headers and Landscape format for more than seven headers. The name of the domain to which this user belongs. Work Number. Mobile Number. . The OpsCenter security admin sets a default password for each user when it creates the profiles. To change password. click the Change Password link. Select one of the following PDF formats in which you want to export the tabular reports: Portrait Displays a maximum of seven columns of data per page. Layout These preferences apply to standard reports only. ■ Expand to fit Displays the entire data across a single page. ■ Landscape Displays a maximum of ten columns of data per page. Department. ■ Read and use the My Profile tab options as follows: Table 4-3 Option User Name Password My Profile options Description Displays the user name.Understanding OpsCenter settings Setting user preferences 271 Table 4-2 Option General options (continued) Description PDF Tabular Report Export You can export a tabular report in various PDF formats. Cost Center. The email address of this user. and Pager Number. The users that belong to the OpsCenterUsers domain can change their passwords after logging on . See “Changing your OpsCenter password” on page 272. User Role Domain Name Email Address General Details The role of this user. Last Name.

In the Change Password dialog box. To change your OpsCenter password 1 2 3 In the OpsCenter console. See “ Adding OpsCenter license keys” on page 273. About managing licenses To use the advanced features that are not available in Symantec OpsCenter.272 Understanding OpsCenter settings About managing licenses Changing your OpsCenter password Change the administrator-assigned password the first time you logon to Symantec OpsCenter console. click Change Password. Expiry date that is associated with the license key. See “ Deleting OpsCenter license keys” on page 273. Change the password at regular intervals thereafter. See “About Symantec OpsCenter” on page 23. Licensed features that are associated with the key. Type the new password in the New Password field. . See “ Viewing OpsCenter license keys” on page 273. Passwords are case-sensitive and must contain at least five characters. Settings > Configuration > License options The License tab shows the current state of the following options: Table 4-4 Option Key Type Expiry Date Licensed Features License options Description License keys associated with OpsCenter. click Settings > My Profile. ■ Type your new password again in the Confirm New Password text box. you need to use a license key and enable Symantec OpsCenter Analytics. In the My Profile dialog box. EVALUATION etc. do the following: ■ ■ Type the existing password in the Old Password field. Type of license key like PERMANENT. 4 Click Save.

To delete Symantec OpsCenter Analytics license keys 1 2 Log on to the OpsCenter console as admin.Understanding OpsCenter settings About managing licenses 273 Table 4-4 Option Enabled License options (continued) Description This column tells whether the licensed feature is enabled or not. enter a license key and click OK. In the OpsCenter console. click Settings > Configuration. Deleting OpsCenter license keys You can remove one or more Symantec OpsCenter Analytics license keys from the OpsCenter Server. . To view OpsCenter license keys 1 2 3 Log on to the OpsCenter console as admin. click Settings > Configuration. Click the License tab. Actual current usage of the licensed feature. To add OpsCenter license keys 1 2 3 4 5 Log on to the OpsCenter console as admin. Click the License tab. on which you are connected as an administrator. Click Add. Viewing OpsCenter license keys You can view the license keys that are installed on the OpsCenterserver host. Total licensed value that is associated for the specific licensed feature. Current Usage License Limit Adding OpsCenter license keys An OpsCenter administrator can install OpsCenter license keys to activate additional product features or delete the license keys that are no longer needed. On the Add License Key pop-up screen. In the OpsCenter console. In the OpsCenter console. You can add one or more OpsCenter license keys. click Settings > Configuration.

enter the time of day (in 24-hour clock format) when you want to purge the data.log file. such as Job. 4 Edit the default data purge settings as necessary. Note: The details of the purged data are stored in the purge-status. See “Settings > Configuration > Data Purge options” on page 274. Click the Data Purge tab. data purge is enabled. Edit the default data purge options as follows: Table 4-5 Option Enable Data Purge Data Purge options Description By default. Uncheck this option to disable data purge. Select the check box in front of the license key that you want to delete. Policy. In the OpsCenter click Settings > Configuration. and Skipped Files.274 Understanding OpsCenter settings Configuring the data purge period on the OpsCenter Server 3 4 5 Click the License tab. which is located in the OpsCenter server logs directory. data purge is enabled. . Settings > Configuration > Data Purge options By default. Configuring the data purge period on the OpsCenter Server You can configure the OpsCenter Server retention periods for the data types that are logged. To configure the data purge period on the OpsCenter Server 1 2 3 Log on to the OpsCenter console as admin. Click Delete. 5 6 In the Time of Purge text box. data purge is enabled. By default. Click Save.

or they can be purged at the same time. . Alert data older than this number is purged from the OpsCenter database. OpsCenter uses these global server settings to send email notifications using the SMTP server that you specify.Understanding OpsCenter settings Configuring SMTP server settings for OpsCenter 275 Table 4-5 Option Backup Job Data Purge options (continued) Description Set the number of days after which you want to purge the backup jobs (default is 420 days). Number of days for which the SLP data should be retained (default is 90 days). To configure SMTP server settings for OpsCenter 1 2 3 Log on to the OpsCenter console as admin. data purge is set to 420 days. Tape Drive History Media History Alert SLP Images Audit Trail Note: By default. Configuring SMTP server settings for OpsCenter This section provides the procedure to configure the SMTP server that you can use for sending emails and alerts. In the OpsCenter console. Number of days for which you want to retain the audit trail records. logs can be purged earlier than their respective jobs. Backup Log Set the number of days after which you want to purge the Backup logs (default is 3 days). Set the number of days to retain Tape Drive History logs (default is 31 days). Time of Purge Enter the time of day (in 24-hour clock format) when you want to purge the data. Click SMTP Server. Set the number of days to retain Media History logs (default is 31 days). In other words. click Settings > Configuration. Enter the number of days for which you want to retain the alert data (default is 31 days). The number of days set for backup logs should be less than or equal to the number of days set for backup jobs.

Sender Display Name Sender Email Address Server User Name Server User Password Some SMTP servers may require user name and password credentials to send email. The Symantec ThreatCon feature is used to show how secure or vulnerable your network is. Notifications of the alerts that are generated in OpsCenter are sent using this SMTP server. See “About the Symantec ThreatCon pane” on page 78. Backup Reporting Department. Settings > Configuration > SMTP server options A description of the Settings > Configuration > SMTP Server options follows in the table. SMTP Server port Enter the SMTP (Simple Mail Transfer Protocol) Server port number. Some SMTP servers may require user name and password credentials to send email. . Table 4-6 Option SMTP Server Name SMTP server options Description Enter the SMTP (Simple Mail Transfer Protocol) Server host name. See “Settings > Configuration > SMTP server options” on page 276. For example. Enter the password for this user account. Specify the Email ID to receive any replies to the alerts or the reports that were sent by OpsCenter.276 Understanding OpsCenter settings Configuring Symantec ThreatCon feature in OpsCenter 4 Enter the required information. Configuring Symantec ThreatCon feature in OpsCenter This section provides information on how to configure the Symantec ThreatCon feature in OpsCenter. Enter the name that is associated with the Email ID. Enter the user name. 5 Click Save.

The ThreatCon feature is enabled by default. Enter the user name of the proxy server. Port User Name Password Enter the port number to connect to the proxy server. Set the password for the user account that you use to connect to the proxy server. Table 4-7 Option ThreatCon options Description EnableThreatConCollection Disable or enable the ThreatCon data collection using this check box. 5 Click Save. To configure Symantec ThreatCon feature in Windows for OpsCenter 1 2 3 4 Log on to the OpsCenter console with administrator privileges. if the default network is down. Enter the proxy server name. . click Settings > Configuration. Note: The proxy server configuration is not mandatory.Understanding OpsCenter settings Configuring Symantec ThreatCon feature in OpsCenter 277 Use the following procedure to enable or disable the Symantec ThreatCon feature. Enter the following proxy server details if you want to use it for accessing the latest ThreatCon ratings. Polling Interval Server Name Set the minutes for Polling Interval. Edit the default information. uncheck the box next to Enable ThreatCon Collection. Click ThreatCon. To disable ThreatCon. Settings > Configuration > ThreatCon options A description of the Settings > Configuration > ThreatCon options follows in the table. In the OpsCenter. See “Settings > Configuration > ThreatCon options” on page 277.

Warning: Your alias names must be compatible with your hosts’ DNS names or with the names by which they are known to applications such as NetBackup and Backup Exec. Table 4-8 Option Select Host Host Alias options Description From the drop-down list select a host name or type a host name. click Settings > Configuration > Host Alias. Click Show Alias to display the aliases associated with the selected host. Instead the explorer attempts to collect data from a host with the alias name.278 Understanding OpsCenter settings Adding host aliases in OpsCenter See “Configuring Symantec ThreatCon feature in OpsCenter” on page 276. if you use an alias that is unknown to OpsCenter. Show Alias . All the existing aliases are displayed. Enter the alias name for the host that you have selected from the drop-down list. the explorer stops collecting information from the OpsCenter host. From the drop-down list select a host name or type a host name and click Show Alias. Other host aliases are used when you are search in OpsCenter or gather and collate data. Adding host aliases in OpsCenter This section provides the procedures to add aliases for hosts. To add a host alias 1 2 In the OpsCenter console. For example. The host’s primary alias is displayed in all console functions and reports. Click Save. Settings > Configuration > Host Alias options A description of the Settings > Configuration > Host Alias options follows in the table. 3 4 5 Click Add Alias.

3. Click Validate Object Merging. Using the OpsCenter UI. See “Settings > Configuration > Object Merger options” on page 280. To merge two objects 1 2 3 Log on to the OpsCenter console with administrator privileges. you can merge only one object into other. you can merge objects (hosts) representing the same backup client. Add Alias Click Add Alias to add aliases for the selected host. backup client. Select the Host Type: Master Server. 2. In OpsCenter. Merging objects (hosts) in OpsCenter OpsCenter provides a facility to merge objects (hosts) that represent the same media server. 4 5 6 7 Select the Source Host from the drop-down list. but registered as separate objects (hosts).Understanding OpsCenter settings Merging objects (hosts) in OpsCenter 279 Table 4-8 Option Alias 1. You can clear and save the alias for removing the particular alias. Host Alias options (continued) Description A selected host can have one or more alias associated with it. Select the Target Host from the drop-down list. . Media Server. Caution: Object merging is not reversible. etc. An auto-suggest feature is available. click Settings > Configuration > Object merger. at a time. An auto-suggest feature is available. To modify the Source Host or Target Host click Back. To begin the merge. In the OpsCenter console. click Start Merge. You can view the snapshot of the selection that you have made earlier. Repeat these steps if you want to merge more objects. or Client.

you can edit the serial number.280 Understanding OpsCenter settings Modifying tape library information in OpsCenter Settings > Configuration > Object Merger options A description of the Settings > Configuration > Object Merger options follows in the table. . In the OpsCenter console. Target host is the host to which you want to merge the source host. Validate Object Merging Click Validate Object Merging to view a snapshot of the selection that you have made. alias. Media Server. or Client radio button to indicate Host Type. Click Tape Library. OpsCenter receives information from NBSL about specific SCSI robots. Symantec recommends that you do not edit Slot Count information for the following SCSI robots: ■ ■ ■ TLD TL4 TL8 To modify tape library information in OpsCenter 1 2 3 Log on to the OpsCenter console with administrator privileges. Modifying tape library information in OpsCenter OpsCenter provides a facility to monitor all the tapes that the data collector uses. manufacturer. Target host is the resultant host after the object merger. Table 4-9 Option Host Type Object Merger options Description Select the Master Server. Source Host Target Host Select a target host from the drop-down list. Using the OpsCenter UI. Source host is the host that you want to merge. An auto-suggest feature is available. An auto-suggest feature is available. click Settings > Configuration. slot count of the tape drives the data collector uses. Select a source host from the drop-down list.

is accessible only by the user who has created it. Table 4-10 Option ID Tape Library options Description Displays the unique ID that is associated with the tape library. Enter the manufacturer of the tape library. Select the type of tape library from the drop-down list. To copy a user profile 1 2 3 Log on to the OpsCenter console with administrator privileges. See “Settings > Configuration > Copy User Profile options” on page 282. and cost formulas. Displays the media server to which the tape library is attached. See “Settings > Configuration > Tape Libary options” on page 281. . In the OpsCenter console. Enter the slot count for the tape library. Select the source user account from the From User drop-down list. Using the copy user profile functionality. Select the check box next to tape library. such as reports. Enter the serial number of the tape library. 4 Select the target user account from the To User drop-down list. Host Name Type Serial Number Manufacturer Alias Slot Count Copying a user profile in OpsCenter Most user-definable content. for which you want to edit the information. Enter the alias for the tape library. cost variables.Understanding OpsCenter settings Copying a user profile in OpsCenter 281 4 5 You can view the list of the tape libraries in OpsCenter. 6 Click Save. click Settings > Configuration > Copy User Profile. Settings > Configuration > Tape Libary options The following table provides a description of the Settings > Configuration > Tape Libary options. Edit the information. you can copy information from one user account to another.

If you copy a cost report. 8 Click Copy. Table 4-11 Option From User Copy User Profile options Description Select the source user account from the From User drop-down list. if you have not defined any location. . Select reports or cost rates and formulae to be copied to this user profile. select the items you want to copy. for example reports or cost rates and formulae. Click Next. Select reports to be copied to this user profile. If you copy a cost formula. To User Copy Items Reports Cost Rates and Formaulae Copy option Setting report export location in OpsCenter In OpsCenter you can configure exporting of reports to a predefined location. Data from exported reports is stored in a default directory.282 Understanding OpsCenter settings Setting report export location in OpsCenter 5 6 7 In the Copy Items options. the associated cost formula and variables are implicitly copied. Settings > Configuration > Copy User Profile options A description of the Settings > Configuration > Copy User Profile options follows in the table. the associated cost variables are implicitly copied. Select the items you want to copy: Reports or Cost Rates and Formulae. Select cost rates and formulae to be copied to this user profile. Select the target user account from the To User drop-down list. Click Copy to copy the selected items to the selected user profile.

See “Adding attributes to object types in OpsCenter” on page 285. Settings > Configuration > Object Type options A description of the Settings > Configuration > Object Type options follows in the table. In the OpsCenter console. Settings > Configuration > Report Export Location options A description of the Settings > Configuration > Report Export Location options follows in the table. Click Save. Table 4-13 Option Object Types Object Type options Description Click the list box to select an object type that you want to configure. About managing Object Types in OpsCenter See the following sections for the procedures related to managing object types and their attributes in OpsCenter.Understanding OpsCenter settings About managing Object Types in OpsCenter 283 To set report export location 1 2 3 4 Log on to the OpsCenter console with administrator privileges. In the Report Export Location box type the directory where you want to save the reports. See “Adding object types in OpsCenter” on page 284. See “Deleting object types in OpsCenter” on page 284. Table 4-12 Option Report Export Location Report Export Location options Description Type the directory path where you want to save the reports. click Settings > Configuration > Report Export Location. . See “Modifying object types in OpsCenter” on page 285. See “Deleting attributes from object types in OpsCenter” on page 285.

284 Understanding OpsCenter settings About managing Object Types in OpsCenter Table 4-13 Option Add/Edit/Delete Object Type options (continued) Description Located to the right of the Object Types drop-down list. . Located above the Attributes check box. Click Delete. Deleting object types in OpsCenter You can only delete an object type that you have created. Add/Delete Attributes Adding object types in OpsCenter In OpsCenter you can add or edit attributes of predefined object types. Click Add. To add an object type 1 2 3 4 5 Log on to the OpsCenter console with administrator privileges. edit. You can delete the object types that you have created. In the OpsCenter console. You cannot delete predefined object types. In the OpsCenter console. Select the object type from the drop-down list.. Enter the name in the Add Object Type dialog box. Attributes associated with the selected object type. Click to add. Click to add or delete attributes. Click OK. You can also add new object types and attributes for those new object types. or delete object types. You cannot delete the predefined objects in the drop-down list. See “Adding object types in OpsCenter” on page 284. click Settings > Configuration > Object Types. To delete object types 1 2 3 4 Log on to the OpsCenter console with administrator privileges. click Settings > Configuration > Object Types.

In the OpsCenter console. To modify an object type name 1 2 3 Log on to the OpsCenter console with administrator privileges. Adding attributes to object types in OpsCenter You can add attributes to all object types. In the OpsCenter console. To add attributes to an object type 1 2 3 4 Log on to the OpsCenter console with administrator privileges. Enter the name of the attribute and click OK. click Settings > Configuration > Object Type. click Settings > Configuration > Object Types. click Add. See “Adding object types in OpsCenter” on page 284. In the Attributes section. 4 5 Click Add. You cannot modify the name of the predefined objects in the drop-down list. Select the object type that you want to modify from the drop-down list. click Settings > Configuration > Object Types.Understanding OpsCenter settings About managing Object Types in OpsCenter 285 Modifying object types in OpsCenter You can only modify the name of an object type that you have created. You cannot rename the predefined object types. select the check box in front of the attribute you want to delete. type a name for the object type and click OK. Select the object type from the drop-down list and in Attributes section. You can rename the object types that you have created. Deleting attributes from object types in OpsCenter You can delete the attributes that are added to an object type. To delete attributes from an object type 1 2 3 4 Log on to the OpsCenter console with administrator privileges. Select the object type from the drop-down list. In the Add Object type dialog. In the OpsCenter console. Click Delete. .

See “ Adding new users to OpsCenter” on page 293. See “User access rights and UI functions in OpsCenter” on page 287. See “ Adding new users to OpsCenter” on page 293. See “ Editing OpsCenter user information” on page 293. . See “Adding OpsCenter user groups” on page 296. The Symantec Product Authentication Service validates credentials of OpsCenter users based on Windows. or delete users. See “Resetting an OpsCenter user password” on page 294. Settings > Users > Users options A description of the Settings > Users > Users options follows in the table. Role that is associated with the user. See “ Deleting OpsCenter users” on page 294. Login name of the user. you need to create user accounts. The Assigned Views tab is only visible if you log on as a Security Administrator (like admin). See “Resetting an OpsCenter user password” on page 294. edit. Email address that you provided while adding the user. See “ Viewing OpsCenter user account information” on page 292. Domain Type Domain type (like vx) that the user is a member of and also specified while adding the user. See “User access rights and UI functions in OpsCenter” on page 287. or private domains. NIS. Domain Name The Security Administrator can view the list of views that each user can access under the Assigned Views tab at the bottom.286 Understanding OpsCenter settings About managing Symantec OpsCenter users About managing Symantec OpsCenter users After you install Symantec OpsCenter. Table 4-14 Option Add/Edit/Delete options Name Email address User Role Users options Description Click Add/Edit/Delete to add. Domain name (like OpsCenterUsers) that the user is a member of and also specified while adding the user .

■ Create. remove roles to users and user groups. ■ Go to this topic See “About managing Symantec OpsCenter users ” on page 286. ■ Add. Permission Type User access rights and UI functions in OpsCenter The following tables provide information on OpsCenter users and the functions that they can perform in the OpsCenter GUI. . The Security Administrator can assign a view directly to a user using the OpsCenter console. Created On Owner This column lists the date and time when the view was created. A Security Administrator or Administrator can also assign a view directly to a user-group using the Java View Builder.Understanding OpsCenter settings About managing Symantec OpsCenter users 287 The following columns are shown in the table: Name Type This column lists the views to which a user is permitted. Table 4-15 provides details of the OpsCenter UI functions that you can perform. update. This column lists the name of the user who owns the specific view. delete user groups. Table 4-15 OpsCenter functions User Management OpsCenter UI functions Tasks The User Management function includes the following tasks: Create. update. This column lists if the view was assigned directly to the selected user or via a user group. ■ Assign. remove users from user groups. This column lists the type of the specific view like Client. delete users. or Policy. Master Server.

See “Configuring SMTP server settings for OpsCenter” on page 275.288 Understanding OpsCenter settings About managing Symantec OpsCenter users Table 4-15 OpsCenter functions OpsCenter Management OpsCenter UI functions (continued) Tasks Go to this topic The OpsCenter Management See “Adding a master server or function includes the appliance in OpsCenter” on page 346. (Activate/De-active) ■ Job (Stop/Start/Suspend/Resume) ■ Media (Assign. Freeze. NetBackup Operations The NetBackup Operations function includes the following tasks: See “Activating or deactivating a job policy” on page 437. NetBackup entities as follows: See “Controlling media” on page 445. SNMP. OpsCenter” on page 357. unfreeze ) ■ Drives (Up/Down) ■ Others . SMTP server See “About managing OpsCenter Agents” on page 322. See “About managing recipients in OpsCenter” on page 297. following tasks: See “Editing a master server or an ■ Add. Update. ■ Policy See “Controlling drives” on page 455. See “Controlling NetBackup jobs” Change states of the on page 416. Update. ■ Add. See “About managing cost analysis and chargeback for OpsCenter Analytics” on page 303. Delete appliance master server in Master Server OpsCenter” on page 356. Delete See “Deleting a master server or an OpsCenter Agents appliance master server in ■ Set default currency.

Views Management The Views Management function includes the following tasks: ■ See “User access rights and UI Create. All Views Read The All Views Read function See “About managing OpsCenter includes the following tasks: views” on page 387. update. and Exchange Server) See “About managing OpsCenter views” on page 387. See “Creating a custom report in OpsCenter” on page 644. ■ Schedule canned and public custom reports. ■ Assign Read permission to users on OpsCenter views and nodes. See “About managing My Dashboard” on page 671. ■ View OpsCenter views and nodes. application (Oracle. OpsCenter views and nodes. or delete functions in OpsCenter” on page 287. The ALL MASTER SERVERS view cannot be modified. ■ Search and restore files. Report Execution This function includes the following tasks: Execute report templates and public custom reports. update Dashboard. . ■ ■ Create. See “About managing report schedules in OpsCenter” on page 678. folders. SQL Server. following tasks: See “Performing a Guided Recovery ■ Execute manual backups. See “Creating an OpsCenter report using a Report Template” on page 634.Understanding OpsCenter settings About managing Symantec OpsCenter users 289 Table 4-15 OpsCenter functions OpsCenter UI functions (continued) Tasks Go to this topic Backup and Recovery The Backup and the Recovery See “Starting a manual backup” function includes the on page 437. cloning operation” on page 563.

Custom SQL Reports This function includes the Note: This feature is following tasks: available with the ■ Create. update. delete licensed (Symantec custom reports. update. Drives. See “Managing an alert policy ” on page 508. Details): Job. acknowledge. Media. product. Monitoring Monitoring includes the following tasks: ■ See “Creating an OpsCenter report using SQL query” on page 666. ■ Assign. OpsCenter Analytics version) of the product. Summary. OpsCenter Analytics) ■ Make custom reports version of the public. Others. Alerts. delete alert policies. clear alerts. OpsCenter users are categorized as follows: . ■ See “About creating (or changing) an alert policy” on page 490. View entities ( Dashboards.290 Understanding OpsCenter settings About managing Symantec OpsCenter users Table 4-15 OpsCenter functions Custom Reports OpsCenter UI functions (continued) Tasks Go to this topic See “Creating a custom report in OpsCenter” on page 644.Monitoring NetBackup using Symantec OpsCenter Alert Management The Alert Management function includes the following tasks: . delete licensed (Symantec custom SQL reports. update. See chapter 7 . This function includes the Note: This feature is following tasks: available with the ■ Create. or both. Policy.Create. private.

The role of this user is to mainly generate the operational and business-level reports for further analysis. or delete users. A Reporter would be able to view only those schedules that they themselves create. The OpsCenter Administrator cannot create. OpsCenter Server. the role of Analyst has been removed. Table 4-17 lists the OpsCenter user roles and the OpsCenter UI functions that these users can perform. Table 4-17 OpsCenter function User Management OpsCenter Management User roles Administrator N Security Administrator Y Operator N Restore Operator Reporter N N Y Y N N N . perform alert operations and run standard or custom reports. Security Administrator Administrator This user can perform all OpsCenter functions except for user management. A new role called Restore Operator has been added. Restore Operator Reporter Note: From OpsCenter 7. The role of this user is to mainly perform restore operations. The OpsCenter Security Administrator can create. and NetBackup configuration. or delete users. and Operator would however be able to access all the schedules. The Security Administrator.Understanding OpsCenter settings About managing Symantec OpsCenter users 291 Table 4-16 User User categories Description A Security Administrator is a super admin user who can perform all OpsCenter functions including user management.5. Administrator. edit. The Restore Operator can monitor. Operator This user is not involved in the activities that are related to managing users. edit.

The user information is arranged in a tabular format. Viewing OpsCenter user account information You can view a list of OpsCenter users and their information such as. access level. “N” represents “No”. . which means that the users of this role cannot perform this particular OpsCenter function. user name. authentication domain. which means that the users of this role can perform this particular OpsCenter function. You can sort the table by user attributes. and so on.292 Understanding OpsCenter settings About managing Symantec OpsCenter users Table 4-17 OpsCenter function NetBackup Operations User roles (continued) Administrator Y Security Administrator Y Operator Y Restore Operator Reporter Partial (Only perform operations on Restore Jobs) Y N Backup and Recovery Views Management All Views Read Report Execution Custom Reports Custom SQL Reports Monitoring Alert Management Y Y Y N Y Y N N N Y Y P P P Y Y (except Hold reports) Y Y (except Hold reports) Y Y (except Hold reports) Y Y (except Hold reports) Y Y Y Y Y N N Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y “Y” represents “Yes”. name. See “About managing Symantec OpsCenter users ” on page 286. P respresents "Permission based" which means that users of this role need permission to perform the particular function.

6 Click Save. specify the password. Confirm Password. Password. Click Users to view the list of users. and enter it once again for confirmation. you can see the Granted Views list box. email ID. Adding new users to OpsCenter You can either add the existing users that are discovered from various domains to OpsCenter or create users in the private “OpsCenterUsers” domain. user role. and contact details. or Restore Operator as the User Role. click Add. mobile number. Editing OpsCenter user information Only a Security Administrator can edit the existing users. If you have selected the New User option. you do not have to enter Password and Confirm Password. The following user information is mandatory: User Name. first name. On the Users tab. Select the user creation type: New User or Existing Domain User. work number. last name. Only a Security Administrator can add or modify user profiles by using the OpsCenter console. In the OpsCenter console. cost center. If you have selected Operator. In the Symantec OpsCenter console. and User Role See “User access rights and UI functions in OpsCenter” on page 287. click Settings > Users. Select one or more views from the Granted Views list box to grant access of the specific views to the specific user. Enter the following general and demographic details of the user: User name. click Settings > Users. . If you have selected the Existing Domain User option. To add a new user to OpsCenter 1 2 3 4 5 Log on to the OpsCenter console as a Security Administrator. Reporter.Understanding OpsCenter settings About managing Symantec OpsCenter users 293 To view OpsCenter user account information 1 2 3 Log on to the OpsCenter console with administrator privileges. domain name. department.

enter the new password and confirm password for the selected user. Modify the user information. In the OpsCenter console. You can modify the views for user roles like Operator. Select one or more views from the Granted Views list to grant access of the specific views to the user. On the Users tab. click Reset Password. The Reset Password functionality is applicable only for OpsCenter users. See “About managing Symantec OpsCenter users ” on page 286. click the check box in front of the user that you want to edit. click the check box in front of the user for whom you want to reset the password.294 Understanding OpsCenter settings About managing Symantec OpsCenter users To edit an existing user in OpsCenter 1 2 3 4 5 Log on to the OpsCenter console as a Security Administrator. You can also reset passwords of the OpsCenter users using this page. To reset a user password 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Log on to the OpsCenter console as a Security Administrator. In the General Details pane. In the OpsCenter console. On the Users tab. . You cannot modify the domain of the user. click Settings > Users. Restore Operator. On the Reset Password page. click Settings > Users. Click Save. 6 Click Save. Deleting OpsCenter users You can delete the user accounts that do not need to be maintained. or Reporter. See “Resetting an OpsCenter user password” on page 294. Click Edit. You can modify the views that you want a user to access. Click Edit. Resetting an OpsCenter user password This section describes how to reset a user password.

Table 4-18 Option Add/Edit/Delete options User Groups options Description Click Add to add user groups. Settings > Users > User Groups options A description of the Settings > Users > User Groups options follows in the table. Click Users. Enter a description for the user group that you add. Check the box next to the user account you want to delete. In the OpsCenter console. Enter a name for the user group that you add. Name Description . Viewing OpsCenter user groups This section provides the procedure to view the existing user groups. Click Delete to delete the user groups.Understanding OpsCenter settings About managing Symantec OpsCenter users 295 Note: The default OpsCenter user admin cannot be deleted. To delete a OpsCenter user 1 2 3 4 5 Log on to the OpsCenter console as a Security Administrator. To view a user group 1 2 3 Log on to the OpsCenter console as a Security Administrator. click Settings > Users. Warning: Do not inadvertently delete all your administrator accounts. Click Delete. Click User Groups to view the list of user groups. In the OpsCenter console. click Settings > Users. Click Edit to add or delete users to the existing user group. Only a Security Administrator can access this view.

On the User Groups tab. Editing OpsCenter user groups You can modify an existing user group. In the OpsCenter console. Add or delete the users using the List of Users pane and Add Users pop-up screen. Click OK. add them to a single user group. select the users that you want to add to this user group. Click User Groups . In the List of Users pane. click Settings > Users. The same access rights on views are attributed to all users in the user group . Modify the user group name or description. . Click User Groups. click Save. Click Add. Click Edit. To create an OpsCenter user group 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Log on to the OpsCenter console as a Security Administrator. enter the name of the group and description. click Settings > Users. On the Add Users dialog box. Select the check box in front of the user group that you want to edit. In the OpsCenter console. click Add to open the Add Users pop-up screen. On the User Group tab.296 Understanding OpsCenter settings About managing Symantec OpsCenter users Adding OpsCenter user groups If you want to give the same privileges to multiple users. Click Save. To edit a Symantec OpsCenter user group 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Log on to the OpsCenter console as a Security Administrator. Deleting OpsCenter user groups You can delete a user group that you no longer need.

creating. In the OpsCenter console. click Settings > Users. See “Configuring SMTP server settings for OpsCenter” on page 275. See “Deleting OpsCenter Email or SNMP trap recipient” on page 302. In the OpsCenter console. Select the check box next to the user groups that you want to delete. Click Delete. click Settings > Recipients. See “Viewing email recipients in OpsCenter” on page 297. and deleting email and SNMP trap recipient information. About managing recipients in OpsCenter You can specify the recipients to whom you want to send alert notifications or email reports. All email recipients are displayed on this tab.Understanding OpsCenter settings About managing recipients in OpsCenter 297 To delete a Symantec OpsCenter user group 1 2 3 4 5 Log on to the OpsCenter console as a Security Administrator. See “Settings > Recipients > Email options” on page 298. The following sections provide procedures for viewing. By default. Click User Groups. the Email tab is selected. See “Modifying OpsCenter Email or SNMP recipient information” on page 302. See “Viewing SNMP trap recipients in OpsCenter” on page 298. See “Creating OpsCenter email recipients” on page 299. To view the email recipients 1 2 Log on to the OpsCenter console. Note: Make sure that the mail server is configured to send emails. See “Creating OpsCenter SNMP trap recipients” on page 300. modifying. Viewing email recipients in OpsCenter This section provides the procedure to view the available email recipients. . 3 Modify recipients and recipient details as needed.

298 Understanding OpsCenter settings About managing recipients in OpsCenter See “About managing recipients in OpsCenter” on page 297. Description Description about the email recipient Viewing SNMP trap recipients in OpsCenter This section provides the procedure to view the available SNMP trap recipients. Settings > Recipients > SNMP trap recipient options A description of the Settings > Recipients > SNMP trap recipient options follows in the table. it is not available for selection on the Adding Email Recipients pop-up screen. when emails are sent. To view the SNMP trap recipients 1 2 3 4 Log on to the OpsCenter console. click Settings > Recipients. Table 4-20 Option Recipient Name SNMP Host SNMP trap recipient options Description Name of the SNMP trap recipient. In the OpsCenter console. . Table 4-19 Option Recipient Name Email Address Active Email recipient options Description Name of the email recipient Email ID of the recipient The status of the email recipient that states whether it is active or not If a recipient is not active. Click SNMP. Name of the SNMP host. Modify recipients and recipient details as needed. Settings > Recipients > Email options A description of the Settings > Recipients > Email options follows in the table.

Email Address Active . it is not available for selection on the Adding Trap Recipients pop-up screen. The status of the trap recipient that states whether it is active or not. click Settings > Recipients. In the OpsCenter console. click Add to create new email recipients. when alert policies are configured. Select this check box if you want the recipient to receive alert notifications and reports by emails. In the Email tab.Understanding OpsCenter settings About managing recipients in OpsCenter 299 Table 4-20 Option Port SNMP trap recipient options (continued) Description Port number on the SNMP host where you want to send traps. Enter the required information. Enter the email ID of the official. to which alert notifications or reports are sent. Table 4-21 Option Email Recipient Name Add Email Recipient options Description Enter the name of the official whom you want to notify about an alert or send reports. To create email recipients 1 2 3 4 Log on to the OpsCenter console with administrator privileges. Settings > Recipients > Email > Add Email Recipient options A description of the Settings > Recipients > Email > Add Email Recipient options follows in the table. If a recipient is not active. Creating OpsCenter email recipients This section describes how to create email recipients. 5 Click Save. Active Description Description about the trap recipient. See “ Settings > Recipients > Email > Add Email Recipient options” on page 299.

Activate Delivery Limit Maximum Number of Messages Delivery Time Span Reset Message Count After Enter the time period in hours. Delivery Time Span = 30 Minutes. Alert Manager once again starts sending messages until message count reaches 10. Maximum Number of Messages. In OpsCenter. or seconds. the Notification Manager blocks the delivery of any new notifications to the associated recipient for the time period that is specified for Reset Message Count After Time. Select this check box to activate the Alert Notification Delivery Limit settings. a trap is sent after an alert was . A trap recipient is a host that receives notifications in the form of SNMP traps when an alert condition is met. or seconds. Delivery Time Span. and Reset Message Count After Time = 2 Hours. Enter the maximum number of notifications that you want to receive within the specified Delivery Time Span. Enter the time duration in hours. Creating OpsCenter SNMP trap recipients Traps or interrupts are signals sent to inform the programs that an event has occurred. Once it has sent 10 messages. In this case. assume Maximum Number of Messages = 10. Once the message count reaches Maximum Number of Messages. Note: For example. minutes. minutes. Alert Manager sends messages until message count reaches 10 in 30 Minutes. Maximum Number of Messages is reset and the Notification Manager starts sending notifications for the specified Delivery Time Span. Once this time period is over. traps are the notifications that are sent to a specified SNMP host or group of hosts when a condition is met.300 Understanding OpsCenter settings About managing recipients in OpsCenter Table 4-21 Option Description Add Email Recipient options (continued) Description Enter a short description about the alert or report so that recipients can understand. during which notifications are sent. After two hours. it blocks the delivery of new messages for next two Hours. during Time which notifications are blocked if the message count has reached Maximum Number of Messages. and Reset Message Count After Time are not taken into account when notifications are sent. For example. If you do not select this check box.

Select this check box to activate the Alert Notification Delivery Limit Settings. click Settings > Recipients. to which you want to send traps. Delivery Time Span. See “Settings > Recipients > SNMP > Add SNMP trap recipient options” on page 301. Maximum Number of Messages. Enter an SNMP host. Enter the port number on the SNMP host where you want to send traps. Click SNMP. refer to the About using SNMP with OpsCenter section. Click Add. In the OpsCenter console. The notifications are sent as soon as alerts are generated. Settings > Recipients > SNMP > Add SNMP trap recipient options A description of the Settings > Recipients > SNMP > Add SNMP trap recipient options follows in the table. For more details. Table 4-22 Option Recipient Name SNMP Host SNMP Port Add SNMP trap recipient options Description Enter the name of the SNMP trap recipient. If you do not select this check box.Understanding OpsCenter settings About managing recipients in OpsCenter 301 generated as a result of failure of communication between the OpsCenter Agent and Server. To create SNMP recipients 1 2 3 4 5 Log on to the OpsCenter Server host with administrator privileges. Select this check box if you want the recipient to receive notifications by SNMP traps. 6 Click Save. Enter a short description about the traps. Enter a maximum number of notifications that can be sent within the specified Delivery Time Span. Active Description Activate Delivery Limit Maximum Number of Messages . and Reset Message Count After Time are not taken into account when notifications are sent. In the SNMP Attributes page enter the required information.

click Settings > Recipients. . On the modify email or trap recipient page. In the Email Recipients tab or SNMP Recipients tab. Delivery Time Span Reset Message Count After Enter the time period in hours. or seconds. minutes. Once the message count reaches Maximum Number of Messages. change Email Recipient or SNMP Trap Recipient attributes and Alert Notification Delivery Limit Settings. Click Save. See “Creating OpsCenter SNMP trap recipients” on page 300. Alert Manager blocks the delivery of any new notifications to the associated recipient for the time period that is specified for Reset Message Count After Time. In the Email Recipients tab or SNMP Recipients tab. Once this time period is over. during Time which notifications are blocked if the message count has reached Maximum Number of Messages. Modifying OpsCenter Email or SNMP recipient information Only OpsCenter administrators can modify email or trap recipient information. during which notifications are sent. To modify email or SNMP trap recipient information 1 2 3 4 5 In the OpsCenter console. To delete Email or SNMP trap recipient 1 2 In the OpsCenter console. Click Edit. click Settings > Recipients. minutes. select the email or trap recipient that you want to edit. Deleting OpsCenter Email or SNMP trap recipient Only OpsCenter administrator can delete email or trap recipient. See “Creating OpsCenter email recipients” on page 299. select the email or trap recipient(s) from the table that you want to delete. Maximum Number of Messages is reset and Alert Manager starts sending notifications for the specified Delivery Time Span.302 Understanding OpsCenter settings About managing recipients in OpsCenter Table 4-22 Option Add SNMP trap recipient options (continued) Description Enter the time duration in hours. See “Creating OpsCenter email recipients” on page 299. or seconds.

cost formulae. . You cannot access the Settings > Chargeback feature if you do not have Symantec OpsCenter Analytics. Click Save.Understanding OpsCenter settings About managing cost analysis and chargeback for OpsCenter Analytics 303 3 4 Click Delete. Note: Setting the default currency gives you the flexibility of displaying cost report values in the currency of your choice. This feature is disabled for unlicensed OpsCenter version. click Settings > Chargeback. See “Settings > Chargeback > Cost Variable options” on page 305. In the OpsCenter console. You cannot access the Settings > Chargeback feature if you do not have Symantec OpsCenter Analytics. you can choose the currency that you want to be displayed on cost reports. This feature is disabled for unlicensed OpsCenter version. OpsCenter does not support conversion of currencies. See “Settings > Chargeback > Cost Formulae options” on page 309. See “Setting the default currency for OpsCenter cost reports” on page 303. You can set the cost variable. you can set multiple global currencies. Setting the default currency for OpsCenter cost reports This section provides the procedure to set the default currency that you want to be displayed on OpsCenter cost reports. If you have OpsCenter administrator privilege. The following sections provide procedures for managing cost analysis and chargeback. See “Editing the OpsCenter global currency list” on page 304. To set the default currency for cost reports 1 2 Log on to the OpsCenter console with administrator privileges. In OpsCenter Analytics. About managing cost analysis and chargeback for OpsCenter Analytics This feature is accessible only to Symantec OpsCenter Analytics users. and cost estimation that you want to run the cost reports. However. one of which can be set as default currency.

Edit Currency List Currency Display Mode Display Currency Option in Select the Display Currency Option in Cost Reports check Cost Reports box to show the default currency on the cost reports. 5 6 Settings > Chargeback > Currency Settings options A description of the Settings > Chargeback > Currency Settings options follows in the table. Editing the OpsCenter global currency list This section provides the procedure to edit the global currency list. which appears on chargeback reports. Click this option to change the list of currencies available for selection. Select a currency from the drop-down list. Select the Display Currency Option in Cost Reports check box to show the default currency on the cost reports. See “Editing the OpsCenter global currency list” on page 304. All global currencies that are set by the administrator are available for selection. 4 Select the Currency Display Mode: Currency Code or Currency Symbol. For example.304 Understanding OpsCenter settings About managing cost analysis and chargeback for OpsCenter Analytics 3 On the Currency Settings tab. . Click Save. in the Default Currency drop-down list. for US dollar currency you can either select a currency code USD or symbol $. which appears on chargeback reports. Table 4-23 Option Default Currency Currency Settings options Description Select a currency from the drop-down list. For example. This list is available when a default currency is selected to be displayed on OpsCenter cost reports. Select the Currency Display Mode: Currency Code or Currency Symbol. for US dollar currency you can either select a currency code USD or symbol $. all global currencies that are set by the administrator are available for selection.

Add/Remove/Add All/Remove All Settings > Chargeback > Cost Variable options You can create cost variables based on various parameters to determine cost of various services. If you have not entered the Symantec OpsCenter Analytics license key. 5 Click Add to add the selected currencies to the User Currency list. On the Edit Currency List pop-up screen. . 6 Click OK. Settings > Chargeback > Currency Settings > Edit Currency List options A description of the Settings > Chargeback > Currency Settings > Edit Currency List options follows in the table. Add All. click Edit Currency List. you cannot access the Settings > Chargeback feature. This feature is disabled for unlicensed OpsCenter version. See “Setting the default currency for OpsCenter cost reports” on page 303. A description of the Settings > Chargeback > Cost Variable options follows in the table. click Settings > Chargeback. Table 4-24 Option Global Currency User Currency Edit Currency List options Description Lists the available global currencies. and Remove All options to alter the User Currency list. In the OpsCenter console. select currencies from the Global Currency list which you want to make available for selection in the Currency Settings > Default Currency drop-down list. Remove. It is the default currency list and lists the currencies that you select.Understanding OpsCenter settings About managing cost analysis and chargeback for OpsCenter Analytics 305 To edit the global currency list 1 2 Log on to the OpsCenter console with administrator privileges. You can use these options to alter the User Currency list. 3 4 On the Currency Settings tab. You can use Add.

306 Understanding OpsCenter settings About managing cost analysis and chargeback for OpsCenter Analytics Table 4-25 Option Name Metric Cost Variable options Description Displays the name of the cost variable that you add. Measure costs for a specific type of job. Measure cost for a specific transport type for example. Select to add a start date to the cost variable. Sybase. Measure cost for a specific storage type for example. Displays the metric that you select for the cost variable. in some cases. which enables you to select disk as a storage type. The default policy type is All. Total Date Ranges and Rates Displays the date ranges and rate in units for the date range that you select. OpsCenter supports NetBackup's disk-based data protection feature. Examples include DB2. Add an associated rate to the cost variable. Job Type Job Policy Type Job Transport Type Job Storage Type Date Range Starts Date Range Ends Rate Add New Range . The default option is All. Table 4-26 Option Variable Name Variable Metric Add Cost Variable options Description Enter a name for the cost variable that you want to add. when a cost variable is created. the policy type determines the type of clients that can be part of the policy and. The default option is All. Select a variable metric from the drop-down list for the cost variable that you add. for example Backup or Restore. In NetBackup. The default option is All. the types of backups that can be performed on the clients. And if you click the Add option. a page with the following settings appears. tape or disk. Measure costs for the jobs that use a specific policy type. Select to add a end date to the cost variable. Select to add more date ranges. LAN (local area network) or SAN (storage area network ). and MS Exchange Server. You can also select Never as the end date.

.00 per backup job. Typically. To set up OpsCenter to run cost reports. Job Policy Type. you need to create the variables that define the cost of various services.Understanding OpsCenter settings About managing cost analysis and chargeback for OpsCenter Analytics 307 Creating cost variables in OpsCenter Cost reports in OpsCenter Analytics are based on the user-defined variables that define the cost of various services. 3 4 5 On the Cost Variable tab.00 per backup job until 31 December 2004 and the rate of $1. click Settings > Chargeback. and Protected Job Size select the Job Type. for example $1. See “Settings > Chargeback > Cost Variable options” on page 305. Job Size. However. you must create a cost variable with the Protected Job Size (GB) metric.25 per backup job starting on 1 January 2005. and Job Storage Type. click Add. In the OpsCenter console. Click Cost Variable. a single variable can incorporate the rate of $1. Job Transport Type. you can account for rate changes in one of two ways: by creating two variables for the same service (which you can include in a single cost formula later) or by incorporating both rates into a single variable. Note: To generate deduplication savings reports. For Job Count. each service is represented by one variable that reflects the cost of the service. Enter the variable name. To create a cost variable 1 2 Log on to the OpsCenter console with administrator privileges. Select any of the following variable metrics from the drop-down list: ■ ■ ■ ■ Daily Occupancy Job Count Job Size Protected Job Size 6 If necessary. select additional parameters to refine the metric you selected. Note: These fields are not applicable for the Daily Occupancy variable metric. For example.

click Settings > Chargeback. In the OpsCenter console. to add more date ranges. 9 Click OK . Add an associated rate by typing a cost per service unit (such as backup jobs or backed-up GB) in the Rate field. Click OK. See “Creating cost formulae in OpsCenter” on page 309.308 Understanding OpsCenter settings About managing cost analysis and chargeback for OpsCenter Analytics 7 Add one or more date ranges using the drop-down lists for Month. 3 4 5 6 Select the check box in front of the variable name that you want to modify. Day. Year. and you must update any formulas that use the variable. Deleting cost variables in OpsCenter You can variables you no longer need. Modify the cost variable details. you can modify the name. click Add New Range. Click Cost Variables. Modifying cost variables in OpsCenter You can update cost variables and formulas without having to recreate the reports that rely on them. This can be useful for defining multiple date ranges to represent historical or future changes in service costs. click Settings > Chargeback. Deleting a cost variable removes it permanently from the database. and Time. . date ranges and rates of a variable to reflect changing conditions in your enterprise. Click Edit. You can also modify the variable later to add or delete date ranges as costs change. For example. 8 Optionally. You can now use the variable you created to build the formulas that form the basis for cost reports. Add at least one date range. To modify a cost variable 1 2 Log on to the OpsCenter console with administrator privileges. To delete a cost variable 1 2 3 Log on to the OpsCenter console with administrator privileges. Click Cost Variables. you must recreate the variable manually. In the OpsCenter console. To restore a deleted variable.

click Add. Click Cost Formulae. click Settings > Chargeback. You now can use the formula to create cost reports. Settings > Chargeback > Cost Formulae options Based on cost variables you can create the cost formulas that you can use to generate cost reports. create the formula that define the cost of various services to run cost reports. A description of the Settings > Chargeback > Cost Formulae options follows in the table. Table 4-27 Option Name Total Cost Variables Cost Formulae options Description Displays the name of the cost formulae added. 3 4 5 On the Cost Formulae tab. Click Delete. Enter the name of the formula. Select a different variable from the drop-down list. You can also modify the formulae later to add or delete variables. To create a cost formula 1 2 Log on to the OpsCenter console with administrator privileges. click Add new cost variable. These reports help you evaluate the cost of services and make decisions about what to charge for performing those services. 7 Click OK. Select a cost variable from the drop-down list.Understanding OpsCenter settings About managing cost analysis and chargeback for OpsCenter Analytics 309 4 5 Select the check box in front of the cost variable that you want to delete. to define formulae containing more than one variable. 6 Optionally. In the OpsCenter console. Displays the number of cost variables added to the cost formulae. You need to select at least one cost variable. Creating cost formulae in OpsCenter After you create cost variables. .

click Settings > Chargeback. On the confirmation dialog box. Click Edit. By inserting the metric Daily . For example.000 over the next year to provide backup services throughout your enterprise. In the OpsCenter console. Click Delete. You can update chargeback formulas without having to recreate the reports that rely on them. To delete cost formulae 1 2 Log on to the OpsCenter console with administrator privileges. 3 4 5 6 On the Cost Formulae tab. it provides you with an estimate of how much it costs your organization to provide a specific kind of service. To modify a cost formulae 1 2 Log on to the OpsCenter console with administrator privileges. Estimating chargeback costs using the OpsCenter Formula Modeling Tool The Formula Modeling Tool offers an easy way to estimate baseline rates for the IT services you provide. In the OpsCenter console. select the cost formulae that you want to delete. click Settings > Chargeback. Deleting a cost formulae in OpsCenter You can also delete formulae that you no longer need. suppose you anticipate spending $500. select the cost formulae that you want to modify. Modify the details of the cost formula. Click Cost Formulae. Click Cost Formulae. Deleting a cost formula removes it permanently from the database. 3 4 5 On the Cost Formulae tab. click OK. Using historical data. you might want to update a formula that is called RecoveryRate to reflect a change in the hourly rate that is charged for recovery operations. Click OK. For example.310 Understanding OpsCenter settings About managing cost analysis and chargeback for OpsCenter Analytics Modifying cost formulae in OpsCenter You can modify the name and variables of a cost formula that you have created.

Settings > Chargeback > Cost Estimation options A description of the Settings > Chargeback > Cost Estimation options follows in the table.00 . Examples: $50000. or $10000. along with the amount $500. Click Run Model to input different values into the model. 5 6 Use the following Time Frame parameters to define the time intervals for which data is modeled. Use the Metric Selection parameters to specify the metric whose rate you want to estimate: See “Settings > Chargeback > Cost Estimation options” on page 311. 3 4 Select a Report Grouping parameter to define the model’s scope. in dollars. Example: Daily Occupancy Amount Specify the total amount of money. To estimate baseline (chargeback) costs using the Formula Modeling Tool 1 2 Log on to the OpsCenter console with administrator privileges.Understanding OpsCenter settings About managing cost analysis and chargeback for OpsCenter Analytics 311 Occupancy into the tool. Table 4-28 Option Report Grouping Cost Estimation options Description Select a report grouping parameter to define the model's scope. In the OpsCenter console. you expect to charge for service within that category in a given time frame. See “Creating cost variables in OpsCenter” on page 307. you can obtain an estimate per kilobyte that is based on the backup activity you performed last year.000. Click Cost Estimation. Examples: All Master Servers or User Metric Select a metric or category of service. $10000. click Settings > Chargeback. or to run a new model. See “Creating cost formulae in OpsCenter” on page 309.

and a stop time using the To drop-down lists.312 Understanding OpsCenter settings About managing cost analysis and chargeback for OpsCenter Analytics Table 4-28 Option Time Frame Cost Estimation options (continued) Description Defines the beginning and end of the time interval the estimate must cover. You can choose either absolute or relative dates. Select a start time (month.M. up to the current time. ■ Examples: Last 21 Days or Last two Quarters The Relative setting is especially useful for the estimates that you plan to generate on a regular basis. Then select a time interval using the Last drop-down lists. to APR 30 2004 12:00 A.M. The estimate reflects the data that is collected within the specified time period. ■ Click Relative to configure a relative time frame. The estimate reflects data from the time period between the start and the end dates. Choose absolute dates if you want the estimate’s contents to remain static whenever you display it. . Such estimates always reflect the data that is collected over the most recent time interval. and time of day) using the From drop-down lists. Select one of the following: Click Absolute to configure an absolute time frame. year. Example: From MAR 1 2004 12:00 A. day. Choose relative dates if you want the estimate to reflect data that was collected over the most recent time interval.

Note: Only one OpsCenter Agent can be installed on a single host.Chapter 5 Understanding data collection This chapter includes the following topics: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ About data collection in OpsCenter About managing OpsCenter Agents About managing OpsCenter Data Collectors About configuring data collection for NetBackup Configuring Backup Exec data collector Collecting data from PureDisk About collecting data from Enterprise Vault IBM Tivoli Storage Manager data collector variables and details EMC NetWorker data collector variables About data collection in OpsCenter OpsCenter provides extensive reporting on the data that is collected from backup and archiving products. An OpsCenter Agent comprises the product-specific data collectors that collect data from point products and return it to the OpsCenter Server. .

See “Backup and archiving products supported by Symantec OpsCenter 7. . See “About OpsCenter Agents” on page 314.5” on page 319. See “OpsCenter Data Collector types” on page 315. refer to the Installing Symantec OpsCenter chapter. OpsCenter Integrated Agent is also installed and configured. These products can reside on the OpsCenter Agent host or on remote hosts. You can collect PureDisk data only through the OpsCenter Integrated Agent. For more details on OpsCenter Agent installation and deployment scenarios.314 Understanding data collection About data collection in OpsCenter An OpsCenter Agent consists of the data collectors that can collect data from the following backup and archiving products: ■ Symantec Backup Exec (Windows only) Note: To collect data from Backup Exec server host. About OpsCenter Agents The OpsCenter Agent collects data from various Symantec and third-party backup and archiving products. Symantec NetBackup PureDisk Symantec Enterprise Vault (Windows only) Note: To collect archive data from Enterprise Vault. you need to install the OpsCenter Agent on a Windows host. which you can use to collect only PureDisk data. To collect PureDisk data. you need to install the OpsCenter Agent on a Windows host. you do not need to manually install or configure OpsCenter Agent. IBM Tivoli Storage Manager (TSM) EMC NetWorker ■ ■ ■ ■ See “About configuring data collection for NetBackup” on page 330. Note: When you install the OpsCenter Server. You cannot delete the Integrated Agent.

These data collectors collect the specified data type as specified in the configuration. You can specify to collect all or some of the data types for that product. or EMC NetWorker.log OpsCenter Data Collector types The OpsCenter data collectors. Job. Policy and Schedule. Media. You can create data collectors to communicate with the various products. Collector (Windows only) See “Configuring Backup Exec data collector” on page 358. such as Backup Exec. Table 5-1 Data collector types Description Data Collector type Symantec Backup Exec Data Create this data collector to collect data from Backup Exec. collect data from backup and archiving product hosts.Understanding data collection About data collection in OpsCenter 315 About OpsCenter Agent logs OpsCenter Agent logs are stored at the following location: InstallPath\Symantec\OpsCenter\Agent\logs Where InstallPath is the location where you have installed the OpsCenter Agent. For example. You can configure multiple data collectors on a single OpsCenter Agent host.log An example of the OpsCenter Agent log file name: 58330-146-2567491850-091129-0000000000. You can enable or disable a data collector. Table 5-1 lists the data collectors that you can configure in OpsCenter. . or Image. Note: Error logs and skipped files are collected as part of job data. By default the InstallPath is: C:\Program Files Naming convention for the OpsCenter Agent log file: 5*-146-*. Enterprise Vault. Each data collector collects data from a single product host. Backup Exec data collector can collect tape drive Usage.

Table 5-2 Data Type 7.1. Symantec Enterprise Vault Data Collector (Windows only) Create this data collector to collect archive data from Symantec Enterprise Vault database See “About collecting data from Enterprise Vault” on page 362.0 6.0.0. TSM Data Collector Table 5-3 lists the data types that OpsCenter 7. See “EMC NetWorker data collector variables” on page 376. Data Collector type NetBackup PureDisk Data Collector Note: You can collect the PureDisk data only through the OpsCenter Integrated Agent that is installed with the OpsCenter server.x 6.0. EMC NetWorker Data Collector Create this data collector to collect data from EMC NetWorker.0.1 7.0. To collect PureDisk data.3 master server and later) .316 Understanding data collection About data collection in OpsCenter Table 5-1 Data collector types (continued) Description Create this data collector to collect data from NetBackup PureDisk.1.x 7.2 master server or NetBackup 7.5 collects from different NetBackup versions (including NetBackup Appliance).0 NetBackup Appliance (Appliance 2. 2.5. you need to create a data collector for the Integrated Agent.1. See “Collecting data from PureDisk” on page 359. See “IBM Tivoli Storage Manager data collector variables and details” on page 375. or 2.5 Data Types collected for different NetBackup versions 7. Create this data collector to collect data from TSM.

A.A. Y Y Y N.A.5.A.3 and later versions Y Y N. NetBackup Appliance Y Appliance Y Hardware Collected N.Understanding data collection About data collection in OpsCenter 317 Table 5-2 Data Type 7.A.1.A.A. Y Skipped Files and Job Throughput Catalog Client Disk Error Logs FT Hold N. Y .A.0 N.0.5 Data Types collected for different NetBackup versions (continued) 7. Y Y Y N.A. Agent N.A. 6.A.A.A.A. Y Y Y Y Y Y Agent Y N.0 N. Y Audit Y N.A.A.A.A. Y Y Agent N. Y Y BMR. Y Y Y N.1 7. only for 7.A. Y N. Y N. Y Y Y Y Y Y N.A. N.A. N.x N.x 7.A.0. N.A. N.A. Y Y Y N. N. 6. Y Y N.A. Y N. N.A.A. N.1.A.A. N.A.A. N.A.A. N. Y Y Y N. Y Y Agent N. N. Y N. Y Y Y Y Policy Y and Schedule Retention Y Level Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y N.A.A. Y Y Y Host Y Properties Images Index Job Media server Y Y Y Y Y N.

1 Y Y 7.A.0 Y Y 6. Y N.318 Understanding data collection About data collection in OpsCenter Table 5-2 Data Type Robot Data Types collected for different NetBackup versions (continued) 7. Virtual Y machine V o l u m e / M e d i a Y Volume group Volume Pool Y N.A. Y Y Y N. N.A.A. Y Y Y Y Agent Y Agent Y Agent Y N.A.A.x Y Y 7. Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Table 5-3 lists the data types that OpsCenter 7.A. Y Y Y Y Y Y N.1.A.A.A. NetBackup Appliance Y Y Scheduled Y jobs Service SLP Image Storage service Storage unit Storage unit Group SubJobs Y Y Y Y Y N.A.5. Y Y Y Y Y Y Y N.5 collects from various backup and archiving products (other than regular NetBackup).0 Y N. .A. Y Y Y Tape Y drive Information Throughput N. Y N. Y N.A.5 Y 7. Y Y Y Y Y Y N. N.x Y Y 6.A.A. Y N.0. Y N.A.

you cannot collect data from third-party products like IBM Tivoli Storage Manager (TSM) and EMC NetWorker. 7.0.1.5) Backup Enterprise Vault Exec (10. 2010 R2) 7. 12. 6.6. 6.x.x.6.5 This section lists the backup and archiving products that OpsCenter 7.0.3.x.0 (6.6.x.3.0 10.5.2) Y Y (5.5 supports.Understanding data collection About data collection in OpsCenter 319 Table 5-3 Data Types Data types collected from backup and archiving products Symantec IBM EMC NetBackup Tivoli NetWorker PureDisk Storage Manager 9.6.1.x.0 Job Y N N N N N N N N Y Y Y Y Policy Y and Schedules Tape Y drive I n f o r m a t i o n Media Y N N N N N Y Y N Y N Y N Y N Y N N Y N Y N Archive N Policy Archive N Vault Vault Store N N Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y N N N N N N N N N Backup and archiving products supported by Symantec OpsCenter 7. 6. Table 5-4 lists the backup and archiving products that OpsCenter supports. you can perform advanced reporting from the data that is collected from all of these products. 6. . 6. With the unlicensed version.5 8.6. Note that with the licensed version of OpsCenter. 6. 5. 11. 2010.2.1.0.4.3 5. 6.6.2.

7.6.0. 12.1. 6.6. Symantec Backup Exec 11d.0 master server or to a regular NetBackup 7.1.6.1. (SP2 & R2) Symantec Enterprise Vault 7. 6.5 master server Data collection happens automatically by NBSL Symantec NetBackup Appliance Symantec NetBackup PureDisk 6.0.2. 8.5 & R2).0 master servers Appliance 1.1.6. 6. To create or configure the data collector.5.6. 2010 R3 Exec platforms by remote agent. 6.0 MP7 and higher All supported NetBackup platforms versions.0.5. 2010 All supported Symantec Backup R2.5. select the Agent that is installed as Integrated Agent. Windows 2008 (SP2 & R2). 6. 12. 2008 Exec running on NetWare. 6. 6. 2010. 10. 6. 2008 (SP2 & R2).2.6.5. . 9.0.6. 11 Appliance 2.5 Versions Support level Backup or Archiving product Symantec NetBackup 6.3.0. 6.2 and 2.x and higher by remote agent versions.2.2.320 Understanding data collection About data collection in OpsCenter Table 5-4 Backup and archiving products supported by Symantec OpsCenter 7. You do not need a separate Agent to collect data from PureDisk.0.2. 6.0 and higher Native agent for Windows 2003 (SP2 versions. 7. 6. Note: OpsCenter does not Native agent on backup servers on support Symantec Backup Windows 2003 (SP2 & R2). 10.0 All supported Symantec Enterprise Vault platforms by remote agent Native agent on Microsoft SQL Server 2005 or 2008 (where Enterprise Vault database resides) on Windows 2003 (SP2 & R2). You can use the inbuilt Agent of the OpsCenter Server for data collection. and Solaris 9.0 media servers that are attached to an appliance 2.3a PureDisk supported platform (PDOS) by the OpsCenter integrated Agent.5.

(CST) and 9:00 P. both OpsCenter server and the product host must show the same time. Backup Exec host. 2008 (SP2 & R2) and Solaris 9/10 Data collection is possible only with a licensed version of OpsCenter. NetBackup master server. For example if the OpsCenter server and the managed host show 8:00 P. and 10:00 P. A backup product host or an archive product host means a supported product host that is connected to OpsCenter. but show different time like 8:00 P. Enterprise Vault host etc. If the OpsCenter server and product host are in different time zones like CST and PST. Note: Ensure that the time on the OpsCenter Server and the backup product host or archive product host is in sync based on the time zone they are deployed in. If the OpsCenter server and the product host are in the same time zone (like CST).M. For example.3 Backup or Archiving product EMC NetWorker Support level Native agent on backup servers on Windows 2003 (SP2 & R2).M.M. then ensure that both the CST and the PST time convert to the same GMT time. PST respectively.. 5. then 8:00 P. 2008 (SP2 & R2) and Solaris 9/10 Data collection is possible only with a licensed version of OpsCenter.M.Understanding data collection About data collection in OpsCenter 321 Table 5-4 Backup and archiving products supported by Symantec OpsCenter 7.3.M.M. 5.5 (continued) Versions 7. .4. Examples of a backup product or archive product host (product host) are PureDisk host. then OpsCenter may not display accurate data in the reports and also Monitor and Manage tabs of the OpsCenter console.5 All supported TSM platforms by remote agent Native agent for backup server on Windows 2003 (SP2 & R2). if the OpsCenter server and the product host are in CST time zone. (PST) must translate to the same GMT time. IBM Tivoli Storage Manager (TSM) 5. CST and 9:00 P.

Name Product Host Name of the Agent host. See “Modifying an OpsCenter Agent” on page 325. See “Configuring an OpsCenter Agent” on page 323. Host from where Agent collects the data like Backup Exec server . Select Delete Agent to delete the selected agent. See “About the OpsCenter Agent” on page 46. Create/Edit/Delete Data Collector Select the Create Data Collector or Edit Data Collector option to create an agent or modify the details of an agent using the Data Collector Wizard. Select Delete Data Collector to delete the selected agent. See “Viewing OpsCenter Agent status” on page 323. See “Deleting OpsCenter Agents” on page 325. and deleting an OpsCenter Agent configuration. Data collection status for policy and schedule on the product host.322 Understanding data collection About managing OpsCenter Agents About managing OpsCenter Agents The following topics provide more information about viewing. See “Settings > Configuration > Agent > Create Agent or Edit Agent options” on page 324. Policy and Schedule Tape Drive Information . creating. PureDisk server etc. Data collection status for tapes on the product host. Table 5-5 Option Create/Edit/Delete Agent Settings > Configuration > Agent options Description Select the Create Agent or Edit Agent option to create an agent or modify the details of an agent. modifying. Settings > Configuration > Agent options A description of the Settings > Configuration > Agent options follows in the table. See “Data Collector Wizard settings” on page 327.

This field is specific to Enterprise Vault hosts. To view Agent status 1 2 In the OpsCenter console. Configuring an OpsCenter Agent This section provides the procedure to configure an OpsCenter Agent. click Settings > Configuration > Agent. Agent Summary by Data Type Status. This field is specific to EMC NetWorker. Job Archive Archive Policy Images Target Vault Store Viewing OpsCenter Agent status Use this section to view general details and status of an OpsCenter Agent that you have configured in OpsCenter. Data collection status for jobs on the product host. This field is specific to Enterprise Vault hosts. 3 Click the Agent Summary by Data Collector Status. The tab displays the parameters which you have specified when you created this Agent. By default the General tab is selected. This field is specific to Enterprise Vault hosts. select an Agent to view its status at the bottom of the page. On the Agent list. This field is specific to Enterprise Vault hosts.Understanding data collection About managing OpsCenter Agents 323 Table 5-5 Option Media Settings > Configuration > Agent options (continued) Description Data collection status for media on the product host. or Agent Summary by Data Collector Count tab to view the relevant details. See “Settings > Configuration > Agent options” on page 322. See “Configuring an OpsCenter Agent” on page 323. .

using Address which you want to connect to the OpsCenter Server Locate option Click Locate to check if OpsCenter can connect to the Agent host that you entered. .5. you can only configure an Agent for IBM Tivoli Storage Manager and EMC NetWorker. Click Create Agent and complete the fields.324 Understanding data collection About managing OpsCenter Agents To configure an OpsCenter Agent 1 2 In the OpsCenter console.5. If you had configured a PBX port other than 1556 and upgrade to OpsCenter 7. 3 Click Save. you can configure an Agent for all supported backup and archiving products.5 the PBX port value is changed to 1556. For Solaris hosts. validate the OS. and Network address. OpsCenter Server Network Select the network address from the drop-down list. the PBX port value is taken as 1556 by default. the Create Agent pane options must be completed as follows: Table 5-6 Settings > Configuration > Agent > Create Agent or Edit Agent options Description Enter the host name where you want to configure the OpsCenter Agent Select the operating system family of the host where you want to install Agent. Settings > Configuration > Agent > Create Agent or Edit Agent options To create an Agent. For example: Solaris Family or Windows Family For Windows hosts. Option Agent Host Agent Operating System Family Note: Changing the port number that the OpsCenter Agent requires to connect to the PBX on the OpsCenter Server is not supported in OpsCenter 7. An error appears if OpsCenter cannot connect to the Agent. See “Settings > Configuration > Agent > Create Agent or Edit Agent options” on page 324. then when you edit and save the Agent in OpsCenter 7. If you add or edit a new OpsCenter Agent. click Settings > Configuration > Agent.

On the Edit Agent page. Deleting OpsCenter Agents This section provides the procedure to delete an OpsCenter Agent. To delete an OpsCenter Agent 1 2 3 In the OpsCenter console. or deleting a data collector. modifying. Click Edit Agent. Viewing OpsCenter Data Collector status Use this section to view general details and status of a Data Collector that you have configured for an Agent. From the list of agents. select the check box in front of the Agent that you want to delete. See “ Configuring an OpsCenter Data Collector” on page 326. See “ Modifying an OpsCenter Data Collector configuration” on page 329. Click Delete. click Settings > Configuration > Agent. modify OpsCenter Server Network Address. Click Save. See “Viewing OpsCenter Data Collector status” on page 325. . From the list of agents. click Settings > Configuration > Agent. See “ Deleting OpsCenter Data Collectors” on page 329. select the check box in front of the Agent that you want to modify. To modify an OpsCenter Agent 1 2 3 4 5 In the OpsCenter console. configuring. About managing OpsCenter Data Collectors The following topics provide more information about viewing.Understanding data collection About managing OpsCenter Data Collectors 325 Modifying an OpsCenter Agent This section provides the procedure to modify an OpsCenter Agent information.

. By default the General tab is selected displaying the following Data Collector details. Product Displays the name of the product type. See “Data collection status of a master server” on page 342. for which this Data Collector is configured. See “Configuring an OpsCenter Agent” on page 323. OpsCenter consists of Server. configure the data collectors. See “ Configuring an OpsCenter Data Collector” on page 326. Java View Builder. the data is not collected from the target host.326 Understanding data collection About managing OpsCenter Data Collectors To view data collector status 1 2 3 In the OpsCenter console. You can generate various business reports on this backup data or archiving data. After you install and configure an OpsCenter Agent. More information is available about the parameters that are displayed on this tab. Displays the status of the Data Collector as Enabled or Disabled that you have set. If the Data Collector status is disabled. and a console. expand an Agent to view the Data Collectors that are configured for this Agent. which this Data Collector collects data from. Configuring an OpsCenter Data Collector OpsCenter is designed to provide extensive reporting on the data that is received from backup and archiving products. which you have specified when you created this Data Collector. The OpsCenter Agent contains product-specific data collectors collecting data from the products and returning it to the OpsCenter Server. Agent. 4 Select the Data Collection Status tab. On the Agent list. Select a Data Collector to view its details and status at the bottom of the page. For example: Symantec Backup Exec Product Host Status Displays the name of the target host. click Settings > Configuration > Agent.

Complete the fields on the Create Data Collector: Product Selection page. For product-specific configuration settings. See “IBM Tivoli Storage Manager data collector variables and details” on page 375. These settings vary depending on the data collector type you configure. . Click Create Data Collector. for which you want to configure a Data Collector. On the Create Data Collector: Details page. Symantec Backup Exec.Understanding data collection About managing OpsCenter Data Collectors 327 To configure a data collector 1 2 3 4 5 In the OpsCenter console. 8 9 Enter the Data Collection Settings. On the Agent list. For example. See “About collecting data from Enterprise Vault” on page 362. refer to the respective data collector settings. Configuration Settings. select a check box in front of the Agent. See “Configuring Backup Exec data collector” on page 358. Click Next. Data Collector Wizard settings Complete the Product Selection fields as follows: Table 5-7 Setting Select Product Product Selection settings Description Select the name of the product from which you want to collect data. Click Save. and Data Collection details are displayed. The options available in the Select Product drop-down list depends on the Agent operating system family that you have selected while creating the respective Agent. 6 Verify or modify the default Target Details: See “Data Collector Wizard settings” on page 327. See “EMC NetWorker data collector variables” on page 376. 7 Enter the data collector ConfigurationSettings. click Settings > Configuration > Agent. the Target Details.

The data types vary depending on the product that you are collect data from. Displays the name of the product host from which this data collector collects data. You need to specify the product name when you create the data collector.M. The first data collection starts at say 9:00 A. hours. Complete the Data Collector: Details fields as follows: Table 5-8 Setting Product Data Collector: Details settings Description Displays the name of the product from which this data collector collects data. Select this check box to collect the associated data type. Configuration Status Collectible Data Type . and days. The data is not collected during the time that is specified in Blackout Period Start Time and Blackout Period End Time. the data collector status is Enabled. till all archive records are collected and ends at 11:00 A. The next data collection starts at 11:15 A. The data is not collected during the time that is specified in Blackout Period Start Time and Blackout Period End Time. You can disable the data collection by changing the status. Lists the data types that can be collected from a product host. See “OpsCenter Data Collector types” on page 315. Blackout Period End Time Select the end time of a blackout period. Collection interval is the time interval that you want to set between the two consecutive data collections. By default.M. Target host name Data Collector Status Blackout Period Start Time Select the start time of a blackout period. You need to specify the product name when you create the data collector. Collection Interval (sec) Enter the Collection Interval in minutes. For example: Symantec Backup Exec. after 15-minutes interval .M. For example: You have set the Collection Interval to 15 Minutes.328 Understanding data collection About managing OpsCenter Data Collectors Table 5-7 Setting Target host name Product Selection settings (continued) Description Enter the name of the product host from which you want to collect backup or archiving data.

Understanding data collection About managing OpsCenter Data Collectors 329 Table 5-8 Setting Data Collector: Details settings (continued) Description States whether last data load was successful or not. 10 Click Save. Last Successful Data Load Modifying an OpsCenter Data Collector configuration This section provides procedure to modify configuration of a Data Collector. expand an Agent to view Data Collectors that are configured for this Agent. Modify data collection configuration settings. In the OpsCenter console. Deleting OpsCenter Data Collectors This section provides procedure for deleting Data Collector configurations from an Agent. . See “Viewing OpsCenter Agent status” on page 323. To delete a Data Collector configuration 1 2 3 4 5 Log on to the OpsCenter Server. Select a check box in front of the Data Collector that you want to modify. Modify blackout period settings. click Settings > Configuration > Agent. click Settings > Configuration > Agent. Modify collection interval. expand an Agent to view Data Collectors that are configured for this Agent. On the Agent list. These settings vary depending on the product. Click Edit Data Collector. On the Edit Data Collector: Details page. Click Delete Data Collector.. modify the Target Details. which this data collector collects data from. To modify a Data Collector configuration 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Log on to the OpsCenter console. On the Agent list. In the OpsCenter console. Select check boxes in front of the Data Collectors that you want to delete.

See “Adding a master server or appliance in OpsCenter” on page 346. . and control data collection for a master server. See “Deleting a master server or an appliance master server in OpsCenter” on page 357. The following sections describe the NetBackup data collection in detail: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ See “NetBackup data collection view” on page 332. See “Editing a master server or an appliance master server in OpsCenter” on page 356. See “How OpsCenter collects data from NetBackup” on page 332. It also describes how you can add. edit. See “About the Breakup Jobs option” on page 334. ■ ■ Settings > Configuration > NetBackup options A description of the Settings > Configuration > NetBackup options follows in the table. See “Viewing master server details and data collection status” on page 341. See “Controlling data collection for a master server in OpsCenter” on page 357.330 Understanding data collection About configuring data collection for NetBackup About configuring data collection for NetBackup This section describes how OpsCenter collects data from NetBackup. delete.

you must add this server to the OpsCenter console so that it can be monitored. Select Edit to edit the properties of a master server. The display name that you have chosen for the master server.Understanding data collection About configuring data collection for NetBackup 331 Table 5-9 Option Add/Edit/Delete NetBackup options Description Select Add to add a NetBackup master server to the OpsCenter console. Note that you must first configure the master server to allow server access and data collection by OpsCenter. The master server can show any of the following states: ■ ■ ■ ■ Master Server Name Display Name Operating System Product State Connected Partially Connected Not Connected Disabled See “Master server states in OpsCenter” on page 345. Reason . Backup product and version from where the data is collected. Connected Since The last time that OpsCenter successfully connected to the particular master server. Name or IP address of the master server that is configured. Disable/Enable Data Collection Select Disable Data Collection or Enable Data Collection to disable or enable data collection from one or more NetBackup master servers. The master server name cannot be edited. Operating system of the master server. The Connected Since column does not necessarily represent the last time that OpsCenter collected information from the master server. See “Adding a master server or appliance in OpsCenter” on page 346. After configuring the master server. Deleting a master server removes all the data that is associated with the master server from the OpsCenter database. Select Delete to delete one or more master servers from the OpsCenter console. Reason if any for the current state.

The table that appears in this view shows the following columns: Master Server Name Display Name Operating System Product State Name or IP address of the master server that is configured. and reporting functions. OpsCenter does not use it.0 release of NetBackup. clients. . You must not add any media servers to the OpsCenter console. To perform the monitoring. The display name that you have chosen for the master server. Note: OpsCenter only uses the NBSL on master servers for data collection. and report on NetBackup master and media servers. The Connected SInce column does not necessarily represent the last time that OpsCenter collected information from the master server. management. The NetBackup data collection and management logic that OpsCenter uses is built into NetBackup master servers. and policies. Starting with the 6.332 Understanding data collection About configuring data collection for NetBackup NetBackup data collection view This view is displayed when you select Settings > Configuration > NetBackup from the OpsCenter console. Connected SInce The last time that OpsCenter successfully connected with the particular master server. manage. Reason How OpsCenter collects data from NetBackup OpsCenter is used to monitor. Though NBSL is also included on media servers. OpsCenter collects data from the NetBackup master servers. This view shows details of master servers. Backup product and version from where the data is collected. The master server can show any of the following states: ■ ■ ■ ■ Connected Partially Connected Not Connected Disabled See “Master server states in OpsCenter” on page 345. Operating system of the master server. This logic is included in the NetBackup Service Layer (NBSL). NetBackup Service Layer (NBSL) components are included as a part of NetBackup on master and media servers. Reason if any for the current state. You must add only master servers to the OpsCenter console.

an Agent must be installed only if you want to collect specific data (image. For 7. OpsCenter may not capture any changes that were made to the NetBackup configuration. error logs. Note: A NetBackup 7. For 6. capacity. jobs. When NBSL restarts. error log. an Agent must be installed only if you want to collect image.x master servers. OpsCenter server software listens to the notifications from NBSL for any change in NetBackup data.0 MP7 master server. Hence for a 6. you cannot collect scheduled jobs and breakup jobs data. objects. See “Data collection status of a master server” on page 342. OpsCenter gets affected. NBSL runs as a service or daemon and has local configuration information. the OpsCenter server starts collecting all the available data from NetBackup master server into the OpsCenter database using NBSL. an Agent must be installed only if you want to collect breakup jobs.0. For 6. when data collection for a master server is enabled or when a master server is added to OpsCenter. or traditional license data. and traditional license data. breakup jobs. OpsCenter uses NBSL for all NetBackup monitoring. The NetBackup UI also uses NBSL.5. If NBSL stops. The OpsCenter Server software collects data from NBSL in the following ways: ■ ■ Initial data load Listening for change notifications Whenever OpsCenter server software starts.5 or 7. it may take some time for the OpsCenter server to collect all data (such as media. capacity license. . The initial data load happens serially for each data type. In this case. or when the data collection for a master server is enabled after a long time. but no local database.) from the NetBackup master server and insert it into the OpsCenter database. If NBSL service stops running on a managed NetBackup server.0 MP7 master server. capacity.1.Understanding data collection About configuring data collection for NetBackup 333 NBSL provides a single point of access to key NetBackup data. and control functions. OpsCenter correctly recaptures the latest state. Note: Consider a scenario when you add a master server or when OpsCenter Server software starts after a long time. images. and updates the OpsCenter database. or traditional license data).x master server requires an OpsCenter Agent to collect capacity and traditional license data. As soon as the initial data load is complete. and change events.x master servers. drives etc. managing.

The Breakup Jobs option can be enabled or disabled when you add a master server from Settings > Configuration > NetBackup. For example.1 is available. You can enable or disable the Breakup Jobs functionality for master server versions earlier than 7. About the Breakup Jobs option This section describes the NetBackup-specific Breakup Jobs option that you can set in Symantec OpsCenter Analytics while adding a master server. you can see how much data was backed up per file system.1. OpsCenter collects job attributes like size. you should disable the data collection (Settings > Configuration > NetBackup) before you uninstall NetBackup. select the Enable Breakup Job data collection option from the Advanced Data Collection Properties section. . See “Adding a master server or an appliance master server in the OpsCenter console” on page 355. More information on how to enable or disable the Breakup Jobs functionality for master server versions earlier than 7.1. Once NetBackup installation completes. you must enable the master server. With the Breakup Jobs option.334 Understanding data collection About configuring data collection for NetBackup Consider a scenario where a master server is already added on the OpsCenter console. The Breakup Jobs functionality was earlier available in Veritas Backup Reporter (VBR). when the Breakup Jobs option is enabled. OpsCenter collects a greater level of job detail at a file-system level. In this case. and directory name from the master server. To enable the Breakup Jobs functionality for master server versions earlier than 7. detailed file-level information like size and backup file count for each backup selection (associated with a NetBackup job) is collected and displayed as a part of custom reports in Symantec OpsCenter Analytics. Enabling the master server marks the existing master server as retired and also create a new master server with the freshly installed NetBackup. and you uninstall and then reinstall NetBackup on the master server. In addition to other job attributes. You cannot configure the PBX port in OpsCenter 7. When the Breakup Jobs option is enabled. The Breakup Jobs functionality is most effective if you have multiple backup selection lists in the NetBackup policy. You can either enable or disable the breakup job option for master servers.5. See “Settings > Configuration > NetBackup > Add Master Server options” on page 351. file count. The default PBX port that is used is 1556. Symantec Private Branch Exchange (PBX) is used for communication and requires a port to be opened on the OpsCenter server and the NetBackup master server for input and output.

For NetBackup master servers before 7. You can also configure the jobs for which you want to collect breakup job information. The Breakup Jobs data collection only happens for the jobs that are collected after you upgrade to Symantec OpsCenter Analytics 7. ■ ■ ■ ■ . you can enable image data collection while adding a master server.1 or later master servers. See “ Configuring the Breakup Jobs option for master servers” on page 336.conf file. For 7. the image data collection happens automatically by NBSL.*. The Breakup Jobs functionality supports the NetBackup master server versions starting from 6.1 or later master servers. This applies to all master server versions.0. Note: Enabling the Breakup Jobs option increases the load on the master server. 7. 6. 7. 6.Understanding data collection About configuring data collection for NetBackup 335 The Breakup Jobs functionality is disabled by default for 7.5 master servers. Review the following considerations with respect to the Breakup Jobs functionality: ■ The Breakup Jobs functionality is specific to NetBackup and does not apply to any other product. This includes NetBackup 6. By default. you must configure the scl. the load on the Agent (applicable for master servers earlier than 7.0 MPx master servers (like 6.1.5. and 7. See “Adding a master server or an appliance master server in the OpsCenter console” on page 355. The breakup jobs data is not collected for the jobs that already exist in the OpsCenter database.5. The Breakup Jobs data collection happens through image ID's. To enable the Breakup Jobs functionality for 7.1. 7.0 MP7.0 MP5 etc.1 master servers is available. Symantec recommends that you enable image data collection for the master server if you want to collect the breakup jobs data.1.).1 and later master servers. More information on how you can enable the Breakup Jobs functionality for 7.5. and the time it takes to gather and load data in OpsCenter.1. The job selection is based on the maximum number of files that a job backs up.0. The Breakup Jobs option is only valid for the backup jobs and Archive jobs whose Job State is Done. See “ Configuring the Breakup Jobs option for master servers” on page 336. Note that the Breakup Jobs functionality is not supported for NetBackup 6. breakup job information is not collected for the jobs whose file count is greater than 1000000.1).

you must disable and then enable data collection for the master server from Settings > Configuration. the breakup jobs data is collected directly from the master server by NBSL.1 or later master servers only. Note that enabling or disabling the Breakup Jobs option using scl.1 and later master servers. you must install the OpsCenter Agent.1 etc. See “About planning an OpsCenter Agent deployment” on page 111. Data for the breakup jobs is collected from NetBackup after every 15 minutes. For NetBackup master servers earlier than 7. breakup jobs may still not be displayed. 7. Hence if you have a master server version earlier than 7. The Breakup Jobs functionality cannot be used with Symantec OpsCenter (free version). the breakup job information from VBR is migrated to the OpsCenter database. By default.1. This applies to all master server versions.1 (like 7. The OpsCenter Agent uses the bplist command to collect data from the NetBackup master server. the OpsCenter Agent collects the breakup jobs data from the NetBackup master server.336 Understanding data collection About configuring data collection for NetBackup ■ For NetBackup 7. The job selection is based on the maximum number of files that a job backs up. breakup job information is not collected for the jobs whose file count is greater than 1000000. The Breakup Jobs functionality applies to Symantec OpsCenter Analytics only. To display breakup jobs. See “Controlling data collection for a master server in OpsCenter” on page 357.0. More information about deploying the OpsCenter Agent is available. If you upgrade from VBR to Symantec OpsCenter Analytics 7.conf file to enable the Breakup Jobs option for 7. ■ ■ ■ ■ Configuring the Breakup Jobs option for master servers You can configure the Breakup Jobs option for master servers from the scl.) and want to collect breakup jobs data for the master server.1.conf file. .1 or later master servers (disabled by default). You can configure the scl.0. Note: Enabling the Breakup Jobs option increases the load on the master server and the time it takes to gather and load data in OpsCenter.conf applies to 7. If you were using OpsCenter and applied the appropriate license keys for the licensed version (OpsCenter Analytics). You can also configure the jobs for which you want to collect breakup job information.

scl.Understanding data collection About configuring data collection for NetBackup 337 To enable the Breakup Jobs option for 7.1 or later master servers.enableBreakupJobDataCollection=true Note: To disable the Breakup Jobs option for 7.1 or later master servers 1 Log on to the OpsCenter Server host.sh stop 2 Open scl. To enable the Breakup Jobs option for 7.bat stop UNIX <INSTALL_PATH>/SYMCOpsCenterServer/bin/opsadmin.conf file.conf file: nbu.1 or later master servers.conf UNIX <INSTALL_PATH>/SYMCOpsCenterServer/config 3 The Breakup Jobs option is disabled by default.collector. add the following text to scl. Restart all OpsCenter Server services on Windows and UNIX: Windows INSTALL_PATH\OpsCenter\server\bin\opsadmin. Stop all OpsCenter Server services on Windows and UNIX: Windows INSTALL_PATH\OpsCenter\server\bin\opsadmin.bat start UNIX <INSTALL_PATH>/SYMCOpsCenterServer/bin/opsadmin.sh start .collector. add the following text to scl.scl.conf file from the following directory on Windows and UNIX: Windows INSTALL_PATH\OpsCenter\Server\config\scl.conf file: nbu.enableBreakupJobDataCollection=false 4 5 Save scl.

However. Stop all OpsCenter Server services on Windows and UNIX: Windows INSTALL_PATH\OpsCenter\server\bin\opsadmin.scl. This applies to all master servers.bat stop UNIX <INSTALL_PATH>/SYMCOpsCenterServer/bin/opsadmin.collector.conf UNIX <INSTALL_PATH>/SYMCOpsCenterServer/config 3 By default.conf file.sh start Viewing the data collection status for breakup jobs You can also view the data collection status for breakup jobs data for a specific master server.bat start UNIX <INSTALL_PATH>/SYMCOpsCenterServer/bin/opsadmin. This applies to all master server versions. you can configure the jobs for which you want to collect breakup job information based on the maximum number of files that a job backs up.338 Understanding data collection About configuring data collection for NetBackup To specify the maximum file size of jobs for Breakup Job data collection 1 Go to theOpsCenter Server host.000 files.conf file: nbu. Restart all OpsCenter Server services on Windows and UNIX: Windows INSTALL_PATH\OpsCenter\server\bin\opsadmin.sh stop 2 Open scl. breakup job information is not collected for the jobs whose file count is greater than 20000. breakup job information is not collected for the jobs that back up more than 1000000 files. if you do not want to collect breakup job information for the jobs that back up more than 20. 4 5 Save scl.breakupJobMaxFileCountPerJob=20000 Once you complete this procedure. add the following text to the scl. For example.conf file from the following directory on Windows and UNIX: Windows INSTALL_PATH\OpsCenter\Server\config\scl. .

Understanding data collection About configuring data collection for NetBackup 339 To view the breakup job data collection status for a master server 1 2 3 Go to the Settings > Configuration > NetBackup view in the OpsCenter console. check the status for the SubJobs data type. The custom report shows the following additional columns: ■ ■ Backup Sub Job File Count Backup Sub Job Size Figure 5-1 is a sample custom report that shows the breakup jobs data for each job directory. This report helps you to know how much data was backed up per job directory. About viewing breakup jobs data in custom reports The Breakup Jobs option provides more granular-level reporting on the files that are backed up by NetBackup. To view breakup jobs data in Symantec OpsCenter Analytics. ensure that the Breakup Jobs option is enabled in OpsCenter and then create a custom report of category Backup/Recovery and subcategory BackupJob/Image/Media in a tabular format. you may notice some job directories named Other in addition to the actual job directories from NetBackup. Click the master server from the Master Server Name column and then click the Data Collection Status tab. The Other job directory exists in cases when the total backup size that we get from the primary job is different from the . Figure 5-1 Sample custom report that shows breakup jobs data In this example. To view the breakup jobs data collection status. You can see the breakup jobs data by creating custom reports in Symantec OpsCenter Analytics.

breakup jobs data for only 50 backup selections is available with NetBackup.0 5200 or 5220 7.1 Master or Media Appliance Master and Media .1. breakup job data (like Backup Sub Job File Count. Hence you see some additional file system objects named “Other” in OpsCenter other than the actual list that comes from NetBackup.5 Base NetBackup version 7.1. OpsCenter Analytics does not show deduplication or snap duplication data for a specific job directory in the custom reports.0. With VBR you can view breakup job information for all job directories for a job or policy. When a NetBackup policy or job has more than 50 backup selections.0 master server or to a regular NetBackup 7. a new job directory named Other is shown to make up the difference. OpsCenter does not provide the option to purge breakup jobs.5 can monitor and manage OpsCenter 7.2 and 2. OpsCenter Analytics does not show deduplication or snap duplication data because deduplication or snap duplication data for a backup selection is not available with NetBackup. Backup Sub Job Size) is available only for 50 job directories. OpsCenter 7.x and 7.0. In addition.0 media servers that are attached to an appliance 2. The following table provides details on how an appliance version maps to a NetBackup version: NetBackup Appliance Hardware NetBackup version Appliance Version version 2.5. To keep the total backup size consistent.5 can also monitor NetBackup appliance 2.5 can monitor and manage all NetBackup versions between 6. The NetBackup GUI truncates data for the subsequent backup selections (greater than 50). About breakup jobs considerations Review the following considerations with respect to the Breakup Jobs functionality: ■ Unlike VBR.5. This information is displayed as data is collected by using CLI's and not NBSL. the breakup jobs are tightly coupled with jobs and are purged along with the jobs. OpsCenter 7. The OpsCenter Server must be at an equal or higher version than the NetBackup master server version that it monitors.0 master servers.5 can monitor appliance 1. For a specific job ID in an OpsCenter custom report. In OpsCenter.5 master server.340 Understanding data collection About configuring data collection for NetBackup summation of the sizes of the individual files in the file list. ■ ■ About NetBackup versions that OpsCenter 7.

0.1 and 7.8 Base NetBackup version 7.1 Master or Media Appliance Media only Note: The NetBackup versions that are listed in the table are available for Appliance only.1. Also review the OpsCenter sections of the NetBackup release notes before using OpsCenter for monitoring NetBackup clusters.1. The version 7. Starting with the 6.Understanding data collection About configuring data collection for NetBackup 341 NetBackup Appliance Hardware NetBackup version Appliance Version version 1. Each managed NetBackup master server that OpsCenter manages must have NBSL present and in operation. The details for the master server are shown at the bottom of the Settings > Configuration > NetBackup view under the following tabs: General This tab displays the contents of many of the columns that are displayed in the table.1. See NetBackup High Availability Administrator's Guide for more details on setting up a NetBackup cluster environment. .0 release of NetBackup.0.0.5 is based on NetBackup 7. Viewing master server details and data collection status Use the following procedure to view the details for a master server. OpsCenter can also be used to monitor a NetBackup cluster.2 5200 7. NetBackup Service Layer (NBSL) components are included as a part of NetBackup on master servers. These managed NetBackup servers harvest pertinent NetBackup data and store it in the OpsCenter database.1.8 is based on 7.0.0. The NetBackup master servers that OpsCenter manages are referred to as managed NetBackup servers.0.1.

To view master server details and data collection status for a master server 1 2 In the OpsCenter console. Data collection status of a master server This section describes the NetBackup data types that OpsCenter collects and the different states for managed servers. Figure 5-2 shows a sample data collection status view for a master server. See “Data collection status of a master server” on page 342. The details for the master server are shown at the bottom of this view.342 Understanding data collection About configuring data collection for NetBackup Data Collection Status This tab displays the collection status for each of the data types. . The Data Collection Status tab is shown by default when you select Settings > Configuration > NetBackup. and the exception message if the data collection failed for any of the data types. Figure 5-2 Sample Data Collection Status view Table 5-10 gives a description of the contents in the Data Collection Status tab. when data collection last happened. select Settings > Configurations > NetBackup. Click the name of the master server (link) from the Master Server Name column. It also lists details like the time when the data load was last successful.

For changes such as job. policy. This data is stored in the OpsCenter database. storage unit etc. See “NetBackup data types and collection status” on page 343. policy. Collection Status Last Exception Message NetBackup data types and collection status OpsCenter collects data for many NetBackup data types (such as Appliance Hardware.) by using NBSL. NBSL sends notifications to OpsCenter. media server. the notification also contains the changed data. jobs. For most operations and changes in NetBackup. service. Last Successful Data Load Last Run Time This column lists the date and time when the last successful data load happened for the specific data type. and devices. This column lists the last exception message if data collection failed for a data type. services.Understanding data collection About configuring data collection for NetBackup 343 Table 5-10 Column Data Type Data Collection Status view Description The type of data that is collected from NetBackup. This column lists the date and time when data collection was attempted. This column provides the status of each data load activity that OpsCenter requests. The following are the collection status for the different data types and their description: .

Not Licensed This status is seen when the specific data type like FT is not licensed in NetBackup. and then start after some time.0 does not support disk. The data collection for the specific data type has failed. Not Started The data collection for the specific data type has not started. See “Editing a master server or an appliance master server in OpsCenter” on page 356. The data collection for the specific data type is in progress. The data collection for the specific data type is complete. This is normal behavior.344 Understanding data collection About configuring data collection for NetBackup Table 5-11 Collection status Not Applicable Collection statuses Description This status may come when the master server version does not support the specific data type. If data collection for a particular data type fails. The data collection for the specific data type is queued. FT data types. . All the functionality other than the functionality of the failed data type can be used normally while collection for a data type fails. you can see the exception message from the Last Exception Message column. This status appears when you initially add a master server or when you start the OpsCenter server. For example. it should be automatically started again within 10 minutes. This status also comes when your master server version is lower than 7. See “Adding a master server or an appliance master server in the OpsCenter console” on page 355. See “Master server states in OpsCenter” on page 345. NetBackup 6. Queued Running Completed Failed Note: Data collection can fail. When the data collection fails.1 and you have not configured data collection for the following data types: ■ ■ ■ Error Logs Image Breakup Jobs You can enable data collection for these data types while adding or editing a master server under Advanced Data Collection Properties section.

The master server is Partially Connected when data collection for some data types fails while data collection has happened or is happening for other data types. Not Connected The master server is Not Connected when the data collection for all data types fails. and then start after some time. The master server can have any of the following states: Table 5-12 Master server states Description The master server is Connected when the data collection status for all data types is not Failed. Master server states in OpsCenter This section lists the different states that can exist for a master server and what they mean. . For example. Master servers may show as Partially Connected temporarily for some time. This may be when there is a network issue because of which OpsCenter is not able to connect and collect data from NetBackup. Master server state Connected Partially Connected Note: Data collection can fail. This is normal behavior. If data collection for a particular data type fails. data collection for catalog data type is Completed but data collection for client. This is normal behavior. If data collection for a particular data type fails. All the functionality other than the functionality of the failed data type can be used normally while collection for a data type fails. disk etc.Understanding data collection About configuring data collection for NetBackup 345 See “Data collection status of a master server” on page 342. and then start after some time. it should be automatically started again within 10 minutes. it should be automatically started again within 10 minutes. This is because data collection can fail. All the functionality other than the functionality of the failed data type can be used normally while collection for a data type fails. Disabled The master server is Disabled when the data collection for the selected master server is disabled. This means that the collection status for all the data types must be any other status except Failed. device. fails.

Note that you must first configure the master server to allow server access and data collection by OpsCenter. 2 After configuring the master server or appliance master server. Note: Symantec recommends that any NetBackup master server or appliance master server is monitored by only one OpsCenter Server. you must add this server to the OpsCenter console so that it can be monitored. To add a master server or an appliance master server 1 Configure your managed master server or appliance master server to allow server access and data collection by OpsCenter.346 Understanding data collection About configuring data collection for NetBackup Adding a master server or appliance in OpsCenter To allow OpsCenter to communicate with a managed NetBackup server and collect data requires some security configuration. . Note: You cannot add an appliance media server to the OpsCenter console. Note: You can use an alternate procedure to add a NetBackup 7. This procedure can be used for both NBAC and non-NBAC servers. See “Adding a master server or an appliance master server in the OpsCenter console” on page 355. To monitor an appliance media server. See “Configuring a master server or appliance master server for server access and data collection by OpsCenter” on page 349. you must add the master server or appliance to the OpsCenter console so that it can be monitored. you can add a master appliance or a regular master server to which it is connected. Use the following steps to add a master server or an appliance master server.0 or later master server” on page 347.0 or later master server to OpsCenter. After configuring the master server. OpsCenter can monitor the master servers which have NetBackup Access Control (NBAC) configured and also those servers that do not have NBAC configured. See “Adding a NetBackup 7.

a command that is called nbregopsc has been added to NetBackup 7.0 master server to the OpsCenter console. Browse to the following location: Windows UNIX %Program Files%/NetBackup/bin/admincmd /usr/openv/netbackup/bin/admincmd 3 Run the following command on the master server or the appliance master server: nbregopsc -add <Name of the OpsCenter Server> As a part of usability enhancements. To add a NetBackup 7.x. In addition.0 or later master server or appliance master server to the OpsCenter console on Windows and UNIX 1 2 Log on to the managed master server or NetBackup 52xx Appliance 2. a new entry that is called OPS_CENTER_SERVER_NAME has been added to the bp.0.0 or later master server Use the following procedure to add a NetBackup 7.0 master server as Administrator or root for Windows and UNIX respectively.conf file.0 and later versions. use this procedure for each node of the cluster. The nbregopsc command registers OpsCenter with the current master server and adds this master server to OpsCenter. or 7.x. 7. . This procedure can be used for both NBAC and non-NBAC servers. This command also establishes a trust relationship from the authentication broker of NetBackup master server to the authentication broker of OpsCenter server. In case of a clustered NetBackup setup.Understanding data collection About configuring data collection for NetBackup 347 Adding a NetBackup 7.5 master server or a NetBackup 52xx Appliance 2.1.

0 and 7. Restart all appliance services or processes only if OpsCenter cannot connect to the Appliance master server.348 Understanding data collection About configuring data collection for NetBackup 4 Ignore this step for master servers for which NBAC is not configured. In case you add an appliance 2. check if OpsCenter can connect to the appliance master server. Note: In case running the nbregopsc command fails. run the following command depending on your specific master server version: 7. log on as Administrator or root on the OpsCenter server host and navigate to the following location: Windows %Program Files%\Veritas\Security\Authentication\bin <INSTALL_PATH>/VRTSat/bin UNIX On the OpsCenter server host. See “Adding a master server or an appliance master server in the OpsCenter console” on page 355.1 or later master server or appliance master server vssat setuptrust --broker <MasterServerhost:2821> --securitylevel high vssat setuptrust --broker <MasterServerhost:13783> --securitylevel high Note that <MasterServerhost> is the name of the master server. 6 Once you perform this procedure.0 master server. you must manually add the master server or the appliance master server to the OpsCenter console. the master server is automatically added to the OpsCenter console. To establish the trust relationship. 5 Restart all the NetBackup services (processes).0. However if the master server is NBAC-enabled. OpsCenter cannot monitor NetBackup servers if the trust relationship has not been set up between OpsCenter and NetBackup server. . a trust relationship must be established from the authentication broker of the OpsCenter server to the authentication broker (AB) of the NetBackup master server.1 master server 7.

For NetBackup servers before 7. The Master Server Properties dialog box appears. Double-click the master server name to view its properties. 6 To add the OpsCenter server to the server list.x. Start the NetBackup Administration Console. Now you can add this appliance master server to the OpsCenter console (if not added already). See “Adding a master server or an appliance master server in the OpsCenter console” on page 355.0 and later servers.Understanding data collection About configuring data collection for NetBackup 349 Configuring a master server or appliance master server for server access and data collection by OpsCenter Use the following procedures to configure a master server or an appliance master server for data collection by OpsCenter on Windows and UNIX. This procedure applies to both NBAC and non-NBAC master servers. Expand NetBackup Management > Host Properties > Master Servers. click Add.5. Click Add and in the Server Name field. select the Servers tab from the Master Server Properties dialog box to display the server list.5. In case of a clustered NetBackup setup. 7. . enter the host name of the OpsCenter Server. use this procedure on each node of the cluster. For a NetBackup 7.5 server. To configure a master server or appliance master server for server access and data collection on Windows and UNIX 1 2 3 4 5 Log on to the managed master server or the appliance master server as Administrator or root on Windows and UNIX respectively. Note: This procedure applies to all master server versions including 7. See “Adding a master server or an appliance master server in the OpsCenter console” on page 355. The Add a New Server Entry dialog box appears. However. Log on to the Appliance console as admin and go to Manage > Appliance > Add Additional Server. The OpCenter servers tab displays all of the OpsCenter servers that can access the currently selected NetBackup master server.1. select the Servers tab and then the OpsCenter servers tab from the Master Server Properties dialog box.0. You can use an alternate procedure to configure an appliance master server for data collection by OpsCenter.x. it is recommended that the following procedure be used for NetBackup 7. 7.

click OK. In the Master Server Properties dialog box.1 master server 7. To set up these trust relationships. However if the master server is NBAC-enabled. Run this command from %Program Files%\Veritas\Security\Authentication\bin directory in Windows or <INSTALL_PATH>/VRTSat/bin in UNIX. then <OpscenterAB> is the host name that is provided as the remote authentication broker host during the OpsCenter installation. However if OpsCenter is installed in a clustered mode. run the following command: vssat setuptrust --broker <OpsCenterABhost:2821> --securitylevel high where <OpsCenterABhost> is same as the host where OpsCenter server is installed. use the vssat command in Symantec Product Authentication Service. 8 9 Click Close.0.0 and 7.350 Understanding data collection About configuring data collection for NetBackup 7 Type the OpsCenter server name in the field and click Add to add the server to the list.1 or later master server vssat setuptrust --broker <MasterServerhost:2821> --securitylevel high vssat setuptrust --broker <MasterServerhost:13783> --securitylevel high where <MasterServerhost> is the name of the master server. a bi-directional trust relationship must be established between the authentication broker of the OpsCenter server and the authentication broker(AB) of each managed NetBackup server. log on as Administrator or root on the OpsCenter server host and run the following command depending on your specific master server version: 7. On the NetBackup master server or the appliance master server host. Similarly. . OpsCenter cannot monitor NetBackup servers if the trust relationship has not been set up between OpsCenter and NetBackup server (NBAC enabled). 10 Ignore this step for master servers on which NBAC is not configured. Ensure that the OpsCenter server name that you add is reachable from the NetBackup server.

Settings > Configuration > NetBackup > Add Master Server options Enter the following detailsforthemasterserverunder GeneralProperties and AdvancedProperties sections: Table 5-13 Option General Properties and Advanced Properties options Description Enter a host name or an IP address of the master server or appliance master server. 12 Add this master server to the OpsCenter console so that it can be monitored.5. If you had configured a PBX port other than 1556 and upgrade to OpsCenter 7. then when you edit and save the master server in OpsCenter 7. OpsCenter uses the address that you select to connect to the master server. Note that this field is required. The display name is used for the master server on all views of the OpsCenter console. See “Adding a master server or an appliance master server in the OpsCenter console” on page 355. OpsCenter's Preferred network address The OpsCenter Server may have multiple network interface cards (NIC).5. You can select a preferred network address from the drop-down list. Locate option Note: Changing the PBX port that the NetBackup master server requires to connect to the PBX on the OpsCenter Server is not supported in OpsCenter 7. the PBX port value is taken as 1556 by default. In case the master server is clustered. This field is required. enter the virtual name of the master server.Understanding data collection About configuring data collection for NetBackup 351 11 Restart all the NetBackup services. Master Server Name Note: You cannot add an appliance media server directly to the OpsCenter console. . After entering the above details. click Locate to locate the master server. Display Name Enter an alternate name for the master server or appliance master server. The OpsCenter Server tries to connect to the master server or the appliance master server. If you add or edit a new master server or an appliance master server.5 the PBX port value is changed to 1556.

and traditional license.5.x .1.x Data Collection Install an Agent if you want to collect data for image. error logs. You do not need to install an Agent to collect scheduled jobs data from NetBackup 6.5. NBSL is used to automatically collect the scheduled jobs data from NetBackup 6.5 Note: The data for image. From OpsCenter 7. capacity. 6. the appropriate NetBackup version is automatically selected in the NetBackup version drop-down list.x 6. Install an Agent if you want to collect data for breakup jobs.x 7. error log. traditional license. error log. Install an Agent if you want to collect data for capacity license and traditional license. You can select from the following versions: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ 6. Enter the following details under Advanced Data Collection Properties section: Table 5-14 Option NetBackup version Advanced Data Collection Properties options Description When you click Locate and OpsCenter server can successfully connect to the master server or appliance master server. capacity.5. Install an Agent if you want to collect data for image.0. In case the Locate operation fails and OpsCenter fails to connect to the master server. and breakup jobs is used in OpsCenter reports.5. breakup jobs.5. capacity. or traditional license.x 7.x 7. and traditional license.x 7. capacity license.x 7.0.352 Understanding data collection About configuring data collection for NetBackup You can configure an Agent to collect the following data from master server or appliance master server versions: NetBackup version 6.1.5.0.x or 7.x and later master servers.0.x master servers. select the appropriate master server version manually from the drop-down list.

click Configure Agent.x or 6. Install Directory The directory path on the OpsCenter Agent host where the NetBackup application is installed. Enable Error Log data Collection Click the checkbox if you want to enable error log data collection from the master server. See “Configuring an OpsCenter Agent” on page 323. Example of Volume Manager directory on a Windows system: C:\Program Files\VERITAS\Volmgr Example of Volume Manager directory on a Solaris system: /usr/openv/volmgr Enable Image Data Collection Click the checkbox if you want to enable image data collection from the master server.5.Understanding data collection About configuring data collection for NetBackup 353 Table 5-14 Option Agent Advanced Data Collection Properties options (continued) Description Select an Agent from the drop-down list. This option appears only when you add 6.x master servers.5.x master servers. no agent is configured. this is the path on the OpsCenter Agent host where RAC (Remote Admin Console) is installed.0. In case. You can create an OpsCenter Agent from Settings > Configuration > Agent > Create Agent. This option appears only when you add 6.0.x or 6. In case of remote data collection. Example of install directory path on a Windows system: C:\Program Files\VERITAS\NetBackup Example of install directory path on a Solaris system: /usr/openv/netbackup Volume Manager Directory The directory path on the OpsCenter Agent host where the Volume Manager is installed. .

Note: Username and Password are not needed if the Agent is installed on the NetBackup master server. Enable Capacity License Click the checkbox if you want to enable capacity license Deployment Data Collection data collection from the master server. .354 Understanding data collection About configuring data collection for NetBackup Table 5-14 Option Advanced Data Collection Properties options (continued) Description Click the checkbox if you want to break up a job (using data from the NetBackup's catalog) so that the size and backup file count have finer granularity.1 and later master servers. or 7. you cannot collect breakup jobs data. and the time it takes to collect and load data in OpsCenter. This option appears for all master server versions. Ignore this field in the following scenarios: ■ ■ If you have not enabled the Traditional License option If you want to collect the traditional license data from a local NetBackup host. This option appears for all master server versions.x master servers. Note: The Username field is disabled if Enable Traditional License Deployment Data Collection checkbox is unchecked. Enable Breakup Job Data Collection Note: Enabling this option increases the load on the OpsCenter Agent. A user name is required if you enable traditional license data collection.0. This feature is most effective if you have multiple paths in your backup selection lists in NetBackup. The breakup jobs data is automatically collected for 7. Note that you must enter the value in Username and Password fields so that traditional license data can be collected.x.0 MP7 master servers. Enable Traditional License Click the checkbox if you want to enable traditional license Deployment Data Collection data collection from the master server.5. the master server. This option appears only when you add 6. For 6. Username Enter the user name to access the NetBackup master server.

This is required if you enable scheduled job or traditional license data collection. See “Settings > Configuration > NetBackup > Add Master Server options” on page 351. Use the following procedure to add a master server or an appliance master server. . 4 Click Locate to check if OpsCenter can connect to the master server or the appliance master server. select Settings > Configurations > NetBackup . click Validate Agent to validate the Agent information that you entered. To add a master server or an appliance master server 1 2 3 In the OpsCenter console.Understanding data collection About configuring data collection for NetBackup 355 Table 5-14 Option Password Advanced Data Collection Properties options (continued) Description Enter the password of the NetBackup user account. Save / Cancel options Click Save to add the master server. Validate Agent option After entering the details in Advanced Data Collection Properties. Adding a master server or an appliance master server in the OpsCenter console You must add a master server or an appliance master server to the OpsCenter console so that it can be monitored. volume manager directory. user name. and password that you have entered. An error appears if OpsCenter cannot connect to the NetBackup master server or appliance master server on the network. Note: The Password field is disabled if Enable Traditional License Deployment Data Collection checkbox is unchecked. Enter the detailsforthemasterserverunder GeneralProperties and AdvancedProperties sections . Click Cancel to exit and go back to the Settings > Configuration > NetBackup page. This would validate the install directory. Click Add.

scheduled jobs. Use the checkbox to select a master server or an appliance master server from the Master Server Name column.5.x master servers. The data like image. 7 8 In case you add an appliance 2. breakup jobs. or traditional license is used in OpsCenter reports. capacity license. restart all appliance services or processes only if OpsCenter cannot connect to the Appliance master server. capacity license. and traditional license data. you must install an Agent to collect the data for image. . OpsCenter Agents are needed to collect breakup jobs. you can click Cancel to exit. user name. Click Save to add the master server. To edit a master server or an appliance master server 1 2 3 In the OpsCenter console.0 master server. capacity. select Settings > Configurations > NetBackup. See “Settings > Configuration > NetBackup > Add Master Server options” on page 351.356 Understanding data collection About configuring data collection for NetBackup 5 The Advanced Data Collection Properties section lets you enable data collection for additional data types by using an Agent. error log. and password that you have entered. OpsCenter Agents are needed to collect capacity and traditional license data. Alternately.1. See the Appliance documentation for details on how to restart services. error log. This would validate the install directory. volume manager directory. For NetBackup 7. For NetBackup 7. Click Edit.1. Editing a master server or an appliance master server in OpsCenter Use the following procedure to change the configuration information for a NetBackup master server or an appliance master server.0. Enter the details under Advanced Data Collection Properties section. 6 Click Validate Agent to validate the Agent information that you entered. or traditional license as per the master server version. For master server versions before 7.x or 7. breakup jobs.

See “Adding a master server or an appliance master server in the OpsCenter console” on page 355. Click Delete. Do you want to proceed? Click OK. Note that you cannot edit the Master Server Name for the master server.Understanding data collection About configuring data collection for NetBackup 357 4 Edit the information that is displayed on the Edit Master Server page. You can change the data that is shown for General Properties. and Advanced Data Collection Properties sections. . Advanced Properties. To delete a master server 1 2 3 4 In the OpsCenter console. 5 Click Save. The Master Server Name field falls under the General Properties section. Note: Deleting a master server may take some time. Deleting a master server or an appliance master server in OpsCenter You can delete one or more master servers or appliance master servers using the following procedure. a drive may have the same status until you enable OpsCenter data collection again. Note that deleting a master server deletes all the data that is associated with the master server. select Settings > Configurations > NetBackup . A description of the fields present in these sections is available. Controlling data collection for a master server in OpsCenter You can disable or enable OpsCenter data collection for a particular managed NetBackup master server or an appliance master server depending on your needs. Note: If you disable data collection it may appear to be a loss of data in OpsCenter. Use the checkbox to select one or more master servers from the Master Server Name column. For example. The following warning message appears: Deletion of the selected master server(s) will delete all related data.

Click Enable Data Collection. for which you want to configure a Data Collector.358 Understanding data collection Configuring Backup Exec data collector To disable data collection for a master server 1 2 3 In the OpsCenter console.aspx?familyid=200B2FD9-AE1A-4A14-984D-389C36F85647&displaylang=en Once you install this component on the Agent host.exe VC Redistributable Package is available at: http://www. select Settings > Configurations > NetBackup . Use the checkbox to select one or more master servers from the Master Server Name column. from which you want to collect data. .microsoft. To enable data collection for a master server 1 2 3 In the OpsCenter console. Click Disable Data Collection. To configure Backup Exec data collector 1 2 3 4 5 6 Click Settings > Configuration > Agent. Configuring Backup Exec data collector This section describes data collection from Backup Exec. Use the checkbox to select one or more master servers from the Master Server Name column. enter the Backup Exec server host name.com/downloads/details. select Symantec Backup Exec from the Select Product drop-down list. Microsoft Visual C++ 2005 SP1 Redistributable Package (x86) that is vcredist_x86. to collect data properly. On the CreateDataCollector:ProductSelection page. On the Agent list. In the Target Host Name text box. select Settings > Configurations > NetBackup. Click Create Data Collector. Caution: The Backup Exec data collector requires the following component to be installed on the OpsCenter Agent host. configure the Backup Exec data collector as described in the following section. Click Next. select a check box in front of the Agent.

For more details on collection interval. including remote hosts. OpsCenter can collect Policy & Schedule and Job data types from PureDisk Storage Pool Authority (PureDisk SPA). based on which you can generate reports.from which you want to collect data. .x. PureDisk determines whether multiple instances of the file are present on hosts across the network. and collection interval. specify the following Backup Exec data collector configuration settings: User name Enter the name of the user account that is required to connect to the Backup Exec Database . refer to the Symantec NetBackup PureDisk documentation. By using the deduplication technology. Enter the password of this user account. PureDisk stores only one instance of the file. such as name and date of modification can vary. While backing up a file.x. Attributes of identical files. PureDisk SPA and its components that run on the PureDisk operating system (PDOS). Password Version 8 Select blackout period details. 11. data types to be collected. which it backs up only once. The Single Instance Storage (SIS) or deduplication technology of NetBackup PureDisk is unique in storage and backup industry. and other data collector settings. Table 5-15 describes the steps that you need to carry out to collect data from PureDisk.x . The collected data is stored in the OpsCenter database. 9 Click Save. Select the version of the Symantec Backup Exec Server . PureDisk identifies files and the data segments that contain identical data and treats them as a single instance of a file. Collecting data from PureDisk OpsCenter supports collection of data from Symantec NetBackup PureDisk. This lets you save storage space. refer to the following section: See “ Configuring an OpsCenter Data Collector” on page 326. For more details on PureDisk.10. or 12.Understanding data collection Collecting data from PureDisk 359 7 On the Create Data Collector: Details page.

Establishing trust is a pre-requisite for PureDisk data collection from OpsCenter. To collect PureDisk data. Step number Step Step 1 Install OpsCenter server.OpsCenter Integrated Agent is also installed and configured. Step 2 You need to establish trust between the See “Setting up a trust authentication brokers of OpsCenter and PureDisk between the PureDisk SPA for secure communication. configure PureDisk See “Configuring data collector for the Integrated Agent. Note: When you install OpsCenter server. See “Configuring PureDisk data collector” on page 361. data collection from OpsCenter. which you can use to collect only PureDisk data.360 Understanding data collection Collecting data from PureDisk Table 5-15 Steps to collect data from PureDisk Reference topic See “Installing Symantec OpsCenter on Windows and UNIX” on page 130. . Setting up a trust between the PureDisk SPA host and OpsCenter AB host You need to set up a bi-directional trust between the PureDisk SPA host and OpsCenter AB (authentication broker ) host. Note: You can collect PureDisk data only through the OpsCenter Integrated Agent. Using the OpsCenter console. Step 3 See “Setting up a trust between the PureDisk SPA host and OpsCenter AB host” on page 360. PureDisk data collector” on page 361. You cannot delete the Integrated Agent. you do not need to manually install or configure OpsCenter Agent. SPA host and OpsCenter AB host” Setting up trust is a pre-requisite for PureDisk on page 360.

.Understanding data collection Collecting data from PureDisk 361 Note: OpsCenter AB host is the host where the OpsCenter server is installed.conf On UNIX: <INSTALL_PATH>/SYMCOpsCenterServer/config/security. then the OpsCenter AB host is the host name that was provided as the remote authentication broker host during the OpsCenter installation. logon as root and run the following command: su www-data 2 As a “www-data” user. the following message is displayed: setuptrust ------------------------------------------Setup Trust With Broker: OpsCenterABhost Note: Setting up a trust between the OpsCenter AB host and PureDisk SPA host from the OpsCenter AB host is accomplished automatically after the PureDisk data collector is configured.conf This section provides the manual steps that you need to carry out on the PureDisk SPA host. The OpsCenter AB host name is stored in the vxss.hostname parameter in the following file: On Windows: C:\Program Files\Symantec\OpsCenter\server\config\security. if OpsCenter is installed in a clustered mode. To set up a trust between PureDisk SPA host and OpsCenter AB host 1 On the PureDisk SPA host. run the following command: <INSTALL_PATH>/VRTSat/bin/vssat setuptrust --broker OpsCenterABhost:2821 --securitylevel low After successfully setting up a trust between the PureDisk SPA host and OpsCenter AB host. to setup trust between the PureDisk SPA host and the OpsCenter authentication broker host. Configuring PureDisk data collector This section provides the procedure to configure NetBackup PureDisk data collector on the OpsCenter UI. However.

1. On the Create Data Collector: Details page. If it is not successful.0. you do not need to manually install or configure OpsCenter Agent.362 Understanding data collection About collecting data from Enterprise Vault To configure NetBackup PureDisk data collector 1 2 Click Settings > Configuration > Agent.1. In the Target Host Name text box.6. On the Agent list. On the Create Data Collector: Product Selection page. specify the following PureDisk configuration settings: Product Version Select any of the following Symantec NetBackup PureDisk versions from the drop-down list: 6. and other data collector settings.2. You can collect PureDisk data only through the OpsCenter Integrated Agent.6.5.0.6.1. enter the PureDisk SPA Server host name. .2. 6.2.0. from which you want to collect data.2. 3 4 5 6 7 Click Create Data Collector.1.3 For more details on collection interval. To collect PureDisk data. select a check box in front of the Integrated Agent. 6.OpsCenter Integrated Agent is also installed and configured. 6.2. refer to the following section: See “ Configuring an OpsCenter Data Collector” on page 326. 6. Setting up a trust between the OpsCenter authentication broker host and PureDisk SPA host is accomplished automatically after PureDisk data collector is configured. When you install OpsCenter server. 6. Click Next. you need to do it manually. 6. 6.6. Refer to Setting up a trust between the OpsCenter AB host and PureDisk SPA host in the OpsCenter Administrator's Guide. See “About Enterprise Vault” on page 363. 6.5. select Symantec NetBackup PureDisk from the Select Product drop-down list. About collecting data from Enterprise Vault The following topics provide information about Enterprise Vault Data Collector configuration.5. 6.0. which you can use to collect only PureDisk data. 8 Click Save.

For example. See “Installing Microsoft SQL Server JDBC driver” on page 372. See “Versions supported by OpsCenter” on page 366. OpsCenter collects Policy and retention category data from Enterprise Vault database and stores it as Archive Policy data type. See “Configuring Enterprise Vault data collector” on page 373. It is supported only on Windows platform. See “Planning the Enterprise Vault data collector deployment” on page 366. See “Accessing Microsoft SQL Server host” on page 368.Understanding data collection About collecting data from Enterprise Vault 363 See “About data collected from Enterprise Vault” on page 363. Table 5-16 lists the data types in OpsCenter that represent the type of data that is collected from Enterprise Vault. file systems. Enterprise Vault has the following features: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Policy-controlled archiving Seamless retrieval of information Powerful search capability Compliance retention Data compression and single instancing For more details. About Enterprise Vault Symantec Enterprise Vault software application provides a flexible framework for archiving emails. See “Configuring the OpsCenter Agent properties for integrated logon” on page 371. . See “OpsCenter Agent deployment modes” on page 368. refer to Enterprise Vault documentation. About data collected from Enterprise Vault OpsCenter categorizes the data that is collected from Enterprise Vault database into various data types. and collaborative environments. See “About creating a user for integrated logon” on page 369.

Figure 5-3 shows the hierarchy of archive data in Enterprise Vault. as per the specified schedule. and Provisioning Group Saveset Data type in OpsCenter Archive Policy Vault Store Target Archive You can select these data types while configuring the Enterprise Vault data collector. . See “Configuring Enterprise Vault data collector” on page 373. . Vault Store. The data collector collects the information from Enterprise Vault that is associated with the selected data types. and Vault Store Partition Mailbox.364 Understanding data collection About collecting data from Enterprise Vault Table 5-16 Enterprise Vault data types Data in Enterprise Vault Policy and retention category Vault Store Groups. Public Folder.

It is at the highest level in the Enterprise Vault data hierarchy. storage media (vault store groups. and Enterprise Vault servers . Using OpsCenter archive reports you can .Understanding data collection About collecting data from Enterprise Vault 365 Figure 5-3 Representation of Enterprise Vault data in OpsCenter reports Archive Site Exchange Server Enterprise Vault Server Vault Store Group Vault Store Group Provisioning Group Vault Store Vault Store Vault Store Vault Store Vault Partition Vault Partition Vault Partition Vault Partition ------------------------Archives----------------------- ------------------------Archive Storage----------------------- An archive site is a logical group of hosts that need to be archived (Exchange Servers. Provisioning Groups). vault stores. vault partitions).

or how many emails were archived per Enterprise Vault server .366 Understanding data collection About collecting data from Enterprise Vault determine the details about both archiving activities and archival storage. the original size of data that has been archived. Note: Mailboxes are referred to as targets and an individual email is referred to as an item. OpsCenter supports local as well as remote archive-data collection. OpsCenter Agent and Microsoft SQL Server are installed on different hosts. Enterprise Vault Microsoft SQL Server 7. 8. Storage of archived data A few archive reports show details about the storage of archived data. which you can view reports for. See “About OpsCenter reports” on page 627. and so on. and so on.0 2005. These are all archiving activities. . For example: details of vault stores and vault partitions where the archive data has been stored. It supports all versions of Microsoft SQL Server that the Enterprise Vault supports. depending on which path you follow to drill down the site information. 2008 Planning the Enterprise Vault data collector deployment Enterprise Vault stores archive metadata in the directory and the Vault Store database. To collect the archive metadata from Microsoft SQL Server. For example: Details of mailboxes to be archived. Table 5-17 lists the steps that you need to carry out before configuring the Enterprise Vault data collector for archive-data collection in the OpsCenter console. Versions supported by OpsCenter OpsCenter supports the following versions of Enterprise Vault. OpsCenter archive reports show only Exchange Server data.5. In the remote data collection method. OpsCenter reports present archive data in the following two ways: Archiving activities A few archive reports show details about archiving activities. you need to configure OpsCenter Agent and data collector using the OpsCenter console. the number of mailboxes that exceed their warning limits per Exchange Server or Provisioning Group. These archiving activity reports are available in the Exchange report folder of Archive reports.

See “Configuring Enterprise Vault data collector” on page 373. where the on page 368. See “Configuring the OpsCenter Agent properties for integrated logon” on page 371. . depending on the OpsCenter Agent deployment mode. See “ About creating a user in multi-domain deployment mode” on page 370. See “About creating a user in standalone deployment mode” on page 370. See “Installing Microsoft SQL Server JDBC driver” on page 372. configure the OpsCenter Agent to run in the context of the user or group that has access to Microsoft SQL Server. Step 3 Depending on the deployment mode of the OpsCenter Agent. ■ Single-domain mode ■ ■ Multi-domain mode Standalone mode Step 2 Make sure that the user whose credentials you See “Accessing Microsoft use for the integrated logon has required access SQL Server host” rights on the Microsoft SQL Server. Step 4 Install Microsoft SQL Server JDBC driver on the OpsCenter Agent host. This can be an existing user. where the Enterprise Vault data resides.Understanding data collection About collecting data from Enterprise Vault 367 Table 5-17 Planning and deployment steps Reference topic Step number Step Step 1 Deploy OpsCenter Agent in any of the following See “OpsCenter Agent ways. to collect archive data remotely: deployment modes” on page 368. See “ About creating a user in single-domain deployment mode” on page 369. or you can create a new user in Microsoft SQL Server and give required access rights. add a user in the appropriate domain or workgroup. Step 5 For integrated logon. You need to configure the Enterprise Vault data collector using the OpsCenter console and schedule data collection. archive data resides. which you want to use for integrated logon between Agent host and Microsoft SQL Server host.

The OpsCenter Agent host is installed on a standalone host. This section mainly talks about the remote agent deployment modes. Add this Windows domain user (local admin) to the Microsoft SQL Server. The OpsCenter Agent host is in a domain different than the SQL Server domain. In addition to single-domain mode. For example. you can deploy the OpsCenter Agent in multi-domain mode.368 Understanding data collection About collecting data from Enterprise Vault OpsCenter Agent deployment modes This section describes various deployment modes in which you can deploy OpsCenter Agent. Open the Microsoft SQL Server admin console. the OpsCenter Agent host and the Microsoft SQL Server host (Enterprise Vault database instance) do not share the same Windows domain. To access Microsoft SQL Server host 1 2 Create a Windows domain user on the Microsoft SQL Server host. In this deployment mode. using SQL Server Management Studio Express or any other Microsoft SQL Server client. You can deploy the OpsCenter Agent on Microsoft SQL Server host or OpsCenter Server host. depending on your setup. Enterprise Vault also supports local Agent deployment. the OpsCenter Agent host and the Microsoft SQL Server host (Enterprise Vault database instance) do not share the same Windows domain. Table 5-18 Agent deployment modes Description In a single-domain deployment mode. create a user with credentials of user name: localadmin and password: pass. However. the OpsCenter Agent host and the Microsoft SQL Server host (Enterprise Vault database instance) share the same Windows domain. . In this deployment mode. Deployment mode Single-domain deployment mode Multi-domain deployment mode Standalone deployment mode Accessing Microsoft SQL Server host This section describes how to give the required rights to a user to access Microsoft SQL Server.

for example user name: OpsDomain\localadmin with the password: pass . on which you want the access rights. You need to add the user to these databases and give the required access rights on these databases. Note: To report on Enterprise Vault / archive data. expand the Security folder. make sure that the user has datareader rights to access the desired database. where the archive data resides. On the logon Properties screen. In the right-hand Server roles pane. OpsCenter Agent needs access to the Enterprise Vault directory and storage databases. Expand the logons folder. in the Object Explorer. See “About creating a user in standalone deployment mode” on page 370. Right-click the user name . in the Select a page pane. select the public check box. The user local admin in the OpsDomain (OpsDomain\localadmin) now has the rights to access Microsoft SQL Server. where the archive data resides. 4 5 6 In the Microsoft SQL Server admin console. User name: localadmin and Password: pass) you use for the integrated logon has required access rights on the Microsoft SQL Server. the procedure to create a logon user varies.Understanding data collection About collecting data from Enterprise Vault 369 3 Add this user (local admin) to the Enterprise Vault databases. See “ About creating a user in multi-domain deployment mode” on page 370. Click Properties. 7 8 9 10 Additionally. About creating a user in single-domain deployment mode Make sure that the user whose credentials (for example. . Depending on the OpsCenter Agent deployment mode. select Server Roles.with which you want to perform integrated logon on the Agent host and Microsoft SQL Server host. About creating a user for integrated logon This section provides procedures to create a user that is required for integrated logon between the OpsCenter Agent host and Microsoft SQL Server host. See “ About creating a user in single-domain deployment mode” on page 369.

(User name: localadmin and Password: pass) in the Agent host domain that is the Windows domain. Use credentials of this user (User name: localadmin and Password: pass) when you configure the Agent properties for integrated logon. create a user (User name: localadmin and Password: pass) in the Agent host domain. The user localadmin can be an existing user. create a user. or you can create a new user with these credentials in Microsoft SQL Server and give required access rights. where the archive data resides. then the user must be created as a local Administrator. See “Configuring the OpsCenter Agent properties for integrated logon” on page 371. or you can create a new user with these credentials in Microsoft SQL Server and give required access rights. or you can create a new user with these credentials in Microsoft SQL Server and give required access rights. See “Accessing Microsoft SQL Server host” on page 368. About creating a user in standalone deployment mode Make sure that the user whose credentials (for example. See “OpsCenter Agent deployment modes” on page 368. User name: localadmin and Password: pass) you use for the integrated logon has required access rights on the Microsoft SQL Server. User name: localadmin and Password: pass) you use for the integrated logon has required access rights on the Microsoft SQL Server. . where the archive data resides. See “Configuring the OpsCenter Agent properties for integrated logon” on page 371. See “Accessing Microsoft SQL Server host” on page 368. If you have deployed the OpsCenter Agent in the single-domain mode. This is because the Agent domain is not visible to the EV host. If the Agent host is on a different domain as compared to the EV host. About creating a user in multi-domain deployment mode Make sure that the user whose credentials (for example.370 Understanding data collection About collecting data from Enterprise Vault The user localadmin can be an existing user. See “Accessing Microsoft SQL Server host” on page 368. The user localadmin can be an existing user. See “OpsCenter Agent deployment modes” on page 368. If you have deployed the OpsCenter Agent in the multi-domain mode. Use credentials of this user (User name: localadmin and Password: pass) when you configure the Agent properties for integrated logon.

Click Enter.Understanding data collection About collecting data from Enterprise Vault 371 If you have deployed the OpsCenter Agent in the standalone mode. . This opens the Select User dialog box. This user should have access rights on Microsoft SQL Server. on the services list. On the Symantec OpsCenter Agent Properties screen. See “Configuring the OpsCenter Agent properties for integrated logon” on page 371. Configuring the OpsCenter Agent properties for integrated logon The Enterprise Vault data collector that is configured in OpsCenter collects the Enterprise Vault archive data residing on the Microsoft SQL Server. click Start > Run. 8 Enter a user name in the text box. In the Run dialog box. on the Log On tab. in the Open text box. See “OpsCenter Agent deployment modes” on page 368. click Properties.msc.who has the rights to access the Microsoft SQL Server. Enter the credentials of the user . However. where the Enterprise Vault archive data resides. Alternatively. Click Check Names to check whether the user name that is specified is present in the Windows domain or not. the data collection is not possible if the OpsCenter Agent is not configured to run in the context of the user or the group that has access to the SQL Server. To configure OpsCenter Agent properties 1 2 3 On the OpsCenter Agent host (Windows system). The Windows Services screen is displayed. right-click the Symantec OpsCenter Agent service. select the This account option. create a user for example (User name: localadmin and Password: pass) in the Administrator workgroup. click Browse. On the right-click menu. Use credentials of this user (User name: localadmin and Password: pass) when you configure the Agent properties for integrated logon. 4 5 6 7 On the Services screen. Note: Make sure that this user has required rights to access Microsoft SQL Server See “Accessing Microsoft SQL Server host” on page 368.for example localadmin with the password: pass . enter services.

you require the SQL Server JDBC driver that is installed on the OpsCenter Agent host. and provides access to SQL Server 2000. click Download. Enterprise Edition 5.100_enu. .372 Understanding data collection About collecting data from Enterprise Vault 9 Click OK.exe file.1803. Unzip the sqljdbc_2.exe file to a desired location. 5 6 Click Save to save the sqljdbc_2. select the following: I Accept the above agreement and I want to download the Microsoft Windows version The File Download dialog box is displayed. This is a Type 4 JDBC driver that provides database connectivity through the standard JDBC application program interfaces (APIs) available in Java Platform.0. 4 On the MICROSOFT SOFTWARE LICENSE TERMS page.0 page.100_enu.0 is available to all SQL Server users at no additional charge. The Agent requires the JDBC driver to communicate with the Microsoft SQL Server. or Java-enabled applet. application server. The SQL Server JDBC Driver 2. and SQL Server 2008 from any Java application.1803.0. Installing Microsoft SQL Server JDBC driver To collect the Enterprise Vault data residing on Microsoft SQL Server (or Microsoft SQL Server or SQL Server). Click Open to access the end-user license agreement.0 2 3 On the Microsoft SQL Server JDBC Driver 2. The File Download dialog box is displayed. SQL Server 2005. 10 Click OK on the LogOn tab. To install Microsoft SQL Server JDBC driver 1 Click the following link: Download Microsoft SQL Server JDBC Driver 2. Microsoft provides a Java Database Connectivity (JDBC) driver for use with SQL Server.

jar and named something else like sqljdbc4. click Settings > Configuration > Agent . select Symantec Enterprise Vault from the Select Product drop-down list.0\enu\auth\x86\sqljdbc_auth. Click Create Data Collector.dll and sqljdbc_2. To collect archive data. from where you want to collect the archive data. Install Dir\Symantec\OpsCenter\Agent\lib where Install Dir is the location where you have installed OpsCenter.0\enu\sqljdbc.Understanding data collection About collecting data from Enterprise Vault 373 7 For 32-bit Agent. copy sqljdbc_2.dll and sqljdbc_2. Microsoft SQL Server JDBC Driver 8 Restart the Agent service.0\enu\sqljdbc. To configure Enterprise Vault data collector 1 2 3 4 5 6 In the OpsCenter console. Click Next.jar files to the following location on the Agent host. the Enterprise Vault data collector needs the Agent to be configured to run in the context of the user or the group that can access Microsoft SQL Server.0\enu directory is not named sqljdbc.0\enu\auth\x64\sqljdbc_auth. Enter the name of the host. On the Create Data Collector: Product Selection page. Note: If the file in sqljdbc_2. Configuring Enterprise Vault data collector This section provides the procedure to configure the Enterprise Vault data collector in the OpsCenter console. select a check box in front of the Agent for which you want to configure the Data Collector.jar. On the Agent list. you must rename it to sqljdbc. Click the following link for more information and frequently asked questions on the JDBC driver. Install Dir\Symantec\OpsCenter\Agent\lib For 64-bit Agent. This data collector collects archive data from Microsoft SQL Server where the Enterprise Vault database resides. See “Configuring the OpsCenter Agent properties for integrated logon” on page 371.jar.jar files to the following location on the Agent host. copy sqljdbc_2. .

refer to the following section: See “ Configuring an OpsCenter Data Collector” on page 326. 8 9 Specify blackout period details. Vault Store. By default this field is left blank. See “Enterprise Vault data collection checklist” on page 374. Select the data types that you want to collect. For more details on collection interval. ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ . that is the Microsoft SQL Server. 11 Click Save.374 Understanding data collection About collecting data from Enterprise Vault 7 Enter the following Configuration Settings: Database Instance Name This is the directory database instance name. You have entered the appropriate information for Enterprise Vault data collector variables. Archive Policy. You can collect the following data types from an Enterprise Vault setup : Target. and Archive. The default port number is 1433. Databaseportnumber Enter the port number that is used to connect to the Microsoft SQL Server. You have selected the data types and events to be collected from the Enterprise Vault database. See “Configuring Enterprise Vault data collector” on page 373. Enterprise Vault data collection checklist Ensure the following before you start collecting data from Enterprise Vault database: ■ The SQL Server JDBC driver has been installed on the OpsCenter Agent host See “Installing Microsoft SQL Server JDBC driver” on page 372. The OpsCenter Agent has been configured to run in the context of the user or user group that has access to Microsoft SQL Server database where Enterprise Vault data is stored. The SQL Server services are running. The OpsCenter Agent service is running. See “Configuring the OpsCenter Agent properties for integrated logon” on page 371. and other data collector settings. 10 Select collection interval.

TSM ID TSM Password TSM Server Port Note: The TSM product environment variables DSM_CONFIG and DSM_SYS point to the dsmadmc required files dsm. IBM Tivoli Storage Manager data collector variables and details OpsCenter supports the collection of the following data types from IBM Tivoli Storage Manager (TSM): The variables to configure for the IBM Tivoli Storage Manager data collector are as follows: Home Directory The home directory for the Tivoli Storage Manager installation.opt file. For more information.) The password for the account (specified in tsmId) for connecting to the TSM server. The Solaris data collector uses only product host settings.) An administrator-level logon that is used to connect to the Tivoli Storage Manager server. dsmConfig dsmDir dsmadmc Location The path to the dsm.opt and dsm.) (Windows only) The TCP port on the TSM server through which the data collector establishes a connection. refer to your TSM documentation. The path of TSM administrative client (dsmadmc). The path where files to be run dsmadmc reside. (The default is admin. The TSM Server Port has no effect on Solaris.Understanding data collection IBM Tivoli Storage Manager data collector variables and details 375 ■ You have specified the collection interval within which you want to collect the archive data. (This variable can be left blank. (The default password is admin. Specify the TSM server host (also called product host) value for the TSM data collector in the following manner: .sys (Solaris and AIX).

sys file: ***************************************** SErvername server_a COMMmethod CoMMmethod TCPPort TCPip 1500 TCPServeraddress 255. for tag SErvername (note the case).255 SERVERNAME MYHOST. EMC NetWorker data collector variables The variables to configure for the EMC NetWorker data collector are as follows: Home Directory The home directory for the EMC NetWorker installation. Solaris and AIX The product host must be the value that is specified in the dsm.COM TCPSERVERADDRESS 255.domain. refer to the following section: See “ Configuring an OpsCenter Data Collector” on page 326.com ****************************************** For more details on collection interval. In short.sample. and other data collector settings.255. The following is a sample dsm. In short.255 NODENAME myhost.sys file.Veritas.mycompany.255. product host is the value that you can use with the dsmadmc -tcpserveraddress option. For example. .255.255. the following entries are valid for product host: Host.com Host assuming that Host can be fully qualified.376 Understanding data collection EMC NetWorker data collector variables Windows Use the fully qualified host name. product host is the value that you can use with the dsmadmc -se option.

absolute. refer to the following section: See “ Configuring an OpsCenter Data Collector” on page 326. or relative to homeDirectory The directory path of the nsradmin CLI. Location of nsradmin. To increase the efficiency of the NetWorker data collector. and other data collector settings. and point messagesFile to this log Location of mminfo.exe The directory path of the mminfo command-line interface (CLI). . and mminfoFile even though these variables are optional and only advanced users must set them.exe Location of nsrres file Location of nsr file Location of mminfo file Output of mminfo(Optional) For more details on collection interval. absolute. nsrFile. This path may be absolute or relative to homeDirectory. The default file name is messages. or relative to homeDirectory The NetWorker resource file to use instead of the default file that is used by nsradmin (Optional) Output of an nsradmin command (Optional) The OpsCenter console displays nsrResFile. configure NetWorker to create a log that contains only group complete messages.Understanding data collection EMC NetWorker data collector variables 377 Location of messages file The directory path for the log file containing group-complete messages.

378 Understanding data collection EMC NetWorker data collector variables .

Chapter 6 Managing OpsCenter views This chapter includes the following topics: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ About OpsCenter views About managing OpsCenter views About managing nodes and objects in OpsCenter Adding nodes to a view in OpsCenter Modifying node details in OpsCenter Deleting nodes in OpsCenter Adding objects to a view node in OpsCenter Deleting objects from a view node in OpsCenter View filters in OpsCenter About OpsCenter views Symantec OpsCenter views are logical groups of IT assets (master servers or clients) organized in a hierarchical manner. Figure 6-1 shows the details that are displayed on the Views tab in the OpsCenter console. A Security Administrator or an Administrator can create views either from OpsCenter console or the Java View Builder and make them available in the OpsCenter console. .

The hierarchy of an object view based on archive data is as follows: Abstract objects (Geography > Region > City) > Domain (Site) > Host (Exchange Server / Enterprise Vault server ) > Target (Mailbox / Journal Mailbox / Public Folder) See “About collecting data from Enterprise Vault” on page 362. you can identify the locations or departments with hosts storing business critical data. See “User access rights and UI functions in OpsCenter” on page 287. OpsCenter detects the IT assets. In an OpsCenter view. IT assets that are scattered across organization can be arranged according to their locations. With these reports. business units.380 Managing OpsCenter views About OpsCenter views Figure 6-1 The Views tab Note: Only a Security Administrator or an Administrator can create or modify views. . which are then stored in the database. or applications. The Java View Builder makes these IT assets available when a view is created. After you install and run the OpsCenter Server and the OpsCenter Agent. You can generate various OpsCenter reports that are filtered by views.

In a view hierarchy. between top and bottom levels you can create a number of user-defined levels. Use the Java View Builder to add. . The Edit View Level Alias option is disabled if you select any other view type like File System. Master Server. and Policy view types using the OpsCenter GUI. This option is available only when you log on as a Security Administrator or an Administrator. Enterprise Vault server etc.5 now displays all the view types that are supported by Java View Builder like File System. you can add. and Policy. and Policy view types using the OpsCenter GUI. or delete only the Master Server. Enterprise Vault server. edit. This option is available only for Master Server. delete. You can manage only the Master Server. A description of the Views tab options follows in the table. These options are available only when you log on as a Security Administrator or an Administrator. See “OpsCenter view types” on page 383. edit. or to edit and delete the available views. Add/Edit/Delete Select to add new views. Settings > Views options OpsCenter 7. The Add. manage nodes and objects etc. In addition. on the Settings > Views pane. Client. or Delete options are disabled if you select any other view type like File System. Client. and Policy view types. it cannot have hosts and file systems in the same tree. delete. Edit. or manage these view types. The options are All Views. An OpsCenter view is a homogeneous one. Edit View Level Alias Select to edit the view level aliases. However you cannot perform operations like add.Managing OpsCenter views About OpsCenter views 381 Note: To run the Java View Builder. you need Java Runtime Environment (JRE) installed on the host. Table 6-1 Option View Type Views tab options Description Select the type of view from the drop-down list. Enterprise Vault server etc. and Vault. Enterprise Vault server etc. from the OpsCenter GUI on view types like File System. Client. Client. Exchange server. edit.

This option is available only for Master Server. if you have not added any nodes or objects to the selected view. Displays the role of the user who created the view. Displays the view type.5 now displays all the view types that are supported by Java View Builder like File System. Level 2. See “Modifying alias view levels in OpsCenter” on page 390.382 Managing OpsCenter views About OpsCenter views Table 6-1 Option Views tab options (continued) Description Select to view the objects on the node and objects that are not in the selected view. on the Settings > Views pane. Enterprise Vault server etc. Manage Nodes and Objects Name Type Displays the names of the views that you can access. . Only a Security Administrator or an Administrator can modify the view level aliases. Displays the date and time when the view was created. Table 6-2 Option View Level Alias tab Settings > Views Details pane tabs Description This tab shows the details of view level aliases of the selected view. This option is available only when you log on as a Security Administrator or an Administrator. OpsCenter 7. General tab The General tab displays the following details: ■ ■ ■ ■ Name of the selected view Description of the view Date and time when the view was created Name of the user who has created this view See “About OpsCenter views” on page 379. and so on. The Manage Nodes and Objects option is disabled if you select any other view type like File System. and Policy view types. Default view level aliases are as follows: Level 1. Client. Created On Owner Two tabs appear in the Details pane of the Settings > Views page. Enterprise Vault server etc. The View Level Alias tab does not contain any data.

Table 6-3 Tab Monitor Overview Yes Yes Yes Tab access for specific view types Subtab Master Server Policy view view Client view .Managing OpsCenter views About OpsCenter views 383 OpsCenter view types In OpsCenter. only policies are available to be assigned to the view. objects are made available for assigning to that view. each view is associated with a view type. If you create a view of type Master Server. Exchange Server etc. You can create views of the following types from the OpsCenter console: Client If you create a view of type Client. This is because data for those tabs is not applicable for the specific view types. a Client view should display data that is relevant to Client objects only and not show any unrelated data like media or services. you see the following error message: Data is not applicable for the view that you have selected. or Client. only Master Servers are available to be assigned to the view. Table 6-3 lists if data in specific tabs or subtabs is applicable when you select a view of a specific view type like Master Server. only backup clients are available to be assigned to the view. UI access for specific view types You may not see data in some tabs or subtabs when you have selected specific views. Policy. Depending on the type of the view. Master server Policy Note: Use the Java View Builder to create any other view types like Enterprise Vault server. For example. In such a scenario. If you create a view of type Policy. Click UI access for specific view types for details about the applicable view types.

384 Managing OpsCenter views About OpsCenter views Table 6-3 Tab Tab access for specific view types (continued) Subtab Jobs Services Policies Media Devices (all subtabs) Hosts > Master Server Hosts > Media Server Hosts > Client Alerts Audit Trails Cloud Appliance Hardware Master Server Policy view view Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No Yes No No Client view Yes No Yes No No Yes No No Yes No No Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No Yes No No No Yes Yes No No No Manage Alert Policies Storage > Storage Unit Storage > Storage Unit Group Storage > Storage Lifecycle Policy Devices (all subtabs) Hosts Yes Yes Yes No Yes No Yes No No Yes No No Yes No No Yes No No .

Reporter. An Analyst is upgraded to OpsCenter 7. Table 6-4 JVB Role admin Default access levels OpsCenter Role Security Administrator Administrator Permitted View RW RW ALL MASTER SERVER View R R User Reporter Restore Operator Operator P P P P P P In this table. The Analyst user role is no longer available. They also need permission to access a view. An Operator. and P stands for Needs Permission. .Managing OpsCenter views About OpsCenter views 385 Note: Manage > Restore and Manage > Deployment Analysis tabs are not dependent on any view selection. The concept of public or private views that existed earlier has been removed in OpsCenter 7. or Restore Operator cannot create or modify views. a Security Administrator can specify the access rights for that view. An Operator or Reporter now only has Read access for all prior public views. The following table describe the permissions available to a user for a public or private view after he or she upgrades. See “Creating OpsCenter views” on page 388.5. RW stands for Read and Write permission. Note: An Administrator can specify the access rights for a view from the Java View Builder. About access rights for a view While creating an OpsCenter view. R stands for Read permission.5 as a Reporter. Table 6-4 lists the default access levels for specific OpsCenter or JVB roles. The content in these tabs is shown for all views.

See “Modifying alias view levels in OpsCenter” on page 390. creating a hierarchical structure in the view. You can add alias for each of these view levels. Between the top level and the bottom level. you can add multiple nodes.386 Managing OpsCenter views About OpsCenter views Table 6-5 Role Permissions available after upgrade Public View Existing After Upgrade RW RW R R Private View Existing After Upgrade Security Administrator Administrator Operator Reporter RW RW RW RW RW RW RW RW RW RW R R About OpsCenter view levels A newly created view has only one level. or policies are always at the lowest levels in a view. Only a Security Administrator or an Administrator can modify views. A node is a logical entity that you add to create a hierarchical structure of a view. Figure 6-2 shows an example of a view comprising multiple nodes and objects. You can add multiple nodes to a view at different levels. Between the first level (the view name itself) and the last level (actual view object). clients. . About nodes and objects An OpsCenter view comprises nodes and view objects. you can create multiple intermediate levels to organize view objects into logical groups. Master server hosts.

See “Deleting OpsCenter views” on page 390. . edit. or delete OpsCenter views. Table 6-6 Option Objects on Node tab Settings > Views > Manage Nodes and Objects options Description The objects that are assigned to the current view or view node are displayed on the Objects on Node tab. Settings > Views > Manage Nodes and Objects options A description of the Settings > Views > Manage Nodes and Objects options follows in the table.Managing OpsCenter views About managing OpsCenter views 387 Figure 6-2 View nodes and objects About managing OpsCenter views The following topics provide procedures to add. See “Modifying OpsCenter views” on page 389. See “Looking at OpsCenter views and their details” on page 388. See “Modifying alias view levels in OpsCenter” on page 390. See “Creating OpsCenter views” on page 388.

symantec. To look at OpsCenter views 1 In the OpsCenter console. For example. See “About OpsCenter views” on page 379. See “Modifying OpsCenter views” on page 389. Continent etc. For example: If the view is of type Client. See “Creating OpsCenter views” on page 388. if you create a view called Geography. A list of views that you are permitted to access is displayed. the lowest level can be an object like adrian.US |. select the view from the views list. The available objects list varies depending on the view type.symantec. only client hosts are available on the Objects not in selected view tab for selection. The View Level Alias and General details are displayed in the lower section of the page. the lowest level of the view should be an object that is created by a data collector like a master server.. See “Settings > Views options” on page 381.Colorado .. 2 To check the details of a view. Example: Geography | . Symantec recommends that while creating a view. Only a Security Administrator or an Administrator can create views.vxa. Creating OpsCenter views This topic provides the procedure to create a view using OpsCenter.388 Managing OpsCenter views About managing OpsCenter views Table 6-6 Option Settings > Views > Manage Nodes and Objects options (continued) Description Objects not in selected view The Objects not in selected view tab shows all host objects tab that are not a part of the selected view or view node. Looking at OpsCenter views and their details This topic provides the procedure to see OpsCenter views.vxa. client etc.com or serena. policy. click Settings > Views.com and not any other hypothetical object like Region.

. click Settings > Views. Click Edit.com which is an object created by a data collector.adrenalize. Note: The ALL MASTER SERVERS view cannot be modified.veritas. On the Add View dialog box. In the OpsCenter console.adrenalize.com |.Colorado |.vxindia.vxindia. Modifying OpsCenter views This topic provides the procedure to modify view details. click Settings > Views. Only a Security Administrator or an Administrator can modify views.vxindia. Click OK. You should not create any view like the following where the lowest level of the view is a hypothetical object like Denver: Geography | .com In this example... From the list of views.Managing OpsCenter views About managing OpsCenter views 389 |.. and the lowest-level of the view is adrenalize.US |.Denver To create an OpsCenter view 1 2 3 4 5 Log on to the OpsCenter console as a Security Administrator or an Administrator.veritas. You can create such views. To modify OpsCenter views 1 2 3 4 Log on to the OpsCenter console as a Security Administrator or an Administrator. ... specify the view details. Click Add.. In the OpsCenter console.veritas. US. select a view that you want to modify. and Colorado are hypothetical nodes (which are not associated with any data collector)..

click Settings > Views. it cannot be recovered. you can modify the view details. and Policy view types can be modified using the OpsCenter GUI. Note: The ALL MASTER SERVERS view cannot be deleted. From the list of views. and Policy view types can be deleted using the OpsCenter GUI. Click Delete. Deleting OpsCenter views This topic provides the procedure to delete views. select a view for which you want to modify view level alias. See “Adding nodes to a view in OpsCenter” on page 391. all its nodes are deleted and the objects are moved to the unassigned tree. Click OK. Client. Only Master Server. See “About managing nodes and objects in OpsCenter” on page 391. Only a Security Administrator or an Administrator can modify views. click Settings > Views. Client.390 Managing OpsCenter views About managing OpsCenter views 5 6 On the Edit View dialog box. Note: Once you have deleted a view. Only Master Server. In the OpsCenter console. From the list of views. Modifying alias view levels in OpsCenter This topic provides the procedure to modify alias of view levels. Only a Security Administrator or an Administrator can modify views. To delete OpsCenter views 1 2 3 4 Log on to the OpsCenter console as a Security Administrator or an Administrator. . To modify alias view levels in OpsCenter 1 2 3 Log on to the OpsCenter console as a Security Administrator or an Administrator. select a view that you want to delete. In the OpsCenter console. If you delete a view.

Adding nodes to a view in OpsCenter This topic provides the procedure to add a node to a view.Managing OpsCenter views About managing nodes and objects in OpsCenter 391 4 5 Click Edit Alias View Levels. See “Deleting objects from a view node in OpsCenter” on page 394. See “View filters in OpsCenter” on page 395. See “Deleting nodes in OpsCenter” on page 393. Note: The ALL MASTER SERVERS view cannot be modified. the Alias View Levels dialog box appears as follows: 6 Rename the available levels. Client. text boxes for entering aliases for all available view levels appear. Click OK. For example. See “Adding objects to a view node in OpsCenter” on page 393. Alias Level 2 as Country. See “Adding nodes to a view in OpsCenter” on page 391. See “Modifying node details in OpsCenter” on page 392. if the selected view has three levels. Only a Security Administrator or an Administrator can modify views. modify. and Alias Level 3 as Region. Only Master Server. . if the selected view has only one level. and Policy view types can be managed using the OpsCenter GUI. On the Alias View Levels dialog box. For example. 7 About managing nodes and objects in OpsCenter The following topics provide procedures to create. and delete nodes and objects related to a view. you can rename the levels as follows: rename Alias Level 1 as Geography.

On the view tree. Modifying node details in OpsCenter This topic provides the procedure to modify the information of a view node. Click OK. From the list of views. expand the view to see the associated nodes.392 Managing OpsCenter views Modifying node details in OpsCenter See “About nodes and objects” on page 386. To modify node information 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Log on to the OpsCenter console as a Security Administrator or an Administrator. Only a Security Administrator or an Administrator can modify views. Click Add. enter the node name. Click Manage Nodes and Objects. . modify the name of the node. Click Edit. select the view to which you want to add a node. On the Add dialog box. In the OpsCenter console. Select the node that you want to modify. On the view tree. Click OK. To add nodes to a view 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Log on to the OpsCenter console as a Security Administrator or an Administrator. select a view to modify the information of associated nodes. click Settings > Views. In the OpsCenter console. On the Edit dialog box. select a view to which you want to add nodes and objects. From the list of views. click Settings > Views. See “Adding nodes to a view in OpsCenter” on page 391. Click Manage Nodes and Objects.

In the OpsCenter console. On the confirmation dialog box. In the OpsCenter console. click Settings > Views. Click Manage Nodes and Objects. expand the view to see the associated nodes. Select the node that you want to delete. Only a Security Administrator or an Administrator can modify views. On the view tree.Managing OpsCenter views Deleting nodes in OpsCenter 393 Deleting nodes in OpsCenter This topic provides the procedure to delete the nodes from a view. Click Delete. select a view from which you want to delete nodes. select the view name or a view node to which you want to add an object. click Settings > Views. To delete a node 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Log on to the OpsCenter console as a Security Administrator or an Administrator. click OK. select the view to which you want to add objects. To add an object to a view node 1 2 3 4 5 Log on to the OpsCenter console as a Security Administrator or an Administrator. From the list of views. On the view tree. Adding objects to a view node in OpsCenter This topic provides the procedure to add objects to a view or a node within a view. From the list of views. Only a Security Administrator or an Administrator can modify views. Click Manage Nodes and Objects. . See “Adding nodes to a view in OpsCenter” on page 391.

Click Manage Nodes and Objects. The Objects not in selected view tab shows all host objects that are not a part of the selected view or view node. 7 8 Select the check boxes in front of the view objects that you want to add to the selected view or view node.394 Managing OpsCenter views Deleting objects from a view node in OpsCenter 6 In the right-hand pane. click Settings > Views. You can filter the objects that are not in the selected view with the help of default filters. select the view from which you want to delete objects. Click Add to Node. Or you can create new filters and apply them to view the required objects on the tab. The objects that are assigned to this view or the view node are displayed on the Objects on Node tab. In the OpsCenter console. On the view tree. Only a Security Administrator or an Administrator can modify views. click OK. The added view objects are removed from the Objects not in selected view tab and appear on the Objects on Node tab. From the list of views. For example: If the view is of type Client. only client hosts are available on the Objects not in selected view tab for selection. Click Delete from Node. See “View filters in OpsCenter” on page 395. select the view name or a view node from which you want to delete an object. The available objects list varies depending on the view type. On the confirmation dialog box. select the Objects not in selected view tab. To delete an object from a view node 1 2 3 4 5 Log on to the OpsCenter console as a Security Administrator or an Administrator. . 6 7 8 Select the check boxes in front of the view objects that you want to delete. Deleting objects from a view node in OpsCenter This topic provides the procedure to delete the objects from a view or a view node.

Other Clients All Servers. The default set of filters varies depending on the view type. select the view to which you want to assign objects. Catalog Policies. Windows Clients. Windows Servers. Standard Policies. select the view name or the view node to which you want to assign view objects. . click Settings > Views. Not Connected Servers. Linux Servers. You can also create your own filters and apply them to view the required list of view objects. Windows Policies. Partially Connected Servers. Active Policies. Table 6-7 View type Client Default filters Default filters All Clients. Other Servers All Policies. Table 6-7 lists the default filters available for various view types.Managing OpsCenter views View filters in OpsCenter 395 View filters in OpsCenter OpsCenter provides a set of default filters using which you can filter the view objects that you need to add to a view. Solaris Servers. On the view tree. Linux Clients. From the list of views. Solaris Clients. See “View filters in OpsCenter” on page 395. and deleting view object filters. Click Manage Nodes and Objects. Inactive Policies. Creating a view object filter in OpsCenter This topic provides the procedure to create user-defined view object filters. In the OpsCenter console. modifying. Connected Servers. To create a view object filter 1 2 3 4 5 Log on to the OpsCenter console as a Security Administrator or an Administrator. Other Policies Master Server Policy See the following topics for information about creating.

only client hosts are available on the Unassigned Objects tab for selection. You cannot modify the default filters. click Settings > Views. Click Manage Nodes and Objects. On the view tree. For example: If the view is of type Client. See “Deleting view object filters in OpsCenter” on page 397. To modify view object filters 1 2 3 4 5 Log on to the OpsCenter console as a Security Administrator or an Administrator. In the OpsCenter console. See “Modifying view object filters in OpsCenter” on page 396. The list of objects that is displayed varies depending on the view type. . specify the filter details. which you can modify or delete. Only a Security Administrator or an Administrator can modify view object filters. Modifying view object filters in OpsCenter You can modify definition of user-defined view object filters. 9 Click OK. 7 8 Click the Create Filter icon. select the view to which you want to assign objects. The following figure shows an example of creating a filter. select the Unassigned Objects tab. This user-defined filter is now added in the Filter drop-down list on the Unassigned Objects tab. In the Add Filter dialog box.396 Managing OpsCenter views View filters in OpsCenter 6 In the right pane. select the view name or a view node to which you want to assign view objects. From the list of views. See “Creating a view object filter in OpsCenter” on page 395.

the Delete Filter icon is disabled. Only a Security Administrator or an Administrator can delete user-defined view object filters. Deleting view object filters in OpsCenter You can delete user-defined view object filters. The list of objects that is displayed varies depending on the view type. In the right pane. From the list of views. The list of objects that is displayed varies depending on the view type. select the user-defined filter that you want to delete. For example: If the view is of type Client. 9 On the dialog box. . See “Creating a view object filter in OpsCenter” on page 395. To delete view object filters 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Log on to the OpsCenter console as a Security Administrator or an Administrator. Click Manage Nodes and Objects. the Edit Filter icon is disabled. If you have selected a default filter. select the view name or a view node to which you want to assign view objects. You cannot delete the default filters.Managing OpsCenter views View filters in OpsCenter 397 6 In the right pane. only client hosts are available on the Unassigned Objects tab for selection. select the user-defined filter that you want to modify. 10 Click OK. select the Unassigned Objects tab. In the OpsCenter console. select the view to which you want to assign objects. Select the Edit Filter icon. If you have selected a default filter. On the view tree. modify name or definition of the filter. From the Filter drop-down list. click Settings > Views. select the Unassigned Objects tab. 7 8 From the Filter drop-down list.

398 Managing OpsCenter views View filters in OpsCenter .

Chapter 7 Monitoring NetBackup using Symantec OpsCenter This chapter includes the following topics: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ About the Monitor views Controlling the scope of Monitor views About monitoring NetBackup using the Overview tab About monitoring NetBackup jobs Monitor > Services view About using the List View to monitor NetBackup media Viewing the details for NetBackup media Viewing the details for a master server associated with the media Filtering on NetBackup media type Controlling media Monitor > Media Summary View options Hierarchical View by Volume Pool for monitoring media Viewing the details for volume pool Viewing the details for media Controlling media Hierarchical View by Volume Group for monitoring media .

400 Monitoring NetBackup using Symantec OpsCenter ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Viewing the details for a volume group Viewing the details for media Controlling media in OpsCenter Monitoring NetBackup devices Monitor > Devices > Drives List View options About using the List View for monitoring drives Viewing the details for a single drive Viewing the details for a master server associated with a drive Filtering on NetBackup drive category Controlling drives Monitor > Devices > Drives Summary View Viewing the Drive Summary by Status Monitor > Devices > Disk Pools options Viewing the details for a single disk pool About monitoring NetBackup hosts Monitor > Hosts > Master Servers view Filtering by NetBackup master server type and status Monitor > Hosts > Media Servers view Viewing the details of a master server that is associated with a media server Monitor > Hosts > Clients view Viewing the details for a single master server About monitoring NetBackup alerts Monitor > Alerts List View About using the List View to monitor NetBackup alerts Viewing the details for a single alert Viewing the details of the alert policy associated with an alert Filtering by alert type .

e. In addition to using the default view i. policies. . For example. ALL MASTER SERVERS. hosts. you can also create your own views from Settings > Views or by using Java View Builder. services. media.Monitoring NetBackup using Symantec OpsCenter About the Monitor views 401 ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Responding to alerts Summary View for monitoring NetBackup alerts Viewing alerts by severity About monitoring Audit Trails Monitor > Appliance Hardware > Master Server Monitor > Appliance Hardware > Media Server Appliance hardware details Monitor > Cloud options About the Monitor views From the Monitor tab and associated subtabs. It cannot monitor or manage other products like Symantec NetBackup PureDisk. you can view detailed information about your NetBackup environment including jobs. devices. Note that OpsCenter or OpsCenter Analytics can only monitor and manage NetBackup or NetBackup appliances. See “About OpsCenter views” on page 379. Controlling the scope of Monitor views The content that is shown in the Monitor views is based on your current View pane selection. You can select the following default option from the View pane: ALL MASTER SERVERS Select ALL MASTER SERVERS to view information for all the NetBackup servers in your environment. Symantec Enterprise Vault etc. you can create a view like Geography to view details about master servers in a particular region like Europe. and alerts. More information about how to create views by using the Settings > Views control is available.

data for the last 24 hours is shown in these views. About time frame selection You can also view data for the last 24. 48. and Master Server Summary sections. Click Apply Selection. These sections show all the data from the OpsCenter database. or 72 hours for some of the Monitor views. To view details of all master servers ◆ In the OpsCenter console. These options are located on the top-right corner of specific Monitor views. select ALL MASTER SERVERS from the drop-down list in the View pane. select ALL MASTER SERVERS from the drop-down list in the View pane. Use the following procedure to view details of all master servers or specific master servers. Top 7 Job Error Log Summary. Job Summary by Exit Status. and Alert Summary by Severity sections) Note: You cannot control timeframes for Media Summary by Status. 3 See “About time frame selection” on page 402. Note that by default. Top 7 Policies by Failed Jobs. or Last 72 Hours to view data for the last 24. or 72 hours respectively. 48. Deselect the checkbox next to ALL MASTER SERVERS and select the specific master servers from the list of master servers. To view details of specific master servers 1 2 In the OpsCenter console. Services Summary.402 Monitoring NetBackup using Symantec OpsCenter Controlling the scope of Monitor views See the online Symantec OpsCenter Java View Builder Help to know how you can create views using Java View Builder. Ensure that other master servers are unchecked. Drive Summary by Status. You can also configure an absolute or relative timeframe for specific Monitor views. Last 48 Hours. Click Last 24 Hours. You can control time frame selection for the following Monitor views: ■ Monitor > Overview (Job Summary by State. Monitor > Jobs Monitor > Alerts ■ ■ .

See “Viewing the Job Summary by Exit Status” on page 407. you can use links to drill down and access detailed information about many aspects of your NetBackup environment. Using the Customize option. This view gives an overview of your NetBackup environment. You can configure an absolute or relative timeframe for the following Monitor views: ■ ■ Monitor > Jobs (List View. About monitoring NetBackup using the Overview tab This view is displayed when you select Monitor > Overview (default view). From this view. Pie charts for most monitoring categories appear. . you can also customize the time frame selection by clicking Customize and specifying an absolute time frame or relative time frame. See “Viewing the Master Server Summary” on page 406. This view contains the different sections which display specific information about your NetBackup environment. See “Viewing the Media Summary by Status ” on page 404. The pie segments are also links to more details for the monitoring category. Summary View. See “Viewing the Drive Summary by Status” on page 408. Note that the Customize option is located on the top-right corner of specific Monitor views. See “Viewing the Alert Summary by Severity” on page 409. The following sections describe the Overview subtab in detail: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ See “Viewing the Job Summary by State ” on page 404.Monitoring NetBackup using Symantec OpsCenter About monitoring NetBackup using the Overview tab 403 ■ Monitor > Policies (Summary View) In addition. See “About Top 7 Job Error Log Summary” on page 405. See “Top 7 Policies by Failed Jobs” on page 409. you can view data for any time frame. See “Viewing the Services Summary” on page 405. and Hierarchical View) Monitor > Alerts (List View and Summary View) See “Controlling the scope of Monitor views” on page 401.

Note: The timeframe selection does not affect this section. click the yellow section of the pie chart to view details for Queued jobs.404 Monitoring NetBackup using Symantec OpsCenter About monitoring NetBackup using the Overview tab Viewing the Job Summary by State The Job Summary by State section shows an overall distribution of jobs by job state for the current selection in the View pane and time frame selection. incomplete. To view the Job Summary by job state 1 2 In the OpsCenter console. In the Job Summary by State section. See “Controlling the scope of Monitor views” on page 401. This information is shown in a pie chart as well as a table. queued. click the number that is shown for Done jobs. A pie chart with different colors represents media distribution in this section. select Monitor > Overview. Each color of the pie chart represents how jobs are distributed in your environment as per the job state in the selected time frame. pointing on the yellow color in the pie chart shows that in the last 24 hours. active jobs etc. A pie chart with different colors represents the job distribution. For example. or 42% jobs in your environment are in a queued state. do either of the following: ■ Click the number of jobs (link) for a particular job state from the table. This information is shown in a pie chart as well as a table. All the data from the OpsCenter database is displayed in this section irrespective of the timeframe that you select. Data for the last 24 hours is shown by default. Pointing on the pie chart gives the number and percentage of jobs in a particular job state in your NetBackup environment. For example. You can also view data for the last 48 hours or 72 hours. 22 jobs. For example. ■ Viewing the Media Summary by Status The Media Summary by Status section shows an overall distribution of media by media status for the current selection in the View pane. Or Click a colored section of the pie chart that corresponds to a particular job state. Each color of the pie chart represents how media are distributed in your . You can also view the color code summary in this section to know the colors that represent different job states. You can drill down from this section to see details for failed.

click the number for Frozen media. By viewing this section. The table that appears in the section lists the top seven exit status codes responsible for maximum job failure. select Monitor > Overview. ■ About Top 7 Job Error Log Summary The Top 7 Job Error Log Summary section lists seven exit status codes responsible for maximum failed jobs in your environment. The table also lists the number of failed jobs for each exit status in the selected time frame. You can also view data for the last 48 hours or 72 hours. You can drill down from this section to see details for media with different status like details for frozen and active media. Note that the failed jobs that are shown in the Failed Job Count column are arranged in descending order in the table. Or Click a colored section of the pie chart that corresponds to a particular media status. do either of the following: ■ Click the number of media (link) for a particular media status from the table.Monitoring NetBackup using Symantec OpsCenter About monitoring NetBackup using the Overview tab 405 environment as per the media status. You can also view the color code summary in this section to know the colors that represent different media status. click the red section of the pie chart to view details for Frozen media. The content that is shown in this section is based on the current View pane selection. For example. you can quickly analyze the reasons behind maximum job failures in your environment. Data for the last 24 hours is shown by default. To view media by media status 1 2 In the OpsCenter console. For example. pointing on the red color in the pie chart shows that four media or 2% media in your environment are frozen. In the Media Summary by Status section. For example. Moving your pointer over the pie chart triggers the appearance of the number and percentage of media with a particular media status in your NetBackup environment. Viewing the Services Summary The Services Summary section provides a high-level view that shows the total number of running and stopped NetBackup services for the current View pane selection. . See “Controlling the scope of Monitor views” on page 401.

All the data from the OpsCenter database is displayed in this section irrespective of the timeframe that you select. The following information is shown in the Master Server Summary section: ■ ■ Total number of master servers in your environment Number of the master servers that appear as Connected in the OpsCenter console Number of the master servers that appear as Not Connected in the OpsCenter console Clients that do not have a backup policy configured for them ■ ■ You can drill down from this section to see details for all the master servers in your environment or the master servers that appear as connected or not connected. All the data from the OpsCenter database is displayed in this section irrespective of the timeframe that you select. Viewing the Master Server Summary The Master Server Summary section provides the specific information about the master servers based on the current View pane selection. You can drill down from the links in this table to see details for running or stopped services. Note: The timeframe selection does not affect this section. In the Service Summary section. . click the number that is shown in the Service Count column of the table. select Monitor > Overview. For example. You can also see details of the clients that do not have a backup policy configured for them. To view running or stopped services 1 2 In the OpsCenter console. Note: The timeframe selection does not affect this section.406 Monitoring NetBackup using Symantec OpsCenter About monitoring NetBackup using the Overview tab The total number of running and stopped NetBackup services are shown in a table. click the number that is shown for Running services to view details for the services that are running.

72 jobs. To view details of the clients that are at risk 1 2 In the OpsCenter console. click the number that is shown in the Total column. This information is shown in a pie chart as well as a table. Viewing the Job Summary by Exit Status The Job Summary by Exit Status section shows an overall distribution of jobs by exit status based on the current View pane and time frame selection. In the Master Server Summary section. Each color of the pie chart represents how jobs are distributed in your environment as per the exit status. You can also view data for the last 48 hours or 72 hours. For example. select Monitor > Overview. Putting your pointer over the pie chart shows the total number and percentage of successful. This information is also listed in a tabular format. In the Master Server Summary section. You can also view the color code summary in this section to know the colors that represent different exit status. partially successful. a table also shows the amount of data that has been backed up for the selected view and time frame. select Monitor > Overview. To view details of the master servers that are not connected 1 2 In the OpsCenter console. In the Master Server Summary section. pointing to the red color in the pie chart shows that in the last 24 hours. click the number that is shown in the Clients at Risk column. or 42% jobs in your environment failed. and failed jobs in your NetBackup environment. click the number that is shown in the Connected column. successful. . In addition. A pie chart with different colors represents the job distribution by exit status in the selected time frame. or partially successful jobs. You can drill down from this section to see details for failed. select Monitor > Overview.Monitoring NetBackup using Symantec OpsCenter About monitoring NetBackup using the Overview tab 407 To view all master servers 1 2 In the OpsCenter console. To view the master servers that are connected 1 2 In the OpsCenter console. click the number that is shown in the Not Connected column. See “Controlling the scope of Monitor views” on page 401. In the Master Server Summary section. select Monitor > Overview. Data for the last 24 hours is shown by default.

This information is shown in a pie chart as well as a table. In the Job Summary by Exit Status section. In the Drive Summary by Status section. You can drill down from this section to see details of all drives including up. select Monitor > Overview. ■ Viewing the Drive Summary by Status The Drive Summary by Status section shows an overall distribution of drives by drive status for the current View pane selection. click the red section of the pie chart to view details for failed jobs. All the data from the OpsCenter database is displayed in this section irrespective of the timeframe that you select. Each color of the pie chart represents how drives are distributed in your environment as per the drive status. Putting your pointer over the pie chart shows the number and percentage of drives with up or down status in your NetBackup environment. Note: For 7. or mixed drives.0. Or Click a colored section of the pie chart that corresponds to a particular exit status. To view drives by drive status 1 2 In the OpsCenter console. do either of the following: ■ Click the number of drives (link) for a particular drive status from the table. A pie chart with different colors represents the distribution of drives by drive status in the selected time frame.408 Monitoring NetBackup using Symantec OpsCenter About monitoring NetBackup using the Overview tab To view jobs by exit status 1 2 In the OpsCenter console. select Monitor > Overview.1 and later master servers. Note: The timeframe selection does not affect this section. do either of the following: ■ Click the number of jobs (link) corresponding to a particular exit status from the table. down. For example. You can also view the color code summary in this section to know the colors that represent different exit status. For example. pointing to the green color in the pie chart shows that 5 drives or 100% drives in your environment are up. click the number for Up drives . the Drive Summary by Status section does not show the drives that are disabled or unreachable. For example.

pointing to the green color in the pie chart shows that in the last 24 hours. 2 In the Alert Summary by Severity section. See “About Top 7 Policies by Failed Jobs” on page 439. For example. Or Click a colored section of the pie chart that corresponds to a particular alert severity. click the green section of the pie chart to view details for the drives that are up. For example. See “Controlling the scope of Monitor views” on page 401. To view alerts by severity 1 In the OpsCenter console. Moving your pointer over the pie chart gives the number and percentage of alerts with a particular severity in your NetBackup environment.Monitoring NetBackup using Symantec OpsCenter About monitoring NetBackup using the Overview tab 409 Or ■ Click a colored section of the pie chart that corresponds to a particular drive status. In the OpsCenter console. You can also view the color code summary in this section to know the colors that represent different severity. click the number that is shown for Critical alerts. Viewing the Alert Summary by Severity The Alert Summary by Severity section shows an overall distribution of alerts by severity for the current View pane and time frame selection. You can drill down from this section to see details for alert categories. do either of the following: ■ Click the number of alerts (link) for a particular alert severity from the table. Top 7 Policies by Failed Jobs For information about the Top 7 Policies by Failed Jobs section. This information is shown in a pie chart as well as a table. Each color of the pie chart represents how alerts are distributed in your environment as per the alert severity. see the following topic. A pie chart with different colors represents the alert distribution by severity in this section. ■ . Data for the last 24 hours is shown by default. You can also view data for the last 48 hours or 72 hours. For example. select Home. click the red section of the pie chart to view details for Critical alerts. For example. select Monitor > Overview. or 17% alerts in your environment are critical. 200 alerts.

Monitor > Jobs List View options This view is displayed when you select Monitor > Jobs. . Hierarchical View The Hierarchical View shows all parent-child jobs in a hierarchical fashion based on the current View pane and time frame selection.410 Monitoring NetBackup using Symantec OpsCenter About monitoring NetBackup jobs About monitoring NetBackup jobs The Monitor > Jobs view provides details of NetBackup jobs. The drop-down list is located at the top-right corner of the page. Note: You can only view jobs data for the last 30 days from the Hierarchical View. Data for the last 24 hours is shown by default. job state. Note: You can select these views from the drop-down list. This view displays detailed information about jobs based on the current View pane and time frame selection. See “About using the Summary View for monitoring jobs” on page 419. The List View is shown by default. Summary View The Summary View contains the different sections which show the NetBackup job distribution by exit status. You can also view data for the last 48 hours or 72 hours. See “Monitor > Jobs List View options” on page 410. Note: You can only view jobs data for the last 30 days from the List View. and job type based on the current View pane and time frame selection. This information is shown in pie charts and tables. You can use the following views to see NetBackup job information: List View This view is shown by default when you select Monitor > Jobs. This view displays detailed information for jobs for the current View Pane and time frame selection. See “About using the Hierarchical View for monitoring jobs” on page 424.

Job Size Files . This column lists the name of the client on which the job is run. Elapsed Time is the difference between the current time and Start time. The table that appears in this view shows the following columns by default: Table 7-1 Option Job ID Monitor > Jobs List View options Description This column shows the unique ID associated with the job (link). This column lists the current NetBackup job state like whether the job is Queued. and year when the job ended. The link provides status description and details on troubleshooting in case it failed. Waiting for Retry. The Elapsed Time is the difference between End Time and Start Time values. time. This column lists the time that is taken by the job. For a running job.Monitoring NetBackup using Symantec OpsCenter About monitoring NetBackup jobs 411 See “Controlling the scope of Monitor views” on page 401. and year when the job started. time. This column shows the name of the master server (link) associated with the job. Master Server Type State Status Policy Client Start Time Elapsed Time Note: The contents of the Elapsed Time column cannot be sorted in ascending or descending order (when you click the column name. This column lists the size of the job. Done etc. This column lists the job type like whether the job is a DB Backup or an Image Cleanup job. This column lists the number of files that have been backed up by this job. You can click the link to view details for the master server. This column lists the name of the policy that is associated with the job. Exit status of the job.) End Time This column lists the date. This column lists the date.

Not all columns are displayed in the table by default. ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Schedule Source Media Server Destination Media Server Destination Storage Unit Attempt Operation Data Reduction Savings Job Size PID Owner Parent KB per sec Session ID Data Movement Backup Type Schedule Type Policy Type Compression Current File Robot Vault Media to Eject Copy . More columns can be added to your view by clicking the Table Settings icon. The following columns are not displayed in the table by default:. The Table Settings icon is located on the top-right corner of the table.412 Monitoring NetBackup using Symantec OpsCenter About monitoring NetBackup jobs Table 7-1 Option % Complete Monitor > Jobs List View options (continued) Description This column lists the percentage of job that has been completed.

Monitoring NetBackup using Symantec OpsCenter About monitoring NetBackup jobs 413 ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Profile Active Start Reconciliation Status Reconciliation Reason Data Reduction Savings (%) Priority State Details See the online NetBackup Administration Console Help for a detailed description of these fields. The File List tab shows the files that have been backed up by the job and also their location. . The Details pane has the following tabs: Table 7-2 Tab General Monitor > Jobs Details pane tabs Description The General tab of the Details pane displays all information available for the job. The Attempts tab shows details of the attempts that have been made to complete a job. The Details pane is located at the bottom of the Monitor > Jobs view. All the details that are associated with a job can be viewed from the Details pane. See “About using tables” on page 83. Attempts File List About monitoring jobs using the List View The following topics provide more information about monitoring jobs using the List View. More information about how to customize tables and view specific columns is available. It also includes the contents of all the available columns that can be viewed from the table.

414 Monitoring NetBackup using Symantec OpsCenter About monitoring NetBackup jobs Viewing the details for a single NetBackup job All the details that are associated with a job can be viewed from the Details pane. The File List tab shows the files that have been backed up by the job and also their location. View the job details in the Details pane. select Monitor > Jobs. Click the server name (link) associated with the job in the Master Server column of the table. select Monitor > Jobs. These details can be viewed from either List View or Hierarchical View. It also includes the contents of all the available columns that can be viewed from the table. Attempts File List To view details for a single NetBackup job 1 2 In the OpsCenter console. The Details pane has the following tabs: General The General tab of the Details pane displays all information available for the job. You can also enable or disable data collection for the master server from this page. Click the ID (link) for a job from the Job ID column of the table. 3 4 Viewing the details for a master server associated with a job Use the following procedure to view the details for a master server that is associated with a job. The Details pane is located at the bottom of the Monitor > Jobs view. The drop-down list is located at the top-right corner of the view. The details of the master server are shown on a separate page. To view details for the master server that is associated with a job 1 2 In the OpsCenter console. The job details can be viewed from either List View or Hierarchical View. The Attempts tab shows details of the attempts that have been made to complete a job. The drop-down list is located at the top-right corner of the view. Select List View or Hierarchical View from the drop-down list. 3 . Select List View or Hierarchical View from the drop-down list.

Select this filter to view the jobs that are undefined. The drop-down list is located at the top-right corner of the view. Many job filters exist. Select this filter to view only Done jobs. These filters are available from the drop-down list which is present on top of the table. Select this filter to view the jobs that have been suspended. Select this filter to view the jobs that are incomplete. Click the policy name (link) for the job in the Policy column of the table. Select this filter to view the jobs that have been canceled. To view policy information for a job 1 2 3 4 In the OpsCenter console. Select this filter to view the jobs that are successful. Select this filter to view only active jobs Select this filter to view only queued jobs. Some of the built-in job filters are the following: All Jobs (default filter) Active Jobs Queued Jobs Done Jobs Suspended Jobs Select this filter to view details of all the jobs. Select List View or Hierarchical View from the drop-down list.Monitoring NetBackup using Symantec OpsCenter About monitoring NetBackup jobs 415 Viewing policy information for a job Use the following procedure to view the details for the policy that is associated with a job. Filtering on NetBackup job type and state You can filter by using any of the built-in job filters. See “Monitor > Policies page” on page 435. Waiting for Retry Jobs Incomplete Jobs Canceled Jobs Undefined Jobs Successful Jobs . select Monitor > Jobs. Select this filter to view the jobs that are waiting for retry. A separate page appears that shows policy information on four tabs.

Select this filter to view the jobs that failed. Select this filter to filter the index cleanup jobs. select Monitor > Jobs. you can also create your own custom filters. The drop-down list is located at the top-right corner of the view. See “Creating. resume. Failed Jobs Index for Search Index Cleanup for Search In addition to using the built-in filters. and removing custom view filters” on page 87. Select List View or Hierarchical View from the drop-down list. To control a job 1 2 3 4 In the OpsCenter console. You may select one or more jobs. Resume. Select this filter to filter indexing related jobs.416 Monitoring NetBackup using Symantec OpsCenter About monitoring NetBackup jobs Partially Successful Jobs Select this filter to view the jobs that are partially successful. These options are located on top of the table. Note that the drop-down list is located on top of the table. Note: These tasks are not visible if you log on with an Analyst or a Reporter role. The OpsCenter console may take some time to show the updated status once you perform the tasks. Before you perform these tasks. Controlling NetBackup jobs Use the following procedure to cancel. manually refresh your Web browser to obtain an updated view for all jobs. Select a filter from the drop-down list. Select List View or Hierarchical View from the drop-down list. editing. Select a job from the table. Suspend. suspend. applying. The drop-down list is located at the top-right corner of the view. To filter details by job state 1 2 3 Select Monitor > Jobs. or restart a job. Click Cancel. Restart. .

The drop-down list is located at the top-right corner of the view. You can select one or more jobs. from being billed. Note that you can select Un-Reconcile from the drop-down list to undo a reconciliation. Review the following points before changing the job priority: ■ ■ Priority can be changed only for the jobs that are in Active or Queued state. By using the Reconcile option and selecting a reason. .2 or higher versions.5.Monitoring NetBackup using Symantec OpsCenter About monitoring NetBackup jobs 417 Reconciling NetBackup jobs You can use the Reconcile option to prevent the jobs that failed due to reasons like user terminating a job. In the Reconcile Jobs dialog box. From the More drop-down list. Select List View or Hierarchical View from the drop-down list. select Monitor > Jobs. you can let your service provider know not to bill you for these jobs as these jobs failed due to specific issues at your end. select a reason for reconciling the job from the drop-down list. Changing the job priority You can change the priority that is associated with a job. manually refresh your Web browser to obtain an updated view for all jobs To reconcile NetBackup jobs 1 2 3 4 5 In the OpsCenter console. select Monitor > Jobs. To change the job priority 1 2 In the OpsCenter console. The drop-down list is located at the top-right corner of the view. Note: The Reconcile option is disabled in the unlicensed version (Symantec OpsCenter). Select List View or Hierarchical View from the drop-down list. select Reconcile. Select a job from the table. 6 Click OK. Before you perform this task. Priority can be changed only for jobs from the master servers that are running NetBackup 6. host cannot be reached etc.

. Change Job Priority dialog box options A description of the Change Job Priority dialog box options follows in the table. Select a value from the drop down list to decrement the job priority. set the job priority to a particular value. Note: Logs are not available for all job types. In the Change Priority dialog box. Note: The Export Job Logs option is not visible if you log on with an Analyst or a Reporter role. From the More drop-down list. Click OK. See “Changing the job priority” on page 417. Click Finish. select Change Job Priority. Table 7-3 Option Set the job priority to Increment the job priority by Decrement the job priority by Change Job Priority dialog box options Description Enter a value to set the job priority. Select a value from the drop down list to increment the job priority. Before exporting a log file. The OpsCenter console may take some time to show the updated status once you perform this task. You can view or save the exported log files in an Excel format. You can also increment or decrement the job priority. ensure that the NetBackup master server is Connected and the selected job logs are enabled.418 Monitoring NetBackup using Symantec OpsCenter About monitoring NetBackup jobs 3 4 5 6 7 Select an active job or a queued job from the table. Exporting NetBackup job logs You can export the log files that are associated with a job.

About using the Summary View for monitoring jobs This view is displayed when you select Monitor > Jobs and then select Summary View from the drop-down list. You can also view data for the last 48 hours or 72 hours. The Group Component Summary table displays information about immediate NetBackup constituents of the view or node (group) that you selected in the View pane. See “About the Group Component Summary table” on page 422. You can use these links to drill down and access detailed information about NetBackup jobs. The following sections describe this view in detail: ■ ■ ■ ■ See “Viewing the Job Summary by Exit Status” on page 420. 4 5 From the More drop-down list. The content that is shown in the Summary View is based on the current View Pane and time frame selection. a Group Component Summary table is displayed when you access the Summary View for Monitor > Jobs. See “Controlling the scope of Monitor views” on page 401. You can uncheck the Allow Multiple Selection in View Pane option from Settings > User Preferences > General. Select List View or Hierarchical View from the drop-down list. . The Summary View contains the different sections which display specific information about NetBackup jobs. You can export only one job log at a time. See “Viewing the Job Summary by Type” on page 421. The drop-down list is located at the top-right corner of the view.Monitoring NetBackup using Symantec OpsCenter About monitoring NetBackup jobs 419 To export the NetBackup log files for a job 1 2 3 In the OpsCenter console. select Export Job Logs. Note: If you uncheck the Allow Multiple Selection In View Pane option. See “Viewing the Job Summary by State” on page 420. The table and the pie charts include links to filtered detail views. select Monitor > Jobs. Data for the last 24 hours is shown by default. Click Open or Save from the dialog box to view or save the log file in an Excel format. Select a job from the table. The drop-down list is located at the top-right corner of the page. These sections show NetBackup job information in a table as well as a pie chart.

. Data for the last 24 hours is shown by default. A pie chart with different colors represents the job distribution by exit status in this section. For example. This information is shown in a pie chart as well as a table. 72 jobs. See “Controlling the scope of Monitor views” on page 401. You can drill down from this section to see details for successful. See “Controlling the scope of Monitor views” on page 401. Note that the drop-down list is located on the top-right corner of the page. Data for the last 24 hours is shown by default. Moving your pointer over the pie chart gives the number and percentage of jobs with a particular exit status in your NetBackup environment. You can also view the color code summary in this section to know the colors that represent different exit status. This information is shown in a pie chart as well as a table. Or Click a colored section of the pie chart that corresponds to a particular exit status. Select Summary View from the drop-down list. You can also view data for the last 48 hours or 72 hours. click the red section of the pie chart to view details for failed jobs. To view jobs by exit status 1 2 3 In the OpsCenter console. You can also view data for the last 48 hours or 72 hours. partially successful. For example. do either of the following: ■ Click the number of jobs (link) corresponding to a particular exit status from the table.420 Monitoring NetBackup using Symantec OpsCenter About monitoring NetBackup jobs Viewing the Job Summary by Exit Status The Job Summary by Exit Status section shows an overall distribution of jobs by exit status. In the Job Summary by Exit Status section. or 42% jobs in your environment failed. The data that is shown in this view is based on the current View pane and time frame selection. select Monitor > Jobs. pointing your cursor to the red color in the pie chart shows that in the last 24 hours. Each color of the pie chart represents how jobs are distributed in your environment as per the exit status. and failed jobs. ■ Viewing the Job Summary by State The Job Summary by State section shows an overall distribution of jobs by the NetBackup job state based on the current View pane and time frame selection.

Note that the drop-down list is located on the top-right corner of the page. or 42% jobs in your environment are in a queued state. You can also view data for the last 48 hours or 72 hours. queued or active jobs. and so on.Monitoring NetBackup using Symantec OpsCenter About monitoring NetBackup jobs 421 A pie chart with different colors represents the job distribution by job state. You can drill down from this section to see details for different job types like DBBackup. This information is shown in a pie chart as well as a table. click the number that is shown for Done jobs. You can drill down from this section to see details for the jobs that failed. For example. Image Cleanup etc. Moving your cursor over the pie chart gives the number and percentage of jobs in a particular job state in your NetBackup environment. Moving your cursor over the pie chart gives the number and percentage of jobs of a particular job type in your NetBackup environment. For example. You can also view the color code summary in this section to know the colors that represent different job states. the jobs that are waiting for retry. . pointing to the yellow color in the pie chart shows that in the last 24 hours. To view jobs by job state 1 2 3 In the OpsCenter console. For example. For example. You can also view the color code summary in this section to know the colors that represent different job types. Each color of the pie chart represents how jobs are distributed in your environment as per the job type. In the Job Summary by State section. click the yellow section of the pie chart to view details for Queued jobs. Data for the last 24 hours is shown by default. 22 jobs. do either of the following: ■ Click the number of jobs (link) in a particular job state from the table. or 42% jobs in your environment are DBBackup jobs. See “Controlling the scope of Monitor views” on page 401. 22 jobs. pointing to the red color in the pie chart shows that in the last 24 hours. A pie chart with different colors represents the job distribution by job type in this section. Or Click a colored section of the pie chart that corresponds to a particular job state. ■ Viewing the Job Summary by Type The Job Summary by Type section shows an overall distribution of jobs by the job type based on the current View pane and time frame selection. Each color of the pie chart represents how jobs are distributed in your environment as per the job state. Select Summary View from the drop-down list. select Monitor > Jobs.

For example. PD. a job summary of the nodes (and not the view objects for each node) is displayed.422 Monitoring NetBackup using Symantec OpsCenter About monitoring NetBackup jobs To view jobs by job type 1 2 3 In the OpsCenter console. Hence any other servers (like BE. you can view the Group Component Summary table in the Summary View for Monitor > Jobs. Select Summary View from the drop-down list. More details about nodes and view objects is available. Note: OpsCenter or OpsCenter Analytics monitors only NetBackup. The Group Component Summary table is displayed at the bottom of the Summary View for Monitor > Jobs. Note that the drop-down list is located on the top-right corner of the page. Or Click a colored section of the pie chart that corresponds to a particular job type. do either of the following: ■ Click the number of jobs (link) corresponding to a particular job type from the table. The Group Component Summary table displays job summary information about the immediate NetBackup constituents of the selected view or node (group) in the View pane. You do not see any data in the Group Component Summary table if you select a specific view object (master server) in the View pane. click the red section of the pie chart to view details for DBBackup jobs. You must select a group (view or node) from the View pane to see data in the Group Component Summary table. click the number that is shown for DBBackup jobs. For example. See “About nodes and objects” on page 386. In the Job Summary by Type section. For example if you select the ALL MASTER SERVERS view. . or TSM servers) do not appear in the Group Component Summary table. select Monitor > Jobs. If you select a view that contains multiple nodes. The Group Component Summary table was also displayed in NOM earlier. the Group Component Summary table displays job summary for each master server. ■ About the Group Component Summary table When you uncheck the Allow Multiple Selection In View Pane option under Settings > User Preferences > General view in the OpsCenter console.

Number of failed jobs (link) for the specific node or view object in the selected time frame. Click the link to view detailed information about all the jobs. Data that is backed up for the specific node or view object in the selected time frame. Number of partially successful jobs (link) for the specific node or view object in the selected time frame. Data for the last 24 hours is shown by default.Monitoring NetBackup using Symantec OpsCenter About monitoring NetBackup jobs 423 The information that is displayed in the Group Component Summary table is based on the current View pane and time frame selection. Successful Partially Successful Failed Data Backup up Active Queued . Total number of jobs (link) for the specific node or view object in the selected time frame. Click the link to view detailed information about successful jobs. Click the link to view detailed information about the active jobs. Click the link to view detailed information about the failed jobs. See “Controlling the scope of Monitor views” on page 401. You can also view data for the last 48 hours or 72 hours. Number of successful jobs (link) for the specific node or view object in the selected time frame. Number of queued jobs (link) for the specific node or view object in the selected time frame. Number of active jobs (link) for the specific node or view object in the selected time frame. Click the link to view detailed information about the queued jobs. Table 7-4 Column Name Total Columns and descriptions in the Group Component Summary table Description Name of the node or view object. Click the link to view detailed information about the partially successful jobs. Table 7-4 explains the information that is displayed in the Group Component Summary table.

In the Hierarchical View. The Hierarchical View shows details of all jobs and also highlights the parent-child relationship between jobs wherever applicable. You can click the + sign to see all child jobs. See “Controlling the scope of Monitor views” on page 401. all related jobs can be grouped and you can see all parent-child jobs in a hierarchical fashion. A child job is indented to the right-hand side in the Job ID column. Click the link to view detailed information about the suspended jobs. Click the link to view detailed information about the undefined jobs. . Note: You can only view jobs data for the last 30 days from the Hierarchical View. You can also view data for the last 48 hours or 72 hours. Click the link to view detailed information about the jobs that are waiting for retry. Data for the last 24 hours is shown by default. The data that is shown in this view is based on the current View pane and time frame selection. Column Suspended Incomplete Undefined Waiting for Retry About using the Hierarchical View for monitoring jobs This view is displayed when you select Monitor > Jobs and then select Hierarchical View from the drop-down list. All parent jobs have a +sign before the job ID. Number of the jobs that are waiting for retry (link) for the specific node or view object in the selected time frame. Number of incomplete jobs (link) for the specific node or view object in the selected time frame. Number of undefined jobs (link) for the specific node or view object in the selected time frame. If some of the child jobs are parent jobs. Click the link to view detailed information about the incomplete jobs. parent job in this view with the ability to expand and drill into the details of child jobs if there are failures. You can view details of only the top level.424 Monitoring NetBackup using Symantec OpsCenter About monitoring NetBackup jobs Table 7-4 Columns and descriptions in the Group Component Summary table (continued) Description Number of suspended jobs (link) for the specific node or view object in the selected time frame.

See “Exporting NetBackup job logs” on page 418. The sorting feature in the Hierarchical View applies to both parent jobs and child jobs. The filters are not applied to child jobs. See “Controlling NetBackup jobs” on page 416. Only parent jobs or unrelated jobs (jobs that are not related to any other job) with partially successful status are considered. All tasks that apply to the parent job are also applicable to its child jobs. However. if a job does not have a relationship with any other job (it is neither a parent nor a child job). View the details for a master server that is associated with a job View policy information for a job Filter on NetBackup job state Control NetBackup jobs Reconcile NetBackup jobs Change job priority Export job logs . child jobs are not considered at all. if you apply the Partially Successful Jobs filter. the current selected sort order is applied to child jobs. See “Changing the job priority” on page 417. See “Reconciling NetBackup jobs” on page 417. See “Viewing policy information for a job” on page 415. For example. When you expand a parent job. See “Filtering on NetBackup job type and state” on page 415. See “Viewing the details for a master server associated with a job” on page 414. Note the following things about the related jobs that are shown in the Hierarchical View: ■ The filters are applied only to parent jobs. ■ ■ The following tasks can be performed from the Heirarchical View: Table 7-5 Task View the details for a single master server Tasks from the Heirarchical View Reference topic See “Viewing the details for a single NetBackup job” on page 414.Monitoring NetBackup using Symantec OpsCenter About monitoring NetBackup jobs 425 then + sign also appears before the job ID of the child job. it is represented only by its job ID in the Job ID column. Neither is there a + sign before the job ID of such a job nor this job is indented to the right-hand side.

Viewing the details for a master server associated with a job Use the following procedure to view the details for a master server that is associated with a job. The details of the master server are shown on a separate page. Select Hierarchical View from the drop-down list. Select Hierarchical View from the drop-down list. Click the ID (link) for a job from the Job ID column of the table. It also includes the contents of all the available columns that can be viewed from the table. select Monitor > Jobs. The Attempts tab shows details of the attempts that have been made to complete a job. The drop-down list is located at the top-right corner of the view. To view the details for the master server that is associated with a job 1 2 3 In the OpsCenter console. . Attempts File List To view details for a single NetBackup job 1 2 3 4 In the OpsCenter console. The File List tab shows the files that have been backed up by the job and also their location. The Details pane is located at the bottom of the Monitor > Jobs view. You can also enable or disable data collection for the master server from this page. The Details pane has the following tabs: General The General tab of the Details pane displays all information available for the job. select Monitor > Jobs.426 Monitoring NetBackup using Symantec OpsCenter About monitoring NetBackup jobs Viewing the details for a single NetBackup job All the details that are associated with a job can be viewed from the Details pane. Click the server name (link) associated with the job in the Master Server column of the table. View the job details in the Details pane. The drop-down list is located at the top-right corner of the view.

A separate page appears that shows policy information on four tabs. Select Hierarchical View from the drop-down list. Select this filter to view the jobs that are waiting for retry. Click the policy name (link) for the job in the Policy column of the table. Filtering on NetBackup job state You can filter by using any of the following built-in job filters. The drop-down list is located at the top-right corner of the view. Select this filter to view the jobs that have been canceled. These filters are available from the drop-down list which is present on top of the table.Monitoring NetBackup using Symantec OpsCenter About monitoring NetBackup jobs 427 Viewing policy information for a job Use the following procedure to view the details for the policy that is associated with a job. Waiting for Retry Jobs Incomplete Jobs Undefined Jobs Canceled Jobs . Note: You can also view policy information from the List View. Select this filter to view the jobs that are incomplete. Select this filter to view the jobs that are undefined. Select this filter to view only Done jobs. select Monitor > Jobs. The built-in job filters are the following: All Jobs (default filter) Active Jobs Queued Jobs Done Jobs Suspended Jobs Select this filter to view details of all the jobs. See “Monitor > Policies page” on page 435. To view policy information for a job 1 2 3 4 In the OpsCenter console. Select this filter to view the jobs that have been suspended. Select this filter to view only active jobs Select this filter to view only queued jobs.

Example: Vault Manager. Select Hierarchical View from the drop-down list. This column lists the name of the master server or media server where the service or daemon is present. This view contains detailed information for services. The data that is shown in this view is based on the current View pane selection. The table that appears in this view has the following columns: Name Host Name This column lists the name of the service. The drop-down list is located at the top-right corner of the view. applying. To filter details by job state 1 2 3 In the OpsCenter console. or Service Layer. Device Manager. Service Type . Select a filter from the drop-down list. editing. See “Creating. Select this filter to view the jobs that failed. This column lists the NetBackup service type. select Monitor > Jobs.428 Monitoring NetBackup using Symantec OpsCenter Monitor > Services view Successful Jobs Select this filter to view the jobs that are successful. Select this filter to view the jobs that are partially successful. Note that the drop-down list is located on top of the table. you can also create your own custom filters. Monitor > Services view This view is displayed when you select Monitor > Services. and removing custom view filters” on page 87. Partially Successful Jobs Failed Jobs In addition to using the built-in filters. See “Controlling the scope of Monitor views” on page 401.

Start Pending. Other can be Not Installed. Select this filter to view details of running services. Control NetBackup services Filtering on NetBackup service type You can filter by using any of the four built-in filters.Monitoring NetBackup using Symantec OpsCenter Monitor > Services view 429 Status The operational status of the service or daemon. applying. or Other. You can perform the following tasks from this view: Use filters to view specific services See “Filtering on NetBackup service type” on page 429. Stop Pending. you can also create your own custom filters. Unknown (not recognized by OpsCenter). Select this filter to view details of all other services like Not Licensed. The built-in filters are the following: All Services (default filter) Select this filter to view details of all the services. editing. Note: The status for some services may show as Stopped on the Monitor > Services page in the OpsCenter console. or Unknown. This status can be Stopped. See “Creating. or Not Applicable (some services may not be applicable to earlier versions). Select this filter to view details of the services that have been stopped. and removing custom view filters” on page 87. . These filters are available from the drop-down list which is present on top of the table. Failed. See “Controlling NetBackup services” on page 430. Running. Not Licensed. Restart Pending. The license for these services is either not installed or configured for a specific media or master server. Stopped Services Running Services Other Services In addition to using the built-in filters.

If you start or stop a service that has a dependency on another service. Note that these tasks are located on top of the table. Stop. select Monitor > Services. select Monitor > Services. Running. Select a filter from the drop-down list. About monitoring NetBackup policies The Monitor > Policies view provides details of NetBackup policies. To filter on service type 1 2 In the OpsCenter console. Click Start. You can use the following views to see NetBackup policy information: . Select a service from the table. You can select one or more services. Note: NetBackup service layer (nbsl) cannot be controlled from OpsCenter. one OpsCenter user stops a service while another user tries to start the same service. Stop. The OpsCenter console may take some time to show the updated status once you perform these tasks. or Restart. To control a service 1 2 3 4 Refresh your Web browser to obtain an updated state for all services.430 Monitoring NetBackup using Symantec OpsCenter Monitor > Services view Use the following procedure to view details by type of service. In the OpsCenter console. For instance. Controlling NetBackup services Under certain circumstances there may be issues among multiple OpsCenter users. NetBackup ensures that any dependent services are also started or stopped. Note: These tasks are not visible if you log on with an Analyst or a Reporter role. or Restart Pending appears in the Status column until the selected action completes. Note that the drop-down list is located on top of the table.

See “Viewing details for a single NetBackup policy” on page 436. See “Viewing details for a single NetBackup policy” on page 436. See “Viewing details for a single NetBackup policy” on page 436. See “Viewing details for a single NetBackup policy” on page 436. These sections show specific policy information in a table as well as a pie chart. Monitor > Policies List View This view is displayed when you select Monitor > Policies. See “Viewing details for a single NetBackup policy” on page 436. See “About using the List View to monitor NetBackup policies” on page 434. The data that is shown in this view is based on the current View pane selection. See “Monitor > Policies Summary View” on page 438. This view contains detailed information about policies. Note: You can select these views from the drop-down list. Summary View The Summary View contains the different sections that display specific information about NetBackup policies based on the current View pane and time frame selection. See “Viewing details for a single NetBackup policy” on page 436. This view shows detailed information about NetBackup policies based on the current View pane selection.Monitoring NetBackup using Symantec OpsCenter Monitor > Services view 431 List View The List View is shown by default when you select Monitor > Policies. See “Controlling the scope of Monitor views” on page 401. See “Filtering on NetBackup policy type” on page 435. The table that appears in this view has the following columns: . See “Monitor > Policies List View” on page 431. The drop-down list is located at the top-right corner of the page.

Priority that you have defined for the policy. Volume pool that is associated with the policy. Name of the master server that is associated with the policy. the Policy type determines the type of clients that can be backed up by this policy. This column determines whether the policy is Active or not. Storage that is associated with the policy. Zero means the lowest priority. but can be added to your view by clicking the Table Settings icon: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Data Classification Effective Date Compression Encryption Block Level Increments Allow Multiple Data Streams Offhost Follow NFS Cross Mount Points . Usually. The following columns do not appear. The total number of jobs that are associated with the policy. Master Server Type Storage Volume Pool CheckPoint Interval Jobs/Policy Priority Active Not all of the available columns appear initially in this view. Click the link to view details of volume pool. NBU-Catalog. Oracle.432 Monitoring NetBackup using Symantec OpsCenter Monitor > Services view Name Name of the policy. Click the link to view details about the policy. Interval (in minutes) between two checkpoints in NetBackup. This column is the policy type. Example: DB2. Vault etc. Sybase. Click the link to view details for storage. Click the link to view details of master server.

The Details pane has the following tabs: . More information about how to customize tables and view specific columns is available. See the online NetBackup Administration Console Help for a detailed description of these fields. All the details that are associated with a policy can be viewed from the Details pane.Index Server Name specifies the machine which will index the backups by this policy for NetBackup Search. See “About using tables” on page 83. The Details pane is located at the bottom of the Monitor > Jobs view.Monitoring NetBackup using Symantec OpsCenter Monitor > Services view 433 ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Individual File Restore From Raw True Image Recovery Collect Disaster Recovery Information Collect Bare Metal Restore Information Snapshot Backups Alternate Client Data Mover Virtual Machine Proxy Snapshot Method Keyword Phrase Policy Domain Name Application Discovery Indexing Index Server Name Use Accelerator Note: The column Indexing indicates if indexing is enabled for the policy for NetBackup Search.

TheClients tab shows the clients that have been backed up by the policy and also their location. The Selections tab shows the files that have eben backed up by the policy. . See “Viewing the history for a single job policy ” on page 438. See “Viewing the details for a volume pool associated with a policy” on page 437.434 Monitoring NetBackup using Symantec OpsCenter Monitor > Services view Table 7-6 Tab General Monitor > Policies Details pane tabs Description The General tab of the Details pane displays all information available for the policy. It also shows if indexing is enabled for a client. It also includes the contents of all the available columns that can be viewed from the table. See “Viewing the details for a master server associated with a policy” on page 436. See “Viewing details for a single NetBackup policy” on page 436. See “Activating or deactivating a job policy” on page 437. It also shows if indexing is enabled for a schedule. View the details for a single NetBackup policy View the details for a master server associated with a policy View the details for a volume pool that is associated with a policy Manage a job policy Start a manual backup View the history for a job policy See “Monitor > Policies Summary View” on page 438. The Schedules tab shows details of the schedules that are associated with the policy. See “Starting a manual backup” on page 437. Schedules Clients Selections About using the List View to monitor NetBackup policies You can perform the following tasks from this view: Use filters to view specific policies See “Filtering on NetBackup policy type” on page 435.

The built-in filters are the following: All Policies (default filter) Select this filter to view details of all NetBackup policies. Select this filter to view details of all policies that apply to Windows clients. To filters details by type of policy 1 2 In the OpsCenter console. editing. you can also create your own custom filters. OS2 policies etc. Note that the drop-down list is located on top of the table. Select this filter to view details of the policies that are active. SAP policies. Monitor > Policies page There are four tabs in the Details pane on the Monitor > Policies page. and removing custom view filters” on page 87. applying.Monitoring NetBackup using Symantec OpsCenter Monitor > Services view 435 Filtering on NetBackup policy type You can filter by using any of the seven built-in filters. Select this filter to view details of the policies that are inactive. Select this filter to view details of catalog policies. Select a filter from the drop-down list. See “Creating. select Monitor > Policies. Select this filter to view details of Standard policies. These filters are available from the drop-down list which is present on top of the table. Select this filter to view details of all other policies like DB2 policies. Use the following procedure to view details by type of policy. . Active Policies Inactive Policies Windows Policies Catalog Policies Standard Policies Other Policies In addition to using the built-in filters.

Click the server name (link) associated with the policy from the Master Server column of the table. View the policy details in the Details pane. It also includes contents of all the columns that can be viewed from the table. You can also enable or disable data collection for the master server from this page. The Selections tab shows the files that have been backed up by the policy and also their location. Click the name (link) for a policy from the Name column of the table. . To view details for a single NetBackup policy 1 2 3 In the OpsCenter console. Schedules The Schedules tab displays details of the schedules that are associated with the policy. Viewing the details for a master server associated with a policy Use the following procedure to view the details for a master server that is associated with a policy. The details of the master server are shown on a separate page. select Monitor > Policies. See “Monitor > Policies page” on page 435. The Details pane has four tabs. To view the details for a master server that is associated with a policy 1 2 In the OpsCenter console.436 Monitoring NetBackup using Symantec OpsCenter Monitor > Services view Table 7-7 Tab General Monitor > Policies page tabs Description The General tab of the Details pane displays all information available for the policy. select Monitor > Policies. You can also click the master server name (link) to get details of the master server. Clients Selections Viewing details for a single NetBackup policy All the details that are associated with a policy can be viewed from the Details pane. The Details pane is located at the bottom of the Monitor > Jobs view. The Clients tab shows details of clients to be backed up by the policy.

To view the details for a volume pool that is associated with a policy 1 2 In the OpsCenter console. Before you perform these tasks. The OpsCenter console may take some time to show the updated status once you perform this task. manually refresh your Web browser to obtain an updated view of all policies. Starting a manual backup Use the following procedure to start a manual backup. select Monitor > Policies.Monitoring NetBackup using Symantec OpsCenter Monitor > Services view 437 Viewing the details for a volume pool associated with a policy Use the following procedure to view the details for a volume pool that is associated with a policy. The OpsCenter console may take some time to show the updated status once you perform these tasks. Note that these options are located on top of the table. manually refresh your Web browser to obtain an updated view of all policies. Activating or deactivating a job policy Use the following procedure to activate or deactivate a policy. . Before you perform this task. Click Activate or Deactivate. To activate or deactivate a policy 1 2 3 In the OpsCenter console. Click the volume pool name (link) associated with the policy from the Volume Pool column in the table. Select a job policy from the table. Note: This task is not visible if you log on with an Analyst or a Reporter role. select Monitor > Policies. The details of the volume pool are shown on a separate page. Note: These tasks are not visible if you log on with an Analyst or a Reporter role.

Monitor > Policies Summary View This view is displayed when you select Monitor > Policies and then select Summary View from the drop-down list. Click View History.438 Monitoring NetBackup using Symantec OpsCenter Monitor > Services view To start a manual backup 1 2 3 4 In the OpsCenter console. You can select a schedule and a client from the drop-down lists for the backup. click the View Differences tab. select Monitor > Policies. If you do not select a schedule. NetBackup backs up all scheduled clients. Viewing the history for a single job policy Use the following procedure to view the history for a policy. You can also compare values for indexing and Index Server attributes for different policy versions. Data for the last 24 hours is shown by default. Note that this option is located on top of the table. The content that is shown in the Summary View is based on the current View pane and time frame selection. or only select a schedule or a client. Note that this option is located on top of the table. select Monitor > Policies. The changes are highlighted in red color. The Compare Policies tab displays the policy versions. This view contains detailed information about policies. You must select two versions from the Policy Versions column to compare versions. . Note: This task is not visible if you log on with an Analyst or a Reporter role. To view the history for a policy 1 2 3 4 In the OpsCenter console. You can select only one policy and it must be an active policy. You can also view data for the last 48 hours or 72 hours. To view only the differences between the versions. NetBackup uses the schedule with the highest retention level. Select a policy from the table. If you do not select a client. The drop-down list is located at the top-right corner of the page. Click Manual Backup. Select a job policy from the table.

Note that the failed jobs (shown in Total Number of Jobs column) are arranged in descending order in the table. See “About Top 7 Policies by No. About Top 5 Policies by Data Backed up The Top 5 Policies by Data Backed up section lists the top five policies which have the maximum data backed up for the current View pane and time frame selection. See “About Top 7 Policies by Failed Jobs” on page 439. Note that the data that is backed up (shown in Volume (Bytes) column) is arranged in descending order in the table. . You can also view data for the last 48 hours or 72 hours. The following sections describe this view in detail: ■ ■ ■ See “About Top 5 Policies by Data Backed up” on page 439. The table that is shown in the section lists the top five policies which have maximum data backed up. Data for the last 24 hours is shown by default. See “Controlling the scope of Monitor views” on page 401. From this section. of Jobs” on page 440. About Top 7 Policies by Failed Jobs The Top 7 Policies by Failed Jobs section lists seven policies which have the maximum failed jobs for the current View pane and time frame selection. See “About Top 7 Policies by No. of Jobs” on page 440. See “Controlling the scope of Monitor views” on page 401. These sections show specific policy information in a table as well as a pie chart. The table also shows the data that is backed up for each policy. Data for the last 24 hours is shown by default. You can use these links to drill down and access detailed information about NetBackup policies. See “About Top 7 Policies by Failed Jobs” on page 439.Monitoring NetBackup using Symantec OpsCenter Monitor > Services view 439 See “Controlling the scope of Monitor views” on page 401. you can quickly view the policies which have the maximum data backed up. You can also view data for the last 48 hours or 72 hours. From this section. The Summary View contains the different sections which display specific information about NetBackup policies. The table also shows the total number of failed jobs for each policy. The table and the pie charts include links to filtered detail views. The table that is shown in the section lists the top seven policies which have maximum failed jobs associated with them.

See “Controlling the scope of Monitor views” on page 401. See “About Top 5 Policies by Data Backed up” on page 439. About monitoring NetBackup media The Monitor > Media view provides details of NetBackup media. You can use the following views to see details about NetBackup media: List View The List View is shown by default when you select Monitor > Media. You can also view data for the last 48 hours or 72 hours.440 Monitoring NetBackup using Symantec OpsCenter Monitor > Services view you can quickly view the policies which have the maximum failed jobs associated with them. Note that the total number of jobs for each policy (shown in Total Number of Jobs column) are arranged in descending order in the table. See “About Top 5 Policies by Data Backed up” on page 439. This data is based on the current View pane and time frame selection. of Jobs” on page 440. Data for the last 24 hours is shown by default. of Jobs section lists seven policies which have the maximum number of jobs. About Top 7 Policies by No. See “About Top 7 Policies by Failed Jobs” on page 439. of Jobs The Top 7 Policies by No. From this section. The table that is shown in the section lists the policies which have maximum number of jobs. . See “Monitor > Media List View options” on page 441. you can quickly view the policies which have the maximum number of jobs associated with them. See “About Top 7 Policies by No. The table also shows the total number of jobs for each policy. Note: This section can also be viewed from Monitor > Overview. This view shows detailed information about NetBackup media for the current View pane selection.

The drop-down list is located at the top-right corner of the page. See “Controlling the scope of Monitor views” on page 401. This data is based on the current View pane selection. The table that appears in this view has the following columns: Table 7-8 Media List View options Column Head/Option Description Media ID Unique ID associated with a media. Note: You can select these views from the drop-down list. It also shows other media details that are associated with the master server like Frozen Media Count. Click the link to view details about the media. See “Hierarchical View by Volume Pool for monitoring media” on page 447. Master Server . Hierarchical View by Volume Pool The Hierarchical View by Volume Pool shows details of all media and also groups media by volume pool for the current View pane selection. Hierarchical View by Volume Group The Hierarchical View by Volume Group shows details of all media and also groups media by volume group for the current View pane selection. Suspended Media Count etc. See “Hierarchical View by Volume Group for monitoring media” on page 449.Monitoring NetBackup using Symantec OpsCenter Monitor > Services view 441 Summary View The Summary View displays the volume pool available for each master server for the current View pane selection. Monitor > Media List View options This view is displayed when you select Monitor > Media. See “Monitor > Media Summary View options” on page 446. Name of the master server that is associated with the media. Click the link to view details of master server. This view contains detailed information for media.

The number of times that the volume has been mounted. but can be added to your view by clicking the Table Settings icon: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Last Write Host Side Partner First Mount Last Mount Cleanings Remaining Created Description . the value would be Yes. the status of the media is On Hold. Robot Number Slot Mounts Time Assigned Max. The most recent time NetBackup used the volume for backups. Current media status like Frozen. Date when the images on the volume expire. Specifies the robot type of the robot to inventory. The date when the volume was assigned for use. 8mm.442 Monitoring NetBackup using Symantec OpsCenter Monitor > Services view Table 7-8 Media List View options (continued) Column Head/Option Description Barcode Media Type Robot Type Barcode on the media Type of media like HCART. Slot in the robot that contains the volume. If an image on a media is placed on hold. This relates to NetBackup Search. Mounts Data Expiration Last Written Media Status Used Capacity On Hold Not all of the available columns appear initially in this view. Unique. Example: tl4. In other cases the value would be -. The following columns do not appear. If the media is on hold. Zero (0) indicates unlimited mounts. 4mm etc. Capacity that has been used. Active etc. tl8 etc. logical identification number for the robot to inventory. The maximum number of mounts (or cleanings) that are allowed for the volume.

About using the List View to monitor NetBackup media You can perform the following tasks from this view: .Monitoring NetBackup using Symantec OpsCenter About using the List View to monitor NetBackup media 443 ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Vault Name Date Vaulted Return Date Vault Slot Session ID Vault Container ID Last Read Images Valid Images Number of Restores Conflicts Origin Host Media Owner Cleaning Media Imported Multiplexed Multiretention Last Restore Volume Expiration Retention Level See the online NetBackup Administration Console Help for a detailed description of these fields. More information about how to customize tables and view specific columns is available. See “About using tables” on page 83.

Click the server name (link) associated with the media in the Master Server column of the table.444 Monitoring NetBackup using Symantec OpsCenter Viewing the details for NetBackup media View the details for a particular NetBackup See “Viewing the details for NetBackup media media” on page 444. For example. you can also click the master server link to see details about the master server that is associated with the media. To view the details for a master server associated with a media 1 2 In the OpsCenter console. From the Details pane. View the details for a master server that is associated with the media Use filters to view specific media See “Viewing the details for a master server associated with the media” on page 444. These filters are available from the drop-down list which is present on top of the table. . select Monitor > Media. Control media Viewing the details for NetBackup media All the details that are associated with a media can be viewed from the Details pane. you can create and apply a filter that displays full media only. To view the details for a particular media 1 2 In the OpsCenter console. See “Controlling media” on page 445. Viewing the details for a master server associated with the media Use the following procedure to view the details for a master server that is associated with a media. The details of the master server are shown on a separate page. See “Filtering on NetBackup media type” on page 444. select Monitor > Media. View the media properties from the Details pane. Filtering on NetBackup media type You can sort and filter this view to focus on the specific type of media that you want to see. You can filter by using any of the built-in filters. The Details pane is located at the bottom of the view. Click a drilldown link from the Media ID column.

Select this filter to view details of the media that have been assigned to an individual for further action. you can create your own custom filters. To filter details by type of media 1 2 In the OpsCenter console. Note that to perform these tasks the media must be assigned to NetBackup. Select this filter to view details of the media that are full. Select this filter to view details of the media that are unassigned. suspend. Controlling media Use the following procedure to freeze. Use the following procedure to view details by type of media. Note that the drop-down list is located on top of the table. Unassigned Media Frozen Media Full Media Suspended Media Other Media Active Media Cleaning Media In addition to the built-in filters. unfreeze. and removing custom view filters” on page 87. select Monitor > Media. Select this filter to view details of the media that are frozen. . See “Creating. Select a filter from the drop-down list.Monitoring NetBackup using Symantec OpsCenter Controlling media 445 The built-in filters are the following: All Media (default filter) Assigned Media Select this filter to view details of all media. editing. Select this filter to view details of the media that are suspended. applying. Select this filter to view details of cleaning media. or unsuspend specific media. Select this filter to view details of all other media like Multi Retention Level media. BE media etc. Select this filter to view details of media with Active status. The media is assigned if there is a date in the Time Assigned column.

Total number of the suspended media that is associated with the master server. Option/Column Head Master Server Volume Pool name Frozen Media Count Suspended Media Count Full Media Count Active Media Count . Monitor > Media Summary View options This view is displayed when you select Monitor > Media and then select Summary View from the drop-down list. Note that these options are present on top of the table. The table that appears in this view displays the volume pool available for each master server. Unfreeze. The OpsCenter console may take some time to show the updated status once you perform these tasks. select Monitor > Media. Total number of active media that are associated with the master server. Total number of the full media that are associated with the master server. The following columns are shown in the table: Table 7-9 Media Summary View options Description Name of the master server Name of the volume pool that is associated with the master server Total number of the frozen media that is associated with the master server. Click Freeze. Suspended Media Count etc. The drop-down list is located at the top-right corner of the page. See “Controlling the scope of Monitor views” on page 401. Suspend. Select a media ID from the table (use the check box). It also shows other media details that are associated with the master server like Frozen Media Count. To perform media tasks 1 2 3 In the OpsCenter console.446 Monitoring NetBackup using Symantec OpsCenter Monitor > Media Summary View options Note: These tasks are not visible if you log on with an Analyst or a Reporter role. The data that is shown in this view is based on the current View pane selection. or Unsuspend.

BE media etc. The data that is shown in this view is based on the current View pane selection. Note that the media are indented to the right-hand side in the Media ID column. Each volume pool that is shown in the Media ID column has a +sign before it. The sorting feature in this view applies only to media in the volume pool. You can expand a volume pool to see all media that are a part of this volume pool. Control media See “Controlling media” on page 448. The following tasks can be performed from this view: View the details for volume pool See “Viewing the details for volume pool” on page 448. The Hierarchical View by Volume Pool shows details of all media and also groups media by volume pool. the current selected sort order is applied to media in the pool. When you expand a volume pool. The drop-down list is located at the top-right corner of the page. that are associated with the master server .Monitoring NetBackup using Symantec OpsCenter Hierarchical View by Volume Pool for monitoring media 447 Table 7-9 Media Summary View options (continued) Description Total number of all other media like Multi Retention Level media. View details for the media that are a part of See “Viewing the details for media” a specific volume pool on page 448. . Total number of the media that are available for the master server. Option/Column Head Other Media Count Available Media Count On Hold Media Count Hierarchical View by Volume Pool for monitoring media This view is displayed when you select Monitor > Media and then select Heirarchical View by Volume Pool from the drop-down list. See “Controlling the scope of Monitor views” on page 401. Total number of the media that are on hold for the master server.

Select Hierarchical View by Volume Pool from the drop-down list. This column shows the media that are a part of the volume pool. To view the details for media 1 2 3 In the OpsCenter console. To perform media tasks 1 2 In the OpsCenter console.448 Monitoring NetBackup using Symantec OpsCenter Viewing the details for volume pool Viewing the details for volume pool Use the following procedure to view the details for a volume pool. Details for the media are shown in the General tab at the bottom of the view. or unsuspend specific media. 4 Controlling media Use the following procedure to freeze. Note that to perform these tasks the media must be assigned to NetBackup. Expand a volume pool from the Media ID column. Select Hierarchical View by Volume Pool from the drop-down list. Note that the media are indented to the right-hand side Click the media ID (link). The details for the volume pool are shown in the General tab at the bottom of this view. The media is assigned if there is a date in the Time Assigned column. The drop-down list is located at the top-right corner of the page. suspend. Note that a volume pool has a + sign on the left side. unfreeze. Click a volume pool (link) from the Media ID column. select Monitor > Media. To view details for a volume pool 1 2 3 In the OpsCenter console. select Monitor > Media. The drop-down list is located at the top-right corner of the page. The drop-down list is located at the top-right corner of the page. Viewing the details for media Use the following procedure to view details for the media that are part of a specific volume pool. select Monitor > Media. Select Hierarchical View by Volume Pool from the drop-down list. Note: These tasks are not visible if you log on with an Analyst or a Reporter role. .

The drop-down list is located at the top-right corner of the page. Each volume group shown in the Media ID column has a +sign before it. Control media See “Controlling media in OpsCenter” on page 450. You can expand a volume group to see all media that are a part of this volume group. Note that the media are indented to the right-hand side in the Media ID column. The Hierarchical View by Volume Group shows details of all media and also groups media by volume group. You can perform the following tasks from this view: View the details for a volume group See “Viewing the details for a volume group” on page 449. Click Freeze. This view shows the media that are a part of the volume pool. The OpsCenter console may take some time to show the updated status once you perform these tasks. Viewing the details for a volume group Use the following procedure to view the details for a specific volume group.Monitoring NetBackup using Symantec OpsCenter Hierarchical View by Volume Group for monitoring media 449 3 Expand a volume pool from the Media ID column. . Note that the media are indented to the right-hand side Select a media ID (use the check box). The sorting feature in this view applies to media in the volume group. the current selected sort order is applied to media in that group. Suspend. Unfreeze. View details for the media that are part of a See “Viewing the details for media” specific volume group on page 450. When you expand a volume group. Note that these tasks are present on top of the table. The data that is shown in this view is based on the current View pane selection. or Unsuspend. See “Controlling the scope of Monitor views” on page 401. 4 5 Hierarchical View by Volume Group for monitoring media This view is displayed when you select Monitor > Media and then select Heirarchical View by Volume Group from the drop-down list.

4 Controlling media in OpsCenter Use the following procedure to freeze. The media is assigned if there is a date in the Time Assigned column. To view the details for media 1 2 3 In the OpsCenter console. unfreeze. The drop-down list is located at the top-right corner of the page. Note that the media are indented to the right-hand side Click the media ID (link). select Monitor > Media. Note that to perform these tasks the media must be assigned to NetBackup. This view shows the media that are a part of the volume group. Note that the media are indented to the right-hand side . Expand a volume group from the Media ID column. or unsuspend specific media. Select Hierarchical View by Volume Group from the drop-down list.450 Monitoring NetBackup using Symantec OpsCenter Viewing the details for media To view details for a volume group 1 2 3 In the OpsCenter console. Details for the media are shown in the General tab at the bottom of the view. select Monitor > Media. The details for the volume group are shown in the General tab at the bottom of this view. This view shows the media that are a part of the volume group. To perform media tasks 1 2 3 In the OpsCenter console. Note: These tasks are not visible if you log on with an Analyst or a Reporter role. The drop-down list is located at the top-right corner of the page. Note that a volume group has a + sign on the left side. Viewing the details for media Use the following procedure to view details for media that are part of a specific volume group. select Monitor > Media. The drop-down list is located at the top-right corner of the page. Select Hierarchical View by Volume Group from the drop-down list. Select Hierarchical View by Volume Group from the drop-down list. suspend. Click a volume group (link) from the Media ID column. Expand a volume group from the Media ID column.

Monitoring NetBackup using Symantec OpsCenter Monitoring NetBackup devices 451 4 5 Select a media ID (use the check box). it is not shown in the Paths tab that appears in the List View. Suspend. See “Controlling the scope of Monitor views” on page 401. This view shows the current drive status information. or Unsuspend. The contents of the Drives tab are shown by default.0. Note: For 7. See “Monitor > Devices > Drives List View options” on page 451. This view contains the following two tabs: Drives This tab is shown by default when you select Monitor > Devices. . Note that these options are present on top of the table. This view displays the current drive status information based on the current View pane selection. The OpsCenter console may take some time to show the updated status once you perform these tasks.1 and later master servers. Monitor > Devices > Drives List View options This view is displayed when you select Monitor > Devices > Drives. See “Monitor > Devices > Disk Pools options” on page 456. Similarly if one of the paths for a drive is unreachable or disabled. The data that is shown in this view is based on the current View pane selection. See “Monitor > Devices > Drives Summary View” on page 455. Disk Pools This view displays detailed information about the disk pools that are configured for use by NetBackup based on the current View pane selection. the List View does not show a drive that is unreachable or disabled. Click Freeze. Monitoring NetBackup devices This view is displayed when you select Monitor > Devices. Unfreeze.

8mm etc. The following columns do not appear. Name of the master server that is associated with the drive. The name of the device host where the drive is connected. Option/Column Head Drive Name Device Host Master Server Drive Type Robot Type Not all of the available columns appear initially in this view. Type of drive like 4mm.452 Monitoring NetBackup using Symantec OpsCenter Monitor > Devices > Drives List View options The table that appears in this view shows the following information: Table 7-10 Drives List View options Description The name that is assigned to the drive when it was added to NetBackup. The type of robot that contains this drive. but can be added to your view by clicking the Table Settings icon: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Serial Number Cleaning Frequency Shared Inquiry Information Volume Header Path ACS LSM Panel Drive Vendor Drive Identifier Robot Number Robot Drive Number Recorded Media ID Assigned Host Control Host Name Control Mode Evsn Control Up .

See “Controlling drives” on page 455. The Details pane is located at the bottom of the view. . More information about how to customize tables and view specific columns is available. See “Filtering on NetBackup drive category” on page 454. See “About using tables” on page 83. See “Viewing the details for a master server associated with a drive” on page 454.Monitoring NetBackup using Symantec OpsCenter About using the List View for monitoring drives 453 ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Last Clean Time Local Control Mounted Time NDMP Occupy Index Opr Comment Ready Request ID Scan Host VM Host Write Enabled See the online NetBackup Administration Console Help for a detailed description of these fields. View the details for a master server that is associated with a drive Use filters to view specific drives Control drives Viewing the details for a single drive All the details that are associated with a drive can be viewed from the Details pane. About using the List View for monitoring drives You can perform the following tasks from this view: View the details for a single drive See “Viewing the details for a single drive” on page 453.

From the General tab. The master server information can be viewed from a separate page. These filters are available from the drop-down list which is present on top of the table. Select this filter to view only those drives that are up. Viewing the details for a master server associated with a drive Use the following procedure to view details for a master server that is associated with a drive. Filtering on NetBackup drive category You can sort and filter this view to focus on the specific type of drives that you want to see. For down drives. For mixed drives. some drive paths are up and some drive paths are down. The List View is shown by default. you can also click the master server link to see details about the master server that is associated with the drive. Select this filter to view all drives. The drive information can be viewed from the General and Paths tab of the Details pane. Select this filter to view mixed drives.454 Monitoring NetBackup using Symantec OpsCenter Viewing the details for a master server associated with a drive To view the details for a single drive 1 2 Select Monitor > Devices > Drives. For up drives. all drive paths are down. Click the drilldown link from the Drive Name column. The following built-in filters are available: All Drives The All Drives filter is the default filter. you can apply a filter that displays only those drives that are up. Click the drilldown link from the Master Server column. all drive paths are up. The List View is shown by default. You can filter by using any of the built-in filters. Select this filter to view only those drives that are down. To view the details for a master server associated with a drive 1 2 Select Monitor > Devices > Drives. For example. Up Drives Down Drives Mixed Drives .

See “Creating. The OpsCenter console may take some time to show the updated status once you perform these tasks. Down. The drop-down list is located at the top-right corner of the page. When you refresh. Note that these options are located on top of the drive details table. and removing custom view filters” on page 87. Select a drive from the Drive Name column in the table. editing. Note: These tasks are not visible if you log on with an Analyst or a Reporter role. The List View is displayed by default. Select a filter from the drop-down list. Use the following procedure to view details by type of drives. Note that the drop-down list is located on top of the table. you also ensure that the drive is not involved in any tasks by other users.Monitoring NetBackup using Symantec OpsCenter Controlling drives 455 In addition to the built-in filters. you can create your own custom filters. To filter details by type of drives 1 2 In the OpsCenter console. or Reset. . select Monitor > Devices > Drives. manually refresh your Web browser to obtain an updated view of all drives. Click Up. Controlling drives See the NetBackup Administrator's Guide. Monitor > Devices > Drives Summary View This view is displayed when you select Monitor > Devices > Drives and then select Summary View from the drop-down list. Ensure that List View is selected in the drop-down list. Before you perform these tasks. Volume I for information on drive states and how to control drives. select Monitor > Devices > Drives. To control drives 1 2 3 In the OpsCenter console. applying. The Summary view contains the following section: See “Viewing the Drive Summary by Status” on page 456.

456 Monitoring NetBackup using Symantec OpsCenter Viewing the Drive Summary by Status Viewing the Drive Summary by Status The Drive Summary by Status section shows an overall distribution of drives by drive status for the current View pane selection. You can also view the color code summary in this section to know the colors that represent different exit status. To view drives by drive status 1 2 3 In the OpsCenter console. For example. Note: For 7. In the Drive Summary by Status section. Each color of the pie chart represents how drives are distributed in your environment as per the drive status. do either of the following: ■ Click the number of drives (link) for a particular drive status from the table. Moving your mouse over the pie chart shows the number and percentage of drives with up or down status in your NetBackup environment. pointing to the green color in the pie chart shows that 5 drives or 100% drives in your environment are up. The drop-down list is located at the top-right corner of the page. For example. ■ Monitor > Devices > Disk Pools options This view is displayed when you select Monitor > Devices > Disk Pools.0. This view displays detailed information about the disk pools that are configured for use by .1 and later master servers. This information is shown in a pie chart as well as a table. select Monitor > Jobs. Note: The Drive Summary by Status section can also be viewed from Monitor > Overview. Select Summary View from the drop-down list. click the green section of the pie chart to view details for the drives that are up. You can drill down from this section to see details of the drives that are up or down. the Drive Summary by Status section does not show the drives that are disabled or unreachable. For example. click the number for Up drives Or Click a colored section of the pie chart that corresponds to a particular drive status.

Name of the master server that is associated with the disk pool State of the disk pool (like Up. The table that appears in this view shows the following information: Name Server Type Name of the disk pool The storage server type. unformatted size of the storage in the disk pool. Number of disk volumes in the disk pool. but can be added to your view by clicking the Table Settings icon: ■ ■ ■ ■ Imported Configured for Snapshots Primary Replication .) Number of Volumes Used Capacity Available Space Raw Size Usable Size Low Watermark (%) High Water Mark (%) % Full Master Server State Not all of the available columns appear initially in this view.) When the capacity of the disk pool returns to the low water mark. (The default is 80%. The amount of storage space in use. Space available on the disk pool The total raw. The low water mark for the disk pool. the server type depends on the vendor name. The estimated amount of disk space available for storage after file metadata overhead is taken into account. The high water mark for the disk pool (default is 98%. See “Controlling the scope of Monitor views” on page 401. The data that is shown in this view is based on the current View pane selection. Down etc. The following columns do not appear.). Percentage of the disk pool that is full.Monitoring NetBackup using Symantec OpsCenter Monitor > Devices > Disk Pools options 457 NetBackup. NetBackup again assigns jobs to the storage unit. For OpenStorage.

This view contains the following subtabs: Master Server This tab is shown by default when you select Monitor > Hosts. Click the drilldown link from the Name column. This view displays detailed information about NetBackup master servers based on the current View pane selection. More information about how to customize tables and view specific columns is available. The disk pool information can be viewed from the General and Disk Volume tab of the Details pane. select Monitor > Devices > Disk Pools.458 Monitoring NetBackup using Symantec OpsCenter Viewing the details for a single disk pool See the online NetBackup Administration Console Help for a detailed description of these fields. To view the details for a single disk pool 1 2 In the OpsCenter console. From the General tab. About monitoring NetBackup hosts This view is displayed when you select Monitor > Hosts. Viewing the details for a single disk pool All the details that are associated with a disk pool can be viewed from the Details pane. . you can also click the master server link to see details about the master server that is associated with the disk pool. See “Monitor > Hosts > Master Servers view” on page 459. See “About using tables” on page 83. The Details pane is located at the bottom of the view. You can perform the following task from this view: View the details for a single disk pool See “Viewing the details for a single disk pool” on page 458.

See “Monitor > Hosts > Media Servers view” on page 461. Reason for the current state of the master server. Not Connected etc. Option/Column Head Master Server Name Display Name Operating System Product State Connected Since Reason . See “Controlling the scope of Monitor views” on page 401. Monitor > Hosts > Master Servers view This view shows details of master servers. The data that is shown in this view is based on the current View pane selection.Monitoring NetBackup using Symantec OpsCenter Monitor > Hosts > Master Servers view 459 Media Server This view displays detailed information about NetBackup media servers based on the current View pane selection. Backup Exec etc. See “Monitor > Hosts > Clients view” on page 462. Client This view displays detailed information about NetBackup clients based on the current View pane selection. The display name that you have chosen for the master server. The table that appears in this view shows the following columns: Table 7-11 Master Servers view options Description Fully qualified domain name or IP address of the master server that is configured. This does not necessarily represent the last time that OpsCenter collected information from the master server. Shows the current state of the master server like Connected. Back up product from where the data is being collected like PureDisk. Operating system of the master server. The last time when OpsCenter successfully initiated contact with the master server.

Select this filter to view details of Linux servers. See “Creating. Select this filter to view details of those master servers that are partially connected. Connected Servers Partially Connected Servers Not Connected Servers Windows Servers Solaris Servers Linux Servers Other Servers In addition to the built-in filters.460 Monitoring NetBackup using Symantec OpsCenter Filtering by NetBackup master server type and status You can perform the following task from this view: Use filters to view specific master servers See “Filtering by NetBackup master server type and status” on page 460. Select this filter to view details of all other servers like AIX servers. Select this filter to view details of those master servers that appear as not connected. For example. you can create your own custom filters. Use the following procedure to view details by type of master server. Select this filter to view details of Windows servers. you can apply a filter that displays Windows servers only. The built-in filters are the following: All Servers (default filter) Select this filter to view details of all master servers. . and removing custom view filters” on page 87. editing. Select this filter to view details of Solaris servers. applying. Select this filter to view details of those master servers that are connected. HP-UX servers etc. Filtering by NetBackup master server type and status You can sort and filter this view to focus on the specific type of master servers that you want to see. These filters are available from the drop-down list which is present on top of the table.

. Note that the drop-down list is located on top of the table. Name of the master server that is associated with the media server. The table that appears in this view shows the following columns: Table 7-12 Option Name Master Server Media Servers view options Description Name of the media server. Monitor > Hosts > Media Servers view This view shows details of media servers. Viewing the details of a master server that is associated with a media server Use the following procedure to view the details of a master server that is associated with a media server. You can perform the following tasks from this view: View the details of a master server that is associated with a media server See “Viewing the details of a master server that is associated with a media server” on page 461. select Monitor > Hosts > Media Servers. To view the details of a master server that is associated with a media server 1 2 In the OpsCenter console. Click the drilldown link from the Master Server column. The data that is shown in this view is based on the current View pane selection.Monitoring NetBackup using Symantec OpsCenter Monitor > Hosts > Media Servers view 461 To filter details by type of master server 1 2 In the OpsCenter console. select Monitor > Hosts > Master Server. Select a filter from the drop-down list. See “Controlling the scope of Monitor views” on page 401.

See “Controlling the scope of Monitor views” on page 401. About monitoring NetBackup alerts The Monitor > Alerts view provides details of NetBackup alerts. Hardware of the client computer like PC. The data that is shown in this view is based on the current View pane and time frame selection. To view the details for a single master server 1 2 In the OpsCenter console. Name of the master server that is associated with the client. Date till the client is offline You can click Search Client to search for specific clients on the page. You can search for clients using absolute host names or substrings. Click the drilldown link in the Master Server column. select Monitor > Hosts > Client. Shows Yes if the client is offline. Viewing the details for a single master server All the details for a master server that is associated with a client can be viewed from the General tab. HP-UX etc. .462 Monitoring NetBackup using Symantec OpsCenter Monitor > Hosts > Clients view Monitor > Hosts > Clients view This view shows details of NetBackup clients. The data that is shown in this view is based on the current View pane selection. The table that appears in this view shows the following columns: Table 7-13 Option Client Name Master Server OS Type Hardware Is Offline Offline Until Clients view options Description Name of the client that is to be backed up. You can perform the following task from this view: View the details for a single master server See “Viewing the details for a single master server” on page 462. Operating system on the client like Linux.

The List View shows active alerts by default. Monitor > Alerts List View The List view is displayed when you select Monitor > Alerts. You can use the following views to see NetBackup alert information: List View The List View is shown by default when you select Monitor > Alerts. This view contains detailed information for alerts. This view also lets you view detailed information about all NetBackup alerts and also filter. This view provides tools to view and filter alerts. An option called Ignore View filter has been added in the View drop-down list under Monitor > Alerts. See “Summary View for monitoring NetBackup alerts” on page 469. You can also view data for the last 48 hours or 72 hours. This information is shown in a pie chart as well as a table. The Summary View shows how active alerts are distributed in your environment as per the alert severity. Ignore View filter is selected by default when you click . respond to alerts. See “Controlling the scope of Monitor views” on page 401. Data for the last 24 hours is shown by default. and to track user responses to alerts. See “Monitor > Alerts List View” on page 463. You can also view data for the last 48 hours or 72 hours. Summary View The Summary View only displays active alerts (these are the alerts that have not been cleared). Note: The OpsCenter console displays active alerts by default (these are the alerts that have not been cleared).Monitoring NetBackup using Symantec OpsCenter Monitor > Alerts List View 463 Data for the last 24 hours is shown by default. Note: The List View displays active alerts by default (these are the alerts that have not been cleared). See “Controlling the scope of Monitor views” on page 401. The data that is shown in this view is based on the current View pane and time frame selection.

Current status of the alert like Active. The severity type helps you determine how quickly you want to respond. The Assignment State column does not appear. The severity of the alert. or an alert that is based on a view for which you do not have access now. the alert count shown in the Alert Summary pane at the bottom-left is based on the Ignore View filter. and year when the alert was modified. This means that the Alert Summary pane always displays all the alerts regardless of the views on which the alert policy is based. Cleared etc. and year when the alert was raised. For example. About using the List View to monitor NetBackup alerts The following tasks can be performed from this view: . Also. date.464 Monitoring NetBackup using Symantec OpsCenter About using the List View to monitor NetBackup alerts Monitor > Alerts List View. When you select Ignore View filter from the View Pane. Alert Policy Alert Condition Status Assigned To Time Raised Last Update Time Updated by Not all of the available columns appear initially in this view. Time. but can be added to your view by clicking the Table Settings icon. date. More information about how to customize tables and view specific columns is available. The table that appears in this view shows the following information: Table 7-14 Option Alert ID Severity Alerts List View options Description Unique ID associated with each NetBackup alert. Name of the individual who last modified the alert. all active alerts for the last 24 hours are displayed in the Monitor > Alerts view regardless of the views on which the alert policy is based. selecting Ignore View filter displays an alert that is based on a view which has been deleted. See “About using tables” on page 83. Name of the policy that is associated with the alert. Name of the individual to whom the alert has been assigned. The alert condition that is used for the alert. Time.

See “Viewing the details of the alert policy associated with an alert” on page 465. View the details of an alert policy that is associated with the alert Use filters to view specific alerts Respond to alerts Viewing the details for a single alert All the details that are associated with an alert can be viewed from the Details pane. the General tab also shows master server. See “Filtering by alert type” on page 466. and exit status information. See “Responding to alerts ” on page 467. policy name. job ID. select Monitor > Alerts. Click a drill-down link from the Alert ID column.Monitoring NetBackup using Symantec OpsCenter Viewing the details for a single alert 465 View the details for a single alert See “Viewing the details for a single alert” on page 465. To view the details of a single alert 1 2 In the OpsCenter console. In addition to the information that is shown in the table. Viewing the details of the alert policy associated with an alert Use the following procedure to view the details of the alert policy that is associated with an alert. The Comments tab shows comments on the alert (if any). select Monitor > Alerts. the time these comments were given and the individual who last updated the alert. The Details pane is located at the bottom of the view. See “Viewing the details for a single alert” on page 465. See “Viewing the details of the alert policy associated with an alert” on page 465. See “Filtering by alert type” on page 466. . Click the drill-down link from the Alert Policy column. See “Responding to alerts ” on page 467. See “Responding to alerts ” on page 467. See “Filtering by alert type” on page 466. To view the details of alert policy associated with the alert 1 2 In the OpsCenter console. The alert details are shown under General and Comments tabs of the Details pane.

Active (default filter) Select this filter to view Active alerts. Select this filter to only view the alerts whose severity is Informational. Use the following procedure to view details by type of alerts. Select this filter to only view the alerts whose severity is Warning. Select this filter to only view the alerts that have not been assigned to anybody. applying. Critical Major Warning Informational Unassigned Assigned Acknowledged Cleared In addition to the built-in filters. For example. You can filter using any of the following built-in alert filters. More information on cleared alerts is available. Select this filter to only view the alerts that have been acknowledged by an OpsCenter user. which lets you focus on only the specific alerts that interest you. You can use this filter to limit the types of alerts that appear. See “Creating. you can create and apply a filter that only displays the alerts that are acknowledged. and removing custom view filters” on page 87. You can filter on various severity levels or status settings.466 Monitoring NetBackup using Symantec OpsCenter Filtering by alert type Filtering by alert type Since the Monitor > Alerts view can include large numbers of alerts. See “Responding to alerts ” on page 467. Select this filter to only view the alerts that have been assigned to other OpsCenter users. . All Alerts Select this filter to view the details of all alerts. Select this filter to only view the alerts whose severity is Critical. a filter is available. you can create your own custom filters. Select this filter to only view the alerts whose severity is Major. This filter does not include the alerts that have been cleared. These filters are available from the drop-down list which is present on top of the alert details table. editing. This filter includes both active alerts and cleared alerts. Select this filter to only view the alerts that have been cleared.

See “Filtering by alert type” on page 466. Drive is Down) are cleared automatically when the condition is resolved. Responding to alerts You can manage OpsCenter alerts from the Monitor > Alerts view by adding comments or by assigning the alert to an individual for further review. If you clear an alert. The following alerts are cleared automatically when the condition is resolved: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Drive is Down Lost Contact with Media Server Service Stopped Agent Server Communication Break Master Server Unreachable . See “Viewing the details of the alert policy associated with an alert” on page 465. For instance. Note: Under certain circumstances there may be issues among multiple OpsCenter users. you inform other users who see the alert that action on the alert occurred. an OpsCenter user comments on an alert while another OpsCenter user tries to clear the same alert. Select a filter using the Filter drop-down list. Some alerts (for example.Monitoring NetBackup using Symantec OpsCenter Responding to alerts 467 To filter details by type of alert 1 2 In the OpsCenter console. assign or acknowledge). OpsCenter allows multiple users to process or take action on an alert. select All Alerts to view details of both active alerts and cleared alerts. See “Viewing the details for a single alert” on page 465. The OpsCenter console displays active alerts by default (these are the alerts that have not been cleared). Cleared alerts do not appear in the alert view by default. You can view cleared alerts from Monitor > Alerts view (List View) by using the Cleared or All Alerts filter. For example. You can also clear or acknowledge an alert. When you acknowledge an alert. select Monitor > Alerts. you cannot perform any further activity on the alert (for example. See “Responding to alerts ” on page 467.

468 Monitoring NetBackup using Symantec OpsCenter Responding to alerts ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Frozen Media Suspended Media Disk Pool Full Disk Volume Down Symantec ThreatCon High Down Drives High Frozen Media High Suspended Media Low Available Media No Cleaning Tape Low Disk Volume Capacity Catalog Space Low Catalog not backed up Catalog backup disabled Note: You can also purge NetBackup alert data from Settings > Configuration > Data Purge in the OpsCenter console based on a retention period that you specify. To add a comment for an alert 1 2 3 In the OpsCenter console. You can add a comment as a reminder to yourself or for other users. Select an alert from the table. Click Add Comment. Click Acknowledge or Clear. See “Configuring the data purge period on the OpsCenter Server” on page 274. Select an alert from the table. select Monitor > Alerts. To acknowledge an alert 1 2 3 In the OpsCenter console. Any purged data is deleted permanently. This option is useful if you see OpsCenter performance degrade when there is a high number of alerts in the OpsCenter database. . select Monitor > Alerts.

Click Assign. Summary View for monitoring NetBackup alerts The Summary View gives an overall summary of alerts by severity. See “Controlling the scope of Monitor views” on page 401. See “Filtering by alert type” on page 466. To change the policy that is associated with an alert 1 2 In the OpsCenter console. This information is shown in a pie chart as well as a table. Select an alert from the table. A pie chart with different colors represents the alert distribution by severity in this section. You can assign an alert to a user for their action or information. Data for the last 24 hours is shown by default. See “About understanding alert counts in the Monitor view” on page 507. . Select an alert from the table. To assign an alert to an individual 1 2 3 In the OpsCenter console. You can also view the color code summary in this section to know the colors that represent different severity. Click OK. The Alert Policy Wizard is also used to create a policy. Select an alert from the table. select Monitor > Alerts. 4 5 Select a user to whom you want to assign the alert. It contains the Alert Summary by Severity section which shows an overall distribution of alerts by severity for the current View pane and time frame selection. select Monitor > Alerts. You can also view data for the last 48 hours or 72 hours. select Monitor > Alerts. 3 Click More and then select Edit Policy from the drop-down list. See “Viewing the details for a single alert” on page 465. See “Viewing the details of the alert policy associated with an alert” on page 465. Each color of the pie chart represents how alerts are distributed in your environment as per the alert severity. Click More and then select Clear from the drop-down list.Monitoring NetBackup using Symantec OpsCenter Summary View for monitoring NetBackup alerts 469 To clear an alert 1 2 3 In the OpsCenter console.

See “About understanding alert counts in the Monitor view” on page 507. To view alerts by severity 1 2 3 In the OpsCenter console. See “Viewing alerts by severity” on page 470. Note: The Alert Summary by Severity section can also be viewed from Monitor > Overview. the last 24 hours data is displayed by default. do either of the following: ■ Click the number of alerts (link) for a particular alert severity from the table. For example.470 Monitoring NetBackup using Symantec OpsCenter Viewing alerts by severity Note: The Summary View only displays active alerts (these are the alerts that have not been cleared). all active alerts in the last 24 hours are displayed in the Monitor > Alerts view regardless of the views on which the alert policy is based. or 17% alerts in your environment are critical. 200 alerts. Note that the Alert Summary pane at the bottom-left displays all the alerts that exist in the OpsCenter database. click the number that is shown for Critical alerts. When you select a view from the View drop-down list (including Ignore View filter). For example. This means that the Alert Summary pane displays all the alerts regardless of the views on which the alert policy is based. Or . The drop-down list is located at the top-right corner of the page. An option called Ignore View filter has been added in the View drop-down list under Monitor > Alerts. pointing to the green color in the pie chart shows that in the last 24 hours. select Monitor > Alerts. In the Alert Summary by Severity section. For example. or an alert that is based on a view for which you do not have access now. selecting Ignore View filter displays an alert that is based on a view which has been deleted. You can drill down from this section to see details for alert categories. When you select Ignore View filter from the View Pane. Select Summary View from the drop-down list. Viewing alerts by severity You can drill down to see details for alert categories. Moving your mouse over the pie chart displays the number and percentage of alerts with a particular severity in your NetBackup environment.

click the red section of the pie chart to view details for critical alerts. storage units. For example. Audit trails display the following information in the form of columns: Column heading Description Category Displays the changes that are made to policies. a storage unit is created. and manages audit trails for the NetBackup master servers for the version 7. You can control the audit settings and generate an Audit Trails Report. such as whether a policy is modified. Additional information about the Audit Trails report See “Audit Trails report” on page 472. See “What Audit Trails track” on page 471. An audit trail consists of the changes that are made in the NetBackup environment. The audit trails feature in OpsCenter lets you enable audit trail logging for NetBackup. audit configuration. you can set the audit logs retention period and also enable or disable audit trail logging. pool. See “Summary View for monitoring NetBackup alerts” on page 469. Note: OpsCenter monitors. For example. modified. and storage server. when a storage unit is added. See “About OpsCenter features for Audit Trails” on page 472. reports. deactivating a policy.1 or later. For example. Displays the action performed. or a storage server is deleted. or deleted. Through OpsCenter. or modifying a policy. What Audit Trails track An audit trail is a record of all the user initiated activities. jobs.Monitoring NetBackup using Symantec OpsCenter About monitoring Audit Trails 471 ■ Click a colored section of the pie chart that corresponds to a particular alert severity. audit service. About monitoring Audit Trails You can manage and monitor audit trails using the OpsCenter features. See “Creating a custom filter to view audit trail data” on page 473. Action . See “About managing Audit Trails settings” on page 474. changes such as creating a policy.

Some of the categories are Policy. The report is displayed in the form of a chart. Audit Configuration. You can view the count of changes for each action for the selected category. Gives the information about the user who initiated the action. This report displays the number of changes that are made in the NetBackup environment. Some of the attributes that are modified are Clients. You can hover the mouse on each colored section of the chart to know the count and the percent changes for each category. and Policy Generation. Audit service. and Percentage. You can view the report in a Distribution chart or Historical chart format The chart displays the count of audit records for each category. For example. About OpsCenter features for Audit Trails OpsCenter helps you to configure audit logging and generate the Audit report. The table also displays the information about Audit Action when you drill down the chart. Displays the reason for the change that is made. Total Audit Count. You can drill down the report by clicking any colored section of the chart. if you click the Policy section. Job. Displays the time when the action was performed. . the column is hidden. User Timestamp Master Server Reason Details Audit Trails report The Audit Trails report is a high-level summary report that is added to the reports tree. you can: ■ ■ Manage the audit settings of the NetBackup master server. and policies deleted. if given by the user who makes the change. Hardware. Monitor audit trails. the chart displays the total audit count for policies created. policies modified. Displays the old and new values of the attributes that are modified. It also gives the identity of the category. Storage unit. click the link Show Chart as Table. The table displays information about the Audit Category. To view the details of the audit trails report in a tabular form. Operating System (OS). Through OpsCenter.472 Monitoring NetBackup using Symantec OpsCenter About monitoring Audit Trails Column heading Description Description Gives a brief information about the category and the action performed. Pool. Displays the name of the master server on which the action is performed. By default. and Storage Server.

Domain Name. editing. Creating a custom filter to view audit trail data OpsCenter helps you to monitor the audit trails. 4 5 6 Select And or Or from the drop-down list to build the filter query. Object Name. The Edit Audit filter dialog box is displayed. select Monitor > Audit Trails.Monitoring NetBackup using Symantec OpsCenter About monitoring Audit Trails 473 ■ ■ Generate alerts if audit service goes down. In the Value text box. Use != if you do not want to match a specific value. You can set OpsCenter to generate alerts when the NetBackup Audit manager services are turned on or off. Time Stamp. To monitor them. See “Creating. Configure audit trail retention period in OpsCenter. If you select Time Stamp as the column. You can view information about predefined and custom filters. Object Name is filtered based on the entity names present in the description. To create a custom filter to view audit trail data 1 2 3 Select the Create Filter icon. select Remove. click Add and select the required column name. To add more columns to the query. The new view filter is displayed in the filter drop-down list. Enter a name for the filter in the Name field. Use the various features of OpsCenter and generate the Audit report. Action. Click the calendar icon to choose the required date and click OK. Once you are done adding the required columns to the filter. See “View filters in OpsCenter” on page 395. Select the column name that you want to filter from the drop-down list. User Name. You can enable or disable the audit settings. and set the retention period of the logs. From the Operator drop-down list. The options available are Category. select the operator =. Domain Type. and Master Server. enter or select a value. a calendar icon appears for value. You can use predefined filters based on category and action to display the contents of the Audit trails and also create custom filters. and deleting the filter. You can also set the retention period for the audit logs. You can view more information about applying the filter. To remove the column that is created. editing the filter. and removing custom view filters” on page 87. applying. click OK. .

. More information on how to add an appliance master server to the OpsCenter console is available. The table displays the following details: Name This column lists the names of the appliance master servers (link) that are added to the OpsCenter console. This view provides the information that is monitored for each piece of hardware in your NetBackup appliance master server. Adding an appliance master server is similar to adding a regular master server to OpsCenter. You must have Admin privileges to configure the audit settings. Click the link to view the appliance summary. Data collection takes place after every 15 minutes by NBSL.474 Monitoring NetBackup using Symantec OpsCenter Monitor > Appliance Hardware > Master Server About managing Audit Trails settings You can manage the settings to enable the auditing for the selected master server through OpsCenter. OpsCenter can monitor the appliance 2. See “Appliance hardware details” on page 480.0 master servers. See “Adding a master server or appliance in OpsCenter” on page 346. The view provides a quick visual cue to hardware status. See “Managing audit trails settings” on page 573. Monitor > Appliance Hardware > Master Server This view lets you monitor the hardware summary of appliance master servers that are added to the Symantec OpsCenter Analytics console. More information about the hardware details that are monitored is available. Data Collection This column lists the date and time when the last data collection occurred. You can monitor any hardware failures in the appliance master servers that are added to the OpsCenter console.

. An error is reported if the status changes from optimal. The icon that is depicted is based on monitoring the CPU presence and voltage to the appliance CPU chip.Monitoring NetBackup using Symantec OpsCenter Monitor > Appliance Hardware > Master Server 475 CPU The icon provides a quick visual cue to the CPU status. A CPU failure is reported if any of the following conditions occur: ■ ■ ■ No voltage Voltage less than 0. The following values are possible: ■ ■ ■ Green/OK Yellow/Presence Unknown Red/failure.25 volts Disk The icon provides a quick visual cue to the disk status.99 volts Voltage more than 1. The following values are possible: ■ ■ ■ Green/OK Yellow/Presence Unknown Red/failure. A disk failure is reported if an internal erroneous state occurs. The icon that is depicted is based on monitoring the RAID status. RAID The icon provides a quick visual cue to the RAID status. The following values are possible: ■ ■ ■ Green/OK Yellow/Presence Unknown Red/failure The icon that is depicted is based on monitoring the boot drive and the storage drives.

.476 Monitoring NetBackup using Symantec OpsCenter Monitor > Appliance Hardware > Master Server Fan The icon provides a quick visual cue to the fan status.Occurs if the Power Module is operated with a warning. ■ ■ Critical . The following values are possible: ■ ■ ■ Green/OK Yellow/Presence Unknown Red/failure. a Not Installed warning is issued.Occurs if the power module is installed and no power is supplied. The icon that is depicted is based on monitoring the fan speed and reports a fan failure when the following conditions occur: ■ ■ ■ ■ Fan speed less than 1974 rpm Fan speed more than 8977 rpm If there is a failure with the Fan. If the Fan is not installed. ■ Not Installed . Power Supply The icon provides a quick visual cue to the power supply. That can occur because it is not connected to the power outlet or some other reason. The following values are possible: ■ ■ ■ Green/OK Yellow/Presence Unknown Red/failure. a Critical warning is displayed.Occurs if the Power Module is pulled out. The icon that is depicted is based on monitoring the power supply wattage and reports a failure when the following conditions occur: ■ ■ Wattage is 0 watts Wattage more than 700 watts The following status warning are also provided: Not Available .

The view provides a quick visual cue to the hardware status.5 master server can be monitored from OpsCenter. .2 and 2. Monitor > Appliance Hardware > Media Server This view lets you monitor the hardware summary of appliance media servers that are monitored from the Symantec OpsCenter Analytics console. See “Monitor > Appliance Hardware > Media Server” on page 477. The icon that is depicted is based on monitoring the status and reports a failure if the status changes from online. The icon that is depicted is based on monitoring the temperature of the appliance at different points and reports a failure if the following limits are exceeded: Intake Vent Temp Lower than 0° C or higher than 60° C ■ Outtake Vent Temp Lower than 0° C or higher than 60° C ■ Backplane Temp Lower than 0° C or higher than 60° C ■ FC HBA The icon provides a quick visual cue to the Fibre Channel HBA's. The following values are possible: ■ ■ ■ Green/OK Yellow/Presence Unknown Red/failure. Click the icon to access the Appliance console.Monitoring NetBackup using Symantec OpsCenter Monitor > Appliance Hardware > Media Server 477 Temperature The icon provides a quick visual cue to the temperature. Manage The icon is a link to the Appliance console. Data collection from the appliance media servers takes place after every 15 minutes via NBSL.0 master server or to a regular NetBackup 7. The following values are possible: ■ ■ ■ Green/OK Yellow/Presence Unknown Red/failure. You can monitor any hardware failures in the appliance media servers that are monitored from the OpsCenter console. Only appliance 1.0 media servers that are attached to appliance 2.

The table displays the following details: Name This column lists the names of the appliance media servers (link) that are monitored from the OpsCenter console. A disk failure is reported if an internal erroneous state occurs.478 Monitoring NetBackup using Symantec OpsCenter Monitor > Appliance Hardware > Media Server Note that you cannot add an appliance media server directly to the OpsCenter console. You can add an appliance master server or a regular master server to which it is connected. Click the link to view the appliance summary. A CPU failure is reported if any of the following conditions occur: ■ ■ ■ No voltage Voltage less than 0. The icon provides a quick visual cue to the CPU status.25 volts Disk The icon provides a quick visual cue to the disk status. This column lists the date and time when the last data collection occured. This view provides the information that is monitored for each piece of hardware in your NetBackup media appliance. . Master Server This column lists the appliance master server or the regular NetBackup master server that the appliance media server is connected to. See “Adding a master server or appliance in OpsCenter” on page 346. This may have the following values: ■ ■ ■ Data Collection CPU Green=OK Yellow=warning Red=failure The icon that is depicted is based on monitoring the CPU presence and voltage to the appliance CPU chip.99 volts Voltage more than 1. More information about the hardware details that are monitored is available. This may have the following values: ■ ■ ■ Green=OK Yellow=warning Red=failure The icon that is depicted is based on monitoring the boot drive and the storage drives. See “Appliance hardware details” on page 480. Data collection takes place after every 15 minutes via NBSL.

Monitoring NetBackup using Symantec OpsCenter Monitor > Appliance Hardware > Media Server 479 RAID The icon provides a quick visual cue to the RAID status. An error is reported if the status changes from optimal. . This may have the following values: ■ ■ ■ Green=OK Yellow=warning Red=failure The icon that is depicted is based on monitoring the RAID status. Power Supply The icon provides a quick visual cue to the power supply. This may have the following values: ■ ■ ■ Green=OK Yellow=warning Red=failure The icon that is depicted is based on monitoring the fan speed and reports a fan failure when the following conditions occur: ■ ■ ■ ■ Fan speed less than 1974 rpm Fan speed more than 8977 rpm If there is a failure with the Fan.Occurs if the Power Module is operated with a warning. ■ ■ Critical .Occurs if the Power Module is pulled out. Fan The icon provides a quick visual cue to the fan status. a Not Installed warning is issued. a Critical warning is displayed.Occurs if the power module is installed and no power is supplied. If the Fan is not installed. This may have the following values: ■ ■ ■ Green=OK Yellow=warning Red=failure The icon that is depicted is based on monitoring the power supply wattage and reports a failure when the following conditions occur: ■ ■ Watage is 0 watts Wattage more than 700 watts The following status warning are also provided: Not Available . ■ Not Installed . That can occur because it is not connected to the power outlet or some other reason.

■ Voltage .Monitors the status of the CPU. This may have the following values: ■ ■ ■ Green=OK Yellow=warning Red=failure The icon that is depicted is based on monitoring the status and reports a failure if the status changes from online. Click the icon to access the Appliance console. such as.Monitors the voltage to the appliance CPU chip ■ Monitored Hardware CPU . See “Monitor > Appliance Hardware > Master Server” on page 474. Appliance hardware details The following table describes the hardware that is monitored. Table 7-15 Appliance hardware that is monitored Sample of collected data Monitors the following: Status . Manage The icon is a link to the Appliance console. Presence detected and No CPU(s) detected.480 Monitoring NetBackup using Symantec OpsCenter Appliance hardware details Temperature The icon provides a quick visual cue to the temperature. This may have the following values: ■ ■ ■ Green=OK Yellow=warning Red=failure The icon that is depicted is based on monitoring the temperature of the appliance at different points and reports a failure if the following limits are exceeded: Intake Vent Temp Lower than 0° C or higher than 60° C ■ Outtake Vent Temp Lower than 0° C or higher than 60° C ■ Backplane Temp Lower than 0° C or higher than 60° C ■ FC HBA The icon provides a quick visual cue to the Fibre Channel HBA's.

such as Optimal. The status can be Frozen. Monitors the status and reports a failure if the status changes from online.The type of disk that is configured. ■ Speed . Active.Capacity that is in use. ■ ■ Type . such as RAID1 and RAID 6. Status .Shows the current status of the device. Status . ■ Capacity . World Wide Port Name . Presence detected and No Fan(s) detected.Monitors the status of the fan. ■ Fan Monitors the following: Status . Enclosure ID .The name of the RAID device.Current status of the HBA. ■ Speed ■ Mode - . RAID Monitors the RAID status and reports an error if the status changes from optimal.The disks being used .ID of the enclosure that the disk resides in. The following data is collected: ■ ■ Fibre Channel HBA Status .Monitoring NetBackup using Symantec OpsCenter Appliance hardware details 481 Table 7-15 Appliance hardware that is monitored (continued) Sample of collected data This view provides the following information: ■ ■ Monitored Hardware Disk Slot No . etc. such as. Monitors the temperature of the appliance at different points. Type .Current status of the media.Monitors the fan speed ■ Power Supply Temperature Information Monitors the power supply wattage.The type of RAID device.Slot in the robot that contains the volume. The following data is collected: ■ ■ Name . ■ Capacity .The capacity of each device.The port currently in use for a specific device. ■ Disks .

5 master or media servers that have cloud configurations are monitored by OpsCenter. The following cloud providers are supported: ■ ■ ■ ■ Nirvanix AT&T Amazon Rackspace The Cloud Storage Providers Overview section shows the data that is backed up and restored for the current month in GB. The Cloud Storage Providers Overview section lists the providers that are configured on the selected media servers. this section shows the current metering data which is collected after you add the master server to OpsCenter. In case you have just installed OpsCenter. Select the master server from the View Pane for which you want to view cloud data. The Summary of data transferred table gives the summary of data downloaded and uploaded for each media server in the selected timeframe. The link at the bottom of each Cloud provider lists the number of media servers for which the specific Cloud provider is configured. Expanding the master server lists the media servers below it that are configured for Cloud. Select any or all of the media servers to view related data in the Content pane. The Live Metering: Data written to cloud chart shows how much data is being written in accordance with the metering time. Only NetBackup 7. The Cloud Connect Overview section shows what all data is being written to the Cloud and also data that is being read from the Cloud. Similarly. Click the link to know the names of the media servers for which the specific cloud provider is configured. The default timeframe for the Cloud Connect Overview section is Last 24 hours. Data is collected from the day the master server is added to OpsCenter. You can also view data for the last last 48 hours or the last 72 hours by clicking Last 48 Hours or Last 72 Hours respectively.482 Monitoring NetBackup using Symantec OpsCenter Monitor > Cloud options Monitor > Cloud options The data on this page is applicable only if you select a view of type Master Server. The cloud data is collected from the master server through NBSL after every 15 minutes. Live Metering: Data read from cloud chart shows how much data is being read from the cloud in accordance with the metering time. The Data .

Monitoring NetBackup using Symantec OpsCenter Monitor > Cloud options 483 transferred per provider table gives the data uploaded for each cloud provider in the selected timeframe. The Backup Job Summary shows the backup job summary for the selected timeframe in the form of a pie chart. . It shows the number of Cloud backup jobs that are successful. or failed. Click the link (number) to monitor the progress from Monitor > Jobs. Only backup jobs for the Cloud are considered in this chart. partially successful.

484 Monitoring NetBackup using Symantec OpsCenter Monitor > Cloud options .

stores it in a database. The OpsCenter server collects data from NetBackup master servers. you can view and manage your NetBackup environment. or browser refresh settings can affect how quickly it appears). Note that OpsCenter or OpsCenter Analytics can only monitor and manage NetBackup or NetBackup Appliances. storage.Chapter 8 Managing NetBackup using Symantec OpsCenter This chapter includes the following topics: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ About the Manage views Controlling the scope of Manage views About managing alert policies About managing NetBackup storage About managing NetBackup devices About Operational Restore and Guided Recovery operations About managing NetBackup Hosts About managing NetBackup Deployment Analysis About the Manage views From the Manage tab and associated subtabs. This data is collected . and displays it on demand. which also includes OpsCenter alert policies. and devices. NetBackup sends most of the data and it appears almost instantaneously after it changes. It cannot monitor or manage other products like Symantec NetBackup PureDisk. (Network. Symantec Enterprise Vault etc. system delays.

Deselect the checkbox next to ALL MASTER SERVERS and select specific master servers from the list of master servers.e. Click Apply Selection. NBSL sends a notification to OpsCenter. To view details of specific master servers 1 2 In the OpsCenter console. See the online Symantec OpsCenter Java View Builder Help to know how you can create views using Java View Builder. To view details of all master servers ◆ In the OpsCenter console. 3 . For example. See “About OpsCenter views” on page 379. you can create a view like Geography to view details about master servers in a particular region like Europe. For most operations and changes in NetBackup.486 Managing NetBackup using Symantec OpsCenter Controlling the scope of Manage views mainly using notifications. More information about how to create views from Settings > Views is available. ALL MASTER SERVERS. select ALL MASTER SERVERS from the drop-down list in the View pane. select ALL MASTER SERVERS from the drop-down list in the View pane. you can also create your own views from Settings > Views or by using Java View Builder. Ensure that other master servers are unchecked. Controlling the scope of Manage views The content that is shown in the Manage views is based on your current View pane selection. In addition to using the default view i. You can select the following default option from the View pane: ALL MASTER SERVERS Select ALL MASTER SERVERS to view information for all the NetBackup servers in your environment. Use the following procedure to view details of all master servers or specific master servers. See “How OpsCenter collects data from NetBackup” on page 332.

See “About creating (or changing) an alert policy” on page 490. or deactivating an alert policy. OpsCenter helps you manage your NetBackup server network by generating alerts or sending email and trap notifications (or both). Administrators do not need to monitor a terminal continuously. The OpsCenter console displays views to help you track and manage these alerts. copying. Alert policies help you manage your NetBackup environment by providing constant monitoring of your NetBackup systems. See “Managing an alert policy ” on page 508. Explains how to filter and view the alert policies that are of interest to you.Managing NetBackup using Symantec OpsCenter About managing alert policies 487 About managing alert policies Table 8-1 lists the topics that describe how to manage alert policies. deleting. When certain events or conditions occur in your environment. Explains how to view the details for an alert policy. About OpsCenter alert policies OpsCenter provides tools to create and manage alert policies and handle any resulting alerts that the policies generate. Explains how to create an alert policy using the Alert Policy Wizard. activating. . See “Viewing the details for a single alert policy” on page 489. When a NetBackup system event triggers an alert (based on your alert policies). See “Viewing the alerts associated with an alert policy” on page 509. Management includes tasks like editing. Topic contents and description Description Explains the concept of alert policies. which lets administrators focus on other job responsibilities. See “Filtering on type of alert policy” on page 489. Table 8-1 Topic See “About OpsCenter alert policies” on page 487. the following occurs: ■ OpsCenter sends email or SNMP notices to any recipients that are configured in the policy. ■ You can specify email or SNMP notification in response to an alert. Explains the tasks that are available for managing a single alert policy. Explains how you can view the alerts that are associated with an alert policy.

major. This column lists the severity that is associated with the alert policy. Severity Clear Severity . This column lists the description for the alert policy. When you select Ignore View filter from the View Pane. or an alert policy that is based on a view for which you do not have access now. Job Finalized. Click the link to view details about the policy. High Frozen Media etc. Manage > Alert Policies view This view is displayed when you select Manage > Alert Policies. This column lists the alert condition that is used for the alert policy. or critical. The table that appears in this view shows the following columns by default: Table 8-2 Column Name Manage > Alert Policies column headings Description This column lists the name of the alert policy. This column lists the severity of the email or trap that is sent when the alert is cleared. This view displays detailed information for OpsCenter alert policies for the current View pane selection.488 Managing NetBackup using Symantec OpsCenter About managing alert policies Alert policies are defined as informational. See “OpsCenter Alert conditions” on page 490. Under certain circumstances there may be issues among multiple OpsCenter users. Example: Hung Job. selecting Ignore View filter displays an alert policy that is based on a view which has been deleted. all alert policies are displayed in the Manage > Alert Policies pane regardless of the views on which the alert policy is based. See “Controlling the scope of Manage views” on page 486. an OpsCenter user changes a policy while another user tries to remove the same policy. Ignore View filter is selected by default when you click Manage > Alert Policies. warning. An option called Ignore View filter has been added in the View drop-down list under Manage > Alert Policies. For instance. For example. Description Alert Condition Enabled This column determines whether the alert policy is enabled or not.

See “Creating. Enabled Alert Select this filter to view the alert policies that are enabled.Managing NetBackup using Symantec OpsCenter About managing alert policies 489 Table 8-2 Column Creation Time Manage > Alert Policies column headings (continued) Description This column lists the date and time when the alert policy was created. Filtering on type of alert policy A filter is available in the Manage > Alert Policies view to limit the types of alert policies that appear. These filters are available from the drop-down list which is present on top of the table. . Click a drill-down link from the Name column. This column lists the OpsCenter user who last modified the alert policy. Policies Disabled Select this filter to view the alert policies that are disabled. applying. Alert Policies You can also create your own filters which let you focus on only the specific alert policies that interest you. select Manage > Alert Policies. editing. and removing custom view filters” on page 87. The General tab displays all the details that are shown in the table. You can filter using any of the following three built-in filters. To view the details for a single alert policy 1 2 In the OpsCenter console. This column lists the date and time when the alert policy was last modified. Modification Time Modified By Viewing the details for a single alert policy All the details that are associated with an alert policy can be viewed from the bottom of the Manage > Alert Policies view under the General tab. The alert policy details are shown at the bottom of this view under the General tab. All Alert Policies Select this filter to view all alert policies.

You can create alert policies based on these alert conditions to detect when something goes wrong in your NetBackup environment and troubleshoot NetBackup. select Manage > Alert Policies. OpsCenter Alert conditions OpsCenter comes with a set of predefined alert conditions. You can specify email and SNMP recipients while creating an alert policy. For example. About creating (or changing) an alert policy You can create alert policies to detect when something goes wrong with NetBackup and troubleshoot it. You can monitor for frozen media and email the operator when the number of frozen media exceeds a threshold value.490 Managing NetBackup using Symantec OpsCenter About managing alert policies To filter on type of alert policy 1 2 In the OpsCenter console. The following topics provide more information about alerts. See “Adding an alert policy” on page 499. See “Additional information on job policy change condition” on page 498. See “About understanding alert counts in the Monitor view” on page 507. See “OpsCenter Alert conditions” on page 490. You can receive these alerts by logging on to OpsCenter. For these alert conditions. OpsCenter retrieves data from NetBackup based on a wait time (of up to 15 minutes). Select a filter from the drop-down list. you can create a policy to alert you when a job fails on a specific master server. Periodic alert conditions . OpsCenter retrieves data from NetBackup based on notifications from NBSL. You can create policies to automate responses to key events in your enterprise. Alert conditions can be divided into the following categories: Event-based alert conditions For these alert conditions. OpsCenter periodically retrieves data from NetBackup based on notifications and a wait time (of up to 15 minutes). The alerts help you to anticipate and handle problems before they occur. This time delay between the NetBackup Activity Monitor and the OpsCenter console can mean that many intermediate job states may be lost. and also by email or SNMP traps. Note that the drop-down list is located on top of the table. You can then take corrective action.

and descriptions. alert category.Managing NetBackup using Symantec OpsCenter About managing alert policies 491 Table 8-3 lists the alert conditions. .

Periodic .492 Managing NetBackup using Symantec OpsCenter About managing alert policies Table 8-3 Alert type Job Alert conditions in OpsCenter Alert condition Alert category High job failure rate Hung job Description Event-based An alert is generated when the job failure rate becomes more than the specified rate.

A job starts 10 minutes after a first check cycle and ends 13 minutes after the third check cycle is done. This time is a total execution of 33 (5 + 15 + 13) minutes. you can configure OpsCenter to ignore the time for which a job is in a queued state. a job may first be in a queued state before it becomes active. The Hung Job condition is checked every 15 minutes. the policy is checked four times. since the job has executed for 26 minutes (11 + 15 minutes). A job may not always be in an active state after it starts. Job finalized Events-based . an alert is raised at the third check. If you configure OpsCenter to ignore the queued time for a job. Depending upon when a job starts within a check cycle. an alert may not occur. If a job starts at 4 minutes after a first check. OpsCenter considers the start time of a job by default. and the job completes (job duration = 33) before the fourth check. For Hung Job alert. For example. The job was not yet started during the first check. Due to unavailability of resources. was running less than the threshold during the second (job duration = 5 minutes) and third checks (job duration = 20 minutes). OpsCenter considers the time when a job becomes active while checking the Hung Job condition. In this case. This also includes the time for which a job is in a queued state. but an alert is not raised. suppose a policy is created with a job threshold of 25 minutes. While checking the Hung Job condition.Managing NetBackup using Symantec OpsCenter About managing alert policies 493 Table 8-3 Alert type Alert conditions in OpsCenter (continued) Alert condition Alert category Description An alert is generated when a job hangs (runs for more than the specified time) for a selected policy or a client for a specified period. Note that the active start time of the first attempt is considered.

Low available media High suspended media Periodic High frozen media Periodic Zero Cleaning Left Events-based An alert is generated when a cleaning tape has zero cleaning left. . Exceeded max media mounts Media required for restore Events-based An alert is generated when a media exceeds the threshold number of mounts. Incomplete Job Events-based An alert is generated when a job of a specified type of the specified policy or client moves to an Incomplete state. Events-based An alert is generated when any of the selected media is frozen. Media Frozen media Suspended media Events-based An alert is generated when any of the selected media is suspended. Periodic An alert is generated when the number of available media becomes less than the predefined threshold value. The restore operation may require a specific media which contains the specific image to be restored. of the specified policy or client ended in the specified status. An alert is generated when the percentage of suspended media exceeds the predefined threshold value. An alert is generated when the percentage of frozen media exceeds the predefined threshold value.494 Managing NetBackup using Symantec OpsCenter About managing alert policies Table 8-3 Alert type Alert conditions in OpsCenter (continued) Alert condition Alert category Description An alert is generated when a job of specified type. Events-based An alert is generated when a restore operation requires media.

This does not necessarily mean that if you do not receive this alert. kilobytes (KB). If the policy has been defined for a server group. an alert is generated for every master server within the group that satisfies this criteria. the catalog backup was successful. bytes. terabytes (TB) or petabytes (PB) and generate alerts. megabytes (MB). gigabytes (GB). An alert is generated when catalog backup does not take place for a predefined time period. you can specify the threshold value for a particular policy in percentage. The generated alert can also show available catalog space using these units. The alert is not generated if no catalog backup policy exists for a master server. For Catalog Space low condition.Managing NetBackup using Symantec OpsCenter About managing alert policies 495 Table 8-3 Alert type Catalog Alert conditions in OpsCenter (continued) Alert condition Alert category Catalog Space low Periodic Description An alert is generated when space available for catalogs becomes less than the threshold value or size. . Catalog not Backed up Periodic Catalog Backup Disabled Periodic An alert is generated when all the catalog backup policies are disabled.

See “Adding an alert policy ” on page 597. An alert is generated when no cleaning tapes are left. See “About the Open Storage alert condition” on page 595. No Cleaning Tape Periodic Drive is Down Events-based An alert is generated when a drive in a specified robot or media server in the selected server context goes down. Events-based An alert is generated when the selected disk volume(s) is down. Disk Disk Pool Full Events-based An alert is generated when a disk pool(s) reaches the high water mark. High Down Drives OpenStorage Events-based An alert is generated when specific events occur in the NetApp devices. An alert is generated when a disk volume capacity is running below the threshold limit. An alert policy based on Disk Pool Full condition generates an alert only when the used capacity of the disk pool reaches the high water mark. Periodic An alert is generated when the percentage of down drives exceeds the predefined threshold value.496 Managing NetBackup using Symantec OpsCenter About managing alert policies Table 8-3 Alert type Device Alert conditions in OpsCenter (continued) Alert condition Alert category Mount Request Description Events-based An alert is generated on a media mount request. Disk Volume Down Low Disk Volume Periodic Capacity .

Master Server Unreachable Events-based An alert is generated when OpsCenter loses contact with the master server. Lost Contact with Events-based An alert is generated when OpsCenter loses Media Server contact with the media server. The Symantec ThreatCon alerts are cleared automatically when the ThreatCon level becomes less than the threshold level that you have specified. It does not necessarily mean that NetBackup backups are not working. then the alert is cleared automatically once the ThreatCon level becomes 2 or less. This alert condition means that the connection between OpsCenter and the managed NetBackup master server is lost. if you have created an alert policy that alerts you when the Symantec ThreatCon level becomes 3. select the Symantec ThreatCon alert condition and then specify the threshold ThreatCon rating. Symantec ThreatCon . and you do not have access to the ALL MASTER SERVERS view. For example. Others Service Stopped Events-based An alert is generated when the selected service stops on any of the selected servers in the selected view. Events-based An alert is generated when the Symantec ThreatCon level is equal to or more than the threshold level that you specify.Managing NetBackup using Symantec OpsCenter About managing alert policies 497 Table 8-3 Alert type Host Alert conditions in OpsCenter (continued) Alert condition Alert category Agent Server Communication break Periodic Description An alert is generated when the communication between Agent and OpsCenter Server breaks. alerts are not generated for the alert policy. By default. An alert policy based on the Agent Server Communication Break condition is always based on the ALL MASTER SERVERS view. this alert is automatically cleared when the communication is re-established. To create the alert policy. If you created an alert policy based on the Agent Server Communication Break condition.

If you select a particular job policy.498 Managing NetBackup using Symantec OpsCenter About managing alert policies Table 8-3 Alert type Alert conditions in OpsCenter (continued) Alert condition Alert category Job Policy Change Description Events-based An alert is generated when a policy attribute for a job policy is changed. Additional information on job policy change condition Review the following text for job policy alert condition. all the job policies are monitored for changes. If you do not select any job policy. Multiple alerts are generated if multiple attributes are changed for a job policy See “Additional information on job policy change condition” on page 498. only the selected job policy is monitored for change. Only the following policy attributes are monitored for job policies: Policy name Checkpoint interval Effective date Compression Block level incrementals Snapshot method Master server Collect bmr info Fail on error Frozen image Number of copies Residence Schedules Storage unit Policy client type Check point Backup network drives Encryption Offhost Snapshot arguments Client name Collect true image restore info Ext sec info Keyword phrase Off host backup Catalog Clients Volume pool .

3 Enter a Name. See “Alert Policy Wizard” on page 501. The Alert Policy Wizard appears. and Alert Condition on the General panel. To add an alert policy 1 2 In the OpsCenter console.Managing NetBackup using Symantec OpsCenter About managing alert policies 499 Jobs/Policy Cross mount points Allow multiple data streams Alternate client Individual file restore from raw Block increment Data mover type File list Max fragmentation size Pfi enabled Data classification name Policy active Priority True image recovery Keyword phrase Data mover Status Backup copy Disaster recovery Follows nfs mounts Max jobs per policy Proxy client Share group Adding an alert policy Follow the screens of the Alert Policy Wizard to define an alert policy. . you can skip the optional screens. Note: The Alert Policy Wizard is also used when you edit an alert policy. You may click Cancel to exit the wizard at any stage. See “OpsCenter Alert conditions” on page 490. Click Add. The required information and the required number of screens vary depending on the alert condition you choose. For some alert conditions. select Manage > Alert Policies. Click Next to continue. Description.

you can configure the severity for an email or trap ■ . do the following in the Severity section: ■ Select a severity level from the Alert Severity drop-down list. See “Adding email recipients” on page 506. You can select a view and a node that contains a group of master servers and also specific objects. the alert is still displayed in the Monitor > Alerts view. for the Job Finalized condition).) Select an appropriate severity level from the Severity of email/trap sent for cleared alert drop-down list. To select a specific object like a master server. See “Alert Policy Wizard” on page 501. You may also deselect a specific master server from a view by selecting the view and then deselecting the specific master server.500 Managing NetBackup using Symantec OpsCenter About managing alert policies 4 On the Alert Condition Properties panel. on the Actions panel. These attributes define and limit the alert. 6 Optionally. This is because the Symantec ThreatCon alert condition does not depend on any views or master servers. 7 Optionally on the Actions panel. For many alert conditions (for example. Note that if you create an alert policy and do not define any recipients. you can select email or SNMP recipients (or both) to receive the alert notification. See “Adding SNMP trap recipients” on page 507. first deselect the view or node that contains the master server and then select the master server. Click Next to continue. The attributes differ for each alert condition. the alert is displayed in the Monitor > Alerts view. specify attributes for the alert condition that you selected. select the view that should be verified for the alert condition from the drop-down menu. Click Next. in the Email Recipients and Trap Recipients sections. You must select at least one object or node for a view from this page. With Severity of email/trap sent for cleared alert option. 5 On the Scope panel. you may need to enter threshold attributes and other required or optional attributes. (If this alert occurs. You may also select only specific objects of a particular view or node to be checked for the alert condition. Note: This page is not shown if you have selected the Symantec ThreatCon alert condition.

. Deselect the Activate Condition option if you want to deactivate the policy. By default. Select an alert condition from the list of alert conditions that are available.Managing NetBackup using Symantec OpsCenter About managing alert policies 501 that is sent when an alert is cleared. ■ The Activate Condition option is checked by default. See “OpsCenter Alert conditions” on page 490. Click Finish once the policy is successfully created. the policy is active once you create it. 8 9 Click Save to save the alert policy. Name is a required field. The name must be unique. See “Managing an alert policy ” on page 508. You can always activate or deactivate the policy later from the OpsCenter console. Alert Policy Wizard The Alert Policy Wizard consists of four panels. Table 8-4 Setting Name Alert Policy Wizard General Panel Description Enter a name for the alert policy. The default severity level is Informational. Description Alert Condition Enter a description for the alert policy.

The attributes differ for each alert condition. for the Job Finalized condition). >55 or >70. For alert conditions like High Job Failure Rate and Job Finalized. For many alert conditions (for example. >50 A value can be a range of exit status like 20-35 or all exit status below 40 like <40.502 Managing NetBackup using Symantec OpsCenter About managing alert policies Table 8-5 Setting Alert Policy Wizard Alert Condition Properties Panel Description Specify attributes for the alert condition that you selected. Any combinations of this format can be used like 20-40. you may need to enter values for Exit Status to Include or Exit Status to Exclude field. <40. 76 Specify properties for the selected alert condition . These attributes define and limit the alert. you may need to enter threshold attributes and other required or optional attributes. You can provide multiple values in this field that are separated by comma in the following format: 20-35. 36.

Managing NetBackup using Symantec OpsCenter About managing alert policies 503 Table 8-6 Setting View Alert Policy Wizard Scope Panel Description .

you can select the default view ALL MASTER SERVERS to be checked for the alert condition. In case. Consider a scenario where there are two objects server A and server B in a particular view like ALL MASTER SERVERS. For example. which is also part of another selected view. all the master servers that are currently in the view or node are automatically selected.504 Managing NetBackup using Symantec OpsCenter About managing alert policies Table 8-6 Setting Alert Policy Wizard Scope Panel (continued) Description Select the view that should be verified for the alert condition. You can select a view and a node that contains a group of master servers and also specific objects. To select a specific master server. You may also deselect a specific master server from a view by selecting the view and then deselecting the specific master server. for the Job . media servers etc. These attributes are located under the applicable views or nodes for specific alert conditions. For example. You may also select only specific objects of a particular view or node to be checked for the alert condition. For this reason. you have selected the ALL MASTER SERVERS view and then specifically deselected server B . For example. Note that you can also view and select additional attributes like policies. you may select only a specific master server(s) under the default view ALL MASTER SERVERS to be checked for the alert condition. When you select a view like ALL MASTER SERVERS or a node that contains a group of master servers. This is because you have specifically deselected server B from the ALLMASTERSERVER view. the deselection or exclusion is given a higher priority because of which the master server is not verified for the alert condition. clients. first deselect the view or node that contains the master server and then select the master server. In addition. and in addition if you have selected a view or node that also contains server B. on expanding the views and nodes from this page (wherever applicable). master servers that you may add later to this view or node are automatically selected and hence verified for the alert condition. server B is not verified for the alert condition even though it is a part of the selected view or node. it is recommended that you do not repeat a master server across groups. When you specifically deselect a master server from a view.

or view from this page. You must select at least one object. You can view the applicable attributes like policy name. Select a severity level from the Alert Severity drop-down list. you can select the view as well as the specific policies and clients that should be checked for the alert.) . (If this alert occurs. client name. node. robot number. media server name. drive IDs etc. Select SNMP recipients to receive the alert notification. Table 8-7 Setting Email Recipients Trap Recipients Alert Severity Alert Policy Wizard Actions Panel Description Select email recipients to receive the alert notification. the alert is displayed in the Monitor > Alerts view. for the following alert conditions: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Job Finalized Drive is Down Media Required for Restore Service Stopped Frozen Media Suspended Media Exceeded Max Media Mounts Disk Group Full Disk Volume Down Job Policy Changed Hung Job Note: This page is not shown if you have selected the Symantec ThreatCon alert condition.Managing NetBackup using Symantec OpsCenter About managing alert policies 505 Table 8-6 Setting Alert Policy Wizard Scope Panel (continued) Description Finalized alert condition. This is because the Symantec ThreatCon alert condition does not depend on any views or master servers.

You can always activate or deactivate the policy later from the OpsCenter console. For example. Whenever this alert is cleared. This email or trap also has a Critical severity. As a result. On the Actions screen. you can configure the severity for an email or trap that is sent when an alert is cleared. You can now configure the severity for this email or trap from Critical to some other severity like “Informational” while creating the alert policy. To add email recipients 1 2 While creating an alert policy using the Alert Policy Wizard. or Bcc from the Email Recipients section. With Severity of email/trap sent for cleared alert option. click To. you receive an email or trap that informs you that the alert has been cleared. In OpsCenter. go to the Actions screen. Deselect the Activate Condition option if you want to deactivate the policy. The default severity level is Informational. an email or trap informing the user that the alert is cleared is sent with the same severity that is defined in the alert policy. By default.506 Managing NetBackup using Symantec OpsCenter About managing alert policies Table 8-7 Setting Alert Policy Wizard Actions Panel (continued) Description Select an appropriate severity level from the Severity of email/trap sent for cleared alert drop-down list. . Cc. the policy will be active once you create it. you receive Hung Job alert with Critical severity. See “Adding an alert policy” on page 499. you may have created an alert policy for a Hung Job alert condition with a Critical severity. See “Managing an alert policy ” on page 508. When this Hung Job alert gets cleared. Note that you can configure the severity only for email or trap. Adding email recipients Follow this procedure to add email recipients to an Alert Policy. an alert is raised with the severity specified in the alert policy. Severity of email/trap sent for cleared alert Activate the Policy The Activate Condition option is checked by default. This is the default behavior.

On the Actions screen. This means that only one alert is raised for the group if the job failure rate for the servers in the selected group is more than a user-defined threshold. An alert is not generated for every master server that is a part of the group. 4 Adding SNMP trap recipients Follow this procedure to add SNMP trap recipients to an Alert Policy. the alert is listed only when you select the server group on which alert policy is created (or a parent group of that group). In this case. select the specific recipients from the Recipient Name column and click To. In the Add Trap Recipients dialog box.Managing NetBackup using Symantec OpsCenter About managing alert policies 507 3 In the Add Email Recipients dialog box. select the specific recipients from the Recipient Name column and click To. a Frozen Media alert occurs when any of the selected media on the selected master server (object) are frozen. The alert does not apply to a single master server in the group but applies to the server group on which the alert policy was created. About understanding alert counts in the Monitor view Alerts apply only to the object (master server) where the corresponding alert policy is created. select the specific recipients from the Recipient Name column and click To. To add SNMP trap recipients 1 2 3 4 While creating an alert policy using the Alert Policy Wizard. But some types of alerts. Click OK. go to the Actions screen. jobs from all of the master servers in the selected group are used to calculate the job failure rate. Click OK. Consider a case where you create an alert policy for a selected view that contains two master servers. Since this master server is present in the view. Add Trap Recipients dialog box In the Add Trap Recipients dialog box. Therefore. When alerts are raised for that policy they are raised on the selected object. For example. . Cc. or Bcc based on your requirements. for example High Job Failure Rate apply across groups. the alert is listed when you select the specific server as well as the specific view from the View Pane. you select an alert condition of type of Frozen Media. For creating the policy. click To from the Trap Recipients section.

copy. You can copy and use an alert policy on another managed master server. Select an alert policy from the Name column in the table. See “Adding an alert policy” on page 499. activate. The Alert Policy Wizard is used to create or edit a policy. the alert is raised on the server since the server is the selected object. The copy of the alert policy is available in the alert policy details table where you can make changes to it. select Manage > Alert Policies. To delete an alert policy 1 2 3 In the OpsCenter console. To copy an alert policy 1 2 3 In the OpsCenter console. or deactivate an alert policy. . Click Edit. delete. Click Delete.508 Managing NetBackup using Symantec OpsCenter About managing alert policies If you create this type of alert policy for a single managed server. the alert condition specific to the policy is selected by default in the Alert Policy Wizard. Select an alert policy from the Name column in the table. select Manage > Alert Policies. Click More and then click Copy from the drop-down list. To edit an alert policy 1 2 3 In the OpsCenter console. Select an alert policy from the Name column in the table. The alert can also be viewed if all the nodes or views that contain the master server are selected. When you edit an alert policy. The following OpsCenter alert policy conditions apply across groups: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ High Down Drives High Frozen Media High Job Failure Rate High Suspended Media Low Disk Volume Capacity Low Available Media Managing an alert policy Use the following procedure to edit. You cannot select a different alert condition while editing an alert policy. select Manage > Alert Policies.

Click More and then click Enable or Disable from the drop-down list. Click OK. Included in this view are subtabs for Storage Unit. select Manage > Alert Policies. The copy of the alert policy is available in the alert policy details table where you can make changes to it. enter the new name for the alert policy. See “Manage > Storage > Storage Unit Group Explains the capabilities that are available view” on page 512. Click More and then select View Alerts from the drop-down list. Storage Unit Group. using the Manage > Storage > Storage Unit Group view. . See “Controlling the scope of Manage views” on page 486. Viewing the alerts associated with an alert policy Use the following procedure to view the alerts that are associated with an alert policy. Table 8-8 lists the topics on how to manage NetBackup storage. Table 8-8 Topic Topic contents and descriptions Description See “Manage > Storage > Storage Unit view” Explains the capabilities that are available on page 510. select Manage > Alert Policies. using the Manage > Storage > Storage Unit view. Select an alert policy from the Name column in the table. To view the alerts associated with an alert policy 1 2 3 In the OpsCenter console. Using these subtabs you can view detailed information about NetBackup storage for the current View pane selection. and Storage Lifecycle Policy.Managing NetBackup using Symantec OpsCenter About managing NetBackup storage 509 4 5 In the Copy Alert Policy dialog box. Select an alert policy from the Name column in the table. About managing NetBackup storage This view is displayed when you select Manage > Storage. To enable or disable an alert policy 1 2 3 In the OpsCenter console.

The table that appears in this view shows the following columns by default: Table 8-9 Column Heading Name Manage > Storage > Storage Unit view Description This column lists the name of the storage unit. This column specifies whether the storage unit is available exclusively on demand. See “Controlling the scope of Manage views” on page 486.510 Managing NetBackup using Symantec OpsCenter About managing NetBackup storage Table 8-8 Topic Topic contents and descriptions (continued) Description Explains the capabilities that are available using the Manage > Storage > Storage Lifecycle Policy view. This column lists the density of the storage unit. See “Manage > Storage > Storage Lifecycle Policy view” on page 513. There is one row in the table for each storage unit for the current selection in the View pane. but can be added to your view by clicking the Table Settings icon: ■ ■ ■ Storage Unit Type Capacity Free Space . This column specifies a unique. Robot Type Robot Number Density On Demand Path Not all of the available columns appear initially in this view. Click the link to view details about the storage unit. This happens only when a policy or schedule is explicitly configured to use this storage unit. This column specifies the absolute path to a file system or a volume available for disk backups. This column specifies the type of robot (if any) that the storage unit contains. This view shows the details for a storage unit for the current View pane selection. . The following columns do not appear. logical identification number for the robotic library. Manage > Storage > Storage Unit view This view is displayed when you select Manage > Storage > Storage Unit.

See “About using tables” on page 83. The following task can be performed from this view: View the details for a single storage unit See “Viewing the details for a single storage unit” on page 512. Concurrent Jobs Staging Low Water Mark Can Exist On Root NDMP Host Enable Block Sharing Transfer Throttle Master Server Last Seen Time Host Fragment Size Multiplexing Disk Type Time Last Selected Disk Pool Host List Configured for Snapshots Primary Replication See the online NetBackup Administration Console Help for a detailed description of these fields.Managing NetBackup using Symantec OpsCenter About managing NetBackup storage 511 ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ High Water Mark Max. . More information about how to customize tables and view specific columns is available.

. Click a storage unit name (drilldown link) from the Name column in the table. Storage Unit Selection Last Seen Time Not all of the available columns appear initially in this view. See “Controlling the scope of Manage views” on page 486. The storage unit details are shown at the bottom of this view under the General tab. The table contains one row for each storage unit group for the current selection in the View pane. This view shows the details for a storage unit group for the current View pane selection. The table that appears in this view shows the following columns by default: Table 8-10 Column heading Name Manage > Storage > Storage Unit Group view Description This column lists the name of the storage unit group. select Manage > Storage > Storage Unit. The following columns do not appear. This tab displays many of the available columns of the table. but can be added to your view by clicking the Table Settings icon: ■ ■ ■ Configured for Snapshots Primary Replication The following task can be performed from this view: . Click the link to view details about the storage unit group.512 Managing NetBackup using Symantec OpsCenter About managing NetBackup storage Viewing the details for a single storage unit Use the following procedure to view the details for a single storage unit. This column specifies the order that storage units are selected when they are included in a group. To view details for a single storage unit 1 2 In the OpsCenter console. This column specifies the date and time when the storage unit group was last seen. Manage > Storage > Storage Unit Group view This view is displayed when you select Manage > Storage > Storage Unit Group.

Click the link to view details about the storage lifecycle Policy. Manage > Storage > Storage Lifecycle Policy view This view is displayed when you select Manage > Storage > Storage Lifecycle Policy. The table contains one row for each Storage lifecycle policy for the current selection in the View pane. See “Controlling the scope of Manage views” on page 486. Version . Storage Unit To view details for a single storage unit group 1 2 In the OpsCenter console. This column lists the version of the storage lifecycle policy. Viewing the details for a single storage unit group Use the following procedure to view the details for a storage unit group. Click the name of a storage unit group (drilldown link) from the Name column in the table. The table that appears in this view shows the following columns by default: Table 8-11 Column heading Name Manage > Storage > Storage Lifecycle Policy view Description This column lists the name of the storage lifecycle policy. This view shows the storage lifecycle policy details for the current View pane selection.Managing NetBackup using Symantec OpsCenter About managing NetBackup storage 513 View the details for a single storage unit group See “Viewing the details for a single storage unit group” on page 513. The storage unit group details are shown at the bottom of this view under the following tabs: General This tab shows the details of the storage unit group that are also shown in the table. This tab shows the details of the storage units that are a part of the storage unit group. select Manage > Storage > Storage Unit Group. A storage lifecycle consists of one or more storage units.

Any policy with a priority greater than zero has priority over the default setting. Data Classification Job Priority Master Server The following tasks can be performed from this view: View the details of a single storage lifecycle See “Viewing the details for a single storage policy lifecycle policy ” on page 514. Viewing the details for a single storage lifecycle policy Use the following procedure to view the details for a single storage lifecycle Policy. View the details of a master server that is associated with a storage lifecycle policy See “Viewing the details for a master server associated with a storage lifecycle policy ” on page 515. Storage Destinations To view the details for a storage lifecycle policy 1 2 In the OpsCenter console. This tab shows the details of the storage destinations that are a part of the storage lifecycle policy. the lowest priority possible. This column lists the master server that is associated with the storage lifecycle Policy. Click the name of a storage lifecycle policy (drilldown link) from the Name column in the table. the data might be classified as gold or silver. . For example. Click the link to view more details about the master server. which applies to all of the storage units in the lifecycle. The default for all policies is 0. The details are shown at the bottom of this view under the following tabs: General This tab shows the details of the storage unit group that are also shown in the table. . select Manage > Storage > Storage Lifecycle Policy.514 Managing NetBackup using Symantec OpsCenter About managing NetBackup storage Table 8-11 Column heading Manage > Storage > Storage Lifecycle Policy view (continued) Description This column lists the data classification that has been selected for the storage lifecycle. This column specifies the priority that a policy has for backup resources.

Managing NetBackup using Symantec OpsCenter About managing NetBackup devices 515 Viewing the details for a master server associated with a storage lifecycle policy Use the following procedure to view the details for a master server that is associated with a storage lifecycle policy. Explains the capabilities that are available using the Manage > Devices > SAN Client view. The details are shown on a separate page. See “Manage > Devices > FT Server view” on page 526. See “Manage > Devices > Disk Pool view” on page 521. select Manage > Storage > Storage Lifecycle Policy. About managing NetBackup devices Under certain circumstances there may be issues among multiple OpsCenter users managing devices. This view shows details for the drives that are configured for use by NetBackup for the current . Explains the capabilities that are available using the Manage > Devices > Disk Pool view. Explains the capabilities that are available using the Manage > Devices > FT Server view. Click the name of the master server (drilldown link) from the Master Server column in the table. Table 8-12 Topic See “Manage > Devices > Drive view” on page 515. See “Manage > Devices > Robot view” on page 519. Explains the capabilities that are available using the Manage > Devices > Robot view. a user brings a drive down while another user tries to bring up the same drive. Topic contents and descriptions Description Explains the capabilities that are available using the Manage > Devices > Drive view. See “Manage > Devices > SAN Client view” on page 524. For instance. Manage > Devices > Drive view This view is displayed when you select Manage > Devices > Drive. Table 8-12 lists the topics on how to manage NetBackup devices. To view the details for a master server associated with a storage lifecycle Policy 1 2 In the OpsCenter console.

Example: TL4. This column specifies the type of drive. Example: hcart2. See “Controlling the scope of Manage views” on page 486. If multiple drive paths are configured. This column lists the name of the master server that is associated with the drive. hcart3. but can be added to your view by clicking the Table Settings icon: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Serial Number Cleaning Frequency Shared Inquiry Information Volume Header Path ACS LSM . Device Host Master Server Drive Type Robot Type This column specifies the type of robot that contains this drive. The column contains No if the path is not enabled. If the drive is configured as a shared drive (SSO). Not all of the available columns appear initially in this view. 4MM. This column lists the name of the device host (media server) where this drive is attached. this column contains Multiple. The following columns do not appear. TLD. This view shows information about all the drives and also includes disabled or unreachable drives. Click the link to view details about the drive. this column contains Multiple. Enabled This column contains Yes if the path is enabled.516 Managing NetBackup using Symantec OpsCenter About managing NetBackup devices View pane selection. The table that appears in this view shows the following columns by default: Table 8-13 Column Heading Drive Name Manage > Devices > Drive view Description This column lists the configured name of the drive. If multiple drive paths are configured. this column contains Multiple.

View the details of a master server that is associated with a drive . The following tasks can be performed from this view: View the details for a single drive See “Viewing the details for a single drive” on page 518. See “Viewing the details for a master server associated with a drive” on page 518. See “About using tables” on page 83. More information about how to customize tables and view specific columns is available.Managing NetBackup using Symantec OpsCenter About managing NetBackup devices 517 ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Panel Drive Vendor Drive Identifier Robot Number Robot Drive Number Recorded Media ID Assigned Host Control Host Name Evsn Last Clean Time Local Control Mounted Time NDMP Occupy Index Opr Comment Ready Request ID Scan Host VM Host Write Enabled See the online NetBackup Administration Console Help for a detailed description of these fields.

Select this filter to view all drives. Filtering on NetBackup drive category You can sort and filter this view to focus on the specific type of drives that you want to see.518 Managing NetBackup using Symantec OpsCenter About managing NetBackup devices Use filters to view specific drives See “Filtering on NetBackup drive category” on page 518. Viewing the details for a single drive Use the following procedure to view the details of a single drive. you can apply a filter that displays only those drives that are up. Details for the specific master server are shown on a separate page. select Manage > Devices > Drive. You can filter by using any of the built-in filters. The following built-in filters are available: All Drives All Drives is the default filter. Viewing the details for a master server associated with a drive Use the following procedure to view the details of a master server that is associated with a drive. Up Drives . all drive paths are up. Select this filter to view only those drives that are up. select Manage > Devices > Drive. Click the name of the drive (drilldown link) from the Master Server column in the table. Detailed properties and status for the drive are shown at the bottom of the view under the General tab. To view the details for a single drive 1 2 In the OpsCenter console. The Paths tab shows the paths that were configured for the drive. For example. Click the name of the drive (drilldown link) from the Drive Name column in the table. To view the details for a master server 1 2 In the OpsCenter console. These filters are available from the drop-down list which is present on top of the table. For up drives.

Device Host This column lists the name of the device host where this robot is attached. this column contains the name of the host that controls the robot. Click the link to view details about the robot. For mixed drives. editing. Serial Number Robot Control Host This column contains the robot serial number. See “Creating. Manage > Devices > Robot view This view is displayed when you select Manage > Devices > Robot. some drive paths are up and some drive paths are down. Mixed Drives In addition to using the built-in filters. This view shows details for the robots that are configured for use by NetBackup for the current View pane selection. you can also create your own custom filters. select Manage > Devices > Drive. The robot name contains the type and number of the robot. all drive paths are down. If the robot is controlled by a remote host. See “Controlling the scope of Manage views” on page 486. applying.Managing NetBackup using Symantec OpsCenter About managing NetBackup devices 519 Down Drives Select this filter to view only those drives that are down. . and removing custom view filters” on page 87. Click the link to view details about the device host. To filter details by type of drive 1 2 In the OpsCenter console. Select a filter from the drop-down list. Select this filter to view mixed drives. Note that the drop-down list is located on top of the table. for example TLD(3). For down drives. The table that appears in this view shows the following columns by default: Table 8-14 Column heading Robot Name Manage > Devices > Robot view Description This column contains the name of the robot.

Not all of the available columns appear initially in this view. . More information about how to customize tables and view specific columns is available. The following columns do not appear. but can be added to your view by clicking the Table Settings icon: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Robot Type Robot Number Inquiry Information Last Seen Time Max Drive Max Slot Remote ID VM Host See the online NetBackup Administration Console Help for a detailed description of these fields. See “Viewing the details for a master server associated with a robot” on page 521. See “About using tables” on page 83. See “Viewing the details of a device host associated with a robot” on page 521.520 Managing NetBackup using Symantec OpsCenter About managing NetBackup devices Table 8-14 Column heading Master Server Manage > Devices > Robot view (continued) Description This column lists the master server that is associated with the robot. View the details for a master server that is associated with a robot View the details for the device host that is associated with a robot Viewing the details for a single robot Use the following procedure to view the details of a single robot. The following tasks can be performed from this view: View the details of a robot See “Viewing the details for a single robot” on page 520. Click the link to view details about the master server.

The table that appears in this view shows the following columns by default: . select Manage > Devices > Robot. The Paths tab shows the paths that were configured for the robot. To view the details for a master server associated with a robot 1 2 In the OpsCenter console. Detailed properties for the device host are shown on a separate page. Click the name of the master server (drilldown link) from the Device Host column in the table.Managing NetBackup using Symantec OpsCenter About managing NetBackup devices 521 To view the details for a single robot 1 2 In the OpsCenter console. Click the name of the robot (drilldown link) from the Robot Name column in the table. See “Controlling the scope of Manage views” on page 486. Viewing the details for a master server associated with a robot Use the following procedure to view the details of a master server that is associated with a robot. Manage > Devices > Disk Pool view This view is displayed when you select Manage > Devices > Disk Pool. To view the details for a device host associated with a robot 1 2 In the OpsCenter console. Detailed properties for the robot are shown at the bottom of the view under the General tab. select Manage > Devices > Robot. select Manage > Devices > Robot. Click the name of the master server (drilldown link) from the Master Server column in the table. Viewing the details of a device host associated with a robot Use the following procedure to view the details of a device host that is associated with a robot. This view shows details for the disk pools that are configured for use by NetBackup in the current View pane selection. Detailed properties for the master server are shown on a separate page.

522 Managing NetBackup using Symantec OpsCenter About managing NetBackup devices Table 8-15 Column heading Name Server Type Manage > Devices > Disk Pool view Description This column lists the name of the disk pool This column lists the storage server type. (The default is 80%. This column lists the low water mark for the disk pool. This column lists the estimated amount of disk space available for storage after file metadata overhead is taken into account. unformatted size of the storage in the disk pool. but can be added to your view by clicking the Table Settings icon: ■ ■ ■ ■ Imported Configured for Snapshots Primary Replication See the online NetBackup Administration Console Help for a detailed description of these fields. The following columns do not appear. This column lists the total raw. Number of Volumes Used Capacity Available Space Raw Size Usable Size Low Watermark (%) High Watermark (%) % Full Master Server State Not all of the available columns appear initially in this view.) When the capacity of the disk pool returns to the low water mark. This column lists the high water mark for the disk pool (The default is 98%. . the server type depends on the vendor name. NetBackup again assigns jobs to the storage unit. For OpenStorage. This column lists the available space in the disk pool in GB. This column lists the name of the master server (link) that is associated with the disk pool.). This column lists the state of the disk pool like Up. This column lists how full the disk pool is in percentage. This column lists the number of disk volumes in the disk pool. This column lists the amount of storage space in use.

View the details for a master server Viewing the details for a disk pool Use the following procedure to view the details for a disk pool. .Managing NetBackup using Symantec OpsCenter About managing NetBackup devices 523 More information about how to customize tables and view specific columns is available. The details for the disk pool are shown at the bottom of the Manage > Devices > Disk Pool view under the following tabs: General This tab shows the detailed properties for a disk pool. Disk Volume This tab shows details about the disk volumes that are associated with the disk pool. See “About using tables” on page 83. select Manage > Devices > Disk Pool. The details are shown at the bottom of this view. The following tasks can be performed from this view: View the details for a disk pool See “Viewing the details for a disk pool” on page 523. See “Viewing the details for a master server associated with a disk pool” on page 523. Click the master server link to view details about the master server that is associated with the disk pool. Click the name of the disk pool (drilldown link) from the Name column in the table. This tab shows details about the storage servers that are associated with the disk pool. Viewing the details for a master server associated with a disk pool Use the following procedure to view the details of a master server that is associated with a SAN client. Storage Server To view the details for a disk pool 1 2 In the OpsCenter console.

Click the name of the master server (drilldown link) from the Master Server column in the table. The following task can be performed from this view: . This column lists the number of NetBackup media servers that support FT transport and that the client can send data to or receive data from.524 Managing NetBackup using Symantec OpsCenter About managing NetBackup devices To view the details for a master server associated with a disk pool 1 2 In the OpsCenter console. The number of minutes to wait for an FT media server for a restore operation. The number of minutes to wait for an FT media server for a backup operation. The different states can be active. of FT Media Servers This column determines when to use the FT media server. disabled etc. Detailed properties for the master server are shown on a separate page. The table that appears in this view shows the following columns by default: Table 8-16 Column heading Name State Manage > Devices > SAN Client view Description This column lists the name of the SAN client. Usage Preference No. This view shows details for the SAN clients that are configured for use by NetBackup in the current View pane selection. select Manage > Devices > Disk Pool. Manage > Devices > SAN Client view This view is displayed when you select Manage > Devices > SAN Client. See “Controlling the scope of Manage views” on page 486. Backup Wait Period Restore Wait Period Master Server The Version column does not appear. but can be added to your view by clicking the Table Settings icon. This column lists the master server that is associated with the SAN client. This column lists the state of the FT device on the SAN client.

select Manage > Devices > SAN Client. See “Viewing the details for a master server associated with a SAN client” on page 525. The details for the SAN Client are shown at the bottom of Manage > Devices > SAN Client view under the following tabs: General This tab shows detailed properties and status for the SAN client. To view the details for a master server associated with a SAN client 1 2 In the OpsCenter console. View the details of a master server that is associated with a SAN client Viewing the details for a SAN client Use the following procedure to view the details of a SAN client. This tab shows the FT target devices information for the selected SAN client. Click the name of the SAN client (drilldown link) from the Name column in the table. Click the master server link to view details about the master server that is associated with the SAN client. select Manage > Devices > SAN Client. . The details are shown at the bottom of this view. Click the name of the master server (drilldown link) from the Master Server column in the table. Detailed properties for the master server are shown on a separate page.Managing NetBackup using Symantec OpsCenter About managing NetBackup devices 525 View the details of a SAN client See “Viewing the details for a SAN client” on page 525. FT device To view the details for a SAN client 1 2 In the OpsCenter console. Viewing the details for a master server associated with a SAN client Use the following procedure to view the details of a master server that is associated with a SAN client.

This column lists the master server that is associated with the FT server. This column specifies the number of FT connections to allow to a media server. Click the link to view details about the robot. This tab shows the FT target devices information for the selected FT server. Max Allowed Connections The following tasks can be performed from this view: View the details of an FT server See “Viewing the details for an FT server ” on page 526. FT device .526 Managing NetBackup using Symantec OpsCenter About managing NetBackup devices Manage > Devices > FT Server view This view is displayed when you select Manage > Devices > FT Server. The table that appears in this view shows the following columns by default: Table 8-17 Column heading Name Manage > Devices > FT Server view Description This column contains the name of the FT media server. State Master Server This column lists the state of the FT media server. See “Viewing the details for a master server associated with an FT server” on page 527. This view shows details for the FT media servers that are configured for use by NetBackup for the current View pane selection. View the details for a master server that is associated with an FT server Viewing the details for an FT server Use the following procedure to view the details for an FT server. See “Controlling the scope of Manage views” on page 486. The details for the FT server are shown at the bottom of Manage > Devices > FT Server view under the following tabs: General This tab shows detailed properties and status for the FT server.

About Operational Restore and Guided Recovery operations Use the Manage > Restore tab to perform operational restore or Guided recovery operations. The OpsCenter console lets you search for and view the backed up files or directories for multiple source clients in a consolidated manner. . The details are shown at the bottom of this view. select Manage > Devices > FT Server. The Restore Files and Directories link is enabled only if you have permission to access either a client view or a master server view and if any client or master server is connected to the OpsCenter console. select Manage > Devices > FT Server. Click the name of the Fibre Transport server (drilldown link) from the Name column in the table. Viewing the details for a master server associated with an FT server Use the following procedure to view the details of a master server that is associated with an FT server. Click the name of the master server (drilldown link) from the Master Server column in the table. review the following considerations: ■ You must have backups of files and directories that you want to restore. The Restore subtab is not visible when you log on as Reporter. Detailed properties for the master server are shown on a separate page.Managing NetBackup using Symantec OpsCenter About Operational Restore and Guided Recovery operations 527 To view the details for an FT server 1 2 In the OpsCenter console. The Clone Oracle Database link is enabled only if you are permitted to access a master server view or if a master server is connected to the OpsCenter console. To view the details for a master server associated with an FT server 1 2 In the OpsCenter console. Before restoring files and directories from the OpsCenter console. About Operational Restores from OpsCenter You can now search for and restore the backed up files or directories from multiple source clients easily from the OpsCenter console.

Only one user session is allowed per user at a given time. True Image.5. Note that you may have backed up files and directories using previous NetBackup versions. The following table provides the details on whether the Search and Restore functionality is available when the client name is the Host name. DNS name etc. If you upgrade from an earlier NetBackup version to NetBackup 7. You must add the NetBackup 7.5 master server can be at 7. or DNS name then only the Search functionality is available.528 Managing NetBackup using Symantec OpsCenter About Operational Restore and Guided Recovery operations ■ You can search for and restore files and directories only from NetBackup 7. Raw Partition. the backups that you have taken with the earlier version can be searched and restored using OpsCenter 7.5 master servers. UUID. If the client name is the same as display name.: Client Name Type Host Name Display Name UUID DNS Name ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Search Yes Yes Yes Yes Restore Yes No No No About timeframe selection You can search for files and directories that were backed up in a specific timeframe.5 or a lower version that is supported. the search and restore operations work only if the client name is the same as hostname.5.5. You cannot search for or restore files and directories from NetBackup master servers prior to 7. Only those views are displayed that you can access. display name. View-based access is used to control the clients that you can search and restore to. are not supported. The NetBackup client that is attached to a NetBackup 7. Virtual Machine etc. Other restore types like Archived. OpsCenter supports normal restores only.5 master server to the OpsCenter console for restoring files and directories from a client that is associated with the master server. The following options are available: . UUID. For VMWare or HyperV clients. You cannot perform restore operations in this case.

2011 12 A. then OpsCenter searches files and directories that were backed up from Jan 9. The time interval associated with the selected timeframe (Week) is displayed on the left side of the page. The time interval associated with the selected timeframe (Year) is displayed on the left side of the page. 2011 12 A. Select Year if you want to view files and directories that were backed up one year prior to the current date.M. You can also adjust the time interval by clicking the arrows on the left and right respectively. Day Select Day if you want to view the files and directories that were backed up in the last 24 hours. 2012 11:00 A. select Today. Month 90 Days Year .M.M. For example. You can also adjust the time interval by clicking the arrows on the left and right respectively. OpsCenter searches all files and directories that were backed up from May 31. if today is May 31’st. Select 90 Days if you want to view files and directories that were backed up in the last 90 days. You can also adjust the time interval by clicking the arrows on the left and right respectively. You can also adjust the time interval by clicking the arrows on the left and right respectively. 11:00 A. For example. Week Select Week if you want to view files and directories that were backed up in the last seven days.M.Managing NetBackup using Symantec OpsCenter About Operational Restore and Guided Recovery operations 529 Today If you have backed up a file today and want to restore it. Select Month if you want to view files and directories that were backed up in the last month.M. if you select Day and click Search on January 10’th. The timeframe is displayed on the left side of the page at the top. to June 1. The time interval associated with the selected timeframe (Day) is displayed on the left side of the page. to Jan 10. 2012 11:00 A. This is selected by default. The time interval associated with the selected timeframe (Month) is displayed on the left side of the page. The time interval associated with the selected timeframe (90 Days) is displayed on the left side of the page. You can also adjust the time interval by clicking the arrows on the left and right respectively.

Using the Customize option. resume etc.530 Managing NetBackup using Symantec OpsCenter About Operational Restore and Guided Recovery operations Customize You can customize the timeframe selection by clicking Customize and specifying an absolute timeframe or relative timeframe. you can view data for any timeframe that you want like you can view backed up data for the previous three weeks. The Restore Operator can only select and perform operations on restore jobs in the Monitor > Jobs view. . Files and Directories Restore Wizard The Files and Directories Restore Wizard consists of three panels. Note: In addition. Only those views are displayed that you can access. See “User access rights and UI functions in OpsCenter” on page 287. view-based access is used to control the clients that you can search and restore to. About the Restore Operator A new user role named Restore Operator has been added to control access to the Manage > Restore view. The Restore Operator can neither select any other jobs (like backup jobs) nor perform any operations on them like cancel. You can view Manage > Restore only when you log on to OpsCenter with the following roles: ■ ■ ■ ■ Security Administrator Administrator Restore Operator Operator The Restore subtab is not visible when you log on as Reporter. restart. The time interval associated with the selected timeframe is displayed on the left side of the page.

overwrite options etc. On this panel. See “Restore Options panel” on page 553. for the selected client. or use the Restore Cart. . When you select a specific timeframe. See “Select Files or Directories > Browse options” on page 547. The Restore Cart also allows you to add files from multiple search and browse operations to a Cart. See “Restore Cart” on page 551. You can restore these files and directories later by adding them to the Restore Cart. See “Summary panel” on page 559. See “Select Files or Directories > Search options” on page 531.Managing NetBackup using Symantec OpsCenter About Operational Restore and Guided Recovery operations 531 Table 8-18 Panel Files and Directories Restore Wizard Description The Search Files or Directories panel allows you to perform simple or advanced search operations for locating specific files or directories that you want to restore. browse clients. you can see Select Files or Directories > Search view by default. You can also browse other tabs and subtabs like Restore Cart and Browse. Search Files or Directories panel Use the Select Files or Directroies panel to search files and directories. The Select Files or Directories > Search view lets you perform simple or advanced search operations based on the timeframe and search options that you select. only the backups that occurred in the selected timeframe are searched. Select Files or Directories > Search options This view is shown by default when you select Manage > Restore and then click the Restore Files and Directories link. Summary The Summary panel displays the list of files or directories that you selected for restore. Search Files or Directories Restore Options The Restore Options panel lets you select a number of restore options like destination client and paths.

The following search options are displayed when you select Select Files or Directories > Search: . the files or directories that are backed up over the last one month are searched.532 Managing NetBackup using Symantec OpsCenter About Operational Restore and Guided Recovery operations By default.

Managing NetBackup using Symantec OpsCenter About Operational Restore and Guided Recovery operations 533 File or Directory name .

Note: You cannot search by only typing * in the text box. Enter C:\backup* to view files named backup* immediately inside C:. ■ Enter a specific file or directory name.doc to view all the files that have one character after ca and a . Use forward slash (/) as the path delimiter for UNIX and back slash (\) as the path delimiter for Windows. Enter C:\\backup* to view files named backup* immediately inside C: or any subdirectory of C:. ■ Enter /etc/hos* to view files named hos* immediately inside directory etc. and as per any advanced search criteria that you entered. OpsCenter searches for the specific file or directory (folder) in the selected clients. ■ ■ Enter etc//hos* to view files named hos* immediately inside etc or any subdirectory of etc. ■ Add a * or a ? wildcard to the entry.doc extension. Enter trace\backup* to view files immediately inside directory named trace. This is a mandatory field. add one of these wildcards to the string. ■ Enter etc/hos* to view files named hos* immediately inside directory etc. OpsCenter searches for the specific path and file in the selected clients. For UNIX clients. ■ Enter ca?. . This is valid for both Windows and UNIX clients. This is not supported. Examples: ■ Enter *. You can search by the following methods: Enter a full path name. timeframe.. A pattern may optionally end with a / for UNIX clients or \ for Windows clients to indicate that only directory matches are returned.doc to view the files that end with that suffix. timeframe. If you do not know the exact directory (folder) or file name. The etc directory must be a first level directory. the search pattern may optionally begin with a / to indicate that the matching should start at the root directory.534 Managing NetBackup using Symantec OpsCenter About Operational Restore and Guided Recovery operations Enter the name of the file or directory that you want to search for. and as per any advanced search criteria that you entered.

5 master servers that are added to the view are displayed in the Master Server drop-down list. Search within Clients In this field. first ensure that the master server that is associated with the client is added to the OpsCenter console. View Select a view from the View drop-down list. Master Server Select a master server from the Master Server drop-down list. and then type in or browse for the clients. All NetBackup 7. A table appears that provides details like client name. you can specify the set of clients whose backup information you want to search. . Even if you have master servers below 7. the Master Server drop-down list is disabled. If you select a client-type view.5 master servers are displayed in the Master Server drop-down list. master server. Only the following views are displayed in the View drop-down list: ■ ■ Views that you have access to Client type or Master Server type views If you select a view of type Master Server.5 in the selected view. the master server that it is associated with and a link to remove the client. Select one or more clients that are associated with one master server. you can search using path* or path. select the view. all NetBackup 7. You can search multiple clients that are associated with one or more views or master servers at a given time. Note: Only NetBackup 7.Managing NetBackup using Symantec OpsCenter About Operational Restore and Guided Recovery operations 535 In addition. those master servers do not appear in the Master Server drop-down list. To find related results. you cannot search by using a pattern like /path/* on UNIX or path\* on Windows. The Master Server drop-down list is disabled in the following scenario: If you select a client-type view from the View drop-down list ■ If you have access to client-type views only ■ To restore backed up files and directories (folders) on a client.5 master servers that are a part of the selected view are displayed. To add the clients that are associated with a different view or master server.

Clients that do not have any backups are not displayed. Note: The time to display search results may increase with the number of selected clients. the master server that it is associated with and a link to remove the client. a table appears beneath that provides details like client name that you selected for search. click the Browse and select client link and select a list of protected clients that are associated with a master server or a client-type view. .536 Managing NetBackup using Symantec OpsCenter About Operational Restore and Guided Recovery operations Client Specify the clients whose backup information you want to search. See “Browse Client dialog box” on page 539. the protected clients that begin with these characters automatically appear beneath the drop-down list (auto-complete field). type the client name in the Client text box. If you do not remember any client names or simply want to browse through the clients. Note: Only those clients on which files and directories are backed up (or protected clients) are displayed when you type in a client name or browse for a client. only those clients are displayed for which the user has been granted access through a view. As you select the clients that you want to search. If you remember the client name. Note: In addition. Select the client name when it appears. Click Remove if you want to remove the specific client. Once you start typing the client name like a1.

Managing NetBackup using Symantec OpsCenter About Operational Restore and Guided Recovery operations 537 Advanced Search .

you can view the backups that are associated with the selected backup type. policy types like FlashBackup. policy name etc. Hyper-V.538 Managing NetBackup using Symantec OpsCenter About Operational Restore and Guided Recovery operations You can also search on the basis of more advanced parameters in addition to the simple search parameters. Standard. backup type. You can select only one policy type from the drop-down list. Select File Extensions You can select one or more file extensions that you want to view from the Select file extensions drop-down list. and VMware are supported. For restoring files and directories. . then you can type it under the Specify extension option Once you select or specify the file extensions. file size. click Add. Click Advanced Search if you want to search using additional parameters like policy type. You are presented with the following options for an advanced search operation: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Policy Name Enter a policy name to view the backups that are associated with the specific policy. NDMP. You can select multiple backup types. Backup type By selecting the Backup type.Windows. The following file extensions are listed: ■ txt ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ doc docx pdf xls xlsx ppt pptx If a file extension is not listed. you can view the backups that are associated with the selected policy type. FlashBackup . Policy type By selecting the policy type. These are optional parameters. MS-Windows. The selected file extensions are displayed in the list box on the right-hand side. you can view the backups that are associated with the specific keyword. Policy associated keywords By specifying the policy associated keyword.

When you click Browse and select client link from Search files or directories > Search view. all NetBackup 7. . If you select a client-type view. ■ File/Directory modification time With this option you can search based on when the file or directory was last modified. You can uncheck the case-insensitive search option to make your search case-sensitive. the Browse Clients dialog box is displayed. In addition to other options.and select From and To timeframes.Managing NetBackup using Symantec OpsCenter About Operational Restore and Guided Recovery operations 539 ■ Case-insensitive search This option is checked by default.5 master servers that are added to the view are displayed under the Name column. Browse Client dialog box You can also browse to view and select clients that are associated with a master server or a view. This option may be helpful if you do not remember any client names or if you want to browse through the clients that are associated with master servers or a view. Note: A command named nbfindfile has been added that lets you search files or directories based on simple search criteria. you can also specify an absolute timeframe by selecting Specify date and time range. the clients are displayed under the selected view in the Name column. The case-sensitive search applies to file or directory name and file extensions only. The following options are displayed in the dialog box: Selected View The view that you select from the View drop-down list is displayed. If you select a view of type Master Server. This command can be executed from the NetBackup master server (and not the OpsCenter Server). The default selection is Any. See nbfindfile on page 1042.

timeframe of the last one month is selected. part of a client name. Performing a simple or advanced search To restore a specific file or directory. when you enter ary in the Filter Clients field. you can view clients under the Name column. Click Clear Filter to clear the filtered view and see all the clients. Click Apply Filter to apply this filter and view the filtered clients. or wildcard) or path along with the client name. Note: The time to display search results may increase with the number of selected clients. you must select the timeframe. enter a file or directory name (full. Select the checkbox next to one or more clients and click OK. For performing a simple search. the master server that the client is associated with and a link to remove the client. This means that files or directories that were backed up over the last one month are searched by default. To filter specific clients. you can see the protected clients that are associated with it.540 Managing NetBackup using Symantec OpsCenter About Operational Restore and Guided Recovery operations Filter Clients You may want to view specific clients when the client list is large. For example. enter client name. A table appears that provides details like client name that are selected for search. If you select a Client-type view. then each master server (with a yellow folder icon) is displayed under the Name column with a + sign next to it. When you expand a master server. you may first need to know the location of the file or directory. . partial. You can either perform a simple or advanced search. or add the * wildcard. By default. Name If you select a Master Server type view. Click Remove if you want to remove the specific client. then OpsCenter displays all results that start with or contain ary string.

Instead of searching and selecting files. See “Browsing for files and directories on a client” on page 550. . From this view. To search and select files and directories for restore 1 2 3 In the OpsCenter console. you can also browse and select the backed up files and directories on a client for restore.Managing NetBackup using Symantec OpsCenter About Operational Restore and Guided Recovery operations 541 While performing an advanced search. You can either perform a simple search or an advanced search. you can specify additional optional parameters like policy name. you can search and select the files and directories that you want to restore. click Manage > Restore. See “About timeframe selection” on page 528. The contents of the Select files or directories > Search tab are displayed by default. The default timeframe that is selected is Month. policy or backup type etc. Use the following procedure to search files and directories for restore. in addition to the simple search parameters. Click Restore Files and Directories under Files and Directories. 4 Select a timeframe that you want to search.

You can select multiple clients from one or more views or master servers to be searched at a given time.542 Managing NetBackup using Symantec OpsCenter About Operational Restore and Guided Recovery operations 5 In the Search files and directories based on name. This column displays the master server that is associated with the specific client. The table displays the following details: Client Name This column displays the client name that is searched. enter the following parameters. It may take some time for OpsCenter to display the search results. path. Master Server Remove 6 To perform an advanced search. The time to display the search results may increase with the number of selected clients. The table lists the following default columns that are displayed: . The clients that you selected for search are displayed in a table in this section. section. complete the Search within Clients section for the second master server. See “Select Files or Directories > Search options” on page 531. The Advanced Search criteria are optional. section. you can also specify advanced search criteria in addition to the simple search criteria. See “Select Files or Directories > Search options” on page 531. wildcards etc. select the first master server and then select clients for the first master server. Similarly. wildcards etc. Click Remove if you do not want the backup information of the specific client to be searched. enter all the details in Search files and directories based on name. To search for clients from multiple views or master servers. to search for clients from two master servers. For example. The most recent 500 results can be shown in the table. 7 Click Search. you must enter details in the Search within Clients section for each view or master server. path. You can use the same procedure to add clients from different views. OpsCenter highlights the search results at the bottom of the pane in a table. To perform a simple search operation.

If you want to restore the selected files and directories now. This indicates that the directory has files or sub-directories. You may want to restore a previous copy. This link shows the backup timeline window for a specific file or directory. click Add to Restore Cart. Backup Time This is the most recent date and time when the file was last backed up. You may want to restore a copy other than the primary copy. In addition. Click the link if you want to to restore a previous backup and also specify a copy other than the primary copy. Modified Time Client Size The columns that can be added to the table are the following: ■ ■ ■ Master Server Last Accessed Time Backup ID The filter button on top of search results table allows you to filter out the search results and display only the search results matching a criteria. A file or directory may have been backed up multiple times in the past. Date and time when the backup was last modified. See “Backup Timeline Window” on page 544. .Managing NetBackup using Symantec OpsCenter About Operational Restore and Guided Recovery operations 543 File/Directory Name Names of the files and directories that are backed up as per the search criteria are displayed. Name of the client on which the backup exists. You can choose if you want to restore the whole directory or specific files from the directory. The result is a filtered subset of the last search result from the OpsCenter database. you may have multiple copies for a specific backup. Size of the backed up file or directory (folder) in bytes (B). File/Directory Path Backup History Current location of files and directories is displayed. The directory (folder) name may have a + sign next to it. To restore the selected files and directories later. click Restore now. The primary copy is selected by default.

8 Select one or more files or directories. Click Add to Restore Cart if you want to add the selected files and directories to the Restore Cart and restore at a later time. You can also customize the search results table to allow standard table customizations like sort order. . Click Change Table Settings icon on top of search result to access table customizations page. You can click the link to clear the filter and view all search results. Filter is currently applied. and whether the media is in the library. and removing custom view filters” on page 87. Click Next. 10 In the Summary panel. Click here to remove filter. See “Restore Options panel” on page 553. page size. The Preview Media dialog box contains details like Media ID. click Restore to restore all the files or directories. Click Restore now to restore the files or directories now. Volume Group. Click Preview Media to view the media required for the restore operation and to determine the availability of the required media. This option applies only for tape backups. Search has been completed successfully. If the selected backups are on a disk. applying. This helps you to know if the tape required for restore is in the library or not. Backup Timeline Window This is a timeline view of backups for a specific file or directory. See “Restore Cart” on page 551. The Backup Timeline window allows you to select a previous backup for the specific file or directory in the selected timeframe and also select a copy other than the primary copy. See “Summary panel” on page 559. Whenever you apply a filter on the search results. 9 In the Restore Options panel. this option is not applicable. See “About using tables” on page 83. By default. the search and browse results that are displayed in the OpsCenter console display the most recent backup that occured for the specific file or directory and is the primary backup copy. select the restore options for each individual client. you see the following message on top of the search results table. editing. columns displayed and the order in which columns are displayed.544 Managing NetBackup using Symantec OpsCenter About Operational Restore and Guided Recovery operations See “Creating.

. basic disk. Also if single or multiple backups occur during a single timeline unit. For example. then June 15 is shown by default. For example. the name and location of the file or directory whose backup details are displayed is mentioned. Each row in the table represent the backups on a single disk pool. The timeline on top displays icons for each backup of the file or directory. you may need to increase the scope of the timeline. on which the specific file or directory resides. or months. Each slot of one hour is in turn split up by 30 minute slots . Multiple backups may be displayed on the timeline.that is 2 cells per hour. The X-axis represents the time while the Y-axis represents the device or source like disk pool. weeks. You can display the timeline in days. if a file was backed up twice in an hour. the latest backup (icon) in the selected timeline is already selected. if search result shows backup date for a file as June 15. then it is represented through different icons. The timeline for a day is split up in 24 slots of an hour each. disk. To view all the instances of backups. The following tabs are displayed: Day This selection shows the backups that occured at different times in the day. or a single volume group. volume group etc. a different icon appears representing more than one backup. 2011 and that link is clicked to view the timeline. or tape backups. Name of the client that contains the file or directory is also mentioned. When you open the Backup Timeline window. Each icon represents a different backup or snapshot. Select another icon if you want to select a previous backup. You can also adjust the time interval by clicking the arrows on the left and right respectively. the Day tab shows the day of the backup that was shown in the search or browse result.Managing NetBackup using Symantec OpsCenter About Operational Restore and Guided Recovery operations 545 At the top of the Backup Timeline window. There are different icons for snapshot. By default.

then the week of June 15 is shown by default. Each slot of one week in turn is split up in seven cells . The Backup table in the middle of the window shows information about the icon (backup) that is selected from the timeline view. the primary copy is selected. Note: A multiple disk. 2011 and that link is clicked to view the timeline. You can also adjust the time interval by clicking the arrows on the left and right respectively. For example. then the month of June 15 is shown by default. the copies that are associated with the backup image are displayed in another table at the bottom. For example. By default. Once you select the specific backup image that you want to restore from the Backup table. 2011 and that link is clicked to view the timeline. By default. tape. if search result shows backup date for a file as June 15. . The Backup table lists the details of each backup image that is associated with the backup. You can also adjust the time interval by clicking the arrows on the left and right respectively.that is six cells per day. policy type.546 Managing NetBackup using Symantec OpsCenter About Operational Restore and Guided Recovery operations Week Select Week to view a weekly summary of the backups. Each slot of one day in turn is split up by 4 hour slots. Click an icon to view the details of the specific backup in the Backup table. Month Select Month to view a monthly summary of the backups. The timeline for week is split up in seven slots of one day each. The Copies of Selected Backup table at the bottom shows information about the copies that are associated with the selected backup image. The timeline for month is split up in five slots of one week each. or snapshot backup may include many backup images. policy name. It shows several details like backup time. the Month tab shows the month of the backup that was shown in search or browse result. the Week tab shows the week of the backup that was shown in search or browse result. backup type etc.that is seven cells per week (and 35 cells per month). By default. if search result shows backup date for a file as June 15. You can select a different copy for restore and click Add to Restore Cart to add this to the restore cart.

the Master Server drop-down list is disabled. Master Server Select the master server that is associated with the client. You may select a view that is of Client-type or master server type. If you select a client-type view. Select a view from the drop-down list. You can browse the contents of only one client at a given time.5 master servers that are added to the view are displayed in the Master Server drop-down list.5 master servers that are added to the OpsCenter console are displayed. all NetBackup 7. The Select Files or Directories > Browse view allows you to select a client and then browse and select the backed up files and directories on the client for restore. The following options are displayed in the Select Client section: View All the views that are shown in the OpsCenter console are displayed in the drop-down list. You first need to select the client from the Select Client section. Only NetBackup 7. Only the following views are displayed in the View drop-down list: ■ ■ Views that you have access to Client type or Master Server type views If you select a view of type Master Server.Managing NetBackup using Symantec OpsCenter About Operational Restore and Guided Recovery operations 547 Select Files or Directories > Browse options This view is displayed when you select Select Files or Directories > Browse. The Master Server drop-down list is disabled in the following scenario: If you select a client-type view from the View drop-down list ■ If you have access to client-type views only ■ .

If you do not remember any client names or simply want to browse through the clients. The following properties are displayed when you select Select Files or Directories > Browse: . Clients that do not have any backups are not displayed. type the client name in the Client text box.548 Managing NetBackup using Symantec OpsCenter About Operational Restore and Guided Recovery operations Client Only protected clients or clients that have backups are displayed. Note: In addition. See “Browse Client dialog box” on page 539. Select the client that contains the protected files and directories. The two-pane view shows the backed up client directories in the left pane and content of the selected directory in the right pane (like Windows Explorer). If you remember the client name. only those clients are displayed for which the user has been granted access through a view. Once you select a client. The backed up files and directories that are displayed is based on the timeframe that you select. Once you start typing the client name like a1. Specify the client whose backup information you want to browse. Select the client name when it appears. click the Browse and select client link and select a list of protected clients that are associated with a master server or a client-type view. From this view. This is also similar to the Java GUI or the BAR GUI browse capability. The most recent backup in the specified timeframe is shown on the top by default. protected clients that begin with these characters automatically appear beneath the drop-down list (auto-complete field). you can select one or more files or directories for restore. you can see a two-pane view. Note: Only those clients on which files and directories are backed up (or protected clients) are displayed when you type in a client name or browse for a client.

Click a directory from the left pane. Size of the backed up file or directory in bytes (B).Managing NetBackup using Symantec OpsCenter About Operational Restore and Guided Recovery operations 549 Change Client link The Change Client link lets you select a different client and allows you to browse the protected files and directories on a different client. Note that you can browse the contents of one client at a time. The directory (folder) name may have a + sign next to it. This indicates that the directory has sub-directories. click Add to Restore Cart. Date and time when the backup was last modified. Select the files or sub-directories that you want to restore. To restore the selected files and directories later. Modified Time Size . Backup Time This is the most recent date and time when the file was last backed up. If you want to restore the selected files and directories now. Directory Structure Contents of selected directory The following details are displayed in the right pane that shows the contents of the selected directory: File/Directory Name Names of the files and directories that are a part of the selected directory in the left-pane are displayed. The Directory structure shows the backed up directories on the selected client in the selected timeframe. The contents of the selected directory are displayed in this pane. Expand the directories to view the subdirectories. click Restore now.

5 6 Select a view from the Views drop-down list. See “About timeframe selection” on page 528. See “Backup Timeline Window” on page 544.550 Managing NetBackup using Symantec OpsCenter About Operational Restore and Guided Recovery operations Backup History This link shows the backup timeline window for a specific file or directory. The Preview Media dialog box displays details like Media ID. The default timeframe that is selected is Month. You can select only one client at a time. A file or directory may have been backed up multiple times in the past. . Select a timeframe that you want to search. you may have multiple copies for a specific backup. You may want to restore a copy other than the primary copy. and if the media is in library. click Manage > Restore. Click Restore Files and Directories under Files and Directories. You may want to restore a previous copy. Click Preview Media to view the media required for the restore operation and to determine the availability of the required media. this option is not applicable. Select Select files or directories > Browse. This helps you to know if the tape required for restore is in the library or not. The view allows you to select the client to be browsed and allows you to specify a timeframe for backup selection. The primary copy is selected by default. If the selected backups are all on disk. Click the link if you want to to restore a previous backup and also specify a copy other than the primary copy. The most recent backup in the specified date range is shown by default. The two pane browse view shows the backed up client directories in the left pane and content of the selected directory in the right pane. volume group. To browse for files and directories for restore 1 2 3 4 In the OpsCenter console. Use the following procedure to browse for files and directories for restore. Browsing for files and directories on a client You can also browse the protected files and directories on a client. In addition. Select a master server from the Select Master Server drop-down list.

select the restore options for each individual client. click Restore to restore all the files or directories. 8 Click Restore now to start the restore process.Managing NetBackup using Symantec OpsCenter About Operational Restore and Guided Recovery operations 551 7 Type a client name in the Client box. Once a file belonging to the Restore Cart is sent for restore. If the selected backups are all on disk. See “Restore Options panel” on page 553. See “Summary panel” on page 559. This helps you to know if the tape required for restore is in the library or not. and if the media is in library. this option is not applicable. From this view. 9 In the Restore Options panel. You can browse and select only one client at a time. The Preview Media dialog box displays details like Media ID. volume group. Click Preview Media to view the media required for the restore operation and to determine the availability of the required media. Click Next. 10 In the Summary panel. can be added to a Restore Cart. volume group. This option only applies to tape backups. You can also click Browse and select clients and then browse to select a client. The directory structure of the selected client and the contents of the directory are displayed in two panes. Click Preview Media to view the media required for the restore operation and to determine the availability of the required media. . Click Add to Restore Cart if you want to add the selected files and directories to the Restore Cart and restore at a later time. If the selected backups are on disk. You may choose to restore all the file or directory selections in one go. a list of client names that start with the characters that you entered is displayed. you can browse and select the specific files and directories that you want to restore. The Restore Cart allows you to view file selections from multiple search and browse operations and restore them at a later point in time. The Restore Cart selection persists for each user across different OpsCenter sessions. Select a client from this list and then click Select Client. Restore Cart The files shown in the Search and Browse subtabs. See “Restore Cart” on page 551. this option is not applicable. The Preview Media dialog box displays details like Media ID. When you start typing a client name. it is automatically removed from the Cart for the specific user. and if the media is in library.

Use the following procedures for performing specific Restore Cart operations. Click Restore Files and Directories under Files and Directories. Performing operations on the Restore Cart You can perform several operations on the files and directories in the Restore Cart. Click Restore Cart. Click Restore Files and Directories under Files and Directories. and Bcc text boxes. Enter the subject of the email. or HTML and click OK. Enter the message that may be a short description regarding the report data that you want to email. to which you want to send emails. To email the Restore Cart 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 In the OpsCenter console. CSV. or restore from the Restore Cart. You can also restore or remove files from the Restore Cart. Cc. Click OK. click Manage > Restore. Alternatively. Select the file format in which you want to export the contents of the Restore Cart such as PDF. CSV. In the Content pane at the right-hand side. click Manage > Restore. export. click the Export Report icon (in green). TSV. or HTML. Click Restore Files and Directories under Files and Directories. click the Email Report icon. click Manage > Restore. such as PDF. Click Restore Cart. You can email or export the contents of the Restore Cart. To restore the files or directories from the Restore Cart 1 2 In the OpsCenter console. TSV. select the file format. . On the Email Report pop-up screen. Enter email IDs in To. See “Performing operations on the Restore Cart” on page 552. On the top-right corner of the Restore Cart table. you can add existing email recipients. Click Open or Save to open or save the file on your system. The Email Report pop-up screen opens.552 Managing NetBackup using Symantec OpsCenter About Operational Restore and Guided Recovery operations You can also email. To export the Restore Cart 1 2 3 4 5 6 In the OpsCenter console.

Click Restore Files and Directories under Files and Directories. 7 In the Summary panel. select the restore options for each individual client. Click Restore Now. Select one or more files or directories that you want to remove from the Restore Cart. Click Restore Cart. Select one or more files or directories that you want to restore. Select individual clients on the left side and specify the restore options for each client. click Manage > Restore. This panel allows you to specify the restore options for each source client from which a file or directory has been selected to be restored. Restore Options panel You can specify restore options for the files and directories that you selected like destination client and paths. To remove files or directories from the Restore Cart 1 2 3 4 5 In the OpsCenter console. See “Summary panel” on page 559. Click Remove from cart. In the Restore Options panel. overwrite options etc. You can specify the following restore options for a client: Specify destination (where to restore selected files/directories) . When you click Restore now. See “Restore Options panel” on page 553. Click Next.Managing NetBackup using Symantec OpsCenter About Operational Restore and Guided Recovery operations 553 3 4 5 6 Click Restore Cart. the selected file or directories are automatically removed from the Restore Cart. click Restore to restore all the files or directories.

Note that a different destination client can only be a client that is associated with the same master server. Select this option file path location on the source client to restore the selected files and directories to the same location from where they were backed up. If the original location contains items with the same names. enter the path for the new destination. This option works best when you restore from archived backups. Restore all files or directories to alternate Select this option to restore all selected files file path location (maintaining existing and directories to a different location from structure) on source client or alternate client where they were backed up. the restore operation (by default) does not replace or overwrite those items.554 Managing NetBackup using Symantec OpsCenter About Operational Restore and Guided Recovery operations Restore all files/directories to their original This option is the default. since the backed up files are deleted from their original location after successful backup. . You may choose to restore at a different location on the same client or may choose to restore on a different client. In the Destination field. You cannot restore to a client that is associated with a different master server. You can also click Browse to locate the destination client.

. and the destination file name. Click on each cell under these columns and select Edit. Click the Saved Table Edited Info icon to save your edits in the table. You can edit most columns of this table (except the Source File Name) and specify the destination client. Restore the file using a temporary file name Restore the file using a different name than (Windows clients only) before. a table appears that lists the source files. file path. and the destination file name. Enter the appropriate values and click OK. This icon is located on the top-right corner of the table. this option is not selected to avoid overwriting a current file. When you select this option. Note: A destination client can only be a client that is associated with the same master server. and default values for destination client and path. You cannot restore to a client that is associated with a different master server. Overwrite and access control options Overwrite the file that exists at the destination By default. Select this option to replace a file with the same name in the destination directory with the file you want to restore.Managing NetBackup using Symantec OpsCenter About Operational Restore and Guided Recovery operations 555 Restore all files or directories to individually Restore individual directories and files to specified path and destination client different locations and file paths and with different names.

this option is selected to prevent the restore operation from overwriting a file with the same name in the destination folder. If you deselect this option and your destination choice is set to Restore everything to its original location. marked files with the same names are not restored. if your destination choice is set to Restore all files/directories to their original location. files in the destination folder with the same names are overwritten. To avoid overwriting current files. you must do one of the following: Select Restore the file with different file name ■ Select a different restore destination ■ . For example.556 Managing NetBackup using Symantec OpsCenter About Operational Restore and Guided Recovery operations Do not restore the file at all By default.

Managing NetBackup using Symantec OpsCenter About Operational Restore and Guided Recovery operations 557 Restore without access control (Windows clients only) By default. ■ NetBackup server software is installed on the computer where the client software is running. This option is available only when the following conditions exist: You are logged on as the system administrator. files are restored with the same access control attributes that existed at the time of their backup. be aware of the following if the access control attributes of a file have changed since the backup: A user that was granted access to the file after the backup does not have access to the file after the restore. On Windows systems. media server. or Windows Server 2008 R2/Windows 7. Windows Server 2008/Vista. ■ A user with previous access to the backed up file retains access to the file after the restore. ■ The Operating System of the client computer is Windows Server 2003/XP. ■ Select this option to restore files without the original access control attributes. and client are all at the same release level (software version). ■ The NetBackup master server. ■ Other options .

■ You use the alternate disk as the system disk with the original file paths. if any exist. all file systems that are mounted in the selected directories are restored. Symantec recommends that you do not select this option if you rename hard links. hard link path names are restored exactly as they exist in the backup. By default. By default. Restore without crossing mount point This option applies to UNIX and Linux systems only. Select this option to rename the soft link path names. if any exist. ■ In this situation. . Select this option to rename the hard link path names. Then. Symantec recommends that you select this option in the following situation: You restore system files to an alternate disk and not to the current system disk. soft (symbolic) link path names are restored exactly as they exist in the backup. make sure that Rename soft links is not selected so that you can use the alternate disk and still have the correct file paths. By default.558 Managing NetBackup using Symantec OpsCenter About Operational Restore and Guided Recovery operations Rename hard links This option applies to UNIX and Linux systems only. Symantec recommends that you select Rename hard links. Note: Mount points inside a backup image are always restored whether or not this option is selected. Rename soft links This option applies to UNIX and Linux systems only. Select this option to restore the selected directories without restoring all file systems that are mounted in those directories.

and if the media is in library. This column lists the name of the destination client where you want to restore the file or directory. The Preview Media dialog box displays details like Media ID. Summary panel The Summary panel shows the list of selected files and directories that have been selected for restore. It also shows details like the current location of these files and directories and where they will be restored. Source File Path Source Client Destination File Path Destination Client Click Preview Media to view the media required for the restore operation and to determine the availability of the required media. Based on your selections. volume group. This helps you to know if the tape required for restore is in the library or not. This column lists the current location of the file or directory. Higher numbers are higher priority. The Summary page shows a table with the following columns: Source File Name This column lists the files or directories that have been selected for restore. Use the following procedure to remove files or directories that you do not want to restore. This option only applies to tape backups. . The available range is 0 to 99999. and then set a priority number. this option is not applicable. If the selected backups are on disk. This column lists the client that contains the source file. the destination client may be the same or different from the source client. This column lists the location that you specified for restoring the file or directory.Managing NetBackup using Symantec OpsCenter About Operational Restore and Guided Recovery operations 559 Override default priority You can change the priority of this restore by selecting Override default priority. Removing files or directories from the Summary panel You can remove files or directories from the Summary panel. The default is 90000.

Click Restore to restore all the files and directories that are displayed. See “File or Directory Restore Launch Status dialog box options” on page 560. 2 The corresponding restore job(s) are triggered. To restore files or directories from the Summary panel 1 The Summary panel shows the selected files or directories that you want to restore. About OpsCenter Guided Recovery The use of the OpsCenter Web-based user interface to guide a user through the Oracle cloning operation offers several benefits: ■ The process is more automated. Name of the source client Client Name Restoring files or directories from the Summary panel Use the following procedure to restore files or directories. click Remove files or directories to remove files or directories that you do not want to restore. making the operation easier to perform. . File or Directory Restore Launch Status dialog box options The following options are displayed on the File or Directory Restore Launch Status dialog box: Job ID Master Server Name Job ID of the restore job Name of the master server that is associated with the client on which the file resides. This dialog box shows basic job details for the jobs triggered. Note: If you want to restore only specific files and directories and not all the files and directories that are displayed. The File/Directory Restore Launch Status dialog is displayed.560 Managing NetBackup using Symantec OpsCenter About Operational Restore and Guided Recovery operations To remove files or directories from the Summary panel 1 2 On the Summary panel. select one or more files or directories that you want to remove. Click Remove files or directories. Click the link to go to the Monitor > Jobs view and look for the specific Job ID. It also shows a link to access these jobs.

See “Guided Recovery Post-clone operations” on page 569. Do the following before you perform a Guided Recovery cloning operation: ■ On UNIX and Linux systems.conf is set at backup time as follows: ORACLE_METADATA=YES Or. ■ ■ See “Setting up for Guided Recovery cloning” on page 561. which enables database information to display in OpsCenter. new_config. Setting up for Guided Recovery cloning Oracle uses metadata cataloging. See “Guided Recovery cloning pre-operation checks” on page 562.txt): ORACLE_METADATA=YES Then send this newly created configuration file to the client host by using the following bpsetconfig command on the master or media server: # bpsetconfig -h myoracleclient new_config. shortening the Oracle clone setup time.Managing NetBackup using Symantec OpsCenter About Operational Restore and Guided Recovery operations 561 ■ OpsCenter retrieves information for you such as databases and control files. Metadata cataloging must occur during the backup from the Oracle database to be cloned. first place the following text into a text file (for example. A validation process increases the rate of successfully completing the cloning operation.txt bpsetconfig is located in the install_path\NetBackup\bin\admincmd directory. . You do not need access to the original database to perform the cloning operation. ensure that the Oracle metadata parameter in the client's bp. See “Performing a Guided Recovery cloning operation” on page 563. use the SEND command to set the metadata parameter: SEND ORACLE_METADATA=YES ■ On Windows systems. The collected metadata displays within the OpsCenter interface to guide the clone operation to enable metadata collection on the client host.

Add the 'BKUP_IMAGE_PERM=ANY' to the send commands during the backup of the source database. then that user needs to be granted the right to "Replace a process level token". To use a different user or a different group for the clone. if you are cloning to the same system. See “Setting up for Guided Recovery cloning” on page 561. because the operation does not create new file paths during the process. See “Performing a Guided Recovery cloning operation” on page 563. perform an alternate restore procedure. On Oracle 10G systems and later. you must change what the permissions of the backup image are to be at backup time. See “Guided Recovery cloning pre-operation checks” on page 562. . the user must have write access to some directories such as DBS. See “About OpsCenter Guided Recovery” on page 560. See “Performing a Guided Recovery cloning operation” on page 563. On Oracle 9 for Windows. ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ See “About OpsCenter Guided Recovery” on page 560.562 Managing NetBackup using Symantec OpsCenter About Operational Restore and Guided Recovery operations ■ Set up all destination file paths before you run the cloning operation. an error indicating the database cannot be mounted in exclusive mode appears. See “Guided Recovery Post-clone operations” on page 569. Otherwise. you can run under the local system. The cloning operation does not support offline tablespaces or raw tablespaces. it runs under the local system. Examples are Solaris 9 to Solaris 10 and Oracle 11 to Oracle 11. The cloning operation does not support Oracle Automatic Storage Management (ASM). if the cloning user shares an existing Oracle home. If the destination client is different than the source client. On Windows systems. run the Oracle service under the Oracle user account. if the NetBackup client service runs as the Oracle user. By default. On Windows systems. shut down the source database to successfully complete the operation. On UNIX and Linux systems. Ensure that the user has write access to these paths. Guided Recovery cloning pre-operation checks Check the following items before you begin the cloning process: ■ Ensure that the source and destination systems and the source and destination databases are compatible.

Along the top of the screen. click Manage > Restore. use the drop-down menu to select the master server that you want to work with. Additional information is available to verify that you have selected the correct control file. The lower left corner of the screen lists three links. To perform a cloning operation on an Oracle database in OpsCenter 1 2 3 When you log onto OpsCenter. See “Guided Recovery Post-clone operations” on page 569. The Select Control File Backup screen shows a timeline view of the control file backups. the first screen that appears is the Monitor Overview screen. More information is available on this screen. You can hover over the icon to display the control file details. Then click Next>. If the icon represents multiple backups. 5 The databases appear under the filtering part of the same screen. to perform a cloning operation. platform. database version. See “Select a Master Server dialog” on page 564. Performing a Guided Recovery cloning operation You need to log onto OpsCenter. Select the icon for the desired control file backup from the timeline view. Then click Next>. See “Select Source Database panel” on page 565. The default condition is to display all databases that are backed up in the default date range. 6 7 The Destination Host and Login screen contains parameters for the destination of the clone to be created. More information is available about these links. See “Select Control File Backup panel” on page 565. Select the database on which you want to perform a cloning operation by clicking option at the left side of the desired database entry. On the small Select a Master Server dialog box. OpsCenter is the Web GUI that you use to perform all guided recovery operations. Click Show Databases. On the What do you want to restore? screen. and date. then click OK. Click on the icon of the control file backup you want to restore for the clone of the selected database. host name. you can hover over the icon to display all versions of the backup for that time periods. 4 The Select Source Database screen lets you filter the list of databases by database name. The default is the latest backup selected. click Clone Oracle Database.Managing NetBackup using Symantec OpsCenter About Operational Restore and Guided Recovery operations 563 See “Pre-clone check panel” on page 568. Enter the destination host name in the .

data files. select the NetBackup master server that collected the backup information to be used for the cloning operation. For operating system authentication. See “Performing a Guided Recovery cloning operation” on page 563. the validation check also flags the error. password (Windows). Note the following prerequisites concerning the destination host: ■ ■ ■ The platform type of the source and destination must be the same. and domain (Windows). the validation check flags the error. The five tabs on this screen are used to change database attributes. When you are satisfied with the summary information. click Next>. enter a user name. the destination paths of control files. When you are ready to launch the cloning operation. See “Pre-clone check panel” on page 568. If a directory path does not already exist. and restore options. Links to the recovery sets and destination database attributes let you view and verify any changes you have made. click the underlined word here. A display appears that is similar to the NetBackup Activity Monitor. 10 The Pre-clone Check screen lets you validate the database attributes and the file paths. A compatible version of Oracle must be installed. Then click Next>. See “Setting up for Guided Recovery cloning” on page 561. 9 The SelectionSummary screen lets you scan the information you have entered on the previous screens. . See “Selection summary panel” on page 568. and redo logs. See “Guided Recovery Post-clone operations” on page 569. See “Destination host and login panel” on page 566. See “Destination Parameters panel” on page 567. click Launch Cloning Process.564 Managing NetBackup using Symantec OpsCenter About Operational Restore and Guided Recovery operations text box that is provided or click Browse and select from a list of available hosts. If a file already exists. After you have changed the destination parameters. See “Guided Recovery cloning pre-operation checks” on page 562. 8 The Define Destination Parameters screen appears. See “About OpsCenter Guided Recovery” on page 560. so that the cloning operation does not overwrite the file. click Next>. Select a Master Server dialog From the pulldown menu. A NetBackup client must be installed. To validate.

if the database was backed up twice in an hour). See “Performing a Guided Recovery cloning operation” on page 563. See “About OpsCenter Guided Recovery” on page 560. a different icon appears representing more than one control file (for example. When you first enter this screen. To select from among these files. the latest backup control file is already selected .Managing NetBackup using Symantec OpsCenter About Operational Restore and Guided Recovery operations 565 See “Setting up for Guided Recovery cloning” on page 561. months. Multiple control files may be displayed on the timeline. To view all the instances of control files. See “Guided Recovery cloning pre-operation checks” on page 562. If multiple control files were backed up during a single timeline unit. A popup lists each control file in table format. database version. weeks. Click option next to the desired control file. Multiple filter parameters can be used at the same time. The timeline displays an icon for each control file that is associated with the backed up database. host name. See “Guided Recovery cloning pre-operation checks” on page 562. the size of the backup. See “About OpsCenter Guided Recovery” on page 560. etc. Then click Show Databases to display the new filtered list of databases. select Solaris from the Platform: pulldown menu. you can filter what databases appear by database name. the lowest portion of the screen shows a list of the latest backups for all the databases that the master server knows about for the default date range. See “Select Control File Backup panel” on page 565. See “Setting up for Guided Recovery cloning” on page 561. and date range. The upper portion of the screen shows parameters for filtering the list of databases. type of media. hover over the icon. It shows several items including the backup name and the type of media. . to show only the Solaris databases that are backed up between 11/05/2011 and 11/12/2011. Select Control File Backup panel The Guided Recovery Select Control File Backup screen is a timeline view of all the control files that are backed up for the selected database. Select Source Database panel When the Select Source Database screen first appears. For example. Hover over the icon on the timeline to display a popup that shows information about that file: backup name. you may need to increase the scope of the timeline. Then select the dates from the calendar icons. or years. You can display the timeline in days. If the list is long.

A compatible version of Oracle must be installed. See “About OpsCenter Guided Recovery” on page 560. See “Setting up for Guided Recovery cloning” on page 561. For Windows. Destination host and login panel The Select Destination Parameters screen lets you enter the destination host and the Oracle logon information. If the image spans media. The following rules apply to the selection of the destination host: ■ ■ ■ The destination must be of the same platform type as the source of the clone. Even though files that are backed up as part of a full backup do not appear in this list. See “Setting up for Guided Recovery cloning” on page 561. It also shows the backup and image information that is displayed for each data file. and its size. Even though files that are backed up as part of a full backup do not appear in this list. ■ ■ See “Performing a Guided Recovery cloning operation” on page 563. the clone still completes successfully. you are asked for the domain name. For UNIX and Linux. This set is generated only for the files that are backed up as part of an incremental strategy. See “Destination Parameters panel” on page 567. The data file recovery set is generated only for the files that are backed up as part of an incremental strategy. A NetBackup client must be installed. you are asked only for the user name. the clone still completes successfully. See “Guided Recovery cloning pre-operation checks” on page 562. . tablespace name. View Datafiles Recovery Set shows the data file backups to be used for the restore process. ■ View Database Schema shows the schema of the selected control file.566 Managing NetBackup using Symantec OpsCenter About Operational Restore and Guided Recovery operations You can also click one of the links in the lower left of the screen to verify that you have selected the proper control file. and password. It shows how the database is laid out by listing each data file name. See “Performing a Guided Recovery cloning operation” on page 563. user name. only the first media is shown in the list. See “About OpsCenter Guided Recovery” on page 560. View Archived Log Recovery Set shows the archive log backups that may be used to recover the database to the latest point in time of that control file.

When you change a path. Enter the path in the text window provided. The option that is displayed on this pane is Number of parallel streams for restore and recover. and database home. lower. This pane displays the source path and the destination path for all redo logs. mixed). This pane appears when you first enter the Database Attributes screen. a highlight bar appears around the text window as a visual indicator that this path has changed. All the information from the previous screen is saved in preparation for the cloning operation. The Destination Parameters screen contains the following tabs: ■ Database Attributes. click Next>. Each attribute name has identical source and destination attributes. and you plan to write the datafiles back to the same location. make sure it is identical to the source path including case (upper. You can change a control file destination path by clicking in the associated text window and entering the new path. You can change the destination attribute of the instance name. and press the Apply option. . ■ ■ ■ ■ When you are done making changes on this screen. do not modify the path. You can modify these values if not appropriate for the destination database. This limitation does not affect UNIX and Linux systems.Managing NetBackup using Symantec OpsCenter About Operational Restore and Guided Recovery operations 567 Destination Parameters panel Guided Recovery uses many values from the source database as default values for the destination database. This pane displays the source path and the destination path for each control file. Be sure to enter the Windows information appropriately. Note: The Windows information you enter on this screen is case sensitive. database name. a highlight bar appears around the text window as a visual indicator that this path has changed. You can type in a new destination path or click Browse to navigate to the desired path. All the changes that are made in this screen are temporary and are active only for the cloning session. This pane lets you change the destination path for one or more data files. This pane displays restore options. If you must modify the path. You can also click Browse to navigate to the desired path. then select the data files on which to apply it. the clone fails with an error that indicates the temporary file already exists. Redo Log Paths. If you use a temporary tablespace or datafiles. Otherwise. Control File Paths. Restore Options. Note that the instance name is case sensitive while the database name is not case sensitive. When you change a path. Data File Paths.

The destination database attributes selected in the previous screen and the database initialization parameters to be used for the cloning operation. See “Performing a Guided Recovery cloning operation” on page 563. Selection summary panel The following information appears on this screen: ■ ■ The selected master server and the source database attributes. See “Setting up for Guided Recovery cloning” on page 561. Pre-clone check panel The Guided Recovery Pre-clone Check screen lets you validate the database attributes and the file paths. The database recovery set and the archived log recovery set. See “About OpsCenter Guided Recovery” on page 560. ■ ■ See “Pre-clone check panel” on page 568. See “Guided Recovery Post-clone operations” on page 569. click the underlined word here. If a file path does not already exist. To validate. the validation check flags the error. the validation check also flags the error. You can also specify an email address. . See “About OpsCenter Guided Recovery” on page 560. and the backup media type. The date and time of the selected control file backup. See “Setting up for Guided Recovery cloning” on page 561. If a file already exists. so that the cloning operation does not overwrite the file.568 Managing NetBackup using Symantec OpsCenter About Operational Restore and Guided Recovery operations See “Selection summary panel” on page 568. See “Performing a Guided Recovery cloning operation” on page 563. See “Performing a Guided Recovery cloning operation” on page 563. an email is sent to you that gives you the status of the cloning operation along with other pertinent information. so when the cloning process completes. See “Setting up for Guided Recovery cloning” on page 561. See “About OpsCenter Guided Recovery” on page 560. See “Job Details panel” on page 569.

See “About OpsCenter Guided Recovery” on page 560. do the following cleanup: ■ ■ ■ If the database is active. spfile<SID>. shut down the database.Managing NetBackup using Symantec OpsCenter About Operational Restore and Guided Recovery operations 569 Job Details panel The Job Details screen is intended to reflect the NetBackup Activity Monitor. dbca sometimes removes directories. See the NetBackup Administrator's Guide. update the oratab file with the appropriate instance information. from the <$ORACLE_HOME>/DBS directory. you must make them read-write before RMAN backs them up. so verify before retrying the operation. See “Performing a Guided Recovery cloning operation” on page 563. If a cloned Oracle database contains read-only tablespaces or datafiles.ora. Back up database B. Guided Recovery Post-clone operations Perform the following after the cloning operation has completed: ■ On UNIX and Linux systems. use the dbca utility to delete the database. On UNIX and Linux systems. Remove init<SID>. . More information is available on the Activity Monitor. ■ ■ On Windows systems. You may revert to read-only if you want. See “Performing a Guided Recovery cloning operation” on page 563. The following shows an example of the sequence of steps in the process: ■ ■ ■ ■ Back up Oracle database A which contains read-only tablespace TABLE1. Clone database A to database B. Use the Oracle alter tablespace command to make tablespace TABLE1 read-write. if the cloning operation fails. ■ ■ See “Guided Recovery cloning pre-operation checks” on page 562. or RMAN cannot restore them.ora. if the cloning operation fails. Use RMAN to restore database B. Remove all data files. and any other files associated with the SID being used. you can return the items to read-only. After the backup (cloning operation). Volume I.

1. Troubleshooting Guided Recovery Guided Recovery operations are in addition to the normal NetBackup for Oracle operations. OID 360. OID 363. All unified logs should be gathered at DebugLevel=6 and DiagnosticlLevel=6. In addition to the troubleshooting methods and evidence that you use for resolving NetBackup for Oracle operations. gather them at General=2. For more information about NetBackup debug logs and reports. refer to the NetBackup Administrator's Guide. Vol. On Windows systems. Verbose=5. See “Troubleshooting files for Guided Recovery validation operations” on page 571.570 Managing NetBackup using Symantec OpsCenter About Operational Restore and Guided Recovery operations See “Setting up for Guided Recovery cloning” on page 561. See “Troubleshooting files for metadata collection operations at the time of the backup” on page 570. New Client Framework ncforautil unified logs. and Database=5.) ncf unified logs. NetBackup Agent Request Service dars unified logs. gather all legacy logs at VERBOSE=5. From the Oracle client host: ■ ■ netbackup/logs/bphdb legacy logs netbackup/logs/dbclient legacy logs (The directory must be writable by the Oracle users. Troubleshooting files for metadata collection operations at the time of the backup The information in the following log files can be helpful when you troubleshoot Guided Recovery metadata collection operations. Database Agent Request Service . New Client Framework Oracle Utility ncforaclepi. OID 309. See “Troubleshooting files for Guided Recovery cloning operations” on page 572. there is also information that is required specifically for troubleshooting Guided Recovery when it fails. New Client Framework Oracle Plugin ■ ■ ■ From the NetBackup media server: netbackup/logs/bpbrm legacy logs From the NetBackup master server: ■ ■ ■ netbackup/logs/bprd legacy logs nbars unified logs. On UNIX and Linux systems. OID 348. See “About OpsCenter Guided Recovery” on page 560. OID 362.

OID 363. OID 147 (The default location is <SYMCOpsCenterGUI>/logs) ■ For more information about NetBackup debug logs and reports. NetBackup Agent Request Service dars unified logs. 1. OID 148 (The default location is <SYMCOpsCenterServer >/logs) opscentergui unified log. See “Troubleshooting Guided Recovery” on page 570. Vol. From the Oracle client host: ■ ■ ■ netbackup/logs/vnetd legacy logs ncf unified logs. OID 362. Vol. OID 309. See “Troubleshooting files for Guided Recovery cloning operations” on page 572. refer to the NetBackup Administrator's Guide. Database Agent Request Service From the Symantec OpsCenter server: ■ ■ <SYMCOpsCenterServer>/config/log. OID 366. Troubleshooting files for Guided Recovery validation operations The information in the following log files can be helpful when you troubleshoot Guided Recovery validation operations. Database Agent Request Service From the NetBackup master server: ■ ■ ■ netbackup/logs/bprd legacy logs nbars unified logs. New Client Framework ncfnbcs unified logs. refer to the NetBackup Administrator's Guide. See “Troubleshooting files for Guided Recovery validation operations” on page 571. See “Troubleshooting Guided Recovery” on page 570. OID 363. New Client Framework NetBackup Client Services From the NetBackup master server: ■ ■ ■ netbackup/logs/vnetd legacy logs nbars unified logs. . See “Troubleshooting files for metadata collection operations at the time of the backup” on page 570.Managing NetBackup using Symantec OpsCenter About Operational Restore and Guided Recovery operations 571 For more information about NetBackup debug logs and reports. OID 362. See “Troubleshooting files for Guided Recovery cloning operations” on page 572. 1. NetBackup Agent Request Service dars unified logs.conf file opscenterserver unified logs.

OID 148 (The default location is <SYMCOpsCenterServer >/logs) opscentergui unified log.conf file opscenterserver unified logs.) A tar of netbackup/logs/user_ops (UNIX/Linux) A compress of NetBackup\Logs\user_ops (Windows) ■ ■ ■ ■ From the NetBackup master server: ■ ■ ■ ■ netbackup/logs/vnetd legacy logs netbackup/logs/bprd legacy logs nbars unified logs. . OID 147 (The default location is <SYMCOpsCenterGUI>/logs) ■ See “Troubleshooting files for metadata collection operations at the time of the backup” on page 570. This view displays detailed information for OpsCenter audit reports. See “Troubleshooting Guided Recovery” on page 570. OID 363.572 Managing NetBackup using Symantec OpsCenter About managing NetBackup Hosts Troubleshooting files for Guided Recovery cloning operations The information in the following log files can helpful when you troubleshoot Guided Recovery cloning operations.) netbackup/logs/bpdbsbora legacy logs netbackup/logs/dbclient legacy logs (The directory must be writable by the Oracle users. From the Oracle client host: ■ netbackup/logs/bphdb legacy logs (Includes the obk_stdout and obk_stderr logs. See “Troubleshooting files for Guided Recovery validation operations” on page 571. Database Agent Request Service From the Symantec OpsCenter server: ■ ■ <SYMCOpsCenterServer>/config/log. for the current Master server selection. About managing NetBackup Hosts This view is displayed when you select Manage>Hosts. OID 362. NetBackup Agent Request Service dars unified logs.

Select the Enable audit trail logging with NetBackup Environment check box to enable the audit logging process. You can disable audit logging by clearing this check box. About the traditional license report The traditional licensing report is helpful if you use the traditional NetBackup licensing model. select the Always retain all audit trail logs option to retain the logs forever. To enable the Audit trail logging 1 2 3 Log on to OpsCenter server host with administrator privileges. Only Administrators or Security Administrators can access Manage > Deployment Analysis. the Enable audit trail logging with NetBackup Environment check box appears as selected. By default. The traditional NetBackup licensing model is based on the number of NetBackup clients. you purchase licenses based on the number of NetBackup clients. To retain logs for a specific period of time. and options on which you want to run NetBackup. As per this model. As you deploy additional NetBackup clients or servers .Managing NetBackup using Symantec OpsCenter About managing NetBackup Deployment Analysis 573 Managing audit trails settings You can manage the settings to enable the auditing for the selected master server through OpsCenter. You must have Admin privileges to configure the audit settings. This view lets you run OpsCenter traditional licensing and capacity licensing reports for all or selected master servers. Note: If audit logging is initiated in NetBackup. the retention period is set to 90 days. 4 Under Retention period. 5 About managing NetBackup Deployment Analysis This view is displayed when you select Manage > Deployment Analysis. servers. Click Manage and click Hosts. servers. The Deployment Analysis subtab is not visible to any other user role. From the Master Server tab. Click Save to save the settings. enter the value in the Retain audit logs for days text box. select the required master server and click Edit Audit Settings. and options in use.

as well as capacity information. media servers. The number of media servers and the number of clients is provided. NDMP This tab shows the computers that the utility determined are NDMP servers and the corresponding tier number of the client.574 Managing NetBackup using Symantec OpsCenter About managing NetBackup Deployment Analysis or attach additional tape drives or storage to NetBackup. When you reconcile the report. Tape options are charged on a per drive basis. The traditional license report is a Microsoft Excel spreadsheet with seven tabs: ■ Summary This tab shows the final details about master servers. database software installed. shared drives. The traditional license report provides details about your utilization of the NetBackup components. along with associated computer information. Volume II. clients. The report lists all the NetBackup components and the associated tier for each component. and clients. and NDMP. Virtual Servers This tab shows the number of virtual servers or virtual hosts detected in the environment. Drives This tab details the type of drives as well as the host or the library where the drive resides. tapes. you must license additional copies of the appropriate NetBackup product. The tab provides the host names that are associated with each drive as well as information about virtual tape libraries. The associated information includes information such as: platform. capacity etc. OpsCenter invokes the nbdeployutil executable (bundled with OpsCenter) to analyze the collected data. The traditional licensing report is generated in the form of an Excel sheet. and vaulted drives. SAN media server. The traditional licensing report also provides detailed information about each master server. ■ ■ ■ ■ . computer type. Basically OpsCenter invokes the nbdeployutil executable on the master server to collect the required data. you need to address the clients that are found on this tab. AdvancedDisk potions are charged on a per terabyte basis. This tab lists the source data for generating the report. NetBackup Server. and Agent offerings are charged on the basis of their hardware tier. Hosts This tab provides a listing of host names. Client. More information about nbdeployutil is available in the NetBackup Administrator's Guide.

Volume II.1. Volume II. This utility is issued as emergency engineering binary (EEB) and must be installed on all master servers below 7.x master servers.com/business/support/index?page=content&id=TECH64620 Note: The nbdeployutil utility was earlier shipped with 7.symantec. Disclaimer This tab shows text explaining the limits of the report’s calculations and proper use of the data.5. . You must install nbdeployutil on master servers lower than 7. This utility automatically gets installed when you install a NetBackup 7. You must add the master servers to the OpsCenter console for which you want to run the traditional licensing report.1.5 master server.5.5 master servers.6 or higher master servers. More information about the utility is available in NetBackup Administrator's Guide.com/docs/TECH148678 More information about installing EEB's is available. ■ ■ You must configure an OpsCenter Agent to collect traditional license data from the master server.Managing NetBackup using Symantec OpsCenter About managing NetBackup Deployment Analysis 575 ■ Interpreting the results This tab provides a general overview of how to reconcile the information in the report which your actual environment. Prerequisites and data collection for a traditional licensing report Consider the following prerequisites before running the traditional licensing report: ■ This report is only available for NetBackup 6.5.x does not support traditional license reporting. For example. http://www.symantec. Figure 8-1 lists an example scenario of how data collection happens for a traditional license report. More information about the traditional licensing report is available in the NetBackup Administrator's Guide. However the utility shipped with NetBackup 7. See “About planning an OpsCenter Agent deployment” on page 111. This information is useful for having a better understanding of your environment. the figures should not be used to audit compliance. Hence you do not need to install this utility on 7. ■ Much of the report information does not affect the final values on the Summary tab. http://www.

■ ■ . You can do this while adding or editing a master server by clicking Settings > Configuration > NetBackup and then configuring the Advanced Data Collection Properties section. Only Administrators or Security Administrators can access Manage > Deployment Analysis subtab and hence run this report. the last report is overwritten. only a single user is allowed to generate the traditional licensing report. At any point of time.576 Managing NetBackup using Symantec OpsCenter About managing NetBackup Deployment Analysis ■ You must enable traditional license deployment data collection for the master server. Figure 8-2 illustrates how you can configure the Advanced Data Collection Properties section for traditional license reporting. Once a traditional licensing report is generated successfully. you must enter the user name and password to access a remote NetBackup master server (a master server is remote if it is not installed on the OpsCenter Server). In addition.

5 RAC or master ProdHost4: NBU 6.5 Collect data ProdHost3: NBU 6.5.Managing NetBackup using Symantec OpsCenter About managing NetBackup Deployment Analysis 577 Figure 8-1 Data Collection for traditional license report Collect data Agent Host 7.5 + EEB for nbdeployutil Agent Host 6.0 + EEB for nbdeployutil OpsCenter Server Agent Host 7.5 Install 6.0 Install 7.6 + EEB for nbdeployutil .5 Install 7.5 RAC or master ProdHost2: NBU 7.0 RAC or master Collect data ProdHost1: NBU 7.

578 Managing NetBackup using Symantec OpsCenter About managing NetBackup Deployment Analysis Figure 8-2 Advanced Data Collection properties section .

Click the link under the Prerequisite Status column to know and troubleshoot the issue. When you select this option. The table only shows those master servers that did not pass the prerequisite check.Managing NetBackup using Symantec OpsCenter About managing NetBackup Deployment Analysis 579 Traditional Licensing page The traditional licensing page displays the last successfully created traditional license report (if applicable) and also lets you create a new traditional licensing report. . The panel also displays the number and details of master servers for which the prerequisite status is Incomplete (or not successful) in a table. This is the number of master servers that are currently added to the OpsCenter console. Note that the master servers for which the Prerequisite Status is Incomplete are not included in the traditional licensing report. Create Traditional Licensing Report Wizard The Create Traditional Licensing Report Wizard consists of the following panels: ■ ■ Data Collection Export or Email Report Options The Data Collection panel shows the following options: Collect data and run report for all configured master servers Select this option if you want to run the traditional license report for all the master servers that are configured on the OpsCenter console. the panel shows the number of configured master servers.

When you select this option. Last Licensing Data Collection This column displays the date and time when the last Date licensing data was collected. you can view a table underneath that shows the available master servers by default. Example: OpsCenter Agent is not connected. . this column displays only those master servers for which the prerequisite status is incomplete. If you select Collect data and run report for all configured master servers. Licensing Data Collection Status This column displays the status of traditional licensing data collection for the specific master server. You must select at least one master server. Once you select the master servers from the list of available master servers.580 Managing NetBackup using Symantec OpsCenter About managing NetBackup Deployment Analysis Collect data and run report for specific master servers Select this option if you want to run the traditional license report for only specific master servers. Exceptions This column displays the reason for data collection failure. A table in the middle of the Data Collection panel displays the following columns: Master Server: This column displays the name of master servers for which the report is generated. The column shows a blank when the data collection fails. you can select the master servers for which you want to run the traditional licensing report. From the list of available master servers. click Selected Master Servers tab to view details for the selected master servers.

In the Export or Email Report Options panel.Managing NetBackup using Symantec OpsCenter About managing NetBackup Deployment Analysis 581 Prerequisites Status This column displays a link named Incomplete when one or more of the prerequisites are not met. The Export or Email Report Options panel displays the following options: To. The recipients receive fields emails when the report generation is complete. See “Prerequisites and data collection for a traditional licensing report” on page 575. The following prerequisites are checked for each master server: ■ ■ Is an Agent configured for data collection? Is the Enable Traditional License Deployment Data Collection option checked? ■ Did you enter a user name or password to access the master server? Besides the prerequisites that are listed above. a green checkmark appears in this column. You can change the subject line if required. When the prerequisite check is successful. CC. you must specify email recipients and optionally can choose to export the report. . Enter a message in this field. or BCC Enter the recipients email address in these fields. Subject This field displays the default text Traditional Licensing Report. Click the link to know the details about the prerequisites that need to be completed for each master server. It is mandatory that you email the report so that you have the report for future reference. Message Export report Select this option to export report to INSTALL_PATH\server\export\NDAReportExport directory on Windows and INSTALL_PATH/SYMCOpsCenterServer/export/NDAReportExport directory on UNIX. More information about all the prerequisites is available. there are other prerequisites that must be satisfied. You can change the export location from Settings > Configuration > Report Export Location.

The Edit Master Server page is displayed. In addition. review the prerequisites in the following topic. Select the Configure agent link to configure an agent. Select the Enable Traditional License Deployment Data Collection check box. click Manage > Deployment Analysis. The Traditional Licensing page contains details about the previously created report. Select the Collect data and run report for specific master servers to generate a report for specific master servers. Select the required master servers from the Available Master Servers tab. 7 8 9 Click Next. log file. and data collection. A calculation log file is also created when the traditional license report is generated. To generate a Traditional Licensing report 1 Before running a traditional licensing report. See “Prerequisites and data collection for a traditional licensing report” on page 575. The Create Traditional Licensing Report wizard is displayed. You can view the previously generated report by clicking Download. it is mandatory to enable Traditional License Deployment Data Collection and configure an OpsCenter Agent. Select the Collect data and run report for all configured master servers to generate a report for all the master servers. Enter the user name and password for the master server (if it is installed separately from the OpsCenter Agent). Log on to the OpsCenter console and select Settings > Configuration > NetBackup. . Click New Report to generate a new report.582 Managing NetBackup using Symantec OpsCenter About managing NetBackup Deployment Analysis Generating a Traditional Licensing report The Traditional Licensing report is generated in the form of an Excel sheet. 2 To generate the Traditional Licensing report. you must also specify the user name and password to access the master server if it is installed remotely from the OpsCenter Agent. You can view the calculation log file by clicking the View Log link. The master servers that you select are displayed in the Selected Master Servers tab. 5 6 In the OpsCenter console. This report can be emailed or exported in the XLS format to the required email address or location. 3 4 Select the required master server and click Edit.

log This log file contains the output of nbdeployutil executable. ■ The following log files are generated when you run the traditional licensing report: NdaReportManager*. Note: Re-running the report when report generation is in progress is not possible as it displays errors in the report. See “Setting report export location in OpsCenter” on page 282. 12 To export the report to the required location. It is advisable to wait till the report is generated. enter the recipients email address in the To and CC fields. The Subject field displays the default text Traditional Licensing Report. Traditional Licensing report and log file locations The traditional licensing reports are located at the following locations: ■ The final report is located at INSTALL_PATH\server\fsdb\nda\report on Windows or INSTALL_PATH/SYMCOpsCenterServer/fsdb/nda/report on UNIX. 11 Enter a message in the Message field. This file is located in INSTALL_PATH\server\logs on Windows and INSTALL_PATH/SYMCOpsCenterServer/logs on UNIX.Managing NetBackup using Symantec OpsCenter About managing NetBackup Deployment Analysis 583 10 In the Report Options panel.xls file or save the file for later viewing. When report generation is complete. 13 Click Finish to initiate the report creation. you can change the subject line if required. . you can open the . The last successful backed up report is located at INSTALL_PATH\server\fsdb\nda\backup on Windows or INSTALL_PATH/SYMCOpsCenterServer/fsdb/nda/backup on UNIX. select the Export report (XLS format) check box. You can change the export location path from Settings > Configuration > Report Export Location. A message to show that report creation is in progress is flashed.

See “Prerequisites and data collection for a traditional licensing report” on page 575. You can also initialize the Agent explicitly by first disabling the master server and then enabling it. The calculation log files contain the logs for report generation which can be used to check the authenticity of the final report. Possible Traditional License report issues The Traditional Licensing report requires a user to enable master servers and configure Agents to generate the correct report. Another cause of errors when a report is not generated is the network connectivity issue. Traditional License report issues. causes.log) You can validate the data in the traditional licensing report using the calculation log file. This file is located in INSTALL_PATH\server\fsdb/nda/logs on Windows and INSTALL_PATH/SYMCOpsCenterServer/fsdb/nda/logs on UNIX. and solution Solution If the Agent is down OpsCenter will try to automatically connect to the Agent after every 10 minutes. When the master server is not enabled or when the Agents are not configured. Always review the list of prerequisites before running a traditional license report. Table 8-19 Error and cause Agent is in disconnected state Agent is not connected as it could be down or there could be a network issue. Make sure that you have network connectivity. Calculation log file (log_timestamp. the report is not generated and shows errors.584 Managing NetBackup using Symantec OpsCenter About managing NetBackup Deployment Analysis *148*. Table 8-19 describes the possible Traditional License report issues and their solution. This file is located in INSTALL_PATH\server\logs on Windows and INSTALL_PATH/SYMCOpsCenterServer/logs on UNIX.log This log file contains the OpsCenter logs for traditional licensing report. .

wait for 10 minutes for it to reconnect. Confirm that the Agent is connected. Traditional License report issues. .Managing NetBackup using Symantec OpsCenter About managing NetBackup Deployment Analysis 585 Table 8-19 Error and cause Failed to initialize Agent Agent is not connected or there could be a network issue. and solution (continued) Solution If the Agent is not connected OpsCenter will try to automatically connect to the Agent after every 10 minutes. Retries exceeded cannot connect on opscenter_agent Connection to the Agent service is lost Master server not connected or it might be disabled Master server is not connected or disabled Agent is not connected Agent is not connected as it could be down or there could be a network issue. This error is displayed when the agent gets disconnected while data collection is in progress. Server-side Confirm that the Agent is connected. causes. You can also initialize the Agent explicitly by first disabling the master server and then enabling it. If the Agent is disconnected. If the Agent is disconnected. You can also initialize the OID Agent explicitly by first disabling the master server and then enabling it. You can also initialize the Agent explicitly by first disabling the master server and then enabling it. You can also initialize the Agent explicitly by first disabling the master server and then enabling it. exception unknown wait for 10 minutes for it to reconnect. If the Agent is down OpsCenter will try to automatically connect to the Agent after every 10 minutes. Confirm that the master server is connected.

and solution (continued) Solution You must install nbdeployutil on master servers lower than 7. you do not need to enter any credentials. In the Advanced Data Collection Properties section. The report contains information about capacity totals backed up for each client. The report displays details such as number of policies per client and their name and the total kilobytes backed up.586 Managing NetBackup using Symantec OpsCenter About managing NetBackup Deployment Analysis Table 8-19 Error and cause Traditional License report issues. The report is classified by the options Enterprise Disk. You can re-enter credentials while adding or editing a master server by clicking Settings > Configuration > NetBackup.symantec. PureDisk. The report is generated in the form of an Excel sheet. which gives information about how the totals are calculated. Login credentials might be incorrect. If Agent and master server are installed on the same computer. The report also gives information about the terabytes stored on: ■ BasicDisk . Capacity License report A Capacity Licensing report gives a summary of the amount of data that is protected.5. causes. http://www. This utility is issued as emergency engineering binary (EEB). You must install the utility to run the Traditional License report. enter the user name and password at the bottom. The report gives capacity totals for each client. Volume II. and RealTime.com/business/support/index?page=content&id=TECH64620 More information about the utility is available in NetBackup Administrator's Guide. The report displays totals on the basis of the number of policies and subtotals for each capacity tier. You must enter the user name and password to access a remote NetBackup master server (a master server is remote if it is not installed with the OpsCenter Agent). Unable to log in into NBU Master server. thus making it easier to verify capacity totals for each client. Refer the Admin Guide for more details. Data collection failed as the NetBackup Deployment Analysis utility has not been installed on the master server. A log file is also created. More information about installing EEB's is available.

The analyzer uses the size of the last full backup for the last 30 days. The NetBackup Deployment Analyzer examines the image headers in the NetBackup catalog to determine the amount of data that NetBackup protects. and RealTime. the analyzer considers the day with the largest total volume of protected data as an . See “Possible Capacity License report issues” on page 593. A day is defined as the 24 hour period from midnight to midnight. For some policy types. The report displays the amount of data with the licensed amount for the Capacity Totals for Enterprise Disk. The data can also be on the software that is used to provide the backup functionality. The data is measured in terabytes.Managing NetBackup using Symantec OpsCenter About managing NetBackup Deployment Analysis 587 ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Physical Tape OpenStorage Visual Tape Library Flexible Disk Enterprise Disk Subtotal NDMP NASSnapVault PureDisk RealTime Using the details of the Capacity Licensing report you can compare the actual amount of data that is backed up with the licensed amount. The data can either be on the clients or the devices where the software is installed. The Deployment Analyzer calculates the total data that needs to be protected. About determining the capacity licensing The bpimagelist command is used to obtain image and fragment information for all backups for the past 30 days. The analyzer sums all backups that started within that period. See “Data compilation for the Capacity License report” on page 587. You can thus ensure that the data that is backed up is within the permitted license amount. PureDisk. The final total is the sum of terabytes for each client and policy combination that the analyzer examines. Data compilation for the Capacity License report Capacity Licensing is a way of determining the total terabytes of data NetBackup protects.

This report can be emailed or exported in the XLS format to the required email address or location.588 Managing NetBackup using Symantec OpsCenter About managing NetBackup Deployment Analysis estimate of the approximate size of active data under protection for the client and policy. Generating a Capacity Licensing report The Capacity Licensing report is generated in the form of an Excel sheet. Select the required master server and click Edit. 2 . Select Settings > Configuration > NetBackup. To generate a Capacity Licensing report 1 To generate the Capacity Licensing report it is mandatory to enable License Deployment data collection and to configure an agent. The Edit Master Server page is displayed. The Settings tab helps you to enable them.

. Select the Enable Capacity License Deployment Data Collection check box as shown in the following figure.Managing NetBackup using Symantec OpsCenter About managing NetBackup Deployment Analysis 589 3 Select the Configure agent link to configure an agent.

6 Click New Report to generate a new report. and data collection. You can view the previously generated report with the available link under the Last Successful Report Date header. The Create Capacity Licensing Report page is displayed. See “About the Capacity Licensing page” on page 592. . The Capacity Licensing page is displayed as shown in the following figure. click Manage > Deployment Analysis. 5 The Capacity Licensing page contains details about the previously created report.590 Managing NetBackup using Symantec OpsCenter About managing NetBackup Deployment Analysis 4 In the OpsCenter console. A log file is generated when the Capacity License report is generated. log file. You can view the log file with the View Log link.

8 9 Click Next. 10 Enter a message in the Message field. you can change the subject line if required. The Subject field displays the default text Capacity Licensing Report. . Select the required master servers from the list. Select the Collect data and run report on specific Master Servers option to generate a report for only the required master servers. the following image displays both the options. Enter the recipients email address in the To and CC fields. The Report Options page is displayed.Managing NetBackup using Symantec OpsCenter About managing NetBackup Deployment Analysis 591 7 Select the Collect data and run report on all Master Servers option to generate a report for all the master servers.

If the report generation is successful. The link itself contains information about the date and time of the last successful report. When report generation is complete. The headers are: ■ Last Successful Report Date: Displays a link to the previously generated report. The status shows as Failed when the report is not generated. The log file is very useful in analyzing the ■ ■ ■ . Exceptions: Displays the reasons for the report generation failure. you can open the . The report section contains details about the report in the form of a table. You can change the export location path from the Settings > Configuration > Report Export Location tab. select the Export report (XLS format) check box. See “Setting report export location in OpsCenter” on page 282. See “About the Capacity Licensing page” on page 592. 12 Select Run Report to initiate the data collection.592 Managing NetBackup using Symantec OpsCenter About managing NetBackup Deployment Analysis 11 To export the report to the required location. A message to show that report generation has started is flashed. this column shows a blank. Symantec recommends that you wait till the report is generated. Last Successful Report Log: Displays a link to the log file that is generated when the report is generated. About the Capacity Licensing page The Capacity Licensing page contains information about the Capacity License report and the data collection status. Note: Re-running the report when report generation is in progress is not possible as it displays errors in the report. See “Data compilation for the Capacity License report” on page 587. Status: Displays the report status as the name suggests. An example exception detail message can be: Data collection failed for selected master servers.xls file or save the file for later viewing.

If the report generation fails. Last Licensing Data Collection Date: Displays the date and time when the last licensing data is collected. The log file is located at SERVER_INSTALL_DIR/fsdb/fetb/log. this column shows a blank. . the report is not generated and shows errors.Managing NetBackup using Symantec OpsCenter About managing NetBackup Deployment Analysis 593 Capacity Licensing report. ■ ■ ■ ■ Final location of the Capacity Licensing reports and logs The reports and log files are located at the following locations: ■ ■ ■ The final report is located at SERVER_INSTALL_DIR/fsdb/fetb/report. When the master server is not enabled or when the agents are not configured. then the column displays only those master servers that you select. or data status collection is not enabled for a master server. The last successful backup report is located at SERVER_INSTALL_DIR/fsdb/fetb/backup. Click the link to know the details about the prerequisites that need to be completed. Data Collection Status: Displays the status of data collection. Exceptions: Displays the reason for data collection failure. an agent not configured. The headers are: ■ Master Server: Displays the list of master servers for which the report is generated. An example is: OpsCenter Agent is not connected. Make sure that you have network connectivity. The output of bpimagelist for each server is located at SERVER_INSTALL_DIR/fsdb/fetb/data. ■ Possible Capacity License report issues The Capacity Licensing report requires a user to enable master servers and configure agents to generate the correct report. Another cause of errors when a report is not generated is the network connectivity issue. Prerequisites can be. The Capacity Licensing page also contains details about data collection in the form of a table. The column shows a blank when data collection fails. Prerequisites Status: Displays a link when the prerequisites have not been completed. If you select the Collect data and run report on specific Master Servers option.

You can also initialize the agent explicitly by first disabling the master server and then enabling it. wait for 10 minutes This error is displayed when the agent gets for it to reconnect. . causes. Table 8-20 Error and cause Agent is in disconnected state Capacity License report issues. wait for 10 minutes for it to reconnect. and solution Solution If the agent is down OpsCenter tries to automatically connect to the agent after Agent is not connected as it can be down or every 10 minutes. If the agent is disconnected. Master server not connected or it might be disabled Master server is not connected or disabled Agent is not connected If the agent is down OpsCenter tries to automatically connect to the agent after Agent is not connected as it can be down or every 10 minutes.594 Managing NetBackup using Symantec OpsCenter About managing NetBackup Deployment Analysis Table 8-20 describes the possible Capacity License report issues and their solution. See “Generating a Capacity Licensing report” on page 588. You can also initialize the there can be a network issue. Failed to initialize agent Agent is not connected or there can be a network issue. You can also initialize the agent explicitly by first disabling the master server and then enabling it. You can also initialize the there can be a network issue. Retries exceeded cannot connect on opscenter_agent Connection to the Agent service is lost Confirm that the agent is connected. You can also initialize the disconnected while data collection is in agent explicitly by first disabling the master progress. agent explicitly by first disabling the master server and then enabling it. agent explicitly by first disabling the master server and then enabling it. If the agent is not connected OpsCenter tries to automatically connect to the agent after every 10 minutes. Server-side exception unknown OID Confirm that the agent is connected. server and then enabling it. Confirm that the master server is connected. If the agent is disconnected.

and report on the Replication Director functionality in NetBackup. For event-based alert conditions like Open .Chapter 9 Supporting Replication Director in OpsCenter This chapter includes the following topics: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ About monitoring Replication Director from OpsCenter About the Open Storage alert condition How the events are generated Adding an alert policy About changes in the SLP Status by Image Copy report About monitoring replication jobs About changes in the Monitor and Manage views About monitoring Replication Director from OpsCenter OpsCenter lets you monitor. About the Open Storage alert condition A new event-based alert condition named Open Storage has been added under the Device alert category in OpsCenter. The following sections provide an overview of the changes that have been made in OpsCenter with regards to the Replication Director functionality. alert.

the current list of events are sent again to all master servers that are connected to this DFM server. then DFM generates this event.596 Supporting Replication Director in OpsCenter How the events are generated Storage. Table 9-1 NTAP events supported by OpsCenter General Category Event Type Space Management Threshold alarms or Volume Almost Full (DataFabric Manager (DFM) and Alerting generated). OpsCenter retrieves data from NetBackup based on notifications from NBSL. After every 24 hours from the time the first call is made. then the same master server who triggered this does not receive the events at that time. When you configure an alert policy based on the Open Storage alert condition. Currently this is a fixed cycle unless NetBackup is restarted. NetBackup connects to the DFM server through the NetApp NetBackup plug-in. Unprotected Data Unprotected Data is a custom event generated by NetApp NetBackup plug-in when resource pool has some volumes that are configured but are not protected. severity. If more than eight master servers are connected to the DFM server . NBSL passes these NTAP events from NetApp devices to OpsCenter. If the master server asks for the event list while the event list is being prepared. Maximum eight event channels are supported by default which means that maximum eight master servers are capable of receiving events from DFM. You can clear the Open Storage alert manually. The raised alert can be configured to be sent as an email or SNMP trap. and message filter values and raises the alert. However. Depending on the alert policy configuration. select the alert and then click More > Clear. OpsCenter filters these events based on storage server. To clear the alert. Table 9-1 lists the NTAP events that OpsCenter supports. go to the Monitor > Alerts (List View). the master servers which connect to the DFM server after the event list is prepared receive those events. The event generation occurs where there is an auto-discovery of unprotected NAS file services data. An OpenStorage alert is generated when specific events occur in the storage server (in this case NetApp DataFabric Manager server). If the particular volume crosses the high water mark. The plug-in scans the volumes that are not protected and takes some time to find out the details of unprotected volumes. you can receive alerts for the NetApp (NTAP) events in OpsCenter. How the events are generated When you configure disk pools in NetBackup.

Click Next. and Alert Condition on the General panel. If some master server connects during that time then it does not receive any events. For Alert Condition.cfg ([ NBUPlugin:NumEvCh ] Value=8) It is recommended that the value for maximum event channels is configured as 8. the first master server that connects to the DFM server by NetApp NetBackup plug-in never receives the event for the first cycle. . Enter a Name. So even if the condition like Volume almost Full has occurred. you see events only after the cycle is complete. The value for maximum number of event channels is configurable in a file on the NetBackup plug-in host (usually the same as DFM host): Windows UNIX C:\Program Files\netapp\NBUPlugin\config\NBUPlugin. Click Add. After 24 hours. select Manage > Alert Policies.Supporting Replication Director in OpsCenter Adding an alert policy 597 and all are monitored by OpsCenter then it is not predictable which eight master servers receive those events. then it does not receive any event until the complete cycle of 24 hours assuming that the event cycle is of 24 hours. When NetBackup initially connects to the NetApp NetBackup plug-in. select Open Storage under Device. all master servers should receive the events from NetApp NetBackup plug-in provided that maximum eight master servers are connected. Consider a scenario where one master server is connected to one DFM server and is monitored by OpsCenter. In this scenario. Description. Which master servers receive the events depends a lot on when they connect to the NetApp NetBackup plug-in. But after 24 hours. Consider a scenario where multiple master servers monitored by OpsCenter are connected to one DFM server. Increasing the value may affect the DFM performance. The Alert Policy Wizard appears. No events are sent in the time between when the first master server connected to DFM server and the time DFM is ready with events. Adding an alert policy Use the following procedure to create an alert policy based on the Open Storage alert condition.cfg /usr/NetApp/NBUPlugin/config/NBUPlugin. To add an alert policy 1 2 3 4 In the OpsCenter console. the events are sent to OpsCenter by NBSL. The master servers which connect later receive events only if they are connected after DFM prepares the event list.

The Activate Condition option is checked by default. or view from this page. Specify words from the event message to get alerts on specific events. You can select or define the following attributes: Event Severity Select the event severity that should be evaluated for the alert condition. By default. In the Email Recipients and Trap Recipients sections. Specify words for vendor type to get alerts on specific events. These attributes or filters define and limit the alert. Click Next to continue. do the following: ■ 8 Select a severity level from the Alert Severity drop-down list. the policy is active once you create it. specify attributes for the Open Storage alert condition. the alert is displayed in the Monitor > Alerts view. In the Severity section. You must select at least one object. You can always activate or deactivate the policy later from the OpsCenter console. you can configure the severity for an email or trap that is sent when an alert is cleared. Deselect the Activate Condition option if you want to deactivate the policy. the alert is still displayed in the Monitor > Alerts view. select email or SNMP recipients (or both) to receive the alert notification. With Severity of email/trap sent for cleared alert option. You can also assign severity for the alert. ■ ■ About changes in the SLP Status by Image Copy report A new column named Format has been added in the SLP Status by Image Copy report. On the Scope panel. The default severity level is Informational. From the Actions panel. All event severities are selected. (If this alert occurs. node. By default. you can send the alert as an email or SNMP trap. Event message contains words Event vendor type contains words 6 7 Click Next. The Format column helps to differentiate between the NetBackup image . select the storage server that should be verified for the Open Storage alert condition.598 Supporting Replication Director in OpsCenter About changes in the SLP Status by Image Copy report 5 On the Alert Condition Properties panel.) Select an appropriate severity level from the Severity of email/trap sent for cleared alert drop-down list. Note that if you create an alert policy and do not define any recipients.

The following figure shows some columns from the SLP Status by Image Copy report and highlights the new Format column.Supporting Replication Director in OpsCenter About monitoring replication jobs 599 format and the snapshot copy. go to Monitor > Jobs (List View or Hierarchical View) and select the Snapshot Replication filter from the Filter drop-down list. This report shows the details of any snapshot copy that is a part of the storage lifecycle policy. The Method field is also available in the Details pane under the General tab. . The duplication method is shown in the Method column. Format column About monitoring replication jobs A new filter named Snapshot Replication has been added in the Monitor > Jobs (List View). To view the replication jobs in the OpsCenter console.

Only the disk pools or storage units that are configured for snapshots can be used for taking snapshot backups. In the Monitor > Devices > Disk Pool or Manage > Devices > Disk Pool view. the Configured for Snapshots field also appears in the Details pane under General and Disk Volume tabs. This is reflected in the Job Size column when you select Monitor > Jobs (List View or Hierarchical View). About changes in the Monitor and Manage views A new column named Configured for Snapshots has been added to the following views in the OpsCenter console: ■ ■ ■ Monitor > Devices > Disk Pool Manage > Devices > Disk Pool Manage > Storage > Storage Units This column helps you to identify if the disk pool or the storage unit has been configured for snapshots or not. .600 Supporting Replication Director in OpsCenter About changes in the Monitor and Manage views You can also view the data that is transferred for each of the replication jobs.

The following figure shows the Configured for Snapshot column and also the Configured for Snapshot field (at the end) under the Disk Volume tab in the Disk Pool view. The following figure shows the Configured for Snapshot column and also the Configured for Snapshot field (at the end) under the General tab in the Disk Pool view. . This column can be added from the Available columns by clicking the Table Settings icon at the top-right corner of the table.Supporting Replication Director in OpsCenter About changes in the Monitor and Manage views 601 Note that the Configured for Snapshots column does not appear by default in the Disk Pool or storage unit view.

.602 Supporting Replication Director in OpsCenter About changes in the Monitor and Manage views The following figure shows the Configured for Snapshot column and also the Configured for Snapshot field (at the end) under the General tab in the Storage Unit view.

Supporting Replication Director in OpsCenter About changes in the Monitor and Manage views 603 .

604 Supporting Replication Director in OpsCenter About changes in the Monitor and Manage views .

See “About the Management Information Base (MIB) and OpsCenter support” on page 607. See “Configuring the SNMP trap community name for OpsCenter” on page 622.Chapter 10 Understanding and configuring OpsCenter alerts This chapter includes the following topics: ■ ■ About using SNMP About managing OpsCenter alerts using Microsoft System Center Operations Manager 2007 About managing OpsCenter alerts using HP OpenView Network Node Manager 7. See “About SNMP versions” on page 606. See “Frequently asked SNMP and OpsCenter questions” on page 625. . See “Configuring the SNMP version for sending SNMP traps” on page 623. See “About customizing Alert Manager settings” on page 624.51 on Windows ■ About using SNMP This section provides information about SNMP and how OpsCenter uses SNMP. See “ SNMP versions supported in OpsCenter” on page 607.50/7. See “About SNMP” on page 606.

manager-to-manager capability. SNMPv2c combines the Community-based approach of SNMPv1 with the protocol operation of SNMPv2 and omits all SNMPv2 security features. ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ The original SNMPv2 (SNMPv2p) Community-based SNMPv2 (SNMPv2c) User-based SNMPv2 (SNMPv2u) SNMPv2 star (SNMPv2*). This document replaces the earlier versions that were published as RFC 1067 and RFC 1098. The agent provides the interface between the manager and the physical devices being managed. being represented as leaves on the branches. Security is based on community strings. A numeric tag or object identifier (OID) is used to distinguish each variable uniquely in the MIB and in SNMP messages. find and solve network problems.606 Understanding and configuring OpsCenter alerts About using SNMP About SNMP The Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) is an application layer protocol that facilitates the exchange of management information between network devices. and protocol operations. The manager provides the interface between the human network manager and the management system. SNMP enables network administrators to manage network performance. SNMPv2 It was created as an update of SNMPv1 adding several features. an agent. The MIB is organized in a tree structure with individual variables. a database of management information. The key enhancements to SNMPv2 are focused on the SMI. such as point status or description. ■ SNMPv3 . SNMP is based on the manager model and agent model. and the network protocol. About SNMP versions Many versions of SNMP are available. The versions of SNMP protocol are as follows: ■ SNMPv1 The SNMPv1 version is the first version of the protocol and is defined by RFC 1157. It is part of the Transmission Control Protocol/Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) protocol suite. This model consists of a manager. and plan for network growth. managed objects. The manager and agent use a Management Information Base (MIB) and a relatively small set of commands to exchange information.

Understanding and configuring OpsCenter alerts About using SNMP 607 This version of the protocol is a combination of user-based security and the protocol operations and data types from SNMPv2p. These OIDs form a tree. See “Alert descriptions in OpsCenter” on page 610. RFC 2262. SNMP traps This section explains the content of an SNMP trap that is sent from Symantec OpsCenter. Each OID consists of the numbers that are separated by decimal points (for example. 1. and RFC 2265 define this protocol. SNMP versions supported in OpsCenter OpsCenter supports the following SNMP versions: ■ ■ ■ SNMPv1 SNMPv2c SNMPv3 About the Management Information Base (MIB) and OpsCenter support Each SNMP element manages specific objects with each object having specific characteristics. A total of 14 bindings (or 14 name-value pairs) are present in each trap that is sent from OpsCenter.1. RFC 2264. The following table shows the contents of a trap that is sent from OpsCenter. and support for proxies. RFC 1906. RFC 2263. An object identifier (or OID) is a numeric string that is used to uniquely identify an object.3. See “SNMP traps” on page 607.1. The MIB associates each OID with a readable label and various other parameters that are related to the object. . The MIB then serves as a data dictionary that is used to assemble and interpret SNMP messages. RFC 2261. Each OpsCenter trap contains 2 standard object identifiers and 12 OpsCenter-specific object identifiers. RFC 1905. Each object and characteristic has a unique object identifier (OID) that is associated with it.6. Each binding associates a particular Management Information Base (MIB) object instance with its current value.2682. Table 10-1 shows the name-value pairs that the traps pass to the SNMP manager.4.1). The security is based on that found in SNMPv2u and SNMPv2*.

1302.p Example: Nancy Nieters roducts.ccTrapVarsBran ch.dod. ccTrapDefinitionsBranch.3.org/rfc/rfc1905.12.10.1.3.10.txt Example: 1173792454 1.12.0 This field is the unique identifier for this trap. http://www. and alert summary in the (iso.1302.1. ccTrapDefinitionsBranch.p roducts.6. See Request for Comment (RFC) 1905 and 2576 for a detailed definition.ccTrapDefinitionsBranc Alert ID (Alert Status) Alert Summary h.txt Example: 1.ietf.1.org/rfc/rfc1905.1.1.4 1.3. alert status.3.1.ietf.3.2.0.1. See “Alert descriptions in OpsCenter” on page 610. http://www.6.1.2 This value specifies the alert ID.dod.ietf.enterprises.enterprises. See RFC 1905 and RFC 2576 for a detailed definition.4.private.1.ietf. .dod.1.3.6.internet.org.12.3 (iso.internet.1.1.10.veritascc.6.alertDescription) This field is the alert description.enterprises.veritascc.alertSummary) Example: 100 (Active) Job Completed with Exit Status 0 1.1302.1 This field is the alert recipient name.3.private.3.3.1.3.3.org/rfc/rfc2576.3.10.alertRecipients) 1.1.6.p following format: roducts.608 Understanding and configuring OpsCenter alerts About using SNMP Table 10-1 Name 1. Examples for each alert condition are available.4.6.1.ccTrapVarsBran ch.1.internet.txt http://www.12.org/rfc/rfc2576.4.1.ccTrapVarsBranch.0 OpsCenter trap binding Value This field is the time (in hundredths of a second) between when OpsCenter server service starts and the OpsCenter trap is sent.txt http://www.6. (iso.4.private.org.4.2.1302.1.veritascc.org.

ccTrapDefinition sBranch.3.private.internet.products.6.1302.products.dod.1.1.internet.3.1302.1.collectorNam e) 1.enterprises.4 (iso.private.1.12.internet.12.4. 1.veritascc.internet.enterprises.v eritas.3.org.internet.dod.6.148 sBranch.4.4.3.1302.1.veritascc.enterprises.enterprises.enterprises.private. This field is blank and not used.7 This field is blank and not used.private.1.3.3.6.10 (iso.products.products.ccTrapDefinition sBranch.10.enterprises.1.veritascc.internet.ccObject) 1.ccTrapVarsBranch.1.1.1.10.12.dod.4.org.1.1302.4.ccHost) 1.dod. .v eritas.6.ccTrapVarsBranch.private.ccTrapVarsBranch.9 (iso.12.10.veritascc.3.1302.org.v eritas.internet.Understanding and configuring OpsCenter alerts About using SNMP 609 Table 10-1 Name OpsCenter trap binding (continued) Value This field is blank and not used.enterprises.veritascc.ccTrapVarsBranch.5 (iso.products. ccTrapDefinitionsBranch.3.3. This field is blank and not used.ccTrapVarsBran ch.veritascc.org.4.ccTrapVarsBranch.12.3.dod.6.6.6.dod. This field is blank and not used.org.org.10.3. (iso.1.1.v eritas.org.1.products.p roducts.private.1302.6 (iso.1.212.dod.1.12.private.1.1.10.1302.ccTrapDefinition sBranch.10.sampleData) This field is the IP address of the OpsCenter server.policyName) 1.4.3.12.1.12.sourceId) 1.ccTrapDefinition Example: 10.1.3.10.objectType) 1.ccTrapDefinition sBranch.ccTrapVarsBranch.v eritas. This field is blank and not used.3.8 (iso.v eritas.veritascc.ccTrapDefinition sBranch.1.

10.1.1.6. Note: 1.internet.4.enterprises.ccAlertSeveri ty) 1.enterprises. All the 12 OpsCenter OIDs are defined in the OpsCenter MIB files. The other OIDs starting from 1.enterprises.3.3 represents iso.3.1302. the two standard OIDs are not defined in the OpsCenter MIB files.4.org.3.6.3.12.3.6.10.4.1302.10.1.12.10.1.products.ccTrapVarsBranch.private.alertDescription. the two standard SNMP OIDs must be present as part of every trap.v eritas.1302.ccTrapDefinition Example: 13-10-2008 06:57:34 00 sBranch.private.dod. .1.6.1 to 1.3.1.4.3.1. As per SNMPv2c trap definition.12.1302.3.1.3.1.610 Understanding and configuring OpsCenter alerts About using SNMP Table 10-1 Name OpsCenter trap binding (continued) Value This field shows the alert severity level.1302.11 (iso.1302.1.1.ccTrapVarsBranch.1.10.veritascc.12.6.6. The first two OIDs listed in the table are standard SNMP OIDs.1.12.3.3.6.12 are OpsCenter OIDs. However.1.4.1.1302.1. 1.12.3.internet.3.1.1.3.dod.1.1302.4.dod.ccTrapVarsBranch.private.org.1.products.products.1. ccTrapDefinitionsBranch.3.12.1.3.10.veritascc.1.10.v eritas.3.ccTrapDefinition Example: Informational sBranch.4.6. Alert descriptions in OpsCenter This section shows the content that is sent for each OpsCenter alert as OID 1.12 (iso.4.1.ccAlertTime) This field shows the time when the alert gets cleared. Most of the alert information in OpsCenter is sent as OID 1.12.3.10.3.veritascc. Table 10-2 shows the content that each OpsCenter alert sends as OID 1.internet.org.

2009 4:54 PM Job: 26356 Tree Type : Policy Nodes : node1 Job Policy: sample_policy Exit Status: 150 (termination requested by administrator) Client: ccs-win-qe-5 New State: Done Alert Policy: Job Finalized OpsCenter Server: ccs-sol-qe-11 Severity: Warning Incomplete Job .Understanding and configuring OpsCenter alerts About using SNMP 611 Table 10-2 Alert type Job Alert conditions in OpsCenter Alert condition High job failure rate Description (Example) Alert Raised on: September 5.0 Alert Policy: high job failure rate policy view OpsCenter Server: ccs-sol-qe-17 Severity: Warning Hung job Alert Raised on: September 7. 2009 2:21 PM Job: 25888 Tree Type : Policy Nodes : ccs-win-qe-5 Job Policy: ccsqasol1 Client: ccs-win-qe-5 Alert Policy: Hung Job OpsCenter Server: ccs-sol-qe-17 Severity: Warning Job finalized Alert Raised on: September 9. 2009 5:00 PM Tree Type : Policy Nodes : Root Node % Failed Jobs: 100.

612 Understanding and configuring OpsCenter alerts About using SNMP Table 10-2 Alert type Alert conditions in OpsCenter (continued) Alert condition Description (Example) Alert Raised on: September 9. 2009 4:54 PM Job: 26356 Tree Type : Policy Nodes : node1 Job Policy: sample_policy Client: ccs-win-qe-5 Alert Policy: Incomplete Job OpsCenter Server: ccs-sol-qe-11 Severity: Warning .

2009 12:24 PM Tree Type : Server Nodes: node1 Frozen Media Name: A00004 Media server : ranjan Alert Policy: frozen media policy OpsCenter Server: localhost Severity: Warning Suspended media Alert Raised on: August 12.Understanding and configuring OpsCenter alerts About using SNMP 613 Table 10-2 Alert type Media Alert conditions in OpsCenter (continued) Alert condition Frozen media Description (Example) Alert Raised on: August 17. 2009 3:27 PM Media Name: A00009 Tree Type : Server Nodes: node1 Media server : ccs-win-qe-13 Number of mounts: 3402 Alert Policy: Exceeded Max Media Mounts policy OpsCenter Server: localhost Severity: Critical Media required for restore . 2009 3:36 PM Suspended Media Name: 0122L2 Tree Type : Server Nodes: node1 Media server : ccs-win-qe-13 Alert Policy: Suspended media policy OpsCenter Server: localhost Severity: Informational Exceeded max media mounts Alert Raised on: August 12.

2008 4:39 PM Tree Type : Server Nodes: node1 Media: 000_00000_TL4 Required for restore Master server: omwin12(omwin12) Client: omwin12 Media server: macy Restore Job ID: 615 Alert Policy: Media Required for Restore_root OpsCenter Server: ccs-sol-qe-10 Severity: Warning Low available media Alert Raised on: August 12. 2009 11:54 AM Tree Type: Server Nodes: node1 Available Media: 4 Alert Policy: low available media OpsCenter Server: localhost Severity: Warning High suspended media Alert Raised on: August 12. 2009 11:40 AM Tree Type : Server Nodes: node1 Suspended Media: 1 % Suspended Media: 25.0 Alert Policy: high percentage suspended media OpsCenter Server: localhost Severity: Warning High frozen media .614 Understanding and configuring OpsCenter alerts About using SNMP Table 10-2 Alert type Alert conditions in OpsCenter (continued) Alert condition Description (Example) Alert Raised on: December 4.

2008 10:24 AM Tree Type : Server Nodes: node1 Frozen media: 6 % Frozen Media: 66 Alert Policy: highfrozenmedia OpsCenter Server: winfor11 Severity: Warning .Understanding and configuring OpsCenter alerts About using SNMP 615 Table 10-2 Alert type Alert conditions in OpsCenter (continued) Alert condition Description (Example) Alert Raised on: December 8.

2009 3:44 PM Tree Type : Server Nodes : ccs-win-qe-1 Alert Policy: Catalog Backup Disabled OpsCenter Server: ccs-sol-qe-17 Severity: Warning . 2008 10:08 AM Master server : sargam(sargam) Tree Type : Server Nodes: node1 Available Catalog Space: 6480880 KB Threshold Catalog Space: 102400 TB Alert Policy: test_catalogspacelow OpsCenter Server: winfor11 Severity: